Iowa Administrative Bulletin

Published Biweekly VOLUME XX NUMBER 15 January 14, 1998 Pages 1285 to 1432

CONTENTS IN THIS ISSUE

Pages 1297 to 1409 include ARC 7753A to ARC 7772A and ARC 7774A to ARC 7777A

ALL AGENCIES

Schedule for rule making 1288

Publication procedures 1289

Agency identification numbers 1294

CITATION OF ADMINISTRATIVE RULES 1293

ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
COMMISSION[567]

NATURAL RESOURCES DEPARTMENT[561]"umbrella"

Notice, Air quality, 20.2, 20.3, amendments to
ch 22, 23.1 to 23.4, 24.1(2), 25.1, 25.2, 28.1,
29.1, 31.2 ARC 7762A 1297

Notice, Landfills, 100.2, 100.3, 102.2, 102.3,
102.7, 102.12, 102.14, ch 103, 108.1, 108.3 to
108.6, 110.7, 110.11(1), 110.12 ARC 7761A 1312

Filed, Drinking water revolving fund, ch 44
ARC 7759A 1391

Filed, Agricultural drainage wells, 50.2 to 50.4,
50.6 to 50.8, 51.3, 52.5, 52.21 ARC 7760A 1397

GENERAL SERVICES DEPARTMENT[401]

Notice, Parking, ch 4 ARC 7754A 1322

HUMAN SERVICES DEPARTMENT[441]

Notice, AIDS/HIV settlement payments,
75.27 ARC 7755A 1325

Notice, Medicaid provider documentation of
services, 79.3 ARC 7756A 1326

Notice, PROMISE JOBS, 93.138(3)
ARC 7757A 1327

Notice, Foster family homes, 113.4(1)
ARC 7758A
1328

LABOR SERVICES DIVISION[875]

WORKFORCE DEVELOPMENT DEPARTMENT[871]"umbrella"

Filed Emergency After Notice, Boilers and pressure
vessels, rescind 347--chs 41, 42, 49; transfer
and amend 347--chs 43 to 48 to 875--
chs 204 to 209; adopt 875--chs 200 to 203
ARC 7777A 1382

NURSING BOARD[655]

PUBLIC HEALTH DEPARTMENT[641]"umbrella"

Filed, Advanced registered nurse practitioners,
7.1, 7.2 ARC 7763A 1401

PUBLIC FUNDS--AVAILABILITY

Public Health Department[641]
Gambling treatment 1296

PUBLIC HEALTH DEPARTMENT[641]

Notice of Public Funds Availability 1296

Notice, Radiation, amendments to chs 38 to 42,
45 ARC 7775A 1329

Notice, Mammography, 41.6, 41.7
ARC 7774A 1362

Notice, Local boards of health, 77.1 to 77.6
ARC 7770A 1372

Notice, EMS services--defibrillation, 132.1,
132.16 ARC 7771A 1374

Notice, Law enforcement emergency care
provider--defibrillation, 139.1, 139.2, 139.6
ARC 7772A
1375

PUBLIC HEARINGS

Summarized list 1290

REAL ESTATE APPRAISER EXAMINING
BOARD[193F]

Professional Licensing and Regulation Division[193]

COMMERCE DEPARTMENT[181]"umbrella"

Filed, Continuing education, 3.3(1), 4.3, ch 6
ARC 7764A
1402

REGENTS BOARD[681]

Filed, Iowa resident tuition and fees to
American Indian students, 1.4(2)
ARC 7765A
1406

Filed, Personnel, 3.39 ARC 7766A 1406

Filed, Purchasing--vendors, 8.9(1)"a"
ARC 7767A
1407

REVENUE AND FINANCE DEPARTMENT[701]

Notice, Net income; partnerships; S corporations,
40.3, 40.12, 40.13, 45.1, 52.1(5)
ARC 7768A
1376

Notice, Net income and taxable income, 40.16,
40.47, 41.3, 41.11(1) ARC 7769A 1377

SUPREME COURT

Decisions summarized 1410

TRANSPORTATION DEPARTMENT[761]

Filed, Financial liability coverage cards,
425.10(8), ch 641 ARC 7753A 1407

Filed, Substance abuse evaluation and treatment;
course for drinking drivers, 620.5, 620.15,
620.16 ARC 7776A 1408

USURY

Notice 1381

PUBLISHED UNDER AUTHORITY OF IOWA CODE SECTIONS 2B.5 AND 17A.6

__________________________________

PREFACE

The Iowa Administrative Bulletin is published biweekly in pamphlet form pursuant to Iowa Code chapters 2B and 17A and contains Notices of Intended Action on rules, Filed and Filed Emergency rules by state agencies.

It also contains Proclamations and Executive Orders of the Governor which are general and permanent in nature; Economic Impact Statements to proposed rules and filed emergency rules; Objections filed by Administrative Rules Review Committee, Governor or the Attorney General; and Delay by the Committee of the effective date of filed rules; Regulatory Flexibility Analyses and Agenda for monthly Administrative Rules Review Committee meetings. Other "materials deemed fitting and proper by the Administrative Rules Review Committee" include summaries of Public Hearings, Attorney General Opinions and Supreme Court Decisions.

The Bulletin may also contain Public Funds Interest Rates [12C.6]; Workers' Compensation Rate Filings [515A.6(7)]; Usury [535.2(3)"a"]; Agricultural Credit Corporation Maximum Loan Rates [535.12]; and Regional Banking--Notice of Application and Hearing [524.1905(2)].

PLEASE NOTE: Italics indicate new material added to existing rules; strike through letters indicate deleted material.

KATHLEEN K. BATES, Administrative Code Editor Telephone: (515)281-3355

ROSEMARY DRAKE, Assistant Editor (515)281-7252

SUBSCRIPTION INFORMATION

Iowa Administrative Bulletin

The Iowa Administrative Bulletin is sold as a separate publication and may be purchased by subscription or single copy. All subscriptions will expire on June 30 of each year. Subscriptions must be paid in advance and are prorated quarterly as follows:

First quarter July 1, 1997, to June 30, 1998 $237.00 plus $11.85 sales tax

Second quarter October 1, 1997, to June 30, 1998 $178.00 plus $8.90 sales tax

Third quarter January 1, 1998, to June 30, 1998 $118.00 plus $5.90 sales tax

Fourth quarter April 1, 1998, to June 30, 1998 $ 60.00 plus $3.00 sales tax

Single copies may be purchased for $17.50 plus $0.88 tax. Back issues may be purchased if the issues are available.

Iowa Administrative Code

The Iowa Administrative Code and Supplements are sold in complete sets and subscription basis only. All subscriptions for the Supplement (replacement pages) must be for the complete year and will expire on June 30 of each year.

Prices for the Iowa Administrative Code and its Supplements are as follows:

Iowa Administrative Code - $1,086.00 plus $54.30 sales tax

(Price includes 22 volumes of rules and index, plus a one-year subscription to the Code Supplement and the Iowa Administrative Bulletin. Additional or replacement binders can be purchased for $10.55 plus $0.53 tax.)

Iowa Administrative Code Supplement - $382.00 plus $19.10 sales tax

(Subscription expires June 30, 1998)

All checks should be made payable to the Iowa State Printing Division. Send all inquiries and subscription orders to:

Customer Service Center

Department of General Services

Hoover State Office Building, Level A

Des Moines, IA 50319

Telephone: (515)242-5120

Schedule for Rule Making
1998

NOTICE
SUBMISSION DEADLINE

NOTICE PUB.
DATE
HEARING OR
COMMENTS 20 DAYS
FIRST
POSSIBLE ADOPTION DATE
35 DAYS
ADOPTED FILING DEADLINE
ADOPTED PUB.
DATE
FIRST
POSSIBLE EFFECTIVE DATE
POSSIBLE EXPIRATION OF NOTICE 180 DAYS
Dec. 26 '97
Jan. 14 '98
Feb. 3
Feb. 18
Feb. 20
Mar. 11
Apr. 15
July 13
Jan. 9 '98
Jan. 28
Feb. 17
Mar. 4
Mar. 6
Mar. 25
Apr. 29
July 27
Jan. 23
Feb. 11
Mar. 3
Mar. 18
Mar. 20
Apr. 8
May 13
Aug. 10
Feb. 6
Feb. 25
Mar. 17
Apr. 1
Apr. 3
Apr. 22
May 27
Aug. 24
Feb. 20
Mar. 11
Mar. 31
Apr. 15
Apr. 17
May 6
June 10
Sept. 7
Mar. 6
Mar. 25
Apr. 14
Apr. 29
May 1
May 20
June 24
Sept. 21
Mar. 20
Apr. 8
Apr. 28
May 13
May 15
June 3
July 8
Oct. 5
Apr. 3
Apr. 22
May 12
May 27
May 29
June 17
July 22
Oct. 19
Apr. 17
May 6
May 26
June 10
June 12
July 1
Aug. 5
Nov. 2
May 1
May 20
June 9
June 24
June 26
July 15
Aug. 19
Nov. 16
May 15
June 3
June 23
July 8
July 10
July 29
Sept. 2
Nov. 30
May 29
June 17
July 7
July 22
July 24
Aug. 12
Sept. 16
Dec. 14
June 12
July 1
July 21
Aug. 5
Aug. 7
Aug. 26
Sept. 30
Dec. 28
June 26
July 15
Aug. 4
Aug. 19
Aug. 21
Sept. 9
Oct. 14
Jan. 11 '99
July 10
July 29
Aug. 18
Sept. 2
Sept. 4
Sept. 23
Oct. 28
Jan. 25 '99
July 24
Aug. 12
Sept. 1
Sept. 16
Sept. 18
Oct. 7
Nov. 11
Feb. 8 '99
Aug. 7
Aug. 26
Sept. 15
Sept. 30
Oct. 2
Oct 21
Nov. 25
Feb. 22 '99
Aug. 21
Sept. 9
Sept. 29
Oct. 14
Oct. 16
Nov. 4
Dec. 9
Mar. 8 '99
Sept. 4
Sept. 23
Oct. 13
Oct. 28
Oct. 30
Nov. 18
Dec. 23
Mar. 22 '99
Sept. 18
Oct. 7
Oct. 27
Nov. 11
Nov. 13
Dec. 2
Jan. 6 '99
Apr. 5 '99
Oct. 2
Oct. 21
Nov. 10
Nov. 25
Nov. 27
Dec. 16
Jan. 20 '99
Apr. 19 '99
Oct. 16
Nov. 4
Nov. 24
Dec. 9
Dec. 11
Dec. 30
Feb. 3 '99
May 3 '99
Oct. 30
Nov. 18
Dec. 8
Dec. 23
Dec. 25
Jan. 13 '99
Feb. 17 '99
May 17 '99
Nov. 13
Dec. 2
Dec. 22
Jan. 6 '99
Jan. 8 '99
Jan. 27 '99
Mar. 3 '99
May 31 '99
Nov. 27
Dec. 16
Jan. 5 '99
Jan 20 '99
Jan. 22 '99
Feb. 10 '99
Mar. 17 '99
June 14 '99
Dec. 11
Dec. 30
Jan. 19 '99
Feb. 3 '99
Feb. 5 '99
Feb. 24 '99
Mar. 31 '99
June 28 '99
Dec. 25
Jan. 13 '99
Feb. 2 '99
Feb. 17 '99
Feb. 19 '99
Mar. 10 '99
Apr. 14 '99
July 12 '99
Jan. 8 '99
Jan. 27 '99
Feb. 16 '99
Mar. 3 '99
Mar. 5 '99
Mar. 24 '99
Apr. 28 '99
July 26 '99

PRINTING SCHEDULE FOR IAB


ISSUE NUMBER
SUBMISSION DEADLINE
ISSUE DATE
17
Friday, January 23, 1998
February 11, 1998
18
Friday, February 6, 1998
February 25, 1998
19
Friday, February 20, 1998
March 11, 1998

PLEASE NOTE:

Rules will not be accepted after 12 o'clock noon on the Friday filing deadline days unless prior approval has been received from the Administrative Rules Coordinator's office.

If the filing deadline falls on a legal holiday, submissions made on the following Monday will be accepted.

PUBLICATION PROCEDURES

TO: Administrative Rules Coordinators and Text Processors of State Agencies

FROM: Kathleen K. Bates, Iowa Administrative Code Editor

SUBJECT: Publication of Rules in Iowa Administrative Bulletin

The Administrative Code Division uses Interleaf 6 to publish the Iowa Administrative Bulletin and can import documents directly from most other word processing systems, including Ami Pro, Microsoft Word, Professional Write, Word for Windows (Word 7 or earlier), and WordPerfect.

1. To facilitate the processing of rule-making documents, we request a 3.5" High Density (not Double Density) IBM PC-compatible diskette of the rule making. Please indicate on each diskette the following information: agency name, file name, format used for exporting, and chapter(s) amended. Diskettes may be delivered to the Administrative Code Division, 4th Floor, Lucas State Office Building or included with the documents submitted to the Governor's Administrative Rules Coordinator.

2. Alternatively, if you have Internet E-mail access, you may send your document as an attachment to an E-mail message, addressed to both of the following:

bcarr@legis.state.ia.us

kbates@legis.state.ia.us

Please note that changes made prior to publication of the rule-making documents are reflected on the hard copy returned to agencies by the Governor's office; diskettes are returned unchanged.

Your cooperation helps us print the Bulletin more quickly and cost-effectively than was previously possible and is greatly appreciated.

PUBLIC HEARINGS

To All Agencies:

The Administrative Rules Review Committee voted to request that Agencies comply with Iowa Code section 17A.4(1)"b" by allowing the opportunity for oral presentation (hearing) to be held at least twenty days after publication of Notice in the Iowa Administrative Bulletin.




EDUCATIONAL EXAMINERS BOARD[282]



Mentor endorsement; beginning
teacher support program,
14.20(17), ch 21
IAB 12/31/97 ARC 7730A
Conference Room 3 North
Third Floor
Grimes State Office Bldg.
Des Moines, Iowa
January 28, 1998
10 a.m.
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION COMMISSION[567]


Air quality,
20.2, 20.3, amendments to ch 22,
23.1 to 23.4, 24.1(2), 25.1, 25.2,
28.1, 29.1, 31.2
IAB 1/14/98 ARC 7762A
East Conference Room
Air Quality Bureau
7900 Hickman Rd., Suite 1
Urbandale, Iowa
February 13, 1998
1 p.m.
Landfills,
100.2, 100.3, 102.2, 102.3.
102.7, 102.12, 102.14, ch 103,
108.1, 108.3 to 108.6, 110.7,
110.11(1), 110.12
IAB 1/14/98 ARC 7761A
Conference Room--4th Floor
Wallace State Office Bldg.
Des Moines, Iowa
February 4, 1998
1 p.m.
GENERAL SERVICES DEPARTMENT[401]


Parking,
ch 4
IAB 1/14/98 ARC 7754A
Director's Conference Room
Level A
Hoover State Office Bldg.
Des Moines, Iowa
February 6, 1998
8 a.m.
HUMAN SERVICES DEPARTMENT[441]


PROMISE JOBS program,
93.138(3)"a"(3)
IAB 1/14/98 ARC 7757A
Conference Room--6th Floor
Iowa Bldg., Suite 600
411 Third St. S.E.
Cedar Rapids, Iowa
February 6, 1998
10 a.m.

Lower Level
417 E. Kanesville Blvd.
Council Bluffs, Iowa
February 4, 1998
9 a.m.

Conference Room 3--5th Floor
Bicentennial Bldg.
428 Western
Davenport, Iowa
February 5, 1998
10 a.m.

Conference Room 104
City View Plaza
1200 University
Des Moines, Iowa
February 5, 1998
1 p.m.
HUMAN SERVICES
DEPARTMENT[441]

(Cont'd)
Liberty Room
Mohawk Square
22 N. Georgia Ave.
Mason City, Iowa
February 5, 1998
10 a.m.

Conference Room 2
120 E. Main
Ottumwa, Iowa
February 4, 1998
10 a.m.

Fifth Floor
520 Nebraska St.
Sioux City, Iowa
February 5, 1998
1 p.m.

Conference Room 420
Pinecrest Office Bldg.
1407 Independence Ave.
Waterloo, Iowa
February 4, 1998
10 a.m.
NATURAL RESOURCE COMMISSION[571]


Snowmobiles and ATVs,
28.13, 28.14(2)
IAB 12/31/97 ARC 7746A
Conference Room--5th Floor East
Wallace State Office Bldg.
Des Moines, Iowa
January 20, 1998
1 p.m.
State parks and recreation areas,
61.2, 61.3, 61.4(1), 61.5, 61.26
IAB 12/31/97 ARC 7747A
Conference Room--5th Floor East
Wallace State Office Bldg.
Des Moines, Iowa
January 20, 1998
1 p.m.
Mussel regulations,
87.1
IAB 12/31/97 ARC 7745A
Blakes Hall
University of Dubuque
2000 University Ave.
Dubuque, Iowa
January 28, 1998
7 p.m.

Public Library
304 Iowa Ave.
Muscatine, Iowa
January 29, 1998
7 p.m.
Nonresident deer hunting,
94.8
IAB 12/31/97 ARC 7744A
Conference Room--4th Floor East
Wallace State Office Bldg.
Des Moines, Iowa
January 23, 1998
1 p.m.
PUBLIC HEALTH DEPARTMENT[641]


Radiation,
amendments to chs 38 to 42, 45
IAB 1/14/98 ARC 7775A
Conference Room--3rd Floor
Side 2
Lucas State Office Bldg.
Des Moines, Iowa
February 3, 1998
9 a.m.
Mammography,
41.1(12), 41.6, 41.7
IAB 1/14/98 ARC 7774A
Conference Room--3rd Floor
Side 2
Lucas State Office Bldg.
Des Moines, Iowa
February 9, 1998
9 a.m.
Local boards of health,
77.1 to 77.6
IAB 1/14/98 ARC 7770A
(ICN Network)

ICN Room--3rd Floor
Lucas State Office Bldg.
Des Moines, Iowa
February 3, 1998
10 to 11 a.m.

National Guard Armory
210 Poplar St.
Atlantic, Iowa
February 3, 1998
10 to 11 a.m.
PUBLIC HEALTH
DEPARTMENT[641]
(ICN Network)
(Cont'd)
National Guard Armory
1601 Park St.
Storm Lake, Iowa
February 3, 1998
10 to 11 a.m.

North Iowa Area Community College
Activity Center, Room AC106
500 College Dr.
Mason City, Iowa
February 3, 1998
10 to 11 a.m.

Washington Armory
ICN Classroom
501 Hwy. 1 South
Washington, Iowa
February 3, 1998
10 to 11 a.m.

Hawkeye Community College
110 Tama Hall
1501 E. Orange Rd.
Waterloo, Iowa
February 3, 1998
10 to 11 a.m.
Automatic external defibrillator
training--non-EMS agencies,
132.1, 132.16
IAB 1/14/98 ARC 7771A
(ICN Network)

National Guard Armory
12 N. 35th St.
Denison, Iowa
February 3, 1998
2 to 3 p.m.

National Guard Armory
11 E. 23rd St.
Spencer, Iowa
February 3, 1998
2 to 3 p.m.

National Guard Armory
1160 10th St. S.W.
Mason City, Iowa
February 3, 1998
2 to 3 p.m.

Iowa Public TV
Room IPTV1
6450 Corporate Dr.
Johnston, Iowa
February 3, 1998
2 to 3 p.m.

National Guard Armory
501 Hwy. 1 South
Washington, Iowa
February 3, 1998
2 to 3 p.m.

National Guard Armory
195 Radford Rd.
Dubuque, Iowa
February 3, 1998
2 to 3 p.m.
Automatic external defibrillator
training--law enforcement agencies,
139.1, 139.2, 139.6
IAB 1/14/98 ARC 7772A
(ICN Network)

National Guard Armory
12 N. 35th St.
Denison, Iowa
February 3, 1998
2 to 3 p.m.

National Guard Armory
11 E. 23rd St.
Spencer, Iowa
February 3, 1998
2 to 3 p.m.

National Guard Armory
1160 10th St. S.W.
Mason City, Iowa
February 3, 1998
2 to 3 p.m.

Iowa Public TV
Room IPTV1
6450 Corporate Dr.
Johnston, Iowa
February 3, 1998
2 to 3 p.m.
PUBLIC HEALTH
DEPARTMENT[641]
(ICN Network)
(Cont'd)
National Guard Armory
501 Hwy.1 South
Washington, Iowa
February 3, 1998
2 to 3 p.m.

National Guard Armory
195 Radford Rd.
Dubuque, Iowa
February 3, 1998
2 to 3 p.m.
Organized delivery systems,
201.6(8)
IAB 12/31/97 ARC 7739A
Conference Room--4th Floor
Lucas State Office Bldg.
Des Moines, Iowa
January 20, 1998
9 a.m.
PUBLIC SAFETY DEPARTMENT[661]


Weapons,
4.1, 4.2, 4.4 to 4.6
IAB 12/17/97 ARC 7716A
Conference Room--3rd Floor
Wallace State Office Bldg.
Des Moines, Iowa
January 22, 1998
9:30 a.m.
SECRETARY OF STATE[721]


Civil penalties for waste tire haulers,
ch 45
IAB 12/31/97 ARC 7741A
Office of Secretary of State
Second Floor
Hoover State Office Bldg.
Des Moines, Iowa
January 20, 1998
1:30 p.m.
TRANSPORTATION DEPARTMENT[761]


Motorcycle rider education (MRE),
ch 635
IAB 12/31/97 ARC 7736A
Conference Room--Lower Level
Park Fair Mall
100 Euclid Ave.
Des Moines, Iowa
January 22, 1998
10 a.m.
(If requested)

CITATION of Administrative Rules

The Iowa Administrative Code shall be cited as (agency identification number) IAC
(chapter, rule, subrule, lettered paragraph, or numbered subparagraph).

441 IAC 79 (Chapter)

441 IAC 79.1(249A) (Rule)

441 IAC 79.1(1) (Subrule)

441 IAC 79.1(1)"a" (Paragraph)

441 IAC 79.1(1)"a"(1) (Subparagraph)

The Iowa Administrative Bulletin shall be cited as IAB (volume), (number), (publication
date), (page number), (ARC number).

IAB Vol. XII, No. 23 (5/16/90) p. 2050, ARC 872A

AGENCY IDENTIFICATION NUMBERS

Due to reorganization of state government by 1986 Iowa Acts, chapter 1245, it was necessary to revise the agency identification numbering system, i.e., the bracketed number following the agency name.

"Umbrella" agencies and elected officials are set out below at the left-hand margin in CAPITAL letters.

Divisions (boards, commissions, etc.) are indented and set out in lowercase type under their statutory "umbrellas."

Other autonomous agencies which were not included in the original reorganization legislation as "umbrella" agencies are included alphabetically in small capitals at the left-hand margin, e.g., BEEF INDUSTRY COUNCIL, IOWA[101].

The following list will be updated as changes occur:

AGRICULTURE AND LAND STEWARDSHIP DEPARTMENT[21]

Agricultural Development Authority[25]

Soil Conservation Division[27]

ATTORNEY GENERAL[61]

AUDITOR OF STATE[81]

BEEF INDUSTRY COUNCIL, IOWA[101]

BLIND, DEPARTMENT FOR THE[111]

CITIZENS' AIDE[141]

CIVIL RIGHTS COMMISSION[161]

COMMERCE DEPARTMENT[181]

Alcoholic Beverages Division[185]

Banking Division[187]

Credit Union Division[189]

Insurance Division[191]

Professional Licensing and Regulation Division[193]

Accountancy Examining Board[193A]

Architectural Examining Board[193B]

Engineering and Land Surveying Examining Board[193C]

Landscape Architectural Examining Board[193D]

Real Estate Commission[193E]

Real Estate Appraiser Examining Board[193F]

Savings and Loan Division[197]

Utilities Division[199]

CORRECTIONS DEPARTMENT[201]

Parole Board[205]

CULTURAL AFFAIRS DEPARTMENT[221]

Arts Division[222]

Historical Division[223]

ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT, IOWA DEPARTMENT OF[261]

City Development Board[263]

Iowa Finance Authority[265]

EDUCATION DEPARTMENT[281]

Educational Examiners Board[282]

College Student Aid Commission[283]

Higher Education Loan Authority[284]

Iowa Advance Funding Authority[285]

Libraries and Information Services Division[286]

Public Broadcasting Division[288]

School Budget Review Committee[289]

EGG COUNCIL[301]

ELDER AFFAIRS DEPARTMENT[321]

EMPLOYMENT SERVICES DEPARTMENT[341]

Job Service Division[345]

Labor Services Division[347]

ETHICS AND CAMPAIGN DISCLOSURE BOARD, IOWA[351]

EXECUTIVE COUNCIL[361]

FAIR BOARD[371]

GENERAL SERVICES DEPARTMENT[401]

HUMAN INVESTMENT COUNCIL[417]

HUMAN RIGHTS DEPARTMENT[421]

Community Action Agencies Division[427]

Criminal and Juvenile Justice Planning Division[428]

Deaf Services Division[429]

Persons With Disabilities Division[431]

Latino Affairs Division[433]

Status of Blacks Division[434]

Status of Women Division[435]

HUMAN SERVICES DEPARTMENT[441]

INSPECTIONS AND APPEALS DEPARTMENT[481]

Employment Appeal Board[486]

Foster Care Review Board[489]

Racing and Gaming Commission[491]

State Public Defender[493]

INTERNATIONAL NETWORK ON TRADE (INTERNET)[497]

LAW ENFORCEMENT ACADEMY[501]

LIVESTOCK HEALTH ADVISORY COUNCIL[521]

MANAGEMENT DEPARTMENT[541]

Appeal Board, State[543]

City Finance Committee[545]

County Finance Committee[547]

NARCOTICS ENFORCEMENT ADVISORY COUNCIL[551]

NATIONAL AND COMMUNITY SERVICE, IOWA COMMISSION ON[555]

NATURAL RESOURCES DEPARTMENT[561]

Energy and Geological Resources Division[565]

Environmental Protection Commission[567]

Natural Resource Commission[571]

Preserves, State Advisory Board[575]

PERSONNEL DEPARTMENT[581]

PETROLEUM UNDERGROUND STORAGE TANK FUND
BOARD, IOWA COMPREHENSIVE[591]

PREVENTION OF DISABILITIES POLICY COUNCIL[597]

PUBLIC DEFENSE DEPARTMENT[601]

Emergency Management Division[605]

Military Division[611]

PUBLIC EMPLOYMENT RELATIONS BOARD[621]

PUBLIC HEALTH DEPARTMENT[641]

Substance Abuse Commission[643]

Professional Licensure Division[645]

Dental Examiners Board[650]

Medical Examiners Board[653]

Nursing Board[655]

Pharmacy Examiners Board[657]

PUBLIC SAFETY DEPARTMENT[661]

RECORDS COMMISSION[671]

REGENTS BOARD[681]

Archaeologist[685]

REVENUE AND FINANCE DEPARTMENT[701]

Lottery Division[705]

SECRETARY OF STATE[721]

SEED CAPITAL CORPORATION, IOWA[727]

SESQUICENTENNIAL COMMISSION, IOWA STATEHOOD[731]

SHEEP AND WOOL PROMOTION BOARD, IOWA[741]

TELECOMMUNICATIONS AND TECHNOLOGY COMMISSION, IOWA[751]

TRANSPORTATION DEPARTMENT[761]

Railway Finance Authority[765]

TREASURER OF STATE[781]

UNIFORM STATE LAWS COMMISSION[791]

VETERANS AFFAIRS COMMISSION[801]

VETERINARY MEDICINE BOARD[811]

VOTER REGISTRATION COMMISSION[821]

WALLACE TECHNOLOGY TRANSFER FOUNDATION[851]

WORKFORCE DEVELOPMENT DEPARTMENT[871]

Industrial Services Division[873]

Labor Services Division[875]

Workforce Development Board and
Workforce Development Center Administration Division[877]

NOTICES

ARC 7762A

ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION COMMISSION[567]

Notice of Intended Action

Twenty-five interested persons, a governmental subdivision, an agency or association of 25 or more persons may demand an oral presentation hereon as provided in Iowa Code section 17A.4(1)"b."

Notice is also given to the public that the Administrative Rules Review Committee may, on its own motion or on written request by any individual or group, review this proposed action under section 17A.8(6) at a regular or special meeting where the public or interested persons may be heard.

Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code section 455B.133, the Environmental Protection Commission hereby gives Notice of Intended Action to amend Chapter 20, "Scope of Title--Definitions--Forms--Rules of Practice," Chapter 22, "Controlling Pollution," Chapter 23, "Emission Standards for Contaminants," Chapter 24, "Excess Emission," Chapter 25, "Measurement of Emissions," Chapter 28, "Ambient Air Quality Standards," Chapter 29, "Qualification in Visual Determination of the Opacity of Emissions," and Chapter 31, "Nonattainment Areas," Iowa Administrative Code.

Item 1 corrects CFR adoption reference dates to accurately identify the dates of the most recent revisions to the regulations. For "EPA reference method," the revisions modify and add emission source test methods to improve and provide for the measurement of various pollutant emissions. These tests are used to determine whether a source is in compliance with the limits placed on the emission units. The continuous emission monitoring provisions of the Acid Rain Program are also revised to help streamline implementation of this program. The revisions also add locally recyclable goods and plastics to the list of items excluded in the "Residential waste" definition and amend the CFR citation date to reflect the last revision to the definition of "Volatile organic compounds." This update adds the exclusion of the following nonphotochemically reactive compounds: HFC 43-10mee, HCFC 225ca, HCFC 225cb, HFC 32, HFC 161, HFC 236fa, HFC 245ca, HFC 245ea, HFC 245eb, HFC 245fa, HFC 236ea, HFC 365mfc, HCFC 31, HCFC 123a, HCFC 151a, C4F9OCH3, (CF3)2CFCF2OCH3, C4F9OC2H5, (CF3)2CFCF2OC2H5.

Item 2 corrects an internal rule citation.

Item 3 removes an obsolete rule referencing a rescinded fee program.

Item 4 provides clarification by eliminating redundant definitions established elsewhere in the title.

Item 5 corrects the date to associate it with the last revision made to the CFR cited. No substantive changes are made by this correction.

Item 6 corrects the date with the last revision made to the CFR regulation cited. No substantive changes are made by this correction.

Item 7 adds the date of the last revision to the cited CFR to provide clarification. No substantive changes are made by this addition.

Item 8 adds the Air Quality Bureau's address and specifies the need to receive two copies of construction permit applications.

Item 9 provides the date of the last revision to the cited CFR for clarification. No substantive changes are made by this addition.

Item 10 corrects dates associated with the CFR citations, which reflect recent revisions to the regulation. Revisions add language to keep Total Suspended Particulate (TSP) increments for Prevention of Significant Deterioration (PSD) in effect to apply toward the amount available for Particulate Matter less than 10 microns (PM10). Nonmethane organic compounds are also added as a pollutant to PSD.

Item 11 corrects dates associated with the CFR citation to demonstrate the most recent revisions to the regulation. The revisions refine modeling techniques and improve the technical basis for impact assessment of air pollution sources.

Item 12 incorporates the date of the last revision to the cited CFR regulation to provide clarification. No substantive changes are made by this addition.

Item 13 deletes the redundant citation of a CFR adoption by reference date from paragraphs "a" to "d" and places the updated adoption by reference date in the introductory paragraph of the subrule for clarification. No substantive changes are made by this correction.

Item 14 corrects dates associated with the CFR citations, which reflect recent revisions to the regulations. The revisions made to the CFR citations are implemented by rule 22.101(455B), Applicability of Title V operating permit requirements, and rule 22.1(455B), Permits required for new or existing stationary sources, and adopted by reference in rule 23.1(455B), Emission standards.

Item 15 corrects dates associated with the CFR citations to adopt recent revisions to the regulations. The revisions promulgate and revise many New Source Performance Standards (NSPS) and Emission Guidelines (EG) to include the NSPS and EG for municipal solid waste landfills. The standards and guidelines have been adopted by reference in rule 23.1(455B), Emission standards. The revisions also provide delegation of authority to Iowa.

Items 16 through 19 add the dates of the latest revisions to the cited CFR citations to provide clarification. No substantive changes are made by the additions.

Item 20 clarifies the meaning of the paragraph by making minor revisions.

Item 21 amends the date associated with the CFR citation to list the recent revisions to the regulation. The revisions approve and federally promulgate Air Quality Implementation Plans for Iowa, which include provisions related to open burning, new source review requirements in nonattainment areas, test method and definition updates, and others.

Item 22 revises the dates to identify the last revisions made to the CFR citations. For "EPA reference method," the revisions are the same as those stated in Item 1. Item 22 also amends the dates associated with the CFR citations for "Existing hazardous air pollutant source" to include recent revisions to the regulations. These revisions provide delegation of authority to Iowa, revise procedures for handling and analyzing samples collected by the sampling train for emission source tests, and rescind 40 CFR Part 61, Subpart I as it applies to Nuclear Regulatory Commission (NRC). No other substantive changes are made by these corrections.

Item 23 excludes total suspended particulate (TSP) as a regulated air pollutant used for determining whether a source is required to obtain a Title V permit.

Item 24 revises the date associated with the CFR citation, so recent revisions to the CFR are included. No substantive changes are made by this correction.

Item 25 provides the dates of the last revision to the CFR citations for clarification. No substantive changes are made by this addition.

Item 26 corrects dates associated with the CFR citations to include recent revisions to the regulations. No substantive changes are made by this correction.

Item 27 adds the date to identify the last revision to the cited CFR regulation for clarification. No substantive changes are made by this addition.

Item 28 changes the Air Quality Bureau's address and removes application deadlines that have passed and are no longer applicable.

Item 29 provides language to specify the requirement for the submittal of four copies of the application to the Department.

Items 30 through 32 add the dates to identify the latest revisions to the cited CFR citations for clarification. No substantive changes are made by the additions.

Item 33 corrects the date associated with the CFR citation to include recent revisions to the regulation. No substantive changes are made by this correction.

Item 34 provides clarification by adding the date of the last revision to the cited CFR regulation. No substantive changes are made by this addition.

Item 35 incorporates definitions to the Acid Rain Program for the nitrogen oxides reduction component of this program. This component is designed to reduce emissions of nitrogen oxides discharged into the atmosphere from the burning of fossil fuels. The program primarily affects the electric utility industry.

Item 36 modifies dates associated with the CFR citations, so recent revisions to the regulations are included. These revisions provide the utilities the ability to use substitution and reduce utilization plans to create excess, new allowances for sulfur dioxide (SO2) emissions. They also establish the Opt-in Program. This allows sources not required to participate in the program the option to do so on a voluntary basis. The Opt-in Program helps generate additional allowances reducing overall compliance costs for utilities.

Item 37 amends the dates of the CFR citations to identify recent revisions to the citations. For "Acid rain program" the revisions create the Opt-in Program as discussed in Item 36. In addition, they revise continuous emission monitoring provisions to make implementation of the program easier for regulatory agencies and regulated industry, and terminate the direct sales of sulfur dioxide allowances. These revisions also provide a method by which additional allowances may be loaned to units receiving early reduction credits as an incentive to further reduce emissions prior to the units' becoming subject to the applicable Acid Rain Program emission limitations. The nitrogen oxide reduction program, as described in Item 35, is added as a citation. The revisions also streamline and improve permitting, excess emissions, and appeal procedures to reduce the burden on utilities, while still ensuring achievement of the statutory requirements of reducing sulfur dioxide and nitrogen emissions. For "Offset plans" and "State Title V operating permit," the revisions create the Opt-in Program, as mentioned above. However, for "State Title V operating permit," the revisions also amend the continuous emission monitoring procedures, and revise regulations to implement compliance assurance monitoring (CAM) for major stationary sources of air pollution that are required to obtain operating permits under Title V of the Act. They also streamline and improve the regulation as mentioned above. Many of the other revisions made to the CFR citation are adopted in rules 22.120(455B) to 22.146(455B), which implement the Acid Rain Program, or result in no substantive changes.

Item 38 amends the date for the CFR citation to reflect recent revisions to the regulation. No substantive changes were made to Table 1. Applicability for nitrogen oxides emission reduction program was also added by including coal-fire substitution units (or compensating unit) that were designated in substitution plans, that were not approved or active by January 1, 1995.

Items 39 and 40 correct the dates to reference the last revisions made to the CFR citations. No substantive changes are made by these corrections.

Item 41 amends dates for the CFR citations to include recent revisions to the regulations. No substantive changes are made by these corrections.

Item 42 revises the date to include the last revision made to the CFR citation. No substantive changes are made by these corrections.

Item 43 revises the date to include recent revisions made to the CFR citation. The revisions made to the citation are adopted in rules 22.120(455B) to 22.146(455B). No substantive changes are made by the corrections to the exceptions described in the paragraph.

Item 44 amends the dates for CFR citations to reference recent revisions to the regulations. The revisions add, streamline, and improve the final acid rain regulations for the allowance system, permitting, emissions monitoring, excess emissions, and administrative appeals. They also provide a method by which additional allowances may be loaned to units receiving early reduction credits as an incentive to further reduce emissions prior to the units' becoming subject to the applicable Acid Rain Program emission limitations. In addition, they develop and amend the Opt-in Program and amend the continuous emission monitoring procedures, as mentioned previously.

Item 45 revises the date to include the last revision made to the CFR citation. No substantive changes are made by these corrections.

Item 46 adds specific CFR citations to outline requirements for the nitrogen oxides emission reduction component of the Acid Rain Program.

Item 47 amends the dates to include recent revisions made to the CFR citations. The revisions create the Opt-in Program which allows sources not required to participate in the Acid Rain Program the opportunity to participate on a voluntary basis.

Item 48 corrects the date to reflect the last revision to the CFR regulation cited. No substantive changes are made by this correction.

Item 49 amends the dates of the CFR references to demonstrate the recent revisions to the regulations. The revisions are the same as those stated in Item 37 for the "Acid Rain Program."

Items 50 and 51 revise the dates to reference the last revisions made to the CFR regulations cited. No substantive changes are made by these corrections.

Item 52 establishes a deadline for a Phase II unit with a Group 1 or Group 2 boiler to submit the unit's permit application and compliance plan for nitrogen oxides.

Item 53 adds the Air Quality Bureau's address.

Item 54 revises the dates to include recent revisions to the CFR citations. No substantive changes are made by these corrections.

Item 55 removes repowering extensions from the regulations. All deadlines to apply have passed. No utilities within the state applied for the allowed extension.

Item 56 revises the dates to include recent revisions to the CFR citations. The revisions are the same as those stated in Item 37 for the "Acid rain program."

Item 57 amends the dates to reference the last revisions made to the CFR citation. No substantive changes are made by these corrections.

Item 58 revises the dates to include recent revisions to the CFR citations. The revisions are the same as those stated in Item 37 for the "Acid rain program."

Items 59 through 61 correct the dates to identify the last revisions made to the CFR citations. No substantive changes are made by these corrections.

Item 62 amends the dates to include recent revisions to the CFR citations. The revisions create the Opt-in Program which allows sources not required to participate in the Acid Rain Program the opportunity to participate on a voluntary basis. They also add the final acid rain regulations for the allowance system, permitting, emissions monitoring, excess emissions, and administrative appeals. In addition, they provide a method by which additional allowances may be loaned to units receiving early reduction credits as an incentive to further reduce emissions prior to the unit's becoming subject to the applicable Acid Rain Program emission limitations.

Item 63 corrects the date to identify the last revision made to the CFR regulation cited. No substantive changes are made by these corrections.

Item 64 removes the compliance certification for units with repowering extensions plans from the regulations. All deadlines to apply have passed. No utilities within the state applied for this extension.

Item 65 modifies the Air Quality Bureau's address.

Item 66 removes an expired deadline for receipt of voluntary operating permit applications.

Item 67 clarifies the paragraph by making minor revisions.

Item 68 modifies the Air Quality Bureau's address and removes an expired deadline for receipt of operating permit by rule registration.

Item 69 corrects dates for the CFR citations to include recent revisions to the regulations. The revisions promulgate and revise many New Source Performance Standards (NSPS) and Emission Guidelines (EG) to include the NSPS and EG for municipal solid waste landfills. Most of these standards have been adopted by reference in previous rule makings. The revisions also provide delegation of authority to Iowa.

Item 70 removes dates from the paragraph. The dates are already specified in the rule.

Item 71 corrects the CFR citation.

Item 72 amends the date to include recent revisions to the CFR citation. Revisions provide delegation of authority to Iowa and remove rules pertaining to air pollution, which are no longer legally in effect. The changes also revise procedures for handling and analyzing samples collected by the sampling train for stack testing.

Item 73 revises the date to reflect recent revisions to the CFR citation. The revisions adopt and revise manyNESHAPS and NESHAPS for source categories. All of these promulgated NESHAPS and NESHAPS for source categories have been adopted by reference in previous rule makings.

Item 74 adds an introductory paragraph to the subrule to identify general requirements that will be applicable to all current and future emission guidelines. This will eliminate redundancies when future emission guidelines are adopted.

Item 75 revises the date to reflect the last revision to the CFR citation. No substantive changes are made by this correction. This item also corrects the CFR citation.

Item 76 prohibits burning rubber tires in recreational fires.

Item 77 amends the date to identify the last revision made to the CFR citation. No substantive changes are made by this correction. This item also prohibits burning rubber tires during training fires.

Item 78 improves the clarity of the subparagraph.

Item 79 corrects the date to include the most recent revisions to the CFR citation. No substantive changes are made by this correction to reference methods measuring elemental fluorine and fluoride compounds.

Items 80 and 81 provide clarification. No substantive changes are made by these revisions.

Item 82 revises the date to include recent revisions to the CFR citation. The revisions amend, revise and adopt a variety of methods to determine compliance for various sources. They also add performance specifications for volatile organic compound and chromatographic continuous emission systems in stationary sources.

Items 83 and 84 add the dates to reflect the last revisions to the CFR citations. No substantive changes are made by these revisions.

Item 85 amends the date to include recent revisions to the CFR citation. The revisions amend continuous emission monitoring (CEM) regulations to provide additional flexibility to implement immediately new provisions that address these unforeseen situations, and reduce the possibility of underestimating emissions. Continuous emission monitoring provisions make implementation of the program easier and more efficient to implement for both regulatory agencies and industry.

Item 86 amends the date to incorporate recent revisions to the CFR citation. The revisions modify the existing National Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS) for ozone and establish new annual and 24-hour PM2.5 NAAQS to better protect public health, especially those at higher risk, such as children, the elderly, and individuals with preexisting heart or lung diseases. The revisions also relax the current PM10 NAAQS. The federal Clean Air Act requires that each NAAQS be reviewed and possibly revised to reflect the most recent health information available.

Items 87 and 88 revise the dates to include recent revisions to the CFR citations. No substantive changes are made by these revisions.

Any person may make written suggestions or comments on the proposed amendments on or before February 13, 1998. Written comments should be directed to Scott Vander Hart, Iowa Department of Natural Resources, Air Quality Bureau, 7900 Hickman Road, Suite 1, Urbandale, Iowa 50322, fax (515)242-5094, or by electronic mail to svander@max.state.ia.us.

A public hearing will be held on February 13, 1998, at 1 p.m. in the East Conference Room, Air Quality Bureau, 7900 Hickman Road, Suite 1, Urbandale, Iowa, at which time comments may be submitted orally or in writing.

Any persons who intend to attend a public hearing and have special requirements, such as those related to hearing or mobility, should contact the Department of Natural Resources to advise the Department of any specific needs.

These amendments may impact small business.

These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code section 455B.133.

The following amendments are proposed.

ITEM 1. Amend rule 567--20.2(455B), definitions of "Country grain elevator," "EPA reference method," "Residential waste," and "Volatile organic compound," as follows:

"Country grain elevator" means any grain elevator that receives more than 50 percent of its grain, as defined by 40 CFR 60.301(a) as amended through March 12, 1996 August 3, 1978, produced by farms in the vicinity. This definition does not include grain terminal elevators or grain storage elevators, as defined in paragraph 23.1(2)"ooo."

"EPA reference method" means any method of sampling and analyzing for an air pollutant as described in 40 CFR 51, Appendix M, as amended through July 20, 1993 June 16, 1997; 40 CFR 52, Appendices D and E, as amended through July 20, 1993 February 6, 1975; 40 CFR 60, Appendix A, as amended through May 17, 1993 March 12, 1996; 40 CFR 61, Appendix B, as amended through June 25, 1993 April 6, 1973; 40 CFR 63, Appendix A, as amended through October 27, 1993 December 7, 1995; and 40 CFR 75, Appendices A, B, and H, as amended through July 20, 1993 May 22, 1996, May 17, 1995, and July 30, 1993.

"Residential waste" means any refuse generated on the premises as a result of residential activities. The term includes landscape waste grown on the premises or deposited thereon by the elements, but excludes garbage, tires, and trade wastes, and any locally recyclable goods or plastics.

"Volatile organic compound" means any compound included in the definition of volatile organic compound found at 40 CFR Section 51.100(s) as amended through September 21, 1995 September 24, 1997.

ITEM 2. Amend subrule 20.3(4) as follows:

20.3(4) Air contaminant emissions survey forms. The submission of emissions information pursuant to 567--subrule 22.2(3) 21.1(3) shall be made in accordance with instructions for completion of survey forms provided by the department.

ITEM 3. Rescind subrule 20.3(6).

ITEM 4. Amend subrule 22.1(1) as follows:

22.1(1) Permit required. Unless exempted in subrule 22.1(2), no person shall construct, install, reconstruct or alter any equipment, control equipment or anaerobic lagoon without first obtaining a construction permit, or conditional permit, or permit pursuant to 22.8(455B), or permits required pursuant to 22.4(455B) and 22.5(455B) as required in this subrule. A permit shall be obtained prior to the initiation of construction, installation or alteration of any portion of the stationary source or anaerobic lagoon. Existing sources built prior to September 23, 1970, are not subject to this subrule, unless they have been modified, reconstructed, or altered on or after September 23, 1970.

a. New stationary sources and modifications of existing stationary sources. No person shall construct or install any equipment or control equipment at a new stationary source or at a modification of an existing stationary source unless a construction permit or conditional permit has been obtained from the department. A permit shall be obtained prior to the initiation of construction, installation or alteration of any portion of the stationary course.

b. Existing stationary sources. No person shall construct, install, reconstruct or alter any equipment or control equipment at an existing stationary source unless a construction permit or conditional permit has been obtained from the department for the equipment or control equipment.

c. Anaerobic lagoons. No person shall construct, reconstruct or alter an anaerobic lagoon unless a construction permit has been obtained from the department.

ITEM 5. Amend subrule 22.1(2), paragraph "b," as follows:

b. Fuel-burning equipment for indirect heating or cooling with a capacity of less than one million Btu per hour input per combustion unit when burning coal, untreated wood or fuel oil. Used oils meeting the specification from 40 CFR 279.11 as amended through March 4, 1994 May 3, 1993, are acceptable fuels for this exemption.

ITEM 6. Amend subrule 22.1(2), paragraph "k," as follows:

k. Asbestos demolition and renovation projects subject to 40 CFR 61.145 as amended through July 15, 1994 January 16, 1991.

ITEM 7. Amend subrule 22.1(2), paragraph "s," subparagraph (7), as follows:

(7) A statement that the accumulated emissions increases associated with each change under paragraph 22.1(2)"i," when totaled with other net emissions increases at the facility contemporaneous with the proposed change (occurring within five years before construction on the particular change commences) have not exceeded significant levels as defined in 40 CFR 52.21(b)(23) as amended through March 12, 1996, and adopted in rule 22.4(455B), and will not prevent the attainment or maintenance of the ambient air quality standards specified in 567--Chapter 28. This statement shall be accompanied by documentation for the basis of these statements.

ITEM 8. Amend subrule 22.1(3), introductory paragraph, as follows:

22.1(3) Construction permits. The owner or operator of a new or modified stationary source shall apply for a construction permit unless a conditional permit is required by Iowa Code chapter 455B or subrule 22.1(4) or requested by the applicant in lieu of a construction permit. The owner or operator of any anaerobic lagoon shall apply for a construction permit. Two copies of the construction permit application shall be presented or mailed to Iowa Department of Natural Resources, Air Quality Bureau, 7900 Hickman Road, Suite 1, Urbandale, Iowa 50322.

ITEM 9. Amend subrule 22.1(4), paragraph "b," subparagraph (1), as follows:

(1) The results of an air quality impact analysis which characterizes preconstruction air quality and the air quality impacts of facility construction and operation. A quality assurance plan for the preconstruction air monitoring where required in accordance with 40 Code of Federal Regulations Part 58 as amended through July 18, 1997, shall also be submitted.

ITEM 10. Amend rule 567--22.4(455B), introductory paragraph, as follows:

567--22.4(455B) Special requirements for major stationary sources located in areas designated attainment or unclassified (PSD). Except as provided in subrule 22.4(1), the following federal regulations pertaining to the prevention of significant deterioration are adopted by reference, 40 CFR Subsection 52.21 as amended through July 21, 1993 March 12, 1996.

ITEM 11. Amend subrule 22.4(1) as follows:

22.4(1) Federal rules 40 CFR 52.21(a) (Plan Approval), 52.21(q) (Public Participation), 52.21(s) (Environmental Impact Statement), and 52.21(u) (Delegation of Authority) are not adopted by reference. Also, for the purposes of 40 CFR 52.21(1), the department adopts by reference Appendix W to 40 CFR 51, Guideline on Air Quality Models (Revised), as adopted July 20, 1993 August 9, 1995.

ITEM 12. Amend subrule 22.4(3) as follows:

22.4(3) The procedural requirements of 40 CFR 51.166(q), as amended through June 19, 1978, (except the phrase "The plan shall provide that--") are hereby adopted by reference. For the purposes of this subrule the phrase "specified time period" shall mean 30 days. The term "administrator" as it appears in subparagraph 51.166(q)"iv" shall mean the administrator of EPA.

ITEM 13. Amend subrule 22.5(2) as follows:

22.5(2) Applicability. Areas designated as attainment, nonattainment, or unclassified are as listed in 40 CFR SS81.316 as amended through March 10, 1994.

a. The requirements contained in rule 22.5(455B) shall apply to any new major stationary source or major modification that, as of the date the permit is issued, is major for any pollutant for which the area in which the source would construct is designated as nonattainment (in 40 CFR SS 81.316 as amended through May 31, 1995).

b. The requirements contained in rule 22.5(455B) shall apply to each nonattainment pollutant that the source will emit or has the potential to emit in major amounts. In the case of a modification, the requirements shall apply to the significant net emissions increase of each nonattainment pollutant for which the source is major.

c. Particulate matter. If a major source or major modification is proposed to be constructed in an area designated nonattainment for particulate matter in 40 CFR SS81.316 (as amended through May 31, 1995), then emission offsets must be achieved prior to startup.

If a major source or major modification is proposed to be constructed in an area designated attainment or unclassified for particulate matter in 40 CFR SS81.316 (as amended through May 31, 1995), but the modeled (EPA-approved guideline model) worst case ground level particulate concentrations due to the major source or major modification in a designated particulate matter nonattainment area is equal to or greater than five micrograms per cubic meter (24-hour concentration), or one microgram per cubic meter (annual arithmetic mean), then emission offsets must be achieved prior to startup.

d. Sulfur dioxide. If a major source or major modification is proposed to be constructed in an area designated nonattainment for sulfur dioxide in 40 CFR SS81.316 (as amended through May 31, 1995), then emission offsets must be achieved prior to startup.

If a major source or major modification is proposed to be constructed in an area designated attainment or unclassified for sulfur dioxide in 40 CFR SS81.316 (as amended through May 31, 1995), but the modeled (EPA-approved guideline model) worst case ground level sulfur dioxide concentrations due to the major source or major modification in a designated sulfur dioxide nonattainment area is equal to or greater than 25 micrograms per cubic meter (three-hour concentration), five microgram per cubic meter (24-hour concentration), or one microgram per cubic meter (annual arithmetic mean), then emission offsets must be achieved prior to startup.

e. At such time that a particular source or modification becomes a major stationary source or major modification solely by virtue of a relaxation in any enforceable limitation which was established after August 7, 1980, on the capacity of the source or modification otherwise to emit a pollutant, such as a restriction on hours of operation, then the requirements of this rule shall apply to the source or modification as though construction had not yet commenced on the source or modification.

ITEM 14. Amend subrule 22.5(4), paragraph "g," as follows:

g. Reduction credits. Credit for an emissions reduction can be claimed to the extent that the administrator and the department have not: (1) relied on it in issuing any permit under regulations approved pursuant to 40 CFR Parts 51(amended through September 24, 1997), 55 (amended through August 4, 1997), 63 (amended through August 11, 1997), 70 (amended through November 26, 1997), or 71 (amended through October 22, 1997) as amended through May 11, 1995; (2) relied on it in demonstrating attainment or reasonable further progress; or (3) the reduction is not otherwise required under the Clean Air Act. Incidental emissions reductions which are not otherwise required under the Act shall be creditable as emissions reductions for such purposes if such emissions reductions meet the requirements of subrule 22.5(3).

ITEM 15. Amend subrule 22.5(6), paragraph "c," as follows:

c. State implementation plan, new source performance standards, and emission standards for hazardous air pollutants. A major stationary source or major modification shall meet each applicable emissions limitation under the state implementation plan and each applicable emissions standard of performance under 40 CFR Parts 60 (amended through June 12, 1997), and 61(amended through October 14, 1997), and 63(amended through August 11, 1997) as amended through May 30, 1995.

ITEM 16. Amend subrule 22.5(10) as follows:

22.5(10) Public availability of information. No permit shall be issued until notice and opportunity for public comment are made available in accordance with the procedure described in 40 CFR 51.161 (as amended through May 8, 1995 November 7, 1986).

ITEM 17. Amend rule 567--22.6(455B) as follows:

567--22.6(455B) Nonattainment area designations. Section 107(d) of the federal Clean Air Act, 42 U.S.C. SS7457(d), requires each state to submit to the administrator of the federal Environmental Protection Agency a list of areas, that exceed the ambient air quality standards, that are lower than those standards, or that cannot be classified on the basis of current data. A list of Iowa's nonattainment area designations is found at 40 CFR Part 81.316 as amended through March 10, 1994. The commission uses the document entitled "Criteria for Revising Nonattainment Area Designations"* (June 14, 1979) to determine when and to what extent the list will be revised and resubmitted.

*Filed with Administrative Rules Coordinator, also available from the department.

ITEM 18. Amend subrule 22.7(1), introductory paragraph, as follows:

22.7(1) Applicability. The owner or operator of any source located in an area with attainment or unclassified status (as published at 40 CFR SS81.316 amended through March 10, 1994), or located in an area with an approved State Implementation Plan (SIP) demonstrating attainment by the statutory deadline may apply for an alternative set of emission limits if:

ITEM 19. Amend subrule 22.7(2), paragraph "d," as follows:

d. Hazardous air pollutants designated in 40 CFR Part 61, as amended through October 14, 1997, will not be exchanged for nonhazardous air pollutants;

ITEM 20. Amend subrule 22.8(1), paragraph "c," as follows:

c. Facilities which facilitywide spray more than one gallon per day but never more than three gallons per day are exempt from all requirements, except that they must submit the certification in 22.8(1) "e" to the department, keep records of daily sprayed material use, and vent emissions from spray booth booth(s) through a stack stack(s) which is at least 22 feet tall, measured from ground level. The facility must keep the records of daily sprayed material use for 18 months from the date to which the records apply.

ITEM 21. Amend 567--22.100(455B), definition of "Applicable requirement," numbered paragraph "1," as follows:

1. Any standard or other requirement provided for in the applicable implementation plan approved or promulgated by EPA through rule making under Title I of the Act that implements the relevant requirements of the Act, including any revisions to that plan promulgated in 40 CFR 52 as amended through August 4, 1994 November 26, 1997;

ITEM 22. Further amend 567--22.100(455B), definitions of "Country grain elevator," "Designated representative," "EPA reference method," "Existing hazardous air pollution source," and "High risk pollutant," introductory paragraph, as follows:

"Country grain elevator" means any grain elevator that receives more than 50 percent of its grain, as defined by 40 CFR 60.301(a) as amended through March 12, 1996 August 3, 1978, produced by farms in the vicinity. This definition does not include grain terminal elevators or pertain to grain storage elevators, as defined in paragraph 23.1(2)"ooo."

"Designated representative" means a responsible natural person authorized by the owner(s) or operator(s) of an affected source and of all affected units at the source, as evidenced by a certificate of representation submitted in accordance with Subpart B of 40 CFR Part 72 as amended to November 22, 1994 October 24, 1997, to represent and legally bind each owner and operator, as a matter of federal law, in matters pertaining to the Acid Rain Program. Whenever the term "responsible official" is used in rules 22.100(455B) to 22.208(455B), it shall be deemed to refer to the designated representative with regard to all matters under the Acid Rain Program.

"EPA reference method" means any method of sampling and analyzing for an air pollutant as described in 40 CFR 51, Appendix M (as amended through May 30, 1995), as amended through January 5, 1995; 40 CFR 52, Appendices D (as amended through February 6, 1975) and E (as amended through February 6, 1975), as amended through August 4, 1994; 40 CFR 60, Appendices A (as amended through March 12, 1996), B (as amended through December 15, 1994), C (as amended through December 16, 1975), and F (as amended through February 11, 1991), as amended through December 15, 1994; 40 CFR 61, Appendix B (as amended through June 3, 1992), as amended through July 5, 1994; 40 CFR 63, Appendix A (as amended through December 7, 1995), as amended through March 8, 1995; and 40 CFR 75, Appendices A (as amended through May 22, 1996), B (as amended through May 17, 1995), and H (as amended through July 30, 1993), as amended through August 18, 1994.

"Existing hazardous air pollutant source" means any source as defined in 40 CFR 61 (as amended through July 15, 1994 April 21, 1997), and 40 CFR 63.72 (as amended through March 8, 1995 December 29, 1992), with respect to Section 112(i)(5) of the Act, the construction or reconstruction of which commenced prior to proposal of an applicable Section 112(d) standard.

"High risk pollutant" means one of the following hazardous air pollutants listed in Table 1 in 40 CFR 63.74 as amended through March 8, 1995 October 21, 1994.

ITEM 23. Further amend 567--22.100(455B), definition of "Regulated air pollutant," by adding the following new numbered paragraph "6":

6. With respect to Title V, total suspended particulate is not considered a regulated air pollutant for the purpose of determining whether a source is considered to be a major source.

ITEM 24. Amend subrule 22.101(1), paragraph "e," as follows:

e. Any source category designated by the administrator pursuant to 40 CFR 70.3 as amended through June 25, 1993 June 20, 1996.

ITEM 25. Amend subrule 22.101(2) as follows:

22.101(2) Title V deferred stationary sources. The requirement to obtain a Title V permit is deferred for all sources listed in 22.101(1) that are not major sources, affected sources, or solid waste incineration units required to obtain a permit pursuant to Section 129(e) of the Act, until December 9, 1999, unless by the final promulgation of a federal standard to which the source is subject under the provisions of 40 CFR Part 60 (as amended through June 12, 1997), or 40 CFR Part 63 (as amended through August 11, 1997), a source is required to obtain a Title V permit. Each source receiving a deferral under the provisions of this rule shall submit a Title V permit application to the department within 12 months of the date when the requirement to obtain a Title V permit is no longer deferred for that source.

ITEM 26. Amend rule 567--22.102(455B) as follows:

567--22.102(455B) Source categories exempt from obtaining Title V operating permit. The following source categories are exempt from the obligation to obtain a Title V operating permit:

22.102(1) Residential wood heaters required to obtain a Title V permit solely because they are subject to 40 CFR 60, Subpart AAA, as amended to August 31, 1993 June 29, 1995.

22.102(2) Asbestos demolition and renovation projects required to obtain a Title V permit solely because they are subject to 40 CFR 61, Subpart M, as amended to July 15, 1994 June 19, 1995.

22.102(3) Any decorative chromium electroplating operation or chromium anodizing operation using fume suppressants as an emission reduction technology; and any decorative chromium electroplating operation using a trivalent chromium bath incorporating a wetting agent as a bath ingredient if the source is not by itself a major source and is not located at a major source, as defined under 40 CFR 70.2 (as amended through July 21, 1992).

22.102(4) Any batch cold solvent cleaning machine as defined in 40 CFR 63 Subpart T (as amended through June 5, 1995) that is not itself a major source and that is not located at a major source as defined under 40 CFR 70.2 (as amended through July 21, 1992).

ITEM 27. Amend subrule 22.103(1), introductory paragraph, as follows:

22.103(1) Insignificant activities excluded from Title V operating permit application. The following are insignificant activities for purposes of Title V permitting if not needed to determine the applicability of or to impose any applicable requirement. In accordance with 40 CFR 70.5 (as amended through June 25, 1993 July 21, 1992), these activities need not be included in the Title V permit application or in the calculation of fees pursuant to 22.106(455B). However, if the inclusion of emissions from these activities makes the source subject to the Title V permit requirement or if these activities are needed to impose any applicable requirement, these activities must be included in the permit application.

ITEM 28. Amend subrule 22.105(1) as follows:

22.105(1) Duty to apply. For each source required to obtain a Title V permit, the owner or operator or designated representative, where applicable, shall present or mail to the Air Quality Bureau, Iowa Department of Natural Resources, Wallace State Office Building, 900 East Grand Avenue, Des Moines, Iowa 50319-0034 7900 Hickman Road, Suite 1, Urbandale, Iowa 50322, at least four copies of a complete and timely permit application in accordance with this rule.

a. Timely application. Each source applying for a Title V permit shall submit an application:

(1) By November 15, 1994, if a source is existing on April 20, 1994, is required to have a Title V permit and is applying for a Title V permit for the first time. However, a source may choose to defer submittal of Part 2 of the permit application until 90 days after approval of the department's Title V program by USEPA. The department will mail notice of the new deadline to all applicants who have filed Part 1 of the application, at least 75 days prior to the new deadline.

(2)(1) At least 6 months but not more than 18 months prior to the date of permit expiration if the application is for a permit renewal.

(3)(2) By January 1, 1996, (for sulfur dioxide) or by 1998, (for nitrogen oxides) if the application is for an initial Phase II acid rain permit.

(4)(3) At least 6 months prior to any planned significant modification of a Title V permit. See rule 22.113(455B).

(5)(4) Within 12 months of commencing operation for a source subject to 112(g) of the Act or subject to rule 22.4(455B) (prevention of significant deterioration permitting) or subject to rule 22.5(455B) (nonattainment area permitting). Where an existing Title V permit would prohibit such construction or change in operation, the source must obtain a Title V permit revision before commencing operation.

(6)(5) Within 12 months of becoming subject to this rule for a new source or a source which has become subject to the Title V permit requirement after April 20, 1994.

b. Complete application. To be deemed complete, an application must provide all information required pursuant to subrule 22.105(2), except that applications for permit revision need supply such information only if it is related to the proposed change.

ITEM 29. Amend subrule 22.106(3) as follows:

22.106(3) Fee and documentation due dates.

a. The fee shall be submitted annually by July 1. The fee shall be submitted with four copies of the following forms:

1. Form 1.0 "Facility identification";

2. Form 5.0 "Title V annual emissions summary/fee"; and

3. Part 3 "Application certification."

b. The Four copies of the following forms shall be submitted annually by March 31 documenting actual emissions for the previous calendar year.:

1. Form 1.0 "Facility identification";

2. Form 4.0 "Emission unit--actual operations and emissions" for each emission unit;

3. Form 5.0 "Title V annual emissions summary/fee"; and

4. Part 3 "Application certification."

If there are any changes to the emission calculation form, the department shall make revised forms available to the public by January 1. If revised forms are not available by January 1, forms from the previous year may be used and the year of emissions documented changed. The department shall calculate the total statewide Title V emissions for the prior calendar year and make this information available to the public no later than April 30 of each year.

ITEM 30. Amend subrule 22.107(1), paragraph "a," subparagraph (6), as follows:

(6) If the administrator has properly objected to the permit pursuant to the provisions of 40 CFR 70.8(d) as amended to June 25, 1993 July 21, 1992, or subrule 22.107(7), then the permitting authority may issue a permit only after the administrator's objection has been resolved; and

ITEM 31. Amend subrule 22.107(8) as follows:

22.107(8) Public petitions to the administrator regarding Title V permits.

a. If the administrator does not object to a proposed permit, any person may petition the administrator within 60 days after the expiration of the administrator's 45-day review period to make an objection pursuant to 40 CFR 70.8(d) as amended to June 25, 1993 July 21, 1992.

b. Any person who petitions the administrator pursuant to the provisions of 40 CFR 70.8(d) as amended to June 25, 1993 July 21, 1992, shall notify the department by certified mail of such petition immediately, and in no case more than 10 days following the date the petition is submitted to EPA. Such notice shall include a copy of the petition submitted to EPA and a separate written statement detailing the grounds for the objection(s) and whether the objection(s) was raised during the public comment period. A petition for review shall not stay the effectiveness of a permit or its requirements if the permit was issued after the end of the 45-day EPA review period and prior to the administrator's objection.

c. If the administrator objects to the permit as a result of a petition filed pursuant to 40 CFR 70.8(d) as amended to June 25, 1993 July 21, 1992, then the director shall not issue a permit until the administrator's objection has been resolved. However, if the director has issued a permit prior to receipt of the administrator's objection, and the administrator modifies, terminates, or revokes such permit, consistent with the procedures in 40 CFR 70.7 as amended to June 25, 1993 July 21, 1992, then the director may thereafter issue only a revised permit that satisfies the administrator's objection. In any case, the source shall not be in violation of the requirement to have submitted a timely and complete application.

ITEM 32. Amend subrule 22.108(14), paragraph "b," as follows:

b. Notwithstanding paragraph "a" of this subrule, the director shall specifically designate as not being federally enforceable under the Act any terms and conditions included in the permit that are not required under the Act or under any of its applicable requirements. Terms and conditions so designated are not subject to the requirements of 40 CFR 70.7 or 70.8 (as amended through June 25, 1993 July 21, 1992).

ITEM 33. Amend subrule 22.108(17), paragraph "a," subparagraph (2), as follows:

(2) The reopening and revision on this ground is not required if the effective date of the requirement is later than the date on which the permit is due to expire, unless the original permit or any of its terms and conditions have been extended pursuant to 40 CFR 70.4(b)(10)(i) or (ii) as amended to June 25, 1993 June 20, 1996; or

ITEM 34. Amend subrule 22.114(1), paragraph "a," as follows:

a. The department receives notice that the administrator has granted a petition for disapproval of a permit pursuant to 40 CFR 70.8(d) as amended to June 25, 1993 July 21, 1992, provided that the reopening may be stayed pending judicial review of that determination;

ITEM 35. Amend rule 567--22.120(455B) by adding the following new definitions in alphabetical order:

"Alternative contemporaneous annual emission limitation" means the maximum allowable NOx emission rate (on a lb/mmBtu, annual average basis) assigned to an individual unit in a NOx emissions averaging plan pursuant to 40 CFR 76.10, as amended through December 19, 1996.

"Alternative technology" means a control technology for reducing NOx emissions that is outside the scope of the definition of low NOx burner technology. Alternative technology does not include overfire air as applied to wall-fired boilers or separated overfire air as applied to tangentially fired boilers.

"Approved clean coal technology demonstration project" means a project using funds appropriated under the Department of Energy's ``Clean Coal Technology Demonstration Program,'' up to a total amount of $2.5 billion for commercial demonstration of clean coal technology, or similar proj-ects funded through appropriations for the Environmental Protection Agency. The federal contribution for a qualifying project shall be at least 20 percent of the total cost of the demonstration project.

"Arch-fired boiler" means a dry bottom boiler with circular burners, or coal and air pipes, oriented downward and mounted on waterwalls that are at an angle significantly different from the horizontal axis and the vertical axis. This definition shall include only the following units: Holtwood unit 6, and Sunbury units 1A, 1B, 2A, and 2B. This definition shall exclude dry bottom turbo-fired boilers.

"Cell burner boiler" means a wall-fired boiler that utilizes two or three circular burners combined into a single vertically oriented assembly that results in a compact, intense flame. Any low NOx retrofit of a cell burner boiler that reuses the existing cell burner, close-coupled wall opening configuration would not change the designation of the unit as a cell burner boiler.

"Coal-fired utility unit" means a utility unit in which the combustion of coal (or any coal-derived fuel) on a Btu basis exceeds 50.0 percent of its annual heat input during the following calendar year: for Phase I units, in calendar year 1990 and, for Phase II units, in the calendar year 1995 or, for a Phase II unit that did not combust any fuel that resulted in the generation of electricity in calendar year, and any calendar year during the period from 1990 through 1995. For the purposes of this part, this definition shall apply notwithstanding the definition at 40 CFR 72.2, as amended through October 24, 1997.

"Combustion controls" means technology that minimizes NOx formation by staging fuel and combustion air flows in a boiler. This definition shall include low NOx burners, overfire air, or low NOx burners with overfire air.

"Cyclone boiler" means a boiler with one or more water-cooled horizontal cylindrical chambers in which coal combustion takes place. The horizontal cylindrical chamber(s) is attached to the bottom of the furnace. One or more cylindrical chambers are arranged either on one furnace wall or on two opposed furnace walls. Gaseous combustion products exiting from the chamber(s) turn 90 degrees to go up through the boiler while coal ash exits the bottom of the boiler as a molten slag.

"Demonstration period" means a period of time not less than 15 months, approved under 40 CFR 76.10, as amended through December 19, 1996, for demonstrating that the affected unit cannot meet the applicable emission limitation under 40 CFR Sections 76.5 or 76.7 as amended through December 19, 1996, or 76.6, as amended through June 12, 1997, and establishing the minimum NOx emission rate that the unit can achieve during long-term load dispatch operation.

"Dry bottom" means the boiler has a furnace bottom temperature below the ash melting point and the bottom ash is removed as a solid.

"Economizer" means the lowest temperature heat exchange section of a utility boiler where boiler feed water is heated by the flue gas.

"Flue gas" means the combustion products arising from the combustion of fossil fuel in a utility boiler.

"Group 1 boiler" means a tangentially fired boiler or a dry bottom wall-fired boiler (other than a unit applying cell burner technology), as defined by this rule.

"Group 2 boiler" means a wet bottom wall-fired boiler, a cyclone boiler, a boiler applying cell burner technology, a vertically fired boiler, an arch-fired boiler, or any other type of utility boiler (such as a fluidized bed or stoker boiler), as defined by this rule that is not a Group 1 boiler.

"Low nitrogen oxides burners" and "low nitrogen oxides burner technology" mean commercially available combustion modification NOx controls that minimize NOx formation by introducing coal and its associated combustion air into a boiler such that initial combustion occurs in a manner that promotes rapid coal devolatilization in a fuel-rich (i.e., oxygen deficient) environment and introduces additional air to achieve a final fuel-lean (i.e., oxygen rich) environment to complete the combustion process. This definition shall include the staging of any portion of the combustion air using air nozzles or registers located inside any waterwall hole that includes a burner. This definition shall exclude the staging of any portion of the combustion air using air nozzles or ports located outside any waterwall hole that includes a burner (commonly referred to as nitrogen oxides ports or separated overfire air ports).

"Maximum Continuous Steam Flow at 100% of Load" means the maximum capacity of a boiler as reported in item 3 (Maximum Continuous Steam Flow at 100% Load in thousands pounds per hour), Section C (design parameters), Part III (boiler information) of the U.S. Department of Energy's Form EIA-767 for 1995.

"Non-plug-in combustion controls" means the replacement, in a cell burner boiler, of the portions of the waterwalls containing the cell burners by new portions of the waterwalls containing low NOx burners with overfire air.

"Operating period" means a period of time of not less than three consecutive months and that occurs not more than one month prior to applying for an alternative emission limitation demonstration period under 40 CFR 76.10, as amended through December 19, 1996, during which the owner or operator of an affected unit that cannot meet the applicable emission limitation:

1. Operates the installed NOx emission controls in accordance with primary vendor specifications and procedures, with the unit operating under normal conditions; and

2. Records and reports quality-assured continuous emission monitoring (CEM) and unit operating data according to the methods and procedures in 40 CFR Part 75, as amended through November 20, 1996.

"Plug-in combustion controls" means the replacement, in a cell burner boiler, of existing cell burners by low NOx burners or low NOx with overfire air.

"Primary vendor" means the vendor of the NOx emission control system who has primary responsibility for providing the equipment, service, and technical expertise necessary for detailed design, installation, and operation of the controls, including process data, mechanical drawings, operating manuals, or any combination thereof.

"Reburning" means reducing the coal and combustion air to the main burners and injecting a reburn fuel (such as gas or oil) to create a fuel-rich secondary combustion zone above the main burner zone and final combustion air to create a fuel-lean burnout zone. The formation of NOx is inhibited in the main burner zone due to the reduced combustion intensity, and NOx is destroyed in the fuel-rich secondary combustion zone by conversion to molecular nitrogen.

"Selective catalytic reduction" means a noncombustion control technology that destroys NOx by injecting a reducing agent (e.g., ammonia) into the flue gas that, in the presence of a catalyst (e.g., vanadium, titanium, or zeolite), converts NOx into molecular nitrogen and water.

"Selective noncatalytic reduction" means a noncombustion control technology that destroys NOx by injecting a reducing agent (e.g., ammonia, urea, or cyanuric acid) into the flue gas, downstream of the combustion zone that converts NOx to molecular nitrogen, water, and when urea or cyanuric acid is used, to carbon dioxide.

"Stoker boiler" means a boiler that burns solid fuel in a bed, on a stationary or moving grate, which is located at the bottom of the furnace.

"Tangentially fired boiler" means a boiler that has coal and air nozzles mounted in each corner of the furnace where the vertical furnace walls meet. Both pulverized coal and air are directed from the furnace corners along a line tangential to a circle lying in a horizontal plane of the furnace.

"Turbo-fired boiler" means a pulverized coal, wall-fired boiler with burners arranged on walls so that the individual flames extend down toward the furnace bottom and then turn back up through the center of the furnace.

"Vertically fired boiler" means a dry bottom boiler with circular burners, or coal and air pipes, oriented downward and mounted on waterwalls that are horizontal or at an angle. This definition shall include dry bottom roof-fired boilers and dry bottom top-fired boilers, and shall exclude dry bottom arch-fired boilers and dry bottom turbo-fired boilers.

"Wall-fired boiler" means a boiler that has pulverized coal burners arranged on the walls of the furnace. The burners have discrete, individual flames that extend perpendicularly into the furnace area.

"Wet bottom" means that the ash is removed from the furnace in a molten state. The term "wet bottom boiler" shall include wet bottom wall-fired boilers, including wet bottom turbo-fired boilers; and wet bottom boilers otherwise meeting the definition of vertically fired boilers, including wet bottom arch-fired boilers, wet bottom roof-fired boilers, and wet bottom top-fired boilers. The term "wet bottom boiler" shall exclude cyclone boilers and tangentially fired boilers.

ITEM 36. Amend 567--22.120(455B), definition of "Acid rain emissions limitation," as follows:

"Acid rain emissions limitation" means:

For purposes of sulfur dioxide emissions:

1. The tonnage equivalent of the basic Phase II allowance allocations authorized to be allocated to an affected unit for use in a calendar year;

2. As adjusted:


* By allowances allocated by the administrator pursuant to Section 403, Section 405 (a)(2), (a)(3), (b)(2), (c)(4), (d)(3), and (h)(2), and Section 406 of the Act;


* By allowances allocated by the administrator pursuant to Subpart D of 40 CFR Part 72 as amended through July 30, 1993 October 24, 1997; and thereafter


* By allowance transfers to or from the compliance subaccount for that unit that were recorded or properly submitted for recordation by the allowance transfer deadline as provided in 40 CFR 73.35 as amended through July 30, 1993 April 4, 1995, after deductions and other adjustments are made pursuant to 40 CFR 73.34(c) as amended through July 30, 1993 April 4, 1995; and

For purposes of nitrogen oxides emissions, the applicable limitation established by regulations promulgated by the administrator pursuant to Section 407 of the Act, as modified by an acid rain permit application submitted to the department, and an acid rain permit issued by the department, in accordance with rules implementing Section 407 of the Act.

ITEM 37. Further amend 567--22.120(455B) by amending the following definitions:

"Acid Rain Program" means the national sulfur dioxide and nitrogen oxides air pollution control and emissions reduction program established in accordance with Title IV of the Act, rules 22.120(455B) to 22.147(455B), 40 CFR Parts 72, 73, 75, 77, and 78 as amended through October 24, 1997, and 76 as amended through December 19, 1996 as amended through November 22, 1994, and regulations implementing Sections 407 and 410 of the Act.

"Allowances held" or "hold allowances" means the allowances recorded by the administrator, or submitted to the administrator for recordation in accordance with 40 CFR 73.50 as amended through July 30, 1993 January 11, 1993, in an allowance tracking system account.

"Authorized account representative" means a responsible natural person who is authorized, in accordance with 40 CFR Part 73 as amended through July 30, 1993 October 24, 1997, to transfer and otherwise dispose of allowances held in an allowance tracking system general account; or, in the case of a unit account, the designated representative of the owners and operators of the affected unit.

"Certificate of representation" means the completed and signed submission required by 40 CFR 72.20 as amended through November 22, 1994 October 24, 1997, for certifying the appointment of a designated representative for an affected source or a group of identified affected sources authorized to represent the owners and operators of such source(s) and of the affected units at such source(s) with regard to matters under the Acid Rain Program.

"Compliance certification" means a submission to the department or the administrator that is required by rules 22.120(455B) to 22.147(455B), by 40 CFR Part Parts 72, 73, 75, 77, or 78 as amended through October 24, 1997, and 76 as amended through December 19, 1996 as amended through November 22, 1994, or by regulations implementing Sections 407 or 410 of the Act to report an affected source or an affected unit's compliance or noncompliance with a provision of the Acid Rain Program and that is signed and verified by the designated representative in accordance with Subpart B of 40 CFR Part 72 as amended through November 22, 1994 October 24, 1997, rules 22.146(455B) and 22.147(455B), and the Acid Rain Program regulations generally.

"Compliance subaccount" means the subaccount in an affected unit's allowance tracking system account, established pursuant to 40 CFR 73.31 (a) or (b) as amended through July 30, 1993, in which are held, from the date that allowances for the current calendar year are recorded under 40 CFR 73.34(a) as amended through July 30, 1993 April 4, 1995, until December 31, allowances available for use by the unit in the current calendar year and, after December 31 until the date that deductions are made under 40 CFR 73.35(b) as amended through July 30, 1993 April 4, 1995, allowances available for use by the unit in the preceding calendar year, for the purpose of meeting the unit's acid rain emissions limitation for sulfur dioxide.

"Designated representative" means a responsible natural person authorized by the owners and operators of an affected source and of all affected units at the source, as evidenced by a certificate of representation submitted in accordance with Subpart B of 40 CFR Part 72 as amended through July 30, 1993 October 24, 1997, to represent and legally bind each owner and operator, as a matter of federal law, in matters pertaining to the Acid Rain Program. Whenever the term "responsible official" is used in rules 22.100(455B) to 22.116(455B), it shall be deemed to refer to the designated representative with regard to all matters under the Acid Rain Program.

"Independent power production facility (IPP)" means a source that:

1. Is nonrecourse project financed, as defined by the secretary of energy at 10 CFR Part 715 as amended to February 1, 1994 October 24, 1991;

2. Is used for the generation of electricity, 80 percent or more of which is sold at wholesale; and

3. Is a new unit required to hold allowances under Title IV of the Act; but only if direct public utility ownership of the equipment comprising the facility does not exceed 50 percent.

"Offset plan" means a plan pursuant to 40 CFR Part 77 as amended through July 30, 1993 October 24, 1997, for offsetting excess emissions of sulfur dioxide that have occurred at an affected unit in any calendar year.

"Potential electrical output capacity" means the MWe capacity rating for the units which shall be equal to 33 percent of the maximum design heat input capacity of the steam generating unit, as calculated according to Appendix D of 40 CFR Part 72 as amended through July 30, 1993 March 23, 1993.

"Proposed acid rain permit" means the version of an acid rain permit that the department submits to the administrator after the public comment period, but prior to completion of the EPA permit review period under 40 CFR 70.8(c) as amended to June 25, 1993 July 21, 1992.

"State Title V operating permit program" means a Title V operating permit program that the administrator has approved as meeting the requirements of Title IV and Title V of the Act and 40 CFR Parts 70 as amended to June 29, 1992 October 22, 1997, and 72 as amended to November 22, 1994 October 24, 1997.

ITEM 38. Amend subrule 22.122(1) as follows:

22.122(1) Each of the following units shall be an affected unit, and any source that includes such a unit shall be an affected source, subject to the requirements of the Acid Rain Program:

a. A unit listed in Table 1 of 40 CFR 73.10(a) (as adopted January 11, 1993 October 24, 1997).

b. An existing unit that is identified in Table 2 or 3 of 40 CFR 73.10 as amended through July 30, 1993 October 24, 1997, and any other existing utility unit, except a unit under subrule 22.122(2).

c. A utility unit, except a unit under subrule 22.122(2), that:

(1) Is a new unit;

(2) Did not serve a generator with a nameplate capacity greater than 25 MWe on November 15, 1990, but serves such a generator after November 15, 1990;

(3) Was a simple combustion turbine on November 15, 1990, but adds or uses auxiliary firing after November 15, 1990;

(4) Was an exempt cogeneration facility under paragraph 22.122(2)"d" but during any three-calendar-year period after November 15, 1990, sold, to a utility power distribution system, an annual average of more than one-third of its potential electrical output capacity and more than 219,000 MWe-hrs electric output, on a gross basis;

(5) Was an exempt qualifying facility under paragraph 22.122(2)"e" but, at any time after the later of November 15, 1990, or the date the facility commences commercial operation, fails to meet the definition of qualifying facility;

(6) Was an exempt independent power production facility under paragraph 22.122(2)"f" but, at any time after the later of November 15, 1990, or the date the facility commences commercial operation, fails to meet the definition of independent power production facility; or

(7) Was an exempt solid waste incinerator under paragraph 22.122(2)"g" but during any three-calendar-year period after November 15, 1990, consumes 20 percent or more (on a Btu basis) fossil fuel.

(8) Is a coal-fired substitution unit that is designated in a substitution plan that was not approved and not active as of January 1, 1995, or is a coal-fired compensating unit.

ITEM 39. Amend subrule 22.122(3) as follows:

22.122(3) A certifying official of any unit may petition the administrator for a determination of applicability under 40 CFR 72.6(c) as amended through July 30, 1993 October 24, 1997. The administrator's determination of applicability shall be binding upon the department, unless the petition is found to have contained significant errors or omissions.

ITEM 40. Amend subrule 22.123(2), introductory paragraph, as follows:

22.123(2) Petition for written exemption. The designated representative, authorized in accordance with Subpart B of 40 CFR Part 72 as amended through July 30, 1993 October 24, 1997, of a source that includes a unit under subrule 22.123(1) may petition the department for a written exemption, or to renew a written exemption, for the unit from certain requirements of the Acid Rain Program. The petition shall be submitted on a form approved by the department which includes the following elements:

ITEM 41. Amend subrule 22.123(3), paragraph "a," as follows:

a. The department will issue, for any unit meeting the requirements of subrules 22.123(1) and 22.123(2), a written exemption from the requirements of the Acid Rain Program except for the requirements specified in this subrule, 40 CFR 72.2 through 72.7, and 40 CFR 72.10 through 72.13 as amended through November 22, 1994 October 24, 1997; provided that no unit shall be exempted unless the designated representative of the unit surrenders, and the administrator deducts from the unit's allowances tracking system account, allowances pursuant to 40 CFR 72.7(c)(1)(i) and (d)(1) as amended through November 22, 1994 October 24, 1997. The exemption shall take effect on January 1 of the year immediately following the date on which the written exemption is issued in accordance with paragraph 22.123(3)"b"; provided that the owners and operators, and, to the extent applicable, the designated representative, shall comply with the requirements of the Acid Rain Program concerning all years for which the unit was not exempted, even if such requirements arise, or must be complied with, after the exemption takes effect. The exemption shall not be a defense against any violation of such requirements of the Acid Rain Program whether the violation occurs before or after the exemption takes effect.

ITEM 42. Amend subrule 22.124(2), paragraph "a," as follows:

a. The designated representative, authorized in accordance with Subpart B of 40 CFR Part 72 as amended through July 30, 1993 October 24, 1997, of a source that includes a unit under subrule 22.124(1) may petition the department for a written exemption, or to renew a written exemption, for the unit from certain requirements of the Acid Rain Program.

ITEM 43. Amend subrule 22.124(3), paragraph "a," as follows:

a. The department will issue, for any unit meeting the requirements of subrules 22.124(1) and 22.124(2), a written exemption from the requirements of rules 22.120(455B) to 22.147(455B) 22.146(455B) and 40 CFR Part 72 as amended through November 22, 1994 October 24, 1997, except for the requirements specified in this rule and 40 CFR 72.1 through 72.6, 40 CFR 72.8, and 40 CFR 72.10 through 72.13. The exemption shall take effect on January 1 of the year following the date on which the written exemption is issued in accordance with paragraph 22.124(3)"b"; provided that the owners and operators, and, to the extent applicable, the designated representative, shall comply with the requirements of rules 22.120(455B) to 22.147(455B) 22.146(455B) and 40 CFR Part 72 as amended through November 22, 1994 October 24, 1997, concerning all years for which the unit was not exempted, even if such requirements arise or must be complied with after the exemption takes effect. The exemption shall not be a defense against any violation of such requirements of the Acid Rain Program whether the violation occurs before or after the exemption takes effect.

ITEM 44. Amend subrule 22.124(4), paragraphs "b" and "c," as follows:

b. The owners and operators of a unit exempted under this rule shall comply with monitoring requirements in accordance with rule 567--25.2(455B) and will be allocated allowances in accordance with 40 CFR Part 73 as amended through July 30, 1993 October 24, 1997.

c. A unit exempted under this rule shall not resume operation unless the designated representative of the source that includes the unit submits an acid rain permit application for the unit not less than 24 months prior to the later of January 1, 2000, or the date the unit is to resume operation. On the earlier of the date the written exemption expires or the date an acid rain permit application is submitted or is required to be submitted under this paragraph, the unit shall no longer be exempted under this rule and shall be subject to all requirements of rules 22.120(455B) to 22.147(455B) and 40 CFR Part 72 as amended through November 22, 1994 October 24, 1997.

ITEM 45. Amend subrule 22.125(3), paragraph "a," subparagraph (1), as follows:

(1) Hold allowances, as of the allowance transfer deadline, in the unit's compliance subaccount (after deductions under 40 CFR 73.34(c) as amended through July 30, 1993 April 4, 1995) not less than the total annual emissions of sulfur dioxide for the previous calendar year from the unit; and

ITEM 46. Amend subrule 22.125(4) as follows:

22.125(4) Nitrogen oxides requirements. The owners and operators of the source and each affected unit at the source shall comply with the applicable acid rain emission limitation for nitrogen oxides, as specified in 40 CFR Sections 76.5 and 76.7 as amended through December 19, 1996; 76.6 as amended through June 12, 1997; and 76.8, 76.11, 76.12, and 76.15 as amended through April 13, 1995; or by alternative emission limitations provided for by 40 CFR 76.10, amended through December 19, 1996, as long as the alternative emission limitation has been petitioned and demonstrated according to 40 CFR 76.14 as amended through April 13, 1995, and approved by the department.

ITEM 47. Amend subrule 22.125(5) as follows:

22.125(5) Excess emissions requirements.

a. The designated representative of an affected unit that has excess emissions in any calendar year shall submit a proposed offset plan to the administrator, as required under 40 CFR Part 77 as amended through July 30, 1993 October 24, 1997, and submit a copy to the department.

b. The owners and operators of an affected unit that has excess emissions in any calendar year shall:

(1) Pay to the administrator without demand the penalty required, and pay to the administrator upon demand the interest on that penalty, as required by 40 CFR Part 77 as amended through July 30, 1993 October 24, 1997; and

(2) Comply with the terms of an approved offset plan, as required by 40 CFR Part 77 as amended through July 30, 1993 October 24, 1997.

ITEM 48. Amend subrule 22.125(6), paragraph "a," subparagraph (1), as follows:

(1) The certificate of representation for the designated representative for the source and each affected unit at the source and all documents that demonstrate the truth of the statements in the certificate of representation, in accordance with 40 CFR 72.24 as amended through July 30, 1993 October 24, 1997; provided that the certificate and documents shall be retained on site at the source beyond such five-year period until such documents are superseded because of the submission of a new certificate of representation changing the designated representative.

ITEM 49. Amend subrule 22.125(7), paragraph "g," as follows:

g. Each violation of a provision of rules 22.120(455B) to 22.147(455B) and 40 CFR Parts 72, 73, 75, 77, and 78 as amended through October 24, 1997, and 76 as amended through December 19, 1996 as amended through November 22, 1994, and regulations implementing Sections 407 and 410 of the Act by an affected source or affected unit, or by an owner or operator or designated representative of such source or unit, shall be a separate violation of the Act.

ITEM 50. Amend subrule 22.126(1) as follows:

22.126(1) The designated representative shall submit a certificate of representation, and any superseding certificate of representation, to the administrator in accordance with Subpart B of 40 CFR Part 72 as amended through July 30, 1993 October 24, 1997, and, concurrently, shall submit a copy to the department. Whenever the term "designated representative" is used in this rule, the term shall be construed to include the alternate designated representative.

ITEM 51. Amend subrule 22.127(1) as follows:

22.127(1) Except as provided in 40 CFR 72.23 as amended through July 30, 1993 January 11, 1993, no objection or other communication submitted to the administrator or the department concerning the authorization, or any submission, action or inaction, of the designated representative shall affect any submission, action, or inaction of the designated representative, or the finality of any decision by the department, under the Acid Rain Program. In the event of such communication, the department is not required to stay any submission or the effect of any action or inaction under the Acid Rain Program.

ITEM 52. Amend subrule 22.128(2) by adding the following new paragraph "i":

i. For a Phase II unit with a Group 1 or a Group 2 boiler, the designated representative shall submit a complete permit application and compliance plan for NOx emissions to the department no later than January 1, 1998.

ITEM 53. Amend subrule 22.128(4) as follows:

22.128(4) Submission of copies. The original and four copies of all permit applications shall be submitted to the department presented or mailed to the Air Quality Bureau, Iowa Department of Natural Resources, 7900 Hickman Road, Suite 1, Urbandale, Iowa 50322.

ITEM 54. Amend subrule 22.131(1) as follows:

22.131(1) For each affected unit included in an acid rain permit application, a complete compliance plan shall include:

a. For sulfur dioxide emissions, a certification that, as of the allowance transfer deadline, the designated representative will hold allowances in the unit's compliance subaccount (after deductions under 40 CFR 73.34(c) as amended through July 30, 1993 April 4, 1995) not less than the total annual emissions of sulfur dioxide from the unit. The compliance plan may also specify, in accordance with rules rule 22.131(455B) and 22.132(455B), one or more of the acid rain compliance options.

b. For nitrogen oxides emissions, a certification that the unit will comply with the applicable limitation established by regulations implementing Section 407 of the Act subrule 22.125(4) or shall specify one or more acid rain compliance options, in accordance with Section 407 of the Act, and regulations implementing Section 407 40 CFR Sections 76.9 amended through April 13, 1995, and 76.16 amended through December 19, 1996.

ITEM 55. Rescind and reserve rule 567--22.132(455B).

ITEM 56. Amend rule 567--22.134(455B) as follows:

567--22.134(455B) Acid rain permit shield. Each affected unit operated in accordance with the acid rain permit that governs the unit and that was issued in compliance with Title IV of the Act, as provided in rules 22.120(455B) to 22.147(455B) 22.146(455B), rule 567--25.2(455B), or 40 CFR Parts 72, 73, 75, 77, and 78 as amended through October 24, 1997, and 76 as amended through December 19, 1996 as amended through November 22, 1994, and the regulations implementing Section 407 of the Act, shall be deemed to be operating in compliance with the Acid Rain Program, except as provided in paragraph 22.125(7)"f."

ITEM 57. Amend subrules 22.138(3) and 22.138(4) as follows:

22.138(3) Following the administrator's review of the proposed acid rain permit or denial of a proposed acid rain permit, the department, or under 40 CFR 70.8(c) as amended to June 25, 1993 July 21, 1992, the administrator, will incorporate any required changes and issue or deny the acid rain permit in accordance with rules 22.133(455B) and 22.134(455B).

22.138(4) No acid rain permit including a draft or proposed permit shall be issued unless the administrator has received a certificate of representation for the designated representative of the source in accordance with Subpart B of 40 CFR Part 72 as amended through July 30, 1993 October 24, 1997.

ITEM 58. Amend subrule 22.139(1) as follows:

22.139(1) Appeals of the acid rain portion of a Title V operating permit issued by the department that do not challenge or involve decisions or actions of the administrator under 40 CFR Parts 72, 73, 75, 77, and 78 as amended through October 24, 1997, and 76 as amended through December 19, 1996 as amended through November 22, 1994, and Sections 407 and 410 of the Act and regulations implementing Sections 407 and 410 shall be conducted according to the procedures in Iowa Code chapter 17A and 561--Chapter 7, as adopted by reference at 567--Chapter 7. Appeals of the acid rain portion of such a permit that challenge or involve such decisions or actions of the administrator shall follow the procedures under 40 CFR Part 78 as amended through July 30, 1993 October 24, 1997, and Section 307 of the Act. Such decisions or actions include, but are not limited to, allowance allocations, determinations concerning alternative monitoring systems, and determinations of whether a technology is a qualifying repowering technology.

ITEM 59. Amend subrule 22.139(4), paragraph "e," as follows:

e. The terms of a certificate of representation submitted by a designated representative under Subpart B of 40 CFR Part 72 as amended through July 30, 1993 October 24, 1997.

ITEM 60. Amend subrule 22.140(4) as follows:

22.140(4) Any determination or interpretation by the state (including the department or a state court) modifying or voiding any acid rain permit provision shall be subject to review by the administrator in accordance with 40 CFR 70.8(c) as amended to June 25, 1993 July 21, 1992, as applied to permit modifications, unless the determination or interpretation is an administrative amendment approved in accordance with rule 22.143(455B).

ITEM 61. Amend subrule 22.143(2), paragraphs "b" and "e," as follows:

b. Changes in the designated representative or alternative designated representative; provided that a new certificate of representation is submitted to the administrator in accordance with Subpart B of 40 CFR Part 72 as amended through July 30, 1993 October 24, 1997;

e. Changes in the owners or operators; provided that a new certificate of representation is submitted within 30 days to the administrator and the department in accordance with Subpart B of 40 CFR Part 72 as amended through July 30, 1993 October 24, 1997;

ITEM 62. Amend rule 567--22.144(455B) as follows:

567--22.144(455B) Automatic permit amendment. The following permit revisions shall be deemed to amend automatically, and become a part of the affected unit's acid rain permit by operation of law without any further review:

22.144(1) Upon recordation by the administrator under 40 CFR Part 73 as amended through July 30, 1993 October 24, 1997, all allowance allocations to, transfers to, and deductions from an affected unit's allowance tracking system account; and

22.144(2) Incorporation of an offset plan that has been approved by the administrator under 40 CFR Part 77 as amended through July 30, 1993 October 24, 1997.

ITEM 63. Amend subrule 22.146(1) as follows:

22.146(1) Applicability and deadline. For each calendar year in which a unit is subject to the acid rain emissions limitations, the designated representative of the source at which the unit is located shall submit to the administrator and the department, within 60 days after the end of the calendar year, an annual compliance certification report for the unit in compliance with 40 CFR 72.90 as amended through July 30, 1993 October 24, 1997.

ITEM 64. Rescind and reserve rule 567--22.147(455B).

ITEM 65. Amend subrule 22.203(1), introductory paragraph, as follows:

22.203(1) Duty to apply. Any source which would qualify for a voluntary operating permit and which would not qualify under the provisions of rule 22.300(455B), operating permit by rule for small sources, must apply for either a voluntary operating permit or a Title V operating permit. Any source determined not to be eligible for a voluntary operating permit shall be subject to enforcement action for operation without a Title V operating permit, except as provided for in rule 22.202(455B) and rule 22.300(455B). For each source applying for a voluntary operating permit, the owner or operator or designated representative, where applicable, shall present or mail to the Air Quality Bureau, Iowa Department of Natural Resources, Wallace State Office Building, 900 East Grand Avenue, Des Moines, Iowa 50319-0034 7900 Hickman Road, Suite 1, Urbandale, Iowa 50322, an original and one copy of a timely and complete permit application in accordance with this rule.

ITEM 66. Amend subrule 22.203(1), paragraph "a," as follows:

a. Timely application. Each source applying for a voluntary operating permit shall submit an application:

(1) By July 1, 1996, if the source is applying for an operating permit for the first time;

(2)(1) At least 6 months but not more than 12 months prior to the date of expiration if the application is for renewal;

(3)(2) Within 12 months of becoming subject to this rule for a new source or a source which would otherwise become subject to the Title V permit requirement after the effective date of this rule.

ITEM 67. Amend subrule 22.300(2), paragraph "a," as follows:

a. Except as provided in subrules 22.300(3) and 22.300(11), any person who owns or operates a stationary source and meets the following criteria may register for an operating permit by rule for small sources:

(1) The potential to emit air contaminants is equal to or in excess of the threshold for a major stationary source of regulated air pollutants or hazardous air pollutants, and

(2) The potential to emit air contaminants equal to or in excess of the threshold for a major stationary source of hazardous air pollutants, and

(3)(2) For every 12-month rolling period, the actual emissions of the stationary source are less than or equal to the emission limitations specified in subrule 22.300(6) below.

ITEM 68. Amend subrule 22.300(8), paragraph "a," as follows:

a. Duty to apply. Any person who owns or operates a source otherwise required to obtain a Title V permit and which would be eligible for an operating permit by rule for small sources must either register for an operating permit by rule for small sources, apply for a voluntary operating permit, or apply for a Title V operating permit. Any source determined not to be eligible for an operating permit by rule for small sources, and operating without a valid Title V or a valid voluntary operating permit, shall be subject to enforcement action for operation without a Title V operating permit, except as provided for in the application shield provisions contained in rules 22.104(455B) and 22.202(455B). For each source registering for an operating permit by rule for small sources, the owner or operator or designated representative, where applicable, shall present or mail to the Air Quality Bureau, Iowa Department of Natural Resources, Wallace State Office Building, 900 East Grand Avenue, Des Moines, Iowa 50319-0034 7900 Hickman Road, Suite 1, Urbandale, Iowa 50322, one original and one copy of a timely and complete registration form in accordance with this rule.

(1) Timely registration. Each source registering for an operating permit by rule for small sources shall submit a registration form:

1. By August 1, 1996, if the source became subject to rule 22.101(455B) (the requirement to obtain a Title V operating permit) before August 1, 1995, unless otherwise required to obtain a Title V permit under rule 22.101(455B).

2. Within within 12 months of becoming subject to rule 22.101(455B) (the requirement to obtain a Title V permit) for a new source or a source which would otherwise become subject to the Title V permit requirement, if the source became subject to the rule on or after August 1, 1995.

(2) to (4) No change.

ITEM 69. Amend subrule 23.1(2), introductory paragraph, as follows:

23.1(2) New source performance standards. The federal standards of performance for new stationary sources, as defined in 40 Code of Federal Regulations Part 60 as amended or corrected through December 15, 1994 June 12, 1997, and 40 CFR Part 503 as adopted on February 19, 1993 October 25, 1995, are adopted by reference, except SS60.530 through SS60.539b, and shall apply to the following affected facilities. The corresponding 40 CFR Part 60 subpart designation is in parentheses. Reference test methods (Appendix A), performance specifications (Appendix B), determination of emission rate change (Appendix C), quality assurance procedures (Appendix F) and the general provisions (Subpart A) of 40 CFR Part 60 also apply to the affected facilities.

ITEM 70. Amend subrule 23.1(2), paragraph "k," as follows:

k. Sewage treatment plants. An incinerator which burns the sludge produced by municipal sewage treatment plants. (Subpart O of 40 CFR 60 as amended through February 3, 1994 (49 FR 5107), and Subpart E of 40 CFR 503 as adopted on February 19, 1993) (58 FR 9248).)

ITEM 71. Amend subrule 23.1(2), paragraph "rrr," as follows:

rrr. Municipal solid waste landfills, as defined by 40 CFR 60.75(1) 40 CFR 60.751. Each municipal solid waste landfill that commenced construction, reconstruction or modification or began accepting waste on or after May 30, 1991, must comply. (Subpart WWW)

ITEM 72. Amend subrule 23.1(3), introductory paragraph, as follows:

23.1(3) Emission standards for hazardous air pollutants. The federal standards for emissions of hazardous air pollutants, 40 Code of Federal Regulations Part 61 as amended through July 15, 1994 October 14, 1997, are adopted by reference, except 40 CFR SS61.20 to SS61.26, SS61.90 to SS61.97, SS61.100 to SS61.108, SS61.120 to SS61.127, SS61.190 to SS61.193, SS61.200 to SS61.205, SS61.220 to SS61.225, and SS61.250 to SS61.256, and shall apply to the following affected pollutants and facilities and activities listed below. The corresponding 40 CFR Part 61 subpart designation is in parentheses. Reference test methods (Appendix B), compliance status information requirements (Appendix A), quality assurance procedures (Appendix C) and the general provisions (Subpart A) of Part 61 also apply to the affected activities or facilities.

ITEM 73. Amend subrule 23.1(4), introductory paragraph, as follows:

23.1(4) Emission standards for hazardous air pollutants for source categories. The federal standards for emissions of hazardous air pollutants for source categories, 40 Code of Federal Regulations Part 63 as amended through June 24, 1996 August 11, 1997, are adopted by reference, except 40 CFR SSSS 63.12, 63.14, 63.15, 63.40 through 63.44, 63.50, 63.560 (b), (e)(2), (3), and 63.562 (c), (d), and shall apply to the following affected facilities. The corresponding 40 CFR Part 63 subpart designation is in parentheses. Test methods (Appendix A), sources defined for early reduction provisions (Appendix B), and determination of the fraction biodegraded (Fbio) in the biological treatment unit (Appendix C) of Part 63 also apply to the affected activities or facilities. For the purposes of this subrule "Hazardous air pollutant" has the same meaning found in 567--22.100(455B). For the purposes of this subrule a "major source" means any stationary source or group of stationary sources located within a contiguous area and under common control that emits or has the potential to emit considering controls, in aggregate, 10 tons per year or more of any hazardous air pollutant or 25 tons per year or more of any combination of hazardous air pollutants, unless a lesser quantity is established, or in the case of radionuclides, where different criteria are employed. For the purposes of this subrule an "area source" means any stationary source of hazardous air pollutants that is not a major stationary source as defined in this paragraph. Paragraph 23.1(4) "a," general provisions (Subpart A) of Part 63, shall apply to owners or operators who are subject to subsequent subparts of 40 CFR 63 (except when otherwise specified in a particular subpart or in a relevant standard) as adopted by reference below.

ITEM 74. Amend subrule 23.1(5), introductory paragraph and paragraph "a," as follows:

23.1(5) Emission guidelines. The emission guidelines and compliance times for existing sources, as defined in 40 Code of Federal Regulations Part 60 as amended through June 12, 1997, shall apply to the following affected facilities. The corresponding 40 CFR Part 60 subpart designation is in parentheses. The control of the designated pollutants will be in accordance with federal standards established in Sections 111 and 129 of the Act and 40 CFR Part 60, Subpart B (Adoption and Submittal of State Plans for Designated Facilities), and the applicable subpart(s) for the existing source. Reference test methods (Appendix A), performance specifications (Appendix B), determination of emission rate change (Appendix C), quality assurance procedures (Appendix F) and the general provisions (Subpart A) of 40 CFR Part 60 also apply to the affected facilities.

a. Emission guidelines for municipal solid waste landfills (Subpart Cc). Emission guidelines and compliance times for the control of certain designated pollutants from certain designated municipal solid waste landfills shall be in accordance with federal standards established in Section 111(d) of the Act and 40 CFR Part 60, Subparts B (Adoption and Submittal of State Plans for Designated Facilities), Subparts Cc (Emission Guidelines and Compliance Times for Municipal Solid Waste Landfills), and WWW (Standards of Performance for Municipal Solid Waste Landfills) of 40 CFR Part 60.

ITEM 75. Amend subrule 23.1(6), introductory paragraphs and paragraph "a," as follows:

23.1(6) Calculation of emission limitations based upon stack height. This rule sets limits for the maximum stack height credit to be used in ambient air quality modeling for the purpose of setting an emission limitation and calculating the air quality impact of a source. The rule does not limit the actual physical stack height for any source.

For the purpose of this subrule, definitions of "stack," "a stack in existence," "dispersion technique," "nearby" and "excessive concentration" as set forth in 40 CFR SSSS51.1 51.100(ff) through (hh), (jj) and (kk) as amended through July 8, 1985 June 14, 1996, are adopted by reference.

This subrule does not apply to those facilities exempted under 40 CFR SS51.12(k) as amended through July 8, 1985, which is adopted herein by reference solely for the purpose of subrule 23.1(5).

a. "Good engineering practice (GEP) stack height" means the greater of:

(1) Sixty-five meters, measured from the ground level elevation at the base of the stack; or

(2) For stacks in existence on January 12, 1979, and for which the owner and operator had obtained all applicable permits or approvals required under 567--Chapter 22 and 40 CFR SS52.21 as amended through March 12, 1996,

Hg = 2.5H

provided the owner or operator produces evidence that this equation was actually relied on in establishing an emission limitation;

For all other stacks,

Hg = H + 1.5L

where:

Hg = good engineering practice stack height, measured from the ground level elevation at the base of the stack,

H = height of nearby structure(s) measured from the ground level elevation at the base of the stack,

L = lesser dimension, height or projected width, of nearby structure(s), provided that the department may require the use of a field study or fluid model to verify GEP stack height for the source; or

(3) The height demonstrated by a fluid model or a field study approved by the department, which ensures that the emissions from a stack do not result in excessive concentrations of any air pollutant as a result of atmospheric downwash, wakes, or eddy effects created by the source itself, nearby structures or nearby terrain features. Public notification of the availability of such study and opportunity for public hearing are required prior to approval by the department.

ITEM 76. Amend subrule 23.2(3), paragraph "e," as follows:

e. Recreational fires. Open fires for cooking, heating, recreation and ceremonies, provided they comply with 23.3(2)"d." Burning rubber tires is prohibited from this activity.

ITEM 77. Amend subrule 23.2(3), paragraph "g," as follows:

g. Training fires. Fires set for the purpose of bona fide training of public or industrial employees in firefighting methods, provided that written notification is postmarked or delivered to the director at least ten working days before such action commences. Notification shall be made in accordance with 40 CFR Section 61.145, "Standard for demolition and renovation," of the asbestos National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants, as amended through March 5, 1992 January 16, 1991. All asbestos-containing materials shall be removed prior to the training fire. Asphalt shingles may be burned in a training fire only if the notification to the director contains testing results indicating that none of the layers of the asphalt shingles contain asbestos. Each fire department may conduct no more than two training fires per calendar year where asphalt roofing has not been removed, provided that for each of those training fires the asphalt roofing material present has been tested to ensure that it does not contain asbestos. Rubber tires may not be burned during a training fire.

ITEM 78. Amend subrule 23.3(2), paragraph "c," subparagraph (2), as follows:

(2) Nonattainment areas. Subparagraph (1) notwithstanding, no person shall allow, cause or permit any visible emission of fugitive dust in a nonattainment area for suspended particulate matter to go beyond the lot line of the property on which a traditional source is located without taking reasonable precautions to prevent emission. Traditional source means a source category for which a particulate emission standard has been established in 23.1(2), 23.3(2)"a," 23.3(2)"b" or 23.4(455B) and includes a quarry operation, haul road or parking lot associated with a traditional source. This paragraph does not modify the emission standard stated in 23.1(2), 23.3(2)"a," 23.3(2)"b" or 23.4(455B), but rather establishes a separate requirement for fugitive dust from such sources. This paragraph was effective January 1, 1980, in primary standard nonattainment areas. This paragraph is effective July 1, 1980, in secondary standard nonattainment areas; however a traditional source is in compliance with this paragraph if, by July 1, 1980, it is on a compliance schedule which has a compliance date no later than June 30, 1981. For guidance on the types of controls which may constitute reasonable precautions, see "Identification of Techniques for the Control of Industrial Fugitive Dust Emissions*," adopted by the commission on May 19, 1981.

*Available from the department

ITEM 79. Amend subrule 23.4(10), paragraph "f," as follows:

f. "Fluoride" means elemental fluorine and all fluoride compounds as measured by reference methods specified in Appendix A to 40 CFR Part 60 as amended through March 15, 1979 March 12, 1996.

ITEM 80. Amend subrule 24.1(2), first unnumbered paragraph, as follows:

An oral report of excess emission is not required for a source with operational continuous monitoring equipment (as specified in 567--subrule 25.1(1)) if the incident of excess emission continues for less than 30 minutes and does not exceed the applicable visible emission standard by more than 10 percent or the applicable visible emission standard by more than 10 percent opacity.

ITEM 81. Amend subrule 25.1(7), paragraph "b," as follows:

b. New equipment. Unless otherwise specified by the department, all new equipment shall be tested by the owner or the owner's authorized agent to determine compliance with applicable emission limits. Tests conducted to demonstrate compliance with the requirements of 567--Chapter 23 the rules or a permit shall be conducted within 60 days of achieving maximum production but no later than 180 days of startup, unless a shorter time frame is specified in the permit.

ITEM 82. Amend subrule 25.1(9) as follows:

25.1(9) Methods and procedures. Stack sampling and associated analytical methods used to evaluate compliance with emission limitations of 567--Chapter 23 or a permit condition are those specified in the "Compliance Sampling Manual*" adopted by the commission on May 19, 1977, as revised through January 1, 1995. Sampling methods, analytical determinations, minimum performance specifications and quality assurance procedures for performance evaluations of continuous monitoring systems are those found in Appendix Appendices A (as amended through March 12, 1996), Appendix B (as amended through December 15, 1994) and Appendix F (as amended through February 11, 1991), 40 CFR Part 60 as amended through May 17, 1993, and 40 CFR 75, Appendices A (as amended through May 22, 1996), B (as amended through May 17, 1995), and H (as amended through July 30, 1993), as amended through August 18, 1994.

ITEM 83. Amend subrule 25.1(10), paragraph "a," as follows:

a. An affected source is subject to a new source performance standard promulgated in 40 CFR Part 60 as amended through June 12, 1997.

ITEM 84. Amend subrule 25.1(12) as follows:

25.1(12) Continuous monitoring of sulfur dioxide from emission points involved in an alternative emission control program. The owner or operator of any facility applying for an alternative emission control program under 567--subrule 22.7(1) that involves the trade-off of sulfur dioxide emissions shall install, calibrate, maintain and operate continuous sulfur dioxide monitoring equipment consistent with EPA reference methods (40 CFR Part 60, Appendix B, as amended through December 15, 1994). The equipment shall be operational within three months of EPA approval of an alternative emission control program.

ITEM 85. Amend rule 567--25.2(455B) as follows:

567--25.2(455B) Continuous emission monitoring under the Acid Rain Program. The continuous emission monitoring requirements for affected units under the Acid Rain Program as provided in 40 CFR 75 as adopted January 11, 1993, and as corrected or amended through August 18, 1994 October 24, 1997, are adopted by reference.

ITEM 86. Amend rule 567--28.1(455B) as follows:

567--28.1(455B) Statewide standards. The state of Iowa ambient air quality standards shall be the National Primary and Secondary Ambient Air Quality Standards as published in 40 Code of Federal Regulations Part 50 (1972) and as amended at 38 Federal Register 22384 (September 14, 1973), 43 Federal Register 46258 (October 5, 1978), and 44 Federal Register 8202, 8220 (February 9, 1979), and 52 Federal Register 24634-24669 (July 1, 1987), and 62 Federal Register 38651-38760, 38855-38896 (July 18, 1997).

ITEM 87. Amend rule 567--29.1(455B), introductory paragraph, as follows:

567--29.1(455B) Methodology and qualified observer. The federal method for visual determination of opacity of emissions and requirements for qualified observers as defined in Method 9, 40 CFR Part 60 Appendix A as amended through November 14, 1990 March 12, 1996, is adopted by reference.

ITEM 88. Amend rule 567--31.2(455B), introductory paragraph, as follows:

567--31.2(455B) Conformity of general federal actions to the Iowa state implementation plan or federal implementation plan. The federal regulations relating to determining conformity of general federal actions to state or federal implementation plans, 40 CFR 93, Subpart B, as adopted November 30, 1993 amended through December 21, 1993, are adopted by reference except 40 CFR 93.151.

ARC 7761A

ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION COMMISSION[567]

Notice of Intended Action

Twenty-five interested persons, a governmental subdivision, an agency or association of 25 or more persons may demand an oral presentation hereon as provided in Iowa Code section 17A.4(1)"b."

Notice is also given to the public that the Administrative Rules Review Committee may, on its own motion or on written request by any individual or group, review this proposed action under section 17A.8(6) at a regular or special meeting where the public or interested persons may be heard.

Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code section 455B.304, the Environmental Protection Commission hereby gives Notice of Intended Action to amend Chapter 100, "Scope of Title--Definitions--Forms--Rules of Practice," Chapter 102, "Permits," Chapter 108, "Reuse of Solid Waste," and Chapter 110, "Design, Construction and Operation Standards for Solid Waste Management Facilities," and rescind Chapter 103, "Sanitary Landfills," and adopt a new Chapter 103, "Sanitary Landfills," Iowa Administrative Code.

The new Chapter 103 addresses design and operation requirements for four specific types of landfills: 567--103.2(455B) Municipal Solid Waste Landfills (MSWLF), 567--103.3(455B) Nonmunicipal Solid Waste Landfills (NMSWLF), 567--103.4(455B) Demolition Waste Disposal Sites, and 567--103.5(455B) Coal Combustion Solid Waste Landfills. The investigation, design, operation, closure/postclosure, and monitoring requirements are addressed in the rules for each landfill type.

The requirements for MSWLFs have been reorganized and rewritten into rule 567--103.2(455B). The intent was for the requirements to remain basically the same. There is one exception; a height restriction for MSWLFs is being proposed.

The requirements for an NMSWLF have been reorganized into rule 567--103.3(455B). This rule applies to disposal of all nonmunicipal solid waste such as industrial solid waste and construction and demolition waste except for coal combustion residue (CCR). A separate rule is proposed for CCR. Major changes include a reduction in the thickness of the clay liner; a reduction in groundwater investigation and monitoring requirements; elimination of gas monitoring requirements; and a reduction in the daily, intermediate, and final cover requirements.

Rule 567--103.4(455B) is new and applies to the disposal of waste from the demolition of structures only. Following are some major differences compared to the NMSWLF requirements. Only a city, county or 28E agency may operate such a facility. The individual responsible for management of such a site must be a certified sanitary landfill operator. There is no hydrogeological investigation or groundwater monitoring requirement. There is no bottom liner or leachate collection requirement and the separation distance from groundwater is reduced. Site volume is limited to 50,000 cubic yards. Daily cover is not required and intermediate and final cover requirements are reduced. Closure and postclosure requirements are reduced.

Rule 567--103.5(455B) is new and applies only to the disposal of coal combustion residue. Following are major differences compared to the NMSWLF requirements. There is no specific bottom liner or leachate collection requirement. The operating plan must be submitted to the appropriate field office and is not part of the construction permit application. Waste must be deposited in lifts of no more than 6 inches and wetted. Daily cover is not required if a cemented surface forms to control dusting. Closure and postclosure requirements are reduced.

Some definitions were deleted and others added to 567--Chapter 100 to conform to changes proposed in 567--Chapter 103.

Some permit requirements for landfills were deleted from 567--Chapter 102 and inserted into 567--Chapter 103. 567--Chapter 108 is revised to make the prescribed management practices for the reuse of solid waste consistent. Some references in 567--Chapter 110 need to be revised because of the change in the organization of 567--Chapter 103.

Any interested persons may make written suggestions or comments on the proposed amendments on or before February 4, 1998. Written comments should be directed to Lavoy Haage, Iowa Department of Natural Resources, Wallace State Office Building, 900 East Grand Avenue, Des Moines, Iowa 50319-0034; fax (515)281-8895.

Also, there will be a public hearing on February 4, 1998, at 1 p.m. in the Fourth Floor Conference Room of the Wallace State Office Building at which time persons may present their views either orally or in writing. At the hearing, persons will be asked to give their names and addresses for the record and to confine their remarks to the subject of the amendments.

Any persons who intend to attend a public hearing and have special requirements such as hearing or mobilityimpairments should contact the Department of Natural Resources and advise of specific needs.

These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code section 455B.304.

The following amendments are proposed.

ITEM 1. Amend 567--100.2(455B,455D) by adding the following new definition in alphabetical order:

"Nonmunicipal solid waste landfill" means a landfill permitted to accept a nonhazardous solid waste or combination of wastes exclusive of municipal solid wastes.

ITEM 2. Further amend 567--100.2(455B,455D), definitions of "sanitary disposal project" and "sanitary landfill," as follows:

"Sanitary disposal project" is defined in Iowa Code section 455B.301. means all facilities and appurtenances including all real and personal property connected with suchfacilities which are acquired, purchased, constructed, reconstructed, equipped, improved, extended, maintained, or operated to facilitate the final disposition of solid waste without creating a significant hazard to the public health or safety, and which are approved by the executive director.

"Sanitary landfill" means a method of disposing of solid waste on land by utilizing the principles of engineering to confine the solid waste to the smallest practical volume and to cover it with a layer of earth so that no nuisance or hazard to the public health is created. a sanitary disposal project where solid waste is buried between layers of earth. A sanitary landfill may be either a municipal solid waste landfill or a nonmunicipal solid waste landfill.

ITEM 3. Amend 567--100.3(17A,455B), catchwords, as follows:

567--100.3(17A,455B) Forms Application forms and rules of practice.

ITEM 4. Amend subrule 100.3(1), paragraph "b," as follows:

b. Application for the following permits or renewals shall be made in triplicate on the forms indicated:

(1) A sanitary disposal project permit pursuant to Iowa Code section 455B.305--Form 43.542-3199 50.542-1542.

(2) A temporary permit pursuant to Iowa Code subsection 455B.307(1)--Form 44.542-1012.

(3)(2) A renewal of a sanitary disposal project permit pursuant to 567--subrule 102.2(1)--Form 45.542-3208.

ITEM 5. Amend 567--102.2(455B), introductory paragraph, as follows:

567--102.2(455B) Types of permits. There are four types of sanitary disposal project permits issued by the director. These are described in this rule.

ITEM 6. Rescind subrules 102.2(1) to 102.2(4) and insert in lieu thereof the following new subrules:

102.2(1) Municipal solid waste landfill permits. These permits are issued to landfills that will receive residential solid and various other solid wastes commonly collected from inhabited communities.

102.2(2) Nonmunicipal solid waste landfill permits. These permits are issued to landfills that will receive a distinct waste or combination of wastes resulting from commercial or industrial activity.

102.2(3) Solid waste processing permits. These permits are issued to facilities that store, process, handle or dispose of solid wastes by means other than landfilling, including but not limited to combing, baling, incinerating, separating, recycling, and transfer stations.

102.2(4) Closure permits. These permits are mandatory for landfills at the close of their active-use period. They prescribe the surveillance and maintenance functions required for the postclosure period.

ITEM 7. Rescind and reserve rule 567--102.3(455B).

ITEM 8. Amend 567--102.7(455B) as follows:

567--102.7(455B) Amendments. Sanitary disposal project permits, temporary permits, and developmental permits may be modified by the issuance of an amendment by the department, except as provided in 102.6(1).

ITEM 9. Amend 567--102.12(455B), catchwords, as follows:

567--102.12(455B) Primary plan Application requirements for all sanitary disposal projects other than sanitary landfills.

ITEM 10. Rescind subrules 102.12(1) through 102.12(11) and insert in lieu thereof the following new subrules:

102.12(1) A completed application Form 50.542-1542.

102.12(2) A contingency plan detailing specific procedures to be followed in case of equipment breakdown, maintenance downtime, or fire in equipment or vehicles, including methods to be used to remove or dispose of accumulated waste.

102.12(3) Proof of the applicant's ownership of the site or legal entitlement to use the site for the disposal of solid waste for the term of the permit for which application is made.

102.12(4) Closure plan. A closure plan shall be submitted which:

a. Details how and when the facility will be closed in accordance with applicable requirements.

b. States the name, address and telephone number of the person or office to serve as a contact with regard to the facility during the postclosure period.

102.12(5) Such other information as may be required by the director.

ITEM 11. Rescind and reserve 567--102.14(455B).

ITEM 12. Rescind 567--Chapter 103 and insert in lieu thereof the following new chapter:

CHAPTER 103

SANITARY LANDFILLS

567--103.1(455B) Scope and applicability. This chapter outlines the permit application, siting, design, operating and closure requirements for municipal solid waste landfills (MSWLFs) in 103.2(455B) and requirements for nonmunicipal solid waste landfills (NMSWLFs) in 103.3(455B). Requirements for demolition waste disposal sites are found in 103.4(455B). Additional rules regarding landfills and other types of waste disposal systems are found in 567--Chapters 100, 101, 102 and 110.

567--103.2(455B) Municipal solid waste landfills (MSWLFs).

103.2(1) New permit application requirements.

a. Completed application Form 50.542-1542.

b. Approved comprehensive waste management plan.

c. Copy of local siting approval required by Iowa Code section 455B.305A.

d. Proof of legal entitlement to use the site.

e. Hydrogeologic investigation report and a hydrologic monitoring system plan. Detailed requirements for these submissions are found in 567--Chapter 110.

f. Site development and operational plan.

g. Leachate control plan.

h. Gas control plan.

i. Closure and postclosure plan.

j. Financial assurance documentation.

k. Map and aerial photograph of sufficient scale to show all homes, buildings, lakes, ponds, watercourses, wetlands, dry runs, rock outcroppings, roads and other relevant features affecting the design or operation of the landfill.

l. Plot plan with contours of the entire area in appropriate scale showing current drainage patterns, existing drain tiles, boring locations, bench marks, existing wells and any other relevant features influencing the design or operation of the facility.

m. Detailed engineering documents showing all site alterations including, but not limited to, buildings, fences, litter control structures, roads, wells, water and sewer lines, leachate control and disposal, waste fill locations and cross sections.

n. All new landfills and expansions that require a new permit or a permit amendment shall also include:

(1) A comprehensive listing of plant and animal species. In preparing the listing, the permit applicant shall contact the department's parks, recreation and preserves division with a request to search its records to determine the presence of, or habitat for, any threatened or endangered species or communities and any prairies, forests or wetlands. In the event that the department's files do not contain records of rare species or communities but their presence is suspected, the permit applicant may be required to conduct an approved site survey.

(2) A determination of the presence of and assessment of the impact on any archaeological, historical, or architecturally significant properties on the proposed site. To assess the impact, the permit applicant must consult with the historic preservation bureau of the Iowa State Historical Society.

103.2(2) Renewal permit application requirements.

a. Completed application Form 50.542-1542.

b. A copy of the current approval of the comprehensive waste management plan update.

c. An update of the documents and information required in 103.2(1).

d. A certification by a professional engineer licensed to practice in the state of Iowa that the landfill is being operated in accordance with the approved plan documents and applicable rules.

103.2(3) Closure permit application requirements.

a. Completed application Form 50.542-1542.

b. An updated hydrogeologic monitoring plan for the 30-year postclosure period.

c. An updated leachate control plan.

d. An updated gas control plan.

e. A plot plan showing the postclosure contours, drainage patterns and permanent features including leachate-handling facilities, roads and structures.

f. Documentation of closure/postclosure financial assurance.

103.2(4) Siting requirements.

a. The base of the landfill must be a minimum of 5 feet above the known high-water table unless a greater separation is required to ensure that there will be no adverse effect on ground or surface waters, or a lesser separation is unlikely to have an adverse effect on ground and surface waters.

b. The landfill may not be located on a flood plain or shoreline without a formal determination by the department's water resources section that the location will comply with the requirements of Title V of these rules and, where necessary, the approval of the U.S. Corps of Engineers must be obtained.

c. The landfill must be a minimum of 1,000 feet from any existing well being used for human or livestock water consumption. Greater separation distance may be required if the hydrologic conditions in the area justify such separation.

d. The landfill property line must be a minimum of 1 mile from any public water supply well in existence at the time of the first application for a landfill permit.

e. All wastes must be deposited a minimum of 50 feet from any adjacent property unless there is a written agreement between the parties on file with the county recorder that allows a lesser distance and a copy of the agreement is furnished to the department at the time of application.

f. All wastes must be deposited a minimum of 500 feet from a habitable residence in existence at the time of application for the initial landfill permit unless there is a written agreement between the parties on file with the county recorder that allows a lesser distance and a copy is furnished to the department at the time of application.

g. When a new landfill or lateral expansion is located within 10,000 feet of any airport runway end used by turbojet aircraft or within 5,000 feet of any airport runway end used only by piston-type aircraft, the plan must contain a notice that the facility's official files will include the following demonstration: The site is designed and will be operated so that it does not pose a bird hazard to aircraft. For any new site or lateral expansion within a 5-mile radius of any airport runway end used for turbojet or piston-type aircraft, the plan must show that the Federal Aviation Administration has been notified. For existing landfills located within 10,000 feet of any airport runway end used by turbojet aircraft or within 5,000 feet of any runway end used only by piston-type aircraft, the owner or operator must prepare the demonstration required above in this paragraph and notify the director that it has been placed in the facility's official files.

h. When a new landfill or lateral expansion is located within 200 feet of a fault that has had displacement in Holocene time, the plan must contain a notice that the facility's official files will include the following demonstration: An alternative setback distance of less than 200 feet will prevent damage to the structural integrity of the site and will be protective of human health and the environment.

i. When a new landfill or lateral expansion is located in seismic impact zones, the plan must contain a notice that the facility's official files will include the following demonstration: that all containment structures, including liners, leach-ate collection systems, and surface water control systems, are designed to resist the maximum horizontal acceleration in the lithified earth material for the site.

j. When a new facility or a lateral expansion is located in an unstable area, the plan must contain a notice that the facility's official files will include the following demonstration: Engineering measures have been incorporated into the site design to ensure that the integrity of the structural components of the site will not be disrupted. The demonstration must consider the on-site or local geologic or geomorphologic features and on-site or local human-made features or events (both surface and subsurface). For existing facilities located in an unstable area, the owner or operator must prepare the above demonstration required in this paragraph and notify the department that it has been placed in the facility's official files.

103.2(5) Design criteria.

a. Liners.

(1) MSWLFs shall have a composite liner system consisting of two components. The upper component must consist of a minimum 30-mil flexible membrane liner (FML) or an FML component consisting of high-density polyethylene (HDPE) at least 60 mil thick. The lower component must consist of at least a 2-foot layer of compacted soil having a coefficient of permeability of 1 _ 10-7 cm/sec (.00028 ft/day) or less, as measured by laboratory analysis. The FML must be installed in direct and uniform contact with the compacted soil component.

(2) The department may approve an alternate to the liner system specified in 103.2(5)"a" provided that the alternate liner system design includes certification by a professional engineer licensed in Iowa stating that the proposed alternate liner system will ensure that the contaminant concentration values listed in federal regulations under 40 CFR 258, Subpart D, Table 1, will not be exceeded in the uppermost aquifer at the designated monitoring points of compliance as specified by the department. This point of compliance shall be not more than 150 meters from the waste management boundary. This point of compliance is to be utilized for the purpose of certifying the alternate design only. All operational issues related to monitoring systems, compliance determinations, groundwater assessments and remedial measures are governed by the appropriate, relevant rules in 567--Chapter 103 and 567--Chapter 111. The certification shall be on a form furnished by the department which shall include space for identification of the sources of data utilized, formulas, models, tests or other methods utilized to determine contaminant concentrations at the points of compliance and all reference or guidance documents relied upon for the techniques or methods applied. A copy of all data utilized, formulas, models, tests or other methods utilized to determine contaminant concentrations at the points of compliance shall be placed in the facility's official files prior to operation of the landfill.

(3) The side slopes of the landfill liner must be not more than 25 percent.

(4) The landfill liner must be graded toward the leachate collection pipe at a slope not less than 2 percent nor greater than 10 percent.

(5) A drainage layer must be placed immediately above the landfill liner. This drainage layer shall consist of a minimum of 1 foot of drainage media with a coefficient of permeability of 1 _ 10-3 cm/sec (2.8 ft/day) or greater.

b. Leachate collection, storage, treatment and disposal.

(1) The leachate collection system shall be designed to allow not more than 1 foot of head above the top of the landfill liner. The system must include a method for measuring the leachate head in the landfill at the lowest area(s) of the collection system.

(2) Leachate collection pipe in a landfill with a synthetic (FML) liner must be placed in a depression in the liner system a minimum of 18 inches deep. Additional soil must be added beneath the depression to provide a minimum of 2 feet of soil liner.

(3) Leachate collection pipe in a landfill with an approved alternative soil liner must be placed in a trench a minimum of 18 inches into the liner. Additional soil must be added beneath the trench to provide a minimum of 4 feet of soil liner.

(4) Leachate collection pipe shall be surrounded by a gravel protection and drainage layer and by either a graded filter layer or by a geotextile filter fabric.

(5) The collection pipe must be covered with a filter material to encourage flow and to prevent infiltration of fine-grained materials into the pipe. The collection pipe must be perforated or slotted, of a sufficient diameter to handle the expected flow, but not less than a 4-inch inside diameter, capable of being cleaned throughout the active life of the site and during the postclosure period, chemically resistant to the wastes and the expected leachate and of sufficient strength to support maximum static and dynamic loads imposed by the overlying wastes, cover materials, and equipment used during the construction and operation of the site. Documentation shall be submitted which includes methods of and specifications for cleaning the pipes, specifications for chemical compatibility of the pipes, and calculations and specifications for pipe strength.

(6) The leachate collection system shall be equipped with valves to enable the flow of leachate from the facility to be shut off during periods of maintenance.

(7) Leachate treatment facilities must be designed in conformance with the department's wastewater treatment design standards. All leachate collection systems must be capable of storing at least seven days of collected leachate. All lagoon types of leachate treatment or storage systems must have a liner that meets the requirements for a landfill liner.

(8) Effluent from a leachate collection or treatment system may be disposed of in the following ways:

1. Direct discharge to a watercourse pursuant to a National Pollution Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permit issued by the department.

2. Discharge to a treatment facility that is owned and operated by another entity pursuant to a treatment agreement between that entity and the landfill. The treatment agreement must be submitted and approved by the department unless the community owning the treatment facility has an approved pretreatment program.

3. Recirculation onto the landfill if authorized by the operating permit. Such recirculation may be authorized only if the application area has a liner and a leachate collection system that comply with the design standards of this chapter.

c. Site design factors.

(1) The site must have all-weather access roads adequate to accommodate all delivery vehicles and operating equipment.

(2) The site must be fenced and gated in a manner that will prevent unauthorized deposition of wastes at the site.

(3) The site must include diversion and drainage structures designed to prevent ponding, infiltration, erosion or slope failure from surface runoff due to a 25-year, 24-hour rainfall event shown in the Illinois State Water Survey's "Rainfall Frequency Atlas of the Midwest," Bulletin #71.

103.2(6) Operating requirements for MSWLFs.

a. An operation and development plan for all new landfills must be prepared and submitted to the department prior to the initiation of operations. The plan must, at a minimum, include the following:

(1) The location and sequence of the area(s) to be filled during the permit period.

(2) A monitoring and sampling program that includes an approximate sampling schedule and a quality assurance program for the collection, transport, analysis and record keeping for each monitoring point.

(3) A contingency plan for dealing with interruptions of normal operations due to equipment failures, weather conditions or any other cause.

b. Each day's waste deposit shall be uniformly spread and compacted in layers not exceeding 2 feet in depth.

(1) Solid waste at the site shall be covered at the close of each day's operation with a compacted layer of soil or approved alternative at least 6 inches in depth.

(2) At least 1 foot of intermediate cover shall be applied to any area of the site which will not be utilized for further disposal of solid waste for more than one week.

(3) At least a 2-foot cover of compacted soil or approved alternative shall be applied to any area of the site which will not be utilized for further disposal of solid waste for more than two months. The cover must be graded to allow surface water runoff.

c. The working area of the landfill shall be staked to ensure that the fill practice conforms to the plans and specifications approved by the department.

d. The landfill must be inspected annually by an engineer licensed to practice in the state of Iowa to determine conformance with the approved plans and specifications. A report identifying the findings of that inspection must be submitted to the department by the permit holder.

e. All MSWLFs shall establish a program at the facility for detection and prevention of the disposal of regulated hazardous waste. The program must consist of random inspections of incoming loads, thorough record keeping of the time, date and finding of each inspection and the follow-up actions taken if any inappropriate wastes are found. The persons conducting such inspections must be trained in the identification of regulated hazardous wastes.

f. Solid waste shall be unloaded at the operating area only when an operator is on duty at that area. Solid waste may be deposited in storage containers at the site under the supervision of an attendant or operator.

g. Access to the site shall be restricted and a gate shall be provided at the entrance to the site and kept locked when an attendant or operator is not on duty.

h. A copy of the permit, engineering plans and reports shall be kept at the site at all times.

i. Solid waste shall not be deposited in such a manner that material or leachate therefrom may cause pollution of ground or surface waters.

j. Provisions shall be made for an all-weather fill area which is accessible for solid waste disposal during all weather conditions under which solid waste is received and disposed of at the site.

k. Provisions shall be made to have cover material available for winter and wet weather operations.

l. The site shall be graded and provided with drainage facilities to prevent flow of surface water onto the fill area and to prevent soil erosion and ponding of water.

m. Areas where disposal is discontinued shall be covered with soil and seeded with suitable vegetation at the earliest possible date.

n. Monitoring wells or appurtenances related to hydrologic monitoring shall be maintained and repaired or replaced as necessary to ensure continuity of all sample sources.

o. The static water level in each monitoring well shall be measured and recorded monthly during the first year of operation and at the time of each sampling event thereafter. Stage and flow rate of any surface waters required to be monitored must be measured and recorded at the time of sample collection.

p. Monitoring requirements.

(1) During the first year of operation of the hydrologic monitoring system, samples must be collected quarterly from each monitoring point. Samples shall be analyzed for the following parameters:

1. Arsenic, dissolved.

2. Barium, dissolved.

3. Cadmium, dissolved.

4. Chromium, total, dissolved.

5. Lead, dissolved.

6. Mercury, dissolved.

7. Magnesium, dissolved.

8. Zinc, dissolved.

9. Copper, dissolved.

10. Benzene.

11. Carbon tetrachloride.

12. 1,2-Dichloroethane.

13. Trichloroethane.

14. 1,1,1-Trichloroethane.

15. 1,1-Dichloroethane.

16. Paradichlorobenzene.

17. Chloride.

18. Specific conductance.

19. pH (field measurement).

20. Ammonia nitrogen.

21. Iron, dissolved.

22. Chemical oxygen demand.

23. Temperature (field measurement).

24. All other parameters specified in the facility's permit.

25. Total organic halogen.

26. Phenols.

27. All additional parameters specified in the facility's permit.

(2) After the first year each monitoring point must be sampled semiannually and analyzed for the following parameters:

1. Chloride.

2. Specific conductance (field measurement).

3. pH (field measurement).

4. Ammonia nitrogen.

5. Iron, dissolved.

6. Chemical oxygen demand.

7. Temperature (field measurement).

8. All other parameters specified in the facility's permit.

(3) After the first year of operation each monitoring point must be sampled quarterly for the following parameters:

1. Total organic halogen.

2. Phenols.

3. Any additional parameters specified in the facilities permit.

(4) All analyses must be performed by a laboratory certified by the state of Iowa. The reported analytical data must show the detection limit for each parameter.

(5) After the first year of monitoring, the mean and standard deviation for each parameter shall be calculated for each up gradient monitoring well and that data must be permanently retained in the facility files.

(6) The mean and standard deviation for each down gradient monitoring point shall be recalculated annually using the data from all subsequent semiannual monitoring available for that point.

(7) If the analytical value for a current sample from any down gradient monitoring point does not fall within two standard deviations for the corresponding up gradient point, the department shall be notified within 30 days. Also, if the analytical value for a current sample from any up gradient monitoring point does not fall within two standard deviations for that monitoring point, the department shall be notified within 30 days. The department may require additional monitoring if an exceedance is reported.

(8) The owner or operator must maintain permanent rec-ords of all sampling events including:

1. The date the samples were collected.

2. The name of the person(s) collecting the samples.

3. The water level at each point sampled.

4. The results of all measurements, analyses and observations.

q. The owner/operator shall submit an annual report in November of each year. The report must be prepared by an engineer licensed to practice in the state of Iowa and, at a minimum, must contain the following:

(1) Graphs showing the concentrations versus time for all monitored parameters at each monitoring well for the period of record. The graph shall show the control limit (two standard deviations) for each parameter.

(2) The amounts and types of wastes accepted under special waste authorizations.

(3) A summary of the construction, operation and closure activities that occurred during the year, such as the areas that were closed and received final cover, new areas opened, inspections and maintenance of monitoring wells, drainage systems and similar activities.

r. Owners and operators of MSWLFs must conduct quarterly monitoring to verify compliance with the following requirements:

(1) The concentration of methane gas generated by the facility does not exceed 25 percent of the lower explosive limit for methane in facility structures (excluding gas control or recovery system components), and

(2) The concentration of methane gas does not exceed the lower explosive limit for methane at the facility property boundary.

s. If the methane gas levels exceed the limits stated in the previous paragraph, the owner or operator of the MSWLF must:

(1) Immediately take all necessary steps to ensure protection of human health and notify the department.

(2) Submit a report to the department within seven days stating the gas levels detected and a description of the steps taken to protect human health.

(3) Implement a plan for remediation of the methane gas releases within 60 days of detection of the violation. A copy of the plan being implemented shall be submitted to the department.

t. No free liquids or waste containing free liquid shall be accepted for disposal at an MSWLF.

u. If it becomes apparent that leachate is migrating from the disposal area in an amount that is or may potentially impact any waters of the state or surrounding property, the department may require the preparation and submittal of a groundwater assessment. The assessment shall delineate the hydrologic pathways of the migration and must identify the current and potential extent and impact of the migration. This assessment shall be submitted to the department not more than 90 days after being notified that it is required.

v. Following the review and approval of the assessment, the department will notify the owner or operator regarding the need to develop and implement a corrective action plan unless it is apparent that the migration does not pose a threat to the waters of the state or any surrounding property.

w. Open burning is prohibited unless specifically authorized by the department.

x. Litter must be confined to the property on which the landfill is located. Any litter strewn beyond the operating area must be collected and properly disposed of at the end of each day.

y. Scavenging is prohibited. Materials salvage may be conducted by the landfill or its authorized representatives.

103.2(7) Closure/postclosure requirements for MSWLFs.

a. Closure requirements.

(1) The owner or operator of an MSWLF shall notify the department of intent to close at least 180 days prior to the date of closure. The notice shall be accompanied by an updated closure/postclosure plan detailing the 30-year postclosure monitoring program.

(2) Notice of closure shall be posted at least 180 days prior to closure of the facility indicating the date of closure and alternative solid waste management facilities. Notice of closure shall also be published in a newspaper of local circulation at least 180 days prior to closure. The notice shall include the date of closure and alternative solid waste management facilities.

(3) Implementation of the closure/postclosure plan shall be completed within 90 days of the closure of the facility. The owner and an engineer licensed in the state of Iowa shall certify that the closure/postclosure plan has been implemented in compliance with the rules, closure/postclosure plan, and permit.

(4) Upon completion of closure activities, as-built plans shall be submitted to the department showing:

1. Changes from the original design plans,

2. Compaction test results indicating compliance with final cover,

3. The final cover contours,

4. Drainage pathways, and

5. Any facilities related to closure or postclosure maintenance.

(5) A minimum of two permanent benchmarks must be installed at different locations on the landfill property where they cannot be affected by the differential settling of the wastes.

(6) The final cover shall consist of a seal layer of not less than 2 feet of compacted soil with a permeability of 1 _ 10-7 cm/sec or less as determined by laboratory analysis. The soil shall be placed in lifts not to exceed 8 inches. Field density tests shall be performed to verify that the 1 _ 10-7 cm/sec permeability has been attained.

(7) The seal layer shall be overlaid with not less than 2 feet of uncomplicated topsoil capable of supporting perennial grasses.

(8) A cover of perennial grasses shall be established on the final cover during the first growing season following closure.

(9) The slope of the final cover shall be not less than 5 percent nor more than 25 percent. The site shall be graded so all surface runoff drains away from fill areas and the drainage pathways shall be designed to prevent erosion.

b. Postclosure requirements.

(1) The owner or operator is responsible for surveillance, monitoring and maintenance of the site for 30 years following closure of the facility.

(2) Implementation of the postclosure plan shall begin within 90 days of closure of the facility.

(3) The department shall be notified within 10 days of any alterations to the site, whether such alterations are deliberate or the result of natural forces.

(4) The vegetative cover must be maintained, including prompt reseeding, if necessary. Erosion must be repaired promptly. Differential settling shall be returned to grade to prevent ponding of surface runoff.

(5) The department may extend the monitoring period beyond the 30-year period if off-site water quality exceeds established limits or if the effectiveness of a remediation program has not been fully documented.

567--103.3(455B) Nonmunicipal solid waste landfills. Following are the minimum requirements for siting, designing, and operating nonmunicipal solid waste landfills based on the assumption that most nonmunicipal solid waste has a very low potential for causing groundwater contamination or other environmental concerns. If the characteristics of the solid waste are such that a contaminated leachate may be generated, additional controls will be required.

103.3(1) Site requirements for nonmunicipal solid waste landfills (NMSWLFs).

a. The site shall not be a wetland or within a 100-year flood plain and cannot have any sinkholes or similar karst features.

b. No waste shall be deposited within 300 feet of an inhabitable residence or a commercial enterprise or within 50 feet of the property boundary.

c. All waste must be a minimum of 5 feet above the maximum known groundwater table.

103.3(2) Application requirements for an NMSWLF.

a. A completed application Form 50.542-1542.

b. A copy of the local siting approval required by Iowa Code section 455B.305A.

c. A copy of the letter from the waste management assistance division approving the comprehensive plan required by 567--101.5(455B).

d. Proof of legal entitlement to use the property as proposed.

e. A topographic map of the site and the adjacent area within 500 feet of the site with contour intervals not exceeding 5 feet that shows the location of existing improvements or alterations such as structures, wells, lakes, roads, drain tiles, or similar items. The highest point of elevation on the site shall also be identified and given.

f. The results of a sufficient number of soil borings to establish the direction of groundwater flow throughout the site and the minimum depth to groundwater on the site.

g. An adequate number, three minimum, of representative groundwater sample results to fully characterize the groundwater quality at the site.

h. Construction drawings and specifications of the improvements and alterations that are to take place on the site such as roads, structures, utilities, drainage ways, gates and fences.

i. A cross-section view of the cell or cells that will be utilized during this permit period showing the placement and cover of the waste that is expected to occur during the permit period being requested.

103.3(3) Design criteria.

a. Nonmunicipal solid waste landfills shall have a soil liner consisting of at least 2 feet of compacted clay. The coefficient of permeability of the liner must be 1 _ 10-7 cm/sec or less. The method of determining compliance with the coefficient of permeability shall be stated in the specifications. A flexible-membrane liner (FML) or other alternate which meets the requirements for municipal solid waste landfills in subparagraphs 103.2(5)"a"(1) and 103.2(5)"a"(2) is an acceptable alternative. If side slopes exceed 25 percent, a liner is not required on the side slope.

b. Nonmunicipal solid waste landfills must have a leach-ate collection and storage system. The collection pipe shall be placed in a trench excavated to a minimum of 18 inches below the liner surface. The collection pipe must be protected by granular material which must in turn be covered with a filter layer to facilitate liquid flow into the pipe while preventing fine-grained materials from plugging the system. If a municipal solid waste landfill liner system is used, the corresponding leachate collection system in 103.3(455B) must also be used.

c. The leachate collection pipe must be perforated and a minimum of 4 inches in diameter. The pipe must be made of chemically resistant materials and possess sufficient strength to support the maximum static loads to which it will be subjected. The collection system shall be equipped with valves that allow the shut off of flow during periods of maintenance.

d. No discharges of leachate from the landfill property to the waters of the state are allowed unless authorized by a National Pollution Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permit. All other methods of leachate disposal must be in accordance with the operating permit.

e. The leachate storage system shall provide a minimum of seven days of storage. Any earthen leachate storage facility shall have a liner with a permeability equal to or less than the landfill liner.

f. Surface runoff must be diverted from all active or closed fill areas.

g. The elevation of the final cover for a new landfill or the horizontal expansion of a currently permitted landfill shall not be more than 25 feet above the highest ground elevation that existed within the fill area prior to its utilization for waste disposal, nor shall the elevation of the final cover at any point be more than 50 feet higher than the original elevation at that point.

(1) Where the final cover of a closed area in a currently active landfill exceeds the elevation limit, a reduction in the height of those areas is not required.

(2) The height limitation for the remaining portions of the landfill may be raised to the elevation already attained prior to the effective date of this rule.

h. The site must have all-weather access roads adequate to accommodate all delivery vehicles and operating equipment.

i. The site must be fenced and gated in a manner that will prevent unauthorized deposition of wastes at the site.

j. The site must be secured with a fence and gate(s) to prevent unauthorized entry when unattended.

103.3(4) Operating requirements.

a. A developmental and operational plan shall be prepared and submitted to the appropriate DNR field office prior to starting operations. The plan, at a minimum, shall include:

(1) An identification of the area to be filled during the period for which a permit is being requested.

(2) The method(s) that will be utilized to prevent illicit municipal or putrescible solid wastes from being deposited as a result of mixing with authorized waste brought to the site.

(3) The frequency, extent, and method of spreading and compacting the waste; the optimum layer thickness; and the size and slope of the operating face.

(4) How the facility will be operated with respect to when the operating personnel will be on site and how waste will be allowed at the facility when an operator is not on site.

b. The person responsible for operation of the site must be certified in accordance with operator certification requirements in 567--102.13(455B).

c. Wastes must be covered at least every two weeks with a minimum of 6 inches of soil cover or an alternative cover material approved by the department. The frequency of cover may be increased by the department if the nature of the waste is such that more frequent covering is needed to control litter, dust, vectors and rodents, infiltration or similar-type problems.

d. A minimum of one foot of intermediate soil cover or a department-approved alternative intermediate cover shall be applied to areas which will not be utilized for further waste disposal for 90 days unless a greater cover depth is required because of the nature of the waste.

e. Prior to the placement of any waste in the landfill, a minimum of one up gradient monitoring well must be installed and sampled for the parameters listed in 103.2(6)"p."

f. A minimum of one down gradient monitoring well must be installed within one year following startup operation. Additional monitoring wells will be required when it is apparent that more than one potential pathway of contaminant movement is available. Monitoring wells will normally be placed within 50 feet of the waste boundary unless the department specifically grants a variance.

g. Within one year of installation of a monitoring well, the first of four quarterly samples shall be collected from each well and analyzed for a volatile organic compound scan (EPA Method 8260-60), total organic carbon, and the predominant parameters agreed upon by the department based on the toxicity characteristic leachate procedure test results that are representative of the waste being disposed of. A minimum of one sample from each well shall be collected annually and analyzed for the above parameters. Each time a groundwater sample is collected, the groundwater elevation shall be measured and recorded to the nearest .01 foot. Increased sampling frequency will be required if a sample shows that the groundwater may be impacted by leachate.

h. A report on the groundwater monitoring results shall be submitted to the solid waste section annually.

103.3(5) Closure/postclosure requirements.

a. The final cover shall consist of not less than 1 foot of compacted clay soil overlaid with not less than 2 feet of uncompacted soil capable of sustaining vegetative growth.

b. The final slope of the entire fill area shall be not less than 3 percent nor more than 20 percent.

c. A growth of hardy native grasses must be established on the final cover at the earliest possible date following closure.

d. A minimum of one sample from each well shall be collected annually and analyzed for the above parameters. Each time a groundwater sample is collected, the groundwater elevation shall be measured and recorded to the nearest .01 foot. Increased sampling frequency will be required if a sample shows that the groundwater may be impacted byleachate.

e. A report on the groundwater monitoring results shall be submitted to the solid waste section annually.

f. One hundred eighty days prior to closure the owner/operator must submit a postclosure plan describing the management process and the parties responsible for postclosure activities including the operation and maintenance of the leachate collection and disposal system, monitoring and site maintenance.

g. After closure an annual inspection of the site shall be conducted and any differential settling, surface cracks or holes, erosion channels or other interference with surface drainage must be restored to the original condition.

567--103.4(455B) Requirements for demolition waste disposal sites.

103.4(1) Criteria and eligibility for establishing a demolition waste disposal site.

a. Permitted landfills may establish a site for the disposal of demolition wastes originating within the defined planning area these entities are participating in without obtaining a permit from the department, subject to the requirements of this rule.

b. The site must be operated under the management, direction and supervision of a certified landfill operator.

c. The tonnage fee requirements of Iowa Code section 455B.310 do not apply.

103.4(2) Siting requirements.

a. The volume of any single site shall not exceed 50,000 cubic yards.

b. The site must be fenced and have gate locks that will prevent unauthorized entry when the site is unattended.

c. The site shall not be located in a wetland or within the 100-year flood plain. The site shall not be located in a gravel pit, quarry or any area where the waste would be in contact with groundwater or highly permeable soils.

d. The waste in the fill area cannot be within 1,000 feet of a public or private well and cannot be within 200 feet of the nearest surface water.

e. The fill area cannot be within 50 feet of the property boundary nor within 300 feet of a usable structure.

f. No burning may take place on the site.

g. The slope of the site cannot exceed 9 percent. All drainage must be diverted around the fill area to prevent surface water run on to the fill area surface during its active life or after closure.

h. The bottom of any filled area must be a minimum of 3 feet above the seasonal high-water table.

103.4(3) Waste acceptance and management.

a. Wastes resulting from the demolition of structures, including those destroyed by natural disasters, are the only wastes that can be disposed of at such a site.

b. The structure must be inspected for the presence of asbestos by a person certified to conduct such inspections and to collect samples of asbestos-containing materials (ACM) or presumed asbestos-containing materials (PACM).

c. If the inspection shows that the total waste stream does not contain ACM or PACM, the structure may be disposed of pursuant to these regulations.

d. If ACM is present, the waste stream must be disposed of in accordance with currently applicable National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAPS) and Iowa occupational safety and health regulations. As an alternative to disposal at an off-site disposal area, ACM may be buried on site, in the basement, provided that:

(1) The wastes are kept thoroughly wet and the workers are adequately protected during the demolition/burial proc-ess.

(2) The local government of jurisdiction grants approval.

e. Salvage of demolition material from ACM-contaminated waste streams is not permitted unless each item is decontaminated in a containment area.

f. Items within a structure must be removed and recycled if practical or taken to a permitted disposal facility. Hazardous materials must be disposed of in accordance with applicable federal hazardous waste regulations.

g. Efforts to salvage and recycle metals and other materials are encouraged. An area on the disposal site should be designated for the separation, recovery and storage of recyclables.

103.4(4) Disposal site operating requirements.

a. The owner/operator of a site must keep records of the weight, type, and source of demolition materials accepted at the facility.

b. The owner/operator must submit an annual report to the department of natural resources by October 1 of each year covering the most recent state fiscal year (July 1 through June 30). At a minimum the report must provide (1) the name of the site owner; (2) location of the facility; (3) tons of waste accepted; and (4) jurisdiction and address of the site of origin of the demolition waste. The tonnage reported must be from scale weights or by applying the formula of 1,250 pounds per cubic yard. One copy of the report shall be provided to the Department of Natural Resources, Waste Management Assistance Division, Henry A. Wallace Bldg., 900 E. Grand Avenue, Des Moines, Iowa 50319, and one copy must be provided to the appropriate field office of the environmental protection division.

c. The site must be secured against unauthorized entry unless a responsible operator is on site. The owner/operator is responsible for removing and disposing of wastes left near the perimeter of the site.

d. Demolition wastes can only be accepted from parties who have received prior approval from the city, county or 28E unit owning and operating the site.

e. The active working face on the site shall be restricted to as small an area as practical.

f. Wastes shall not be exposed for more than 30 calendar days unless additional wastes are currently being placed in the same area. Such interim cover shall consist of not less than 6 inches of topsoil.

103.4(5) Closure/postclosure requirements.

a. When an area is permanently closed it must be covered with a soil cover of at least 2.5 feet. The entire waste-containing area must be graded to ensure that surface water will readily run off.

b. After closure the owner/operator must establish a grass cover over the site and perform any other site modifications needed to prevent erosion of the cap.

c. The owner/operator must conduct an annual inspection of the site after closure and take any necessary actions to prevent drainage problems, repair erosion, eliminate depressions in the cap, reestablish grass cover in all damaged or barren areas in the cover and identify any other potential problems with final closure. This annual inspection and maintenance must be performed for at least five years after closure.

d. The department may, at any time after closure, require investigation, testing, monitoring, or other action if it appears that the site is or may be a threat to the public health and welfare or to the environment.

567--103.5(455B) Requirements for solid waste landfills that will receive only coal combustion residue. Following are the minimum requirements for siting, designing, and operating a solid waste landfill accepting only coal combustion residue. "Coal combustion residue" means any solid waste produced by the burning of coal, either by itself or in conjunction with natural gas or other carbon-based fuels. It includes, but is not limited to, bottom ash, fly ash, slag and flue gas desulfurization sludge generated by coal combustion and associated air pollution control equipment.

103.5(1) Site requirements.

a. The site cannot be a wetland, cannot be within a 100-year flood plain and cannot have any sinkholes or similar karst features.

b. No wastes shall be deposited within 300 feet of an inhabitable residence or a commercial enterprise, or within 50 feet of the property boundary.

c. All waste must be a minimum of 5 feet above the known groundwater table.

103.5(2) Permit application requirements.

a. A completed application Form 50.542-1542.

b. A copy of the letter from the waste management assistance division approving the comprehensive plan required by 567--101.5(455B).

c. Proof of legal entitlement to use the property as proposed.

d. A topographic map of the site and the adjacent area within 300 feet of the site, with contour intervals not exceeding 5 feet, that shows the location of existing improvements or alterations such as structures, wells, lakes, roads, drain tiles or similar items. The highest point of elevation on the site shall also be identified and given.

e. The results of a sufficient number of soil borings to establish the direction of groundwater flow throughout the site and the minimum depth to groundwater on the site.

f. An adequate number, three minimum, of representative groundwater sample results to fully characterize the groundwater quality at the site.

g. Construction drawings and specifications of the improvements and alterations that are to take place on the site such as roads, structures, utilities, drainage ways, gates and fences.

h. A copy of the local siting approval required by Iowa Code section 455B.305A.

103.5(3) Design criteria.

a. The design of a coal combustion residue solid waste landfill shall contain a method for ensuring protection of the groundwater and surface water.

b. The design plan shall include a method of ash transportation that prevents blowing ash and a method for preventing blowing dust and air emissions when unloading the ash.

c. Surface runoff must be diverted from all active or closed areas, both during the active life of the facility and during the postclosure period.

d. The site must be secured with a fence and gate(s) to prevent unauthorized entry when unattended.

e. The elevation of the final cover for a new landfill or the horizontal expansion of a currently permitted landfill shall not be more than 25 feet above the highest ground elevation that existed within the fill area prior to its utilization for waste disposal, nor shall the elevation of the final cover at any point be more than 50 feet higher than the original elevation at that point.

(1) Where the final cover of a closed area in a currently active landfill exceeds the elevation limit, a reduction in the height of those areas is not required.

(2) The height limitation for the remaining portions of the landfill may be raised to the elevation already attained prior to the effective date of this rule.

f. The site must have all-weather access roads adequate to accommodate all delivery vehicles and operating equipment.

g. The site must be fenced and gated in a manner that will prevent unauthorized deposition of wastes at the site.

103.5(4) Operating requirements.

a. An operation plan shall be prepared and submitted to the appropriate department field office prior to initiating operations. The plan, at a minimum, shall include:

(1) An identification of the area to be filled during the period for which a permit is being requested.

(2) The method(s) that will be utilized to prevent illicit municipal or putrescible solid wastes from being deposited as a result of mixing with authorized waste brought to the site.

(3) The frequency, extent and method of spreading and compacting the waste; the optimum layer thickness; and the size and slope of the operating face.

(4) A description of the operating procedures that will be followed when wastes are brought to the site.

b. Wastes may not be deposited in lifts of more than 6 inches. After the waste is deposited the lift shall be wetted sufficiently to form a cemented surface. If this method does not adequately control dust and erosion, the department may require a soil cover.

c. A minimum of 1 foot of intermediate soil cover or a department-approved alternative intermediate cover shall be applied to areas which will not be utilized for further waste disposal for 90 days.

d. A minimum of one down gradient monitoring well must be installed within one year of initiating operations. Additional wells may be required when it is apparent that more than one potential contaminant pathway exists. Monitoring wells will normally be placed within 50 feet of the waste boundary.

e. Annual sampling of all monitoring wells shall commence within one year of initiating operations. Additional sampling may be required if it appears that the groundwater is or may be affected by leachate or surface activities at the landfill.

f. A report of the groundwater monitoring results shall be submitted to the department by the end of the first year's operation and annually thereafter.

103.5(5) Closure/postclosure requirements.

a. One hundred eighty days prior to closure the owner/operator shall submit a postclosure plan to the department. The plan shall list the date of closure, the actions that will be taken to close the site and the parties responsible for postclosure maintenance.

b. The final cover shall consist of not less than 2 feet of compacted soil and 1 foot of uncompacted soil capable of sustaining a growth of common grasses.

c. The slope of the landfill area after final closure shall be not less than 3 percent nor more than 25 percent.

d. A growth of common grasses shall be established on the final cover by the end of the first full growing season.

e. A minimum of one sample from each monitoring well shall be collected annually during the postclosure period and analyzed for the parameters specified in the permit. The results shall be included in the annual report.

f. After closure, an annual inspection of the site shall be conducted. Any differential settling, surface cracks, holes, erosion channels, or any interference with surface drainage shall be corrected by restoration to the original condition. A report on the findings and corrective actions taken shall be included in the annual report.

ITEM 13. Rescind 567--108.1(455B) and insert in lieu thereof the following new rule:

567--108.1(455B) Policy. It is the policy of the department to encourage recycling and beneficial reuse of wastes, residues and by-products that would otherwise have to be disposed of in accordance with solid waste disposal rules. This chapter is intended to identify some of the more common beneficial reuse practices that may be conducted without the approval of this department. It further prescribes some management practices that must be followed to avoid the creation of environmental problems or nuisance conditions and also prescribes the procedure to be followed to obtain a determination from the department regarding the acceptability of a beneficial reuse that is not identified in these rules.

This rule describes some uses of waste products that are allowed without obtaining a permit or formal approval from the department. It does not exempt the user/generator from any other permits, approvals, licenses, registrations or similar requirements of local, state or federal agencies.

ITEM 14. Rescind 567--108.3(455B) and 567-- 108.4(455B) and insert the following new rules in lieu thereof.

567--108.3(455B) User/generator responsibilities. The following are some of the items that any generator or user of a waste should be aware of as they may determine the appropriateness of the beneficial reuse.

108.3(1) Wastes that are stockpiled prior to use must not be placed in a manner or location where they are subject to scattering by wind, water or scavengers.

108.3(2) If the waste materials are removed from the originating site at intervals of more than six months, the department is to be furnished with written documentation specifying the reuse plan, including the anticipated interval times for removal and the location of the storage. Failure to do so could result in the generator being charged with maintaining an open dump.

567--108.4(455B) Generally acceptable beneficial reuses of solid waste materials.

108.4(1) Coal combustion residues (CCR).

a. As a raw material in the manufacture of cement, asphaltic products, shingles, wallboard, plastics and ceramics and similar uses.

b. As an aggregate or admixture in concrete, soil cement, or asphaltic mixtures.

c. As subbase or wear surface for roads, parking lots, and trails. It may be used as subbase for structures, levees and dikes.

d. As a soil conditioner, subject to the limitations contained in 567--Chapter 121. When applied directly to farmland it shall be incorporated within ten days of application.

e. As daily cover and the seal layer of the intermediate and final cover at landfills provided that it is mixed with the soil in a ratio that does not exceed 50 percent, by volume. It may be used as a soil conditioner in the uncompacted surface layer of the intermediate and final cover in amounts that will not inhibit or slow the establishment of permanent vegetative growth.

108.4(2) Used foundry sand. A representative sample of the used foundry sand shall be collected and subjected to the Toxic Characteristic Leachate Procedure (TCLP) specified in the Federal Register at 40 CFR Part 261, Appendix II, and if no value exceeds 50 percent of the leachate classification limit given in 40 CFR 261.24, the used foundry sand is considered acceptable for the following reuses.

a. As daily cover at a sanitary landfill in accordance with the conditions stated in the landfill permit.

b. As fill base for roads, parking lots, dikes and levees, and similar applications.

c. As aggregate in concrete.

d. As bedding material in trenches for underground conduits other than potable water lines.

567--108.5(455B) Procedures for determining the acceptability of a proposed reuse. The amount of ongoing reuse of materials that would otherwise be treated as a solid waste is very large. It is inevitable that the variety of beneficial reuses will increase with time. It is not uncommon for generators/users to be concerned that the reuse being contemplated could be considered unacceptable after a considerable effort and expense have been invested. This rule attempts to provide guidelines to be followed in obtaining the department's opinion regarding acceptability prior to initiation of the reuse. The department encourages recycling and reuse and is likely to reject a proposal only when the public health or the environment would be at risk.

108.5(1) A telephone call or personal contact with the department may be made to identify the proposed reuse. It is possible that the project being considered has been or is being conducted elsewhere in the state and the department can confirm that there is no concern with or objection to the proposed reuse.

108.5(2) A written submission may be submitted to the department providing the following details, as appropriate:

a. The name and address of the responsible waste generator and user.

b. The source and location(s) of the waste generation and the location(s) of the beneficial use, including a map of the area of proposed use.

c. A full description of the waste constituents.

d. A full description of the proposed reuse.

e. If the proposed use could potentially result in the release of organic materials or chemical constituents to the environment, the department will likely require an analysis or a TCLP test for the compounds or elements suspected of being present, or both, before indicating acceptance of the proposed reuse.

567--108.6(455B) Potential problematic reuses. The following information items are provided to illustrate some of the more common objections to reuse proposals.

108.6(1) Depositions in a gully, ravine, wash, excavation or basement. Some persons have assumed that such depositions represent land reclamation and are, therefore, a beneficial reuse. Generally, such practices provide little reclamation benefit and are little more than an excuse for open dumping.

108.6(2) Placement or temporary storage at an unsecured site where the presence of wastes would be likely to attract illegal dumping. Wastes which are difficult or expensive to dispose of, such as hazardous wastes, are likely to find their way to such a site and the responsible party is difficult to determine.

108.6(3) The use or storage of a waste where its presence is likely to be aesthetically objectionable, an attractive nuisance, or a harborage for insects and rodents.

108.6(4) The use or storage of the waste could result in wind or water carriage to neighboring properties or bodies of water.

ITEM 15. Amend 567--110.7(455B), introductory paragraph, as follows:

567--110.7(455B) Monitoring system plan. A hydrologic monitoring system shall be designed to intercept the groundwater and surface water flow paths from the site. The plan shall include proposed locations and depths for monitoring wells in accordance with monitoring well siting criteria in subrule 567--110.1(2) rule 567--110.10(455B). Monitoring wells shall be designed in accordance with subrule 567--110.1(3) rule 110.11(455B).

ITEM 16. Amend subrule 110.11(1), paragraph "a," as follows:

a. Contractors involved in construction of monitoring wells and piezometers and soil boring activities shall be registered with the department as required in 567--Chapter 37 82.

ITEM 17. Amend 567--110.12(455B), introductory paragraph, as follows:

567--110.12(455B) Sealing abandoned wells and boreholes. Boreholes, piezometers and observation wells not used for groundwater monitoring must be sealed in accordance with applicable 567--Chapter 39 requirements and the procedures defined under 567--Chapter 110. Document in writing the well or borehole legal property location, site owner and abandonment information utilizing departmental Form 542-1226. Include the location of the abandoned well or borehole with reference to the landfill's coordinate system and method of sealing. The document must be retained at the landfill with a copy copies sent to the department department's water supply and solid waste sections.

ARC 7754A

GENERAL SERVICES DEPARTMENT[401]

Notice of Intended Action

Twenty-five interested persons, a governmental subdivision, an agency or association of 25 or more persons may demand an oral presentation hereon as provided in Iowa Code section 17A.4(1)"b."

Notice is also given to the public that the Administrative Rules Review Committee may, on its own motion or on written request by any individual or group, review this proposed action under section 17A.8(6) at a regular or special meeting where the public or interested persons may be heard.

Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code sections 18.4 and 18.11, the Department of General Services hereby gives Notice of Intended Action to rescind Chapter 4, "Parking," Iowa Administrative Code, and adopt a new chapter with the same title.

This chapter implements guidelines to provide citizens with the most convenient access to Iowa state offices in the Capitol Complex and to provide state employees the benefit of a parking space within a reasonable distance of their offices.

Public comments concerning the proposed amendments will be accepted until 4:30 p.m. on February 3, 1998. Interested persons may submit written comments or suggestions to the Director's Office, Department of General Services, Hoover State Office Building, Level A, Des Moines, Iowa 50319; fax (515)242-5974.

A public hearing to receive comments about the proposed amendments will be held on February 6, 1998, at 8 a.m. at the above address in the Director's Conference Room.

The following amendment is proposed.

Rescind 401--Chapter 4 and adopt the following new chapter:

CHAPTER 4

PARKING

401--4.1(18) Purpose--definitions. The purpose of these rules is to provide citizens with the most convenient access to Iowa state offices in the capitol complex, to provide state employees the benefit of a parking space within a reasonable distance of their offices and to remove the hazards inherent in unregulated parking. The director adopts the following rules that will establish a system for parking vehicles within the capitol complex.

"Capitol complex" for the purposes of this chapter means an area within the city of Des Moines within which the Iowa state capitol building is located. This area includes all real estate owned by the state of Iowa adjacent to or within 2000 feet of the capitol building.

"Capitol police" means a peace officer of the capitol police division of the Iowa department of public safety.

"Controlled lots" means parking lots assigned by the department of general services and controlled by any of the following: parking gates, vehicle decals, signs, symbols, or markings.

"Director" means the director of the department of general services of the state of Iowa or the director's designee.

"Employee" means any person employed by the state of Iowa and regularly assigned to work in the capitol complex, including legislators, judges, temporary workers and persons who are service contractors or private contractors with the state and their employees who regularly work within the capitol complex.

"Habitual violator" means any owner of a vehicle that accumulates six or more separate and distinct citations in any given six-month period regardless of whether payment is made in a timely manner.

"Operator" means any person who is in actual physical control of a vehicle.

"Overflow lot" means a lot designated by the department of general services as an overflow lot.

"Overtime parking" means parking in a space or lot longer than the posted time limit.

"Owner" means a person who is named on the legal title of a vehicle as the owner or, in the case of vehicles without title certificates, the person who is lawfully seized of the vehicle.

"Parking coordinator" means an employee, designated within each department, with the assigned duties of disseminating information and requesting parking decals and access cards from the department of general services for employee parking lot assignment and building access.

"Peace officer" means a person defined as a peace officer in Iowa Code chapter 80.

"Persons with disabilities" means persons having a disability that limits or impairs the person's ability to walk. A person shall be considered a person with a disability for purposes of this chapter under the following circumstances:

1. The person cannot walk 200 feet without stopping to rest.

2. The person cannot walk without the use of, or assistance from, a brace, cane, crutch, another person, prosthetic device, wheelchair, or other assistive device.

3. The person is restricted by lung disease to such an extent that the person's forced expiratory volume for one second, when measured by spitometry, is less than one liter, or the arterial oxygen tension is less than 60 mm/hg on room air at rest.

4. The person uses portable oxygen.

5. The person has a cardiac condition to the extent that the person's functional limitations are classified in severity as Class III or Class IV according to standards set by the American Heart Association.

6. The person is severely limited in the person's ability to walk due to an arthritic, neurological, or orthopedic condition.

"Persons with disabilities parking permit" means a permit bearing the international symbol of accessibility issued by the department which allows the holder to park in a persons with disabilities parking space, and includes the following:

1. A persons with disabilities registration plate issued to or for a person with a disability under Iowa Code section 321.34, subsection 7.

2. A persons with disabilities parking sticker affixed to a registration plate issued to a disabled veteran under section 321.166, subsection 6, or to an operator under section 321.34.

3. A persons with disabilities removable windshield placard which is a two-sided placard for hanging from the rearview mirror when the motor vehicle is parked in a persons with disabilities parking space.

"Persons with disabilities parking sign" means a sign which bears the international symbol of accessibility that meets the requirements under section 321L.6.

"Persons with disabilities parking space" means a parking space, including the access aisle, designated for use only by motor vehicles displaying a persons with disabilities parking permit that meets the requirements of sections 321L.5 and 321L.6.

"Ride sharing" means a group of not less than four state employees who arrive and depart from work in one vehicle.

"Vehicle" means every device in, upon, or by which any person or property is or may be transported or drawn upon a highway. Vehicle does not include any device moved by human power.

"Visitor" means a person who is not included in the definition of employee.

401--4.2(18) Parking space assignments.

4.2(1) Each parking space in the capitol complex will be assigned, on an individual or lot basis, by the director.

4.2(2) The assignment of spaces will be indicated and designated by traffic control devices including but not limited to signs, instructions, lines or symbols painted on curbs or on parking surfaces, or by curbs, barricades, blocks, and lights. A raised parking control gate or missing parking control gate does not constitute open parking.

4.2(3) Spaces or lots will be assigned to four classes of drivers: handicapped visitors, visitors, employees and handicapped employees.

401--4.3(18) Parking for persons with disabilities.

4.3(1) Spaces designated for visitors with disabilities shall be used only by visitors with disabilities, or by persons transporting visitors with disabilities. Such visitors are required to display a persons with disabilities windshield placard from the rearview mirror so as to be in view when looking through the windshield from outside the vehicle, or have a persons with disabilities registration plate on the vehicle.

4.3(2) A visitor with disabilities or a person transporting a visitor with disabilities may use a space or lot assigned to visitors with disabilities or a space or lot assigned to visitors if the visitors with disabilities spaces near the building to be entered are occupied.

4.3(3) Spaces designated for employees with disabilities shall be used only by employees with disabilities, or persons who are transporting employees with disabilities, who display upon their vehicle a persons with disabilities identification device or have a persons with disabilities registration plate on the vehicle.

401--4.4 Reserved.

401--4.5(18) Deliveries. Most buildings in the capitol complex have delivery entrances for vehicle use, and delivery vehicles shall use these entrances. Each of the restrictions and regulations contained in these rules, all traffic control devices and state laws shall apply to delivery vehicles. The director may, upon application showing information the director deems advisable, issue a sign, symbol or device to permit delivery vehicles to park in spaces or areas designated on such sign, symbol or device for such temporary periods as the director may determine.

401--4.6(18) Employee parking.

4.6(1) The director will issue each employee a permit, state parking decal or device to use a space or to enter a controlled parking lot. The decals will be coded and shall only be used in the assigned space or lot. Vehicles with such decals shall not park in spaces reserved for visitors.

4.6(2) All employees who park any vehicle(s), except a bicycle, in the capitol complex shall register the vehicle(s) and obtain a parking decal(s) and space or lot assignment within five days after commencing to park said vehicle in capitol complex. No employee is exempt from this registration for any reason.

4.6(3) Employees who fail to obtain a parking decal and space or lot assignment shall not park in the capitol complex.

4.6(4) A parked vehicle may display no more than one state capitol complex parking decal on the same vehicle.

4.6(5) All parking decals must be permanently affixed to the lower windshield on the driver's side within 48 hours of issuance. On a motorcycle, such decal shall be placed upon the back side (nonreflecting) of the rearview mirror. The use of tape or adhesive other than that found on the decal to affix said decal is prohibited.

4.6(6) A lost decal may be replaced upon application to the parking coordinator.

4.6(7) Decals which become damaged or unidentifiable or which are on a vehicle which is being assigned to a different parking lot requiring a new decal, must be replaced upon application to the parking coordinator. If cards used for operating automatic parking gates are lost or damaged to the extent that they are no longer operational, they may be replaced upon paying the fee prescribed by the director. Vehicles which are being released for the purchase of a new vehicle must have the parking decal removed.

401--4.7(18) Temporary parking. If an employee is unable to park in an assigned parking space or lot, the employee must attempt to locate alternative parking in an overflow lot or on the street. An individual who is a visitor on the capitol complex, who drives a vehicle with a decal assigned to a specific lot, may park in a visitors space provided the capitol police are immediately telephoned at (515)281-5608 and given the registration (license plate) number of the vehicle and where it is parked. All time limitations must be observed; no exceptions.

401--4.8(18) Prohibited parking.

4.8(1) Vehicles shall not be parked in a manner that violates any of these rules or state law.

4.8(2) Vehicles shall not be parked in a manner that causes:

a. Two spaces to be occupied.

b. A street, parking lot lane or traffic lane to be blocked within a capitol complex parking lot.

c. A building entrance to be blocked or obstructed.

d. Access to fire hydrants or emergency equipment or vehicles to be blocked or obstructed.

e. Another vehicle to be blocked in.

f. Pedestrian walkways or sidewalks to be obstructed or blocked.

g. The view of an intersection, crosswalk, traffic control sign or signal to be blocked or obstructed within a capitol complex parking lot.

h. An area which is prohibited to vehicle parking to be occupied.

i. Overtime parking.

4.8(3) Vehicles shall not be parked in a space designated for use by visitors with disabilities or employees with disabilities unless the driver is a person with disabilities or is transporting a person with disabilities visitor.

4.8(4) Vehicles shall not be parked in a space or lot unless that space or lot is designated for use by or assigned to the driver. However, spaces or lots that are not otherwise designated (by sign or symbol that indicates a restricted or continuous reserved status such as legislator, emergency vehicle or persons with disabilities) may be used between 6 p.m. and 6 a.m. and during weekends and state government holidays.

4.8(5) Vehicles shall not be parked on curbs, upon grass or in any area not intended for vehicle parking.

4.8(6) Delivery vehicles shall be not parked in a manner or for a period of time that does not comply with the restrictions established for those vehicles by the director or with a traffic control device.

4.8(7) Vehicles for which there remain unpaid parking tickets for a period exceeding 30 calendar days shall not be allowed to park in the capitol complex.

4.8(8) If any vehicle is found stopped, standing or parked in any manner violative of the provisions of these rules and the identity of the operator cannot be determined, the owner, or operator or corporation in whose name said vehicle is registered shall be held responsible for said violation.

401--4.9(18) Waiver. As the purpose of these rules is to facilitate the system of parking, encourage compliance and reduce conflict, any rule contained herein, unless otherwise provided by law, may be suspended or waived by the director to aid law enforcement, to prevent undue hardship in any particular instance or to prevent surprise, unnecessary conflict or injustice. All suspensions and waivers shall be in writing. The director will change space and lot designations, temporarily or permanently, as appropriate to maintain an integrated parking system. Space and lot designation changes may occur during legislative sessions and during periods of construction and special events; changes shall be made in writing.

401--4.10(18) Enforcement.

4.10(1) The capitol police will be primarily responsible for the enforcement of these rules.

4.10(2) The capitol police may in their discretion enforce these rules by:

a. Issuing oral or written orders or directions to an owner or operator.

b. Removing or causing to be removed a vehicle in accordance with subrule 4.10(7). A vehicle may be removed for nonpayment of all parking fines whether or not the vehicle is illegally parked at that time.

c. Commencing the procedure established by the director to impose a fine.

d. Arresting the owner or operator if a public offense is being committed.

e. Issuing a citation (summons to appear in court) if a public offense is being committed.

4.10(3) The director may rescind the privilege to park in the capitol complex for any vehicle for which parking tickets remain unpaid for a period exceeding 30 calendar days.

4.10(4) The director may rescind the privilege to park in the capitol complex for any vehicle that is a habitual violator.

4.10(5) Capitol police have the right to remove from the capitol complex the vehicle of a habitual violator.

4.10(6) If capitol police determine that a vehicle is to be removed, the capitol police shall have the vehicle removed by the use of state equipment or by a private contractor.

4.10(7) The director may contract with an individual or firm to provide services for removing (towing) vehicles found in violation of these rules or state law and to store such vehicles until claimed by the owner or disposed of as abandoned vehicles.

4.10(8) Capitol police, upon impounding a vehicle, shall give notice in person, by telephone or by ordinary mail to the owner of the vehicle. The notice shall state the specific violation claimed or other reason for which it was impounded, its location and the fee for the removal, storage and notice. The towing contractor shall release the vehicle to the owner upon notification by the department of general services that the owner or operator has paid all outstanding citations and the service fee has been paid to the towing contractor. The amount of this fee will be determined by the contract executed by the director and an individual or firm.

4.10(9) If an owner or operator returns to the vehicle prior to its removal, but after the towing contractor has been summoned, the capitol police may require that the vehicle not be taken from the capitol complex until the service vehicle arrives. Upon the service vehicle's arrival, the vehicle may be allowed to leave after the operator pays the service vehicle operator the cost of the service call and after the department of general services notifies the capitol police that all outstanding citations have been paid. The contractor shall issue a receipt for such payment to the owner or operator and the capitol police.

4.10(10) If the owner or operator wishes to contest the fees paid because of the removal or attempted removal of the vehicle, the owner or operator shall immediately notify the office of the director. Upon such notification, the owner or operator will be provided with written instructions that describe the procedure the director will use to conduct a hearing to consider the owner's or operator's evidence and arguments. Upon such notification, the fees paid by the owner or operator shall be considered a bond that will be held to ensure the appearance of the owner or operator at such hearing. The director or other person chosen by the director to act as the hearing officer may determine after the hearing that such bond will be returned, in whole or in part, to the owner or operator or may continue to be retained as fees. If the bond, or part thereof, is returned to the owner, the state shall pay said moneys and the towing contractor will be required to return a part or all of said moneys to the state and the state will reimburse both the owner or operator and towing contractor.

4.10(11) Operators entering a parking lot in a manner not consistent with usual parking lot access procedures shall be subject to a parking citation and possible charge for damages. Access to parking lots inconsistent with usual access procedures includes, but is not limited to: tailgating a car into a parking lot; opening a gate for other persons with operator's card; driving over the curb or around the gate; or lifting a parking gate by hand.

401--4.11(18) Fines. A fine of $5 is hereby established for the violation of any of these rules, except persons with disabilities parking. Improper use of a persons with disabilities parking space is subject to a $100 fine pursuant to Iowa Code section 321L.4(2). A violator may be notified of a violation by being served with a parking violation ticket which:

1. May be served personally to the operator or placed upon the vehicle parked in violation of a rule.

2. Advises the operator of the rule violated.

3. Instructs the operator that the operator is required to pay $5 for each violation charged to the department of general services within ten days by submitting the ticket or the ticket number and payment in cash, check or money order, preferably a check payable to the Department of General Services, Customer Service Center, Hoover Building, Level A, Des Moines, Iowa 50319.

4. Warns the operator that after 30 days the director may rescind the parking privilege of any vehicle or owner or operator having unpaid parking tickets. When the parking privilege is rescinded, the vehicle will not be allowed to park in any employee, visitor or overflow lot in the capitol complex until all fines are paid. The director may authorize capitol police to tow any vehicle found to be parked in the capitol complex for which parking privileges have been rescinded.

5. Warns the violator that failure to pay the fine may result in the director's proceeding against the violator in an Iowa district court.

6. Advises the operator how to obtain a hearing on the charges.

401--4.12(18) Ride sharing. In order to provide incentives for ride sharing, the director may designate specific parking spaces for assignment to carpools. Only those carpools which have four or more people, including the driver, will be given preferred parking space. Each carpool will be issued an identification device which must be hung from the rearview mirror of the vehicle. Only the access card of one member of the carpool will be programmed to provide access to the assigned lot and access to parking lots will be denied all other members of the carpool. The names of those who wish to apply for preferred carpool parking will be maintained by the director; in exceptional circumstances, the director may authorize preferred carpool parking for carpools with fewer than four members.

These rules are intended to implement Iowa Code sections 18.4 and 18.11.

ARC 7755A

HUMAN SERVICES DEPARTMENT[441]

Notice of Intended Action

Twenty-five interested persons, a governmental subdivision, an agency or association of 25 or more persons may demand an oral presentation hereon as provided in Iowa Code section 17A.4(1)"b."

Notice is also given to the public that the Administrative Rules Review Committee may, on its own motion or on written request by any individual or group, review this proposed action under section 17A.8(6) at a regular or special meeting where the public or interested persons may be heard.

Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code section 249A.4, the Department of Human Services proposes to amend Chapter 75, "Conditions of Eligibility," appearing in the Iowa Administrative Code.

This amendment exempts from Medicaid income and resource consideration settlement payments made by the fund established pursuant to the class action case of Susan Walker v. Bayer Corporation, et al. 96-C-5024 (N.D. Ill.) and payments that were entered into in lieu of the class action settlement. This amendment requires that the funds received in the settlement or other payments be kept in a separate account that is identifiable as proceeds from the settlement to be exempt from consideration. Payments made pursuant to a release of all claims in a case that is entered into in lieu of the class settlement must be signed by all affected parties in the cases on or before the later of December 31, 1997, or the date that is 270 days after the date on which the release is first sent to the persons (or the legal representatives of the persons) to whom payment is to be made to be exempt.

A class action lawsuit was filed against four companies that processed and distributed plasma factor, used in the treatment of hemophilia. The settlement was approved between the four companies and a class of more than 6,000 persons with hemophilia who used the factor concentrates between 1978 and 1985 and who became infected with the HIV virus. The settlement is not an admission that the virus was contracted through the use of the plasma factor. Under the agreement each HIV-infected person in the class, or the person's heirs, will receive a payment of $100,000 from the companies.

Congress has approved legislation that exempts the settlement payment from being counted as income or resources to the class member if that person applies for or receives Medicaid.

Consideration will be given to all written data, views, and arguments thereto received by the Bureau of Policy Analysis, Department of Human Services, Hoover State Office Building, Des Moines, Iowa 50319-0114, on or before February 4, 1998.

This amendment is intended to implement Iowa Code section 249A.4.

The following amendment is proposed.

Amend 441--Chapter 75 by adding the following new rule:

441--75.27(249A) AIDS/HIV settlement payments. The following payments are exempt as income and resources when determining eligibility for or the amount of Medicaid benefits under any coverage group if the payments are kept in a separate, identifiable account:

75.27(1) Class settlement payments. Payments made from any fund established pursuant to a class settlement in the case of Susan Walker v. Bayer Corporation, et al., 96-C-5024 (N. D. Ill.) are exempt.

75.27(2) Other settlement payments. Payments made pursuant to a release of all claims in a case that is entered into in lieu of the class settlement referred to in subrule 75.27(1) and that is signed by all affected parties in the cases on or before the later of December 31, 1997, or the date that is 270 days after the date on which the release is first sent to the person (or the legal representative of the person) to whom payment is to be made are exempt.

ARC 7756A

HUMAN SERVICES DEPARTMENT[441]

Notice of Intended Action

Twenty-five interested persons, a governmental subdivision, an agency or association of 25 or more persons may demand an oral presentation hereon as provided in Iowa Code section 17A.4(1)"b."

Notice is also given to the public that the Administrative Rules Review Committee may, on its own motion or on written request by any individual or group, review this proposed action under section 17A.8(6) at a regular or special meeting where the public or interested persons may be heard.

Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code section 249A.4, the Department of Human Services proposes to amend Chapter 79, "Other Policies Relating to Providers of Medical and Remedial Care," appearing in the Iowa Administrative Code.

These changes strengthen the requirements for Medicaid provider documentation of services. The amendment defines minimum documentation required to support the medical necessity of a service and, therefore, its reimbursement. The basis of the changes is the American Medical Association's Principles of Documentation modified to fit other providers.

Consideration will be given to all written data, views, and arguments thereto received by the Bureau of Policy Analysis, Department of Human Services, Hoover State Office Building, Des Moines, Iowa 50319-0114, on or before February 4, 1998.

This amendment is intended to implement Iowa Code section 249A.4.

The following amendment is proposed.

Rescind rule 441--79.3(249A) and insert the following new rule in lieu thereof:

441--79.3(249A) Maintenance of fiscal and clinical rec-ords by providers of service. The fiscal and clinical records shall be maintained for a minimum of five years from when a charge was made to the program. After five years the fiscal and clinical records may be destroyed.

79.3(1) Fiscal records. Providers of service shall maintain fiscal records in support of services for which a charge is made to the program and shall make the records available to the department or its duly authorized representative on request. The fiscal records shall support each item of service for which a charge is made to the program. The fiscal record does not constitute a clinical record.

79.3(2) Clinical records. Providers of service shall maintain complete and legible clinical records for which a charge is made to the program documenting that the services are medically necessary, the services are consistent with the diagnosis of the patient's condition, and the services are consistent with professionally recognized standards of care. Providers shall make the records available to the department or its duly authorized representative on request. The documentation for each patient encounter shall include the following when appropriate:

a. Complaint and symptoms; history; examination findings; diagnostic test results; assessment, clinical impression or diagnosis; plan for care; date; and identity of the observer.

b. Specific procedures or treatments performed.

c. Medications or other supplies.

d. Patient's progress, response to and changes in treatment, and revision of diagnosis.

e. Information necessary to support each item of service reported on the Medicaid claim form.

79.3(3) Failure to maintain supporting fiscal and clinical records may result in claim denials or recoupment.

79.3(4) Medicaid providers contracted under 441--Chapter 152 are not subject to subrules 79.3(1), 79.3(2), and 79.3(3).

This rule is intended to implement Iowa Code section 249A.4.

ARC 7757A

HUMAN SERVICES DEPARTMENT[441]

Notice of Intended Action

Twenty-five interested persons, a governmental subdivision, an agency or association of 25 or more persons may demand an oral presentation hereon as provided in Iowa Code section 17A.4(1)"b."

Notice is also given to the public that the Administrative Rules Review Committee may, on its own motion or on written request by any individual or group, review this proposed action under section 17A.8(6) at a regular or special meeting where the public or interested persons may be heard.

Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code Supplement subsection 239B.4(3), the Department of Human Services proposes to amend Chapter 93, "PROMISE JOBS Program," appearing in the Iowa Administrative Code.

This amendment revises the review process for a Limited Benefit Plan chosen after signing a Family Investment Agreement to allow flexibility.

Family Investment Program participants must participate in PROMISE JOBS. With their PROMISE JOBS worker, participants must develop and sign a Family Investment Agreement (FIA) which is the family plan for achieving self-sufficiency. Participants who abandon the FIA, i.e., who stop carrying out the steps of their self-sufficiency plan, have chosen by that action the Limited Benefit Plan (LBP). A PROMISE JOBS participant may not reconsider participation under an LBP chosen after signing the FIA. Therefore, a request from PROMISE JOBS staff to impose an LBP is subject to review before a Notice of Decision can be issued establishing the beginning date of the LBP.

Under current policy the review must be completed by the administrator of the Division of Economic Assistance or the administrator's designee.

This amendment will allow a Limited Benefit Plan chosen after signing a Family Investment Agreement to be reviewed according to a procedure developed or approved by the administrator of the Department's Division of Economic Assistance or the administrator's designee.

The review of each request to impose the LBP for participants who choose the LBP after signing the FIA is used to ensure that FIP participants are not mistakenly or lightly placed in an LBP which has no reconsideration option. PROMISE JOBS staff in the PROMISE JOBS Service Delivery Regions (SDR) believe that there may be other ways to accomplish a review of a request to impose the LBP which may be equally effective in protecting participant rights and more effective in carrying out the objectives of thePROMISE JOBS program. They have asked for this rule change to allow opportunity for change in current procedures.

The proposed amendment will allow flexibility for the Department of Human Services to work in partnership with Iowa Workforce Development and PROMISE JOBS SDR staff to develop alternative procedures for review of the LBP requests. The proposed amendment will give the PROMISE JOBS partners the opportunity to keep current procedures, consider statewide procedures other than those in use today, or consider local procedures developed to fit SDR circumstances.

The proposed amendment keeps the requirement for a review of LBPs requested for participants who do not carry out the steps of the FIA. It continues to fulfill the expectation that FIP participants will not be mistakenly or lightly placed in an LBP with no reconsideration option. It allows opportunities for development of a review process which may be designed to be an improvement over current procedures. However, there may be some advocates who believe the current procedure should remain in place as a guarantee of due process.

Consideration will be given to all written data, views, and arguments thereto received by the Bureau of Policy Analysis, Department of Human Services, Hoover State Office Building, Des Moines, Iowa 50319-0114, on or before February 4, 1998.

Oral presentations may be made by persons appearing at the following meetings. Written comments will also be accepted at these times.

Cedar Rapids - February 6, 1998
Cedar Rapids Regional Office
Iowa Building - Suite 600
Sixth Floor Conference Room
411 Third St. S. E.
Cedar Rapids, Iowa 52401

10 a.m.
Council Bluffs - February 4, 1998
Lower Level
Council Bluffs Regional Office
417 E. Kanesville Boulevard
Council Bluffs, Iowa 51501
9 a.m.
Davenport - February 5, 1998
Davenport Area Office
Bicentennial Building - Fifth Floor
Conference Room 3428 Western
Davenport, Iowa 52801
10 a.m.
Des Moines - February 5, 1998
Des Moines Regional Office
City View Plaza
Conference Room 104
1200 University
Des Moines, Iowa 50314
1 p.m.
Mason City - February 5, 1998
Mason City Area Office
Mohawk Square, Liberty Room
22 North Georgia Avenue
Mason City, Iowa 50401
10 a.m.
Ottumwa - February 4, 1998
Ottumwa Area Office
Conference Room 2
120 East Main
Ottumwa, Iowa 52501
10 a.m.
Sioux City - February 5, 1998
Sioux City Regional Office
Fifth Floor
520 Nebraska St.
Sioux City, Iowa 51101
1 p.m.
Waterloo - February 4, 1998
Waterloo Regional Office
Pinecrest Office Building
Conference Room 420
1407 Independence Avenue
Waterloo, Iowa 50703
10 a.m.

Any persons who intend to attend a public hearing and have special requirements such as hearing or vision impairments should contact the Bureau of Policy Analysis at (515)281-8440 and advise of special needs.

This amendment is intended to implement Iowa Code Supplement section 239B.9.

The following amendment is proposed.

Amend subrule 93.138(3), paragraph "a," by rescinding subparagraph (3) and inserting the following new subparagraph in lieu thereof:

(3) If the above steps do not lead to fulfillment of the FIA, the request to impose an LBP for the case shall be reviewed under procedures developed or approved by the division of economic assistance administrator or the administrator'sdesignee.

ARC 7758A

HUMAN SERVICES DEPARTMENT[441]

Notice of Intended Action

Twenty-five interested persons, a governmental subdivision, an agency or association of 25 or more persons may demand an oral presentation hereon as provided in Iowa Code section 17A.4(1)"b."

Notice is also given to the public that the Administrative Rules Review Committee may, on its own motion or on written request by any individual or group, review this proposed action under section 17A.8(6) at a regular or special meeting where the public or interested persons may be heard.

Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code section 237.3, the Department of Human Services proposes to amend Chapter 113, "Licensing and Regulation of Foster Family Homes," appearing in the Iowa Administrative Code.

This amendment provides for an emergency placement process in foster homes that are over licensed capacity and clarifies when regional variances to licensing capacity may be granted.

Under current policy a regional administrator may grant a variance to licensing capacity to keep a sibling group together and to allow the placement of up to three foster children when foster parents who have three or more biological and adoptive children have shown the ability to parent a large number of children. Additional exceptions to licensing capacity may be granted by the Director of the Department.

Current policy is revised to clarify that before a variance can be granted, at least one sibling of the child or children needing placement must currently be residing in the foster home or could be placed there within the licensed capacity of the foster home. Policy is also revised to clarify that relative placements are considered as well as biological and adoptive children when determining if a variance to the licensing capacity is needed.

A new process is added which allows the regional administrator to grant a variance if an emergency placement must be made in a foster family home that causes the home to exceed its licensed capacity. These emergency placements shall be made according to a preapproved regional plan as outlined below and are limited to a maximum of 30 days.

Prior to the start of each fiscal year, each region shall submit to central office for approval a plan for an emergency which necessitates the placement of a child in a foster family home that would exceed the licensing capacity. The regional plan shall define emergencies, identify a specific pool of preapproved homes, and provide for placement of up to three additional foster children above the numbers allowed by variances in the chart.

Consideration will be given to all written data, views, and arguments thereto received by the Bureau of Policy Analysis, Department of Human Services, Hoover State Office Building, Des Moines, Iowa 50319-0114, on or before February 4, 1998.

This amendment is intended to implement Iowa Code sections 237.3 and 237.5.

The following amendment is proposed.

Amend subrule 113.4(1) as follows:

113.4(1) Number of children. A foster family home shall be licensed for the care of only up to five children including the foster family's biological and adoptive children and any relative placements. Any exceptions variance to this rule must:

a. Be documented in the case record with reasons given for granting the exception, and approved by the regional administrator or designee.

b. Be approved by the district administrator, and documented in the licensing record with reasons given for granting the variance.

c. Meet one of the following criteria:

(1) An exception A variance is necessary to keep a sibling group together. No variance shall be granted if the foster home is at licensed capacity and there are no members of the sibling group in the foster home.

(2) When the foster parents have three or more biological and adoptive children and relative placements in the home and the parents have shown the ability to parent a large number of children, an exception a regional variance may be made approved to allow the placement of up to three foster children. as set forth in the chart below:

No. of birth/
relative/adoptive placements

Maximum License Capacity:


Without
regional
variance

With regional
variance

0 children
5
Not applicable
1 child
4
Not applicable
2 children
3
Not applicable
3 children
2
3
4 children
1
3
5 or more children
0
3

(3) An emergency placement must be made in a foster family home that causes the home to exceed its licensed capacity. These emergency placements shall be made according to a preapproved regional plan as outlined below and are limited to a maximum of 30 days.

Prior to the start of each fiscal year, each region shall submit to central office for approval a plan for an emergency which necessitates the placement of a child in a foster family home that would exceed the licensing capacity. The regional plan shall define emergencies and identify a specific pool of preapproved homes which shall provide for placement of up to three additional foster children above the number that is allowed by the variances in the chart in subparagraph (2).

d. All other licensing requirements including, but not limited to, parenting ability and available bedroom space must be met before a foster home can be approved for a variance.

ARC 7775A

PUBLIC HEALTH DEPARTMENT[641]

Notice of Intended Action

Twenty-five interested persons, a governmental subdivision, an agency or association of 25 or more persons may demand an oral presentation hereon as provided in Iowa Code section 17A.4(1)"b."

Notice is also given to the public that the Administrative Rules Review Committee may, on its own motion or on written request by any individual or group, review this proposed action under section 17A.8(6) at a regular or special meeting where the public or interested persons may be heard.

Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code section 136C.3, the Iowa Department of Public Health hereby gives Notice of Intended Action to amend Chapter 38, "General Provisions," Chapter 39, "Registration of Radiation Machine Facilities, Licensure of Radioactive Materials and Transportation of Radioactive Materials," Chapter 40, "Standards for Protection Against Radiation," Chapter 41, "Safety Requirements for the Use of Radiation Machines and Certain Uses of Radioactive Materials," Chapter 42, "Operating Procedures and Standards for Use of Radiation Emitting Equipment," and Chapter 45, "Radiation Safety Requirements for Industrial Radiographic Operations," Iowa Administrative Code.

These rules are being revised to incorporate changes in references for clarification and to incorporate changes made at the federal level which establish national radiation protection standards.

Any interested persons may make written suggestions or comments on the proposed amendments by 4:30 p.m. on February 3, 1998. Such written material should be directed to Donald A. Flater, Chief, Bureau of Radiological Health, Lucas State Office Building, Des Moines, Iowa 50319; fax (515)242-6284.

A public hearing will be held on February 3, 1998, at 9 a.m. in the Third Floor Conference Room, Side 2, Lucas State Office Building, Des Moines, Iowa, at which time persons may present their views orally or in writing. At the hearing, persons will be asked to state their names, addresses and whom they represent. Presenters will also be asked to confine their remarks to the subject of the amendments.

The proposed amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code chapters 136B and 136C.

The following amendments are proposed.

ITEM 1. Amend 641--38.1(136C) as follows:

641--38.1(136C) Purpose and scope.

38.1(1) Except as otherwise specifically provided, these rules apply to all persons who receive, possess, use, transfer, own, or acquire any source of radiation; provided, however, that nothing in these rules shall apply to any person to the extent such person is subject to regulation by the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission. Attention is directed to the fact that regulation by the state of source material, by-product material, and special nuclear material in quantities not sufficient to form a critical mass is subject to the provisions of the agreement between the state and the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission and to 10 CFR Part 150 of the Commission's regulations. All references to Code of Federal Regulations (CFRs) in this chapter are those in effect as of October 1, 1996.

38.1(2) All references to Code of Federal Regulations (CFRs) in this chapter are those in effect as of July 1, 1998.

38.1(3) The provisions of Chapter 38 are in addition to, and not in substitution for, any other applicable portions of Chapters 39 to 45.

ITEM 2. Amend 641--38.2(136C), by amending the introductory paragraph and by amending, adding or rescinding the following definitions:

641--38.2(136C) Definitions. As used in these rules, these terms have the definitions set forth below and are adopted by reference and included herein for 641--Chapters 39 to 46 45.

"Activity" means the rate of disintegration or transformation or decay of radioactive material. The units of activity are the curie (Ci) and the becquerel (bq) (Bq) and the curie (ci).

"Air kerma (K)" means the kinetic energy released in air by ionizing radiation. Kerma is determined as the quotient of dE by dM, where dE is the sum of the initial kinetic energies of all the charged ionizing particles liberated by uncharged ionizing particles in air of mass dM. The SI unit of air kerma is joule per kilogram and the special name for the unit of kerma is the gray (Gy).

"Assembler" means any person engaged in the business of assembling, replacing, or installing one or more components into an X-ray system or subsystem. The term includes the owner of an X-ray system or the employee or agent who assembles components into an X-ray system that is subsequently used to provide professional or commercial services.

"Beam monitoring system" means a system designed to detect and measure the radiation present in the useful beam.

"Cabinet radiography" means industrial radiography conducted in an enclosure or cabinet shielded so that radiation levels at every location on the exterior meet the limitations specified in 641--40.26(136C).

"Changeable filters" means any filter, exclusive of inherent filtration, which can be removed from the useful beam through any electronic, mechanical, or physical process.

"Chelating agent" means amine polycarboxylic acids, hydroxycarboxylic acids, gluconic acid, and polycarboxylic acids.

"Diagnostic X-ray imaging system" means an assemblage of components for the generation, emission and reception of X-rays and the transformation, storage and visual display of the resultant X-ray image which are designed and used for irradiation of any part of the human body for the purpose of diagnosis or visualization.

"Explosive material" means any chemical compound, mixture, or device which produces a substantial instantaneous release of gas and heat spontaneously or by contact with sparks or flame.

"Facility" means the location, building, vehicle, or complex under one administrative control, at which radioactive material is stored or used or at which one or more radiation machines are installed, located or used.

"Industrial radiography" means a nondestructive testing method using ionizing radiation, such as gamma rays or X-rays, to make radiographic images.

"Instrument traceability" means, for ionizing radiation measurements, the ability to show that an instrument has been calibrated at specified time intervals using a national standard or a transfer standard. If a transfer standard is used, the calibration must be from a laboratory accredited by a program which required continuing participation in measurement quality assurance with the National Institute of Standards and Technology or other equivalent national or international program.

"Ionizing radiation." See "Radiation."

"Irradiation" means the exposure of matter to ionizing radiation.

"Licensed practitioner" means a person licensed or otherwise authorized by law to practice medicine, osteopathy, chiropractic, podiatry, dentistry, or dental hygiene, or certification as a physician assistant as defined in Iowa Code section 148C.1, subsection 6, and is authorized to prescribe X-ray tests for the purpose of diagnosis or treatment.

"Natural radioactivity" means the radioactivity of naturally occurring nuclides.

"Particle accelerator" means any machine capable of accelerating electrons, protons, deuterons, or other charged particles in a vacuum and of discharging the resultant particulate or other radiation into a medium at energies usually in excess of 1 MeV. See "Accelerator."

"Patient" means an individual or animal subjected to healing arts examination, diagnosis or treatment.

"Peak tube potential" means the maximum value of the potential difference across the X-ray tube during an exposure.

"Phantom" means a volume of material behaving in a manner similar to tissue with respect to the attenuation and scattering of radiation. This requires that both the atomic number (Z) and the density of the material be similar to that of tissue.

"Primary dose monitoring system" means a system which will monitor the useful beam during irradiation and which will terminate irradiation when a preselected number of dose monitor units have been acquired.

"Pyrophoric material" means any liquid that ignites spontaneously in dry or moist air at or below 130deg. F (54.4deg. C) or solid, other than one classed as an explosive, which under normal conditions is liable to cause fires through friction, retained heat from manufacturing or processing, or which can be ignited readily and, when ignited, burns so vigorously and persistently as to create a serious transportation, handling, or disposal hazard. Included are spontaneously combustible and water-reactive materials.

"Qualified expert" means an individual having the knowledge and training to measure ionizing radiation, to evaluate safety techniques, and to advise regarding radiation protection needs. For example, individuals certified in the appropriate field by the American Board of Radiology, the American Board of Medical Physics, or the American Board of Health Physics, or those having equivalent qualifications. With reference to the calibration of radiation therapy equipment, an individual having, in addition to the above qualifications, training and experience in the clinical applications of radiation physics to radiation therapy, for example, individuals certified in Therapeutic Radiological Physics or X-Ray and Radium Physics by the American Board of Radiology, or those having equivalent qualifications.

"Radiation safety officer" means one an individual who has the knowledge and responsibility to apply appropriate radiation protection regulations and has been assigned such responsibility by the licensee or registrant.

"Registrant" means any person who is registered with the agency and or is legally obligated to register with the agency pursuant to these rules and the Act.

"Scattered radiation" means ionizing radiation emitted by interaction of ionizing radiation with matter, the interaction being accompanied by a change in direction of the radiation. Scattered primary radiation means that scattered radiation which has been deviated in direction only by materials irradiated by the useful beam.

"Source" means the focal spot of the X-ray tube.

"Source traceability" means the ability to show that a radioactive source has been calibrated either by the national standards laboratory of the National Institute of Standards and Technology or by a laboratory which participates in continuing measurement quality assurance programs with National Institute of Standards and Technology or other equivalent national or international program.

"Special nuclear material in quantities not sufficient to form a critical mass" means uranium enriched in the isotope U-235 in quantities not exceeding 350 grams of contained U-235; uranium-233 in quantities not exceeding 200 grams; plutonium in quantities not exceeding 200 grams; or any combination of them in accordance with the following formula: For each kind of special nuclear material, determine the ratio between the quantity of that special nuclear material and the quantity specified above for the same kind of special nuclear material. The sum of such ratios for all of the kinds of special nuclear material in combination shall not exceed 1. For example, the following quantities in combination would not exceed the limitation and are within the formula:

175 (grams
containedU-235)

+
50
(grams U-233)

+
50
(grams Pu)

=
1
350


200


200



175 (grams
contained U-235)

+
50
(grams U-233)

+
50
(grams Pu)

=
1
350


200


200



"Teletherapy" means therapeutic irradiation in which the source of radiation is at a distance from the body.

"These rules" means 641--Chapters 38 to 46 45.

"Traceable to a national standard." See "Instrument traceability" or "Source traceability."

"Tube" means an X-ray tube unless otherwise specified. See "X-ray tube."

"Unrestricted area" means an area that is not a restricted area. (See "Restricted area.") to which access is neither limited nor controlled by the licensee or registrant. For purposes of these rules, "uncontrolled area" is an equivalent term.

"Wedge filter" means an added filter effecting continuous progressive attenuation on all or part of the useful beam.

"X-ray tube" means any electron tube which is designed to be used primarily for the production of X-rays.

ITEM 3. Amend 38.4(4) as follows:

38.4(4) Units of exposure and dose.

a. As used in these rules, the unit of Exposure is the coulomb per kilogram (C/kg) of air. One roentgen is equal to 2.58E-4 coulomb per kilogram of air.

b. As used in these rules, the units of dose are:

Gray (Gy) is the SI unit of absorbed dose. One gray is equal to an absorbed dose of 1 joule per kilogram (100 rad). Rad is the special unit of absorbed dose. One rad is equal to an absorbed dose of 100 erg per gram or 0.01 joule per kilogram (0.01 Gy). Rem is the special unit of any of the quantities expressed as dose equivalent. The dose equivalent in rem is equal to the absorbed dose in rad multiplied by the quality factor (1 rem = 0.01 Sv).

Sievert is the SI unit of any of the quantities expressed as dose equivalent. The dose equivalent in sievert is equal to the absorbed dose in gray multiplied by the quality factor (1 Sv = 100 rem).

c a. As used in these rules, the quality factors for converting absorbed dose to dose equivalent are shown in Table I.

TABLE I (No change)

d b. If it is more convenient to measure the neutron fluence rate than to determine the neutron dose equivalent rate in sievert per hour or rem per hour, as provided in 38.4(4)"a," 1 rem (0.01 Sv) of neutron radiation of unknown energies may, for purposes of these rules, be assumed to result from a total fluence of 25 million neutrons per square centimeter incident upon the body. If sufficient information exists to estimate the approximate energy distribution of the neutrons, the licensee or registrant may use the fluence rate per unit dose equivalent or the appropriate Q value from Table II to convert a measured tissue dose in gray or rad to dose equivalent in sievert or rem.

TABLE II (No change)

ITEM 4. Rescind and reserve 38.4(5).

ITEM 5. Amend 641--38.6(136C) to read as follows:

641--38.6(136C) Prohibited uses. A hand-held fluoroscopic screen shall not be used with X-ray equipment unless it has been listed in the Registry of Sealed Source and Devices or accepted for certification by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration, Center for Devices and Radiological Health. A shoe-fitting fluoroscopic device shall not be used.

ITEM 6. Amend 641--38.7(136C) to read as follows:

641--38.7(136C) Communications.

38.7(1) All communications and reports concerning these rules, and applications filed thereunder, should be addressed to the agency at its office located at the Iowa Department of Public Health, Bureau of Radiological Health, Lucas State Office Building, Des Moines, Iowa 50319.

38.7(2) Drafts of proposed regulations released to the department from the federal government which constitute essential information needed by the department to ensure compliance with federal regulations are not available for public examination. Therefore, pursuant to Iowa Code section 22.9, the department waives the provision of Iowa Code section 22.2 as it applies to these proposed draft regulations.

ITEM 7. Amend 38.8(1) as follows:

38.8(1) Radiation machines.

a. Each registrant shall, at the time of registration and each year the anniversary date thereafter, as long as the registrant owns the radiation machine, remit to the agency a fee sufficient to defray the cost of registering the equipment with the department. All fees shall be paid annually in the form of a check or money order made payable to the Iowa Department of Public Health. The fees to be paid shall be in the amount computed by the following schedule:

ANNUAL FEE SCHEDULE




Type of X-ray machine

Fee per tube
Maximum
fee
1.
Medical
$51
$1500
2.
Osteopathy
$51
$1500
3.
Chiropractic
$51
$1500
4.
Dentistry
$39
$1000
5.
Podiatry
$39
$1000
6.
Veterinary Medicine
$25
--
7.
Radiography
(Industrial
/Nonmedical Use)
$50
--
8.
Analytical
$50
--
8 9.
Sterilization
$80
--
9 10.
Other Accelerators
$100
--
10 11.
Electron Microscope
$20
--
Fees for radiation machines not listed in the above schedule shall not be less than $50 per unit/tube.

b. No change.

c. Each person who is engaged in the business of installing or offering to furnish radiation machines or is engaged in the business of furnishing or offering to furnish radiation machine servicing or service in the state shall apply for registration of such service with the agency prior to furnishing or offering to furnish any such service. Application shall be on a form provided by the department and include an annual nonrefundable fee of $100. The fee shall accompany the application form in the form of a check or money order made payable to the Iowa Department of Public Health.

ITEM 8. Amend 38.8(2) as follows:

38.8(2) Radioactive material licensing, inspection and registration fee.

a. Licensing.

(1) Fees associated with licensing of the possession and use of radioactive materials in Iowa are identical to those specified in 10 CFR 170.31 entitled "Schedule of Fees for Materials Licenses and Other Regulatory Services."

(2) All required fees for new radioactive materials licenses, amendments to licenses, or renewal of licenses, shall accompany the application for the requested action and be made payable to the Iowa Department of Public Health.

b. Inspections.

(1) After completion of an inspection, an inspection fee shall be assessed to a facility based on the fees for inspection found in 10 CFR 170.32 entitled "Schedule of Fees for Health and Safety, and Safeguards Inspections for Materials Licenses."

(2) All required fees for inspections conducted by the agency shall be paid within 30 days after receipt of the agency notification following the inspection and shall be made payable to the Iowa Department of Public Health.

c. Registration. Each person having generally licensed radioactive materials shall annually register with the department and pay a nonrefundable annual fee of $150. The registration must be on the appropriate agency form and the fee must be in the form of a check or money order made payable to the Iowa Department of Public Health.

ITEM 9. Amend 38.8(3) as follows:

38.8(3) Industrial radiography testing and certification.

a. A nonrefundable fee of $100 shall be submitted with each application for taking an industrial radiography examination to become certified by the agency. The fee shall be made payable to the Iowa Department of Public Health.

b. A fee of $25 shall be made payable to the Iowa Department of Public Health to cover the cost of replacing be submitted in order to replace lost identification cards issued to industrial radiographers by the agency pursuant to 641--subrule 45.11(3).

ITEM 10. Amend 38.8(5) as follows:

38.8(5) Environmental surveillance fee. A fee may be levied against any licensee for environmental surveillance activities which are necessary to access the radiological impact of activities conducted by the registrant or licensee. This fee shall be sufficient to defray actual costs incurred by the agency, including, but not limited to, salaries of agency employees, per diem, travel, and costs of laboratory analysis of samples, when required. This fee shall also be sufficient to cover the costs of leak test analysis of wipes taken by agency employees during surveillance activities.

ITEM 11. Amend 38.8(6) as follows:

38.8(6) Certification fees. Diagnostic radiographers, radiation therapists, and nuclear medicine technologists, other than licensed practitioners of the healing arts, are required to pay fees sufficient to defray the cost of administering 641--Chapter 42. Fees are as follows:

a. Annual fee. Each individual must submit a $45 initial fee for the first year and $35 annually in the form of a money order or check made payable to the Iowa Department of Public Health.

b. Examination fee.

(1) Each individual making application to take an examination given by the agency as a general diagnostic radiographer under 641--42.1(4)"b"(3), general nuclear medicine technologist, or general radiation therapist as defined in Chapter 42 must pay a nonrefundable fee of $25 each time the individual takes the examination required by 641--Chapter 42.

(2) Each individual making application to take an examination given by the agency as a limited diagnostic radiographer under 641--42.1(4)"b"(1) or 42.1(4)"b"(2), limited nuclear medicine technologist, or limited radiation therapist as defined in Chapter 42 must pay a nonrefundable fee of $35 each time the individual takes the examination required by 641--Chapter 42.

c. Recertification fees. Once certification has been terminated for failure to complete continuing education requirements, any individual who requests permission to reestablish certification within six months of the initial continuing education due date must meet the training and testing requirements of 641--Chapter 42, submit proof of continuing education hours and shall submit a late fee of $30 in addition to the annual fee in order to obtain reinstatement of certification.

ITEM 12. Amend 38.8(7) as follows:

38.8(7) Returned check and late fees. Persons who fail to pay required fees to the agency are subject to the following penalties:

a. and b. No change.

c. Late fees for 641--Chapter 42 continuing education requirements.

(1) For any individual who completes the required continuing education before the continuing education due date but fails to submit the required proof within 30 days after the continuing education due date, the certification shall be terminated and the renewal fee will not be refunded.

(2) For any individual who fails to complete the required continuing education before the continuing education due date but submits a written plan of correction to obtain the required hours, that person shall be allowed no more than 60 days after the original continuing education due date to complete the plan of correction and submit the documentation of completion of continuing education requirements. After 60 days, the certification shall be terminated and the individual shall not function as a diagnostic radiographer, radiation therapist, or nuclear medicine technologist in Iowa.

(3) Once certification has been terminated, any individual who requests permission to reestablish certification within six months of the initial continuing education due date must submit proof of continuing education hours and shall submit a late fee of $30 in addition to the annual fee in order to obtain reinstatement of certification.

ITEM 13. Amend 38.8(8), introductory paragraph and paragraph "b," as follows:

38.8(8) Reciprocity. Fees paid for reciprocal recognition of out-of-state persons wishing to utilize radiation machines or radioactive materials in Iowa shall allow the out-of-state person to operate for a total of 180 days during the one-year 365-day reciprocity period starting the date the fee is received by the agency.

b. Radioactive materials. Out-of-state persons wishing to bring sources of radioactive material into Iowa for business purposes may be subject to a reciprocity fee depending on the type of activity to be performed and the type of radioactive materials license possessed (refer to 641--subrule 39.4(90)). If a reciprocity fee is applicable, it shall be assessed at the rate for reciprocity specified in 10 CFR 170.31 38.8(2) for each 365-day reciprocity period. In addition, if the agency performs an inspection of the out-of-state person's activities while in Iowa, the appropriate inspection fee as specified in 10 CFR 170.31 38.8(2) will be assessed.

ITEM 14. Amend 38.8(9) as follows:

38.8(9) Radon certification. Any person wishing to become certified as a radon measurement specialist or radon measurement laboratory, is required to pay fees sufficient to defray the cost of administering this chapter. Fees, which must be submitted in the form of a check or money order made payable to the Iowa Department of Public Health, are as follows:

a. No change.

b. Examination fee. Each person taking the EPA radon proficiency examination shall pay a fee of $125. The fee must be in the form of a check or money order made payable to the Iowa Department of Public Health and must be submitted prior to testing.

c. to e. No change.

ITEM 15. Amend 38.8(10) as follows:

38.8(10) Radon mitigation credentialing. Any person wishing to become credentialed as a radon mitigation specialist shall be required to pay fees sufficient to defray the cost of administering 641--Chapter 44. Fees, which must be submitted in the form of a check or money order made payable to the Iowa Department of Public Health, are as follows:

a. and b. No change.

c. Examination fee. Each person taking the EPA radon proficiency examination, if it is administered by the Iowa department of public health, shall pay a fee of $125. The fee must be in the form of a check or money order made payable to the Iowa Department of Public Health and must be submitted prior to testing.

ITEM 16. Amend 39.1(3) as follows:

39.1(3) All references to any Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) in this chapter are those in effect as of October 1, 1996 July 1, 1998.

ITEM 17. Adopt new 39.1(4) as follows:

39.1(4) In addition to the requirements of this chapter, all registrants are subject to the requirements of 641--Chapters 38 and 40. Furthermore, registrants engaged in healing arts are subject to the requirements of 641--Chapters 41 and 42; registrants engaged in industrial/nonmedical radiographic operations are subject to the requirements of 641--Chapter 45.

ITEM 18. Amend 641--39.2(136C) as follows:

641--39.2(136C) Definitions. For the purpose of this chapter, the definitions in 641--Chapter 38 may also apply to this chapter.

39.2(1) For the purpose of this chapter, the definitions in 641--Chapter 39 may also apply to Chapters 38 and 40 to 46.

39.2(2) As used in this chapter, "facility" means the location at which one or more devices or sources are installed and located within one building, vehicle, or under one roof and are under the same administrative control.

ITEM 19. Amend 39.3(1)"a" as follows:

a. Electronic equipment that produces radiation incidental to its operation for other purposes is exempt from the registration and notification requirements of this chapter, provided that the dose equivalent rate averaged over an area of 10 square centimeters does not exceed 0.5 millirem (5 mSv) (5 uSv) per hour at 5 centimeters from any accessible surface of such equipment. The production, testing, or factory servicing of such equipment shall not be exempt.

ITEM 20. Amend 39.3(2)"a" as follows:

a. Apply for registration of such facility with the agency prior to the operation of a radiation machine facility. In order to register equipment, the person must have a permanent office located in Iowa that has a telephone, employee and equipment, and storage for records regarding the equipment and operator certification. Application for registration shall be completed on forms furnished by the agency and shall include the following: appropriate fee from 641--38.8(136C).

(1) Name, address, and telephone number of:

1. The facility;

2. The owner of the facility;

3. The individual responsible for the use of the facility; and

4. The individual designated under 39.3(2)"b."

(2) The manufacturer, model number, and type of each radiation machine located within the facility.

(3) If the facility is mobile, the geographic areas within the state to be covered by the operations of the facility.

(4) The signature of the individual designated under 39.3(2)"b."

(5) Name of the radiation machine supplier, installer and service agent.

(6) The date of application and signature of the individual responsible for the use of the facility.

ITEM 21. Amend 39.3(3)"b" as follows:

b. Application for registration shall be completed on forms furnished by the agency and shall contain all information required by the agency as indicated on the forms and accompanying instructions and include the fee required in 641--paragraph 38.8(1)"c."

ITEM 22. Amend 39.3(10)"c"(3) as follows:

(3) Not operate within the state on a temporary basis in excess of 180 calendar days in a one-year 365-day reciprocity period. The one-year 365-day reciprocity period starts on the day the agency receives the appropriate fee, as specified in 641--subrule 38.8(8), and ends exactly 365 days later. It is the registrant's responsibility to ensure the 180-day limit is not exceeded during the one-year 365-day reciprocity period and to ensure that the reciprocal recognition is renewed 30 days prior to the expiration of the one-year 365-day reciprocity period.

ITEM 23. Rescind 39.3(11).

ITEM 24. Amend 39.4(1) as follows:

39.4(1) In addition to the requirements of this chapter, all licensees are subject to the requirements of 641--Chapters 38, 40 and 41. Furthermore, licensees engaged in industrial/nonmedical radiographic operations are subject to the requirements of 641--Chapter 45; licensees using radionuclides in the healing arts are subject to the requirements of 641--41.2(136C), 42.2(136C) and 42.3(136C) and 641-- Chapter 42; and licensees engaged in land disposal of radioactive material are subject to the requirements of 641-- Chapter 40; and licensees engaged in wireline and subsurface tracer studies are subject to the requirements of 641-- 41.5(136C).

ITEM 25. Amend 39.4(3)"a" by adding new (3) as follows:

(3) An exemption is granted to persons who receive, possess, use, process, transfer, distribute, and dispose of materials containing or contaminated at concentrations less than 20 picocuries per gram of radium.

ITEM 26. Amend 39.4(3)"c"(1)"9" as follows:

9. Ionizing radiation measuring instruments or detection devices containing, for purposes of internal calibration or standardization, one or more sources of radioactive material, provided that:


* Each source contains no more than one exempt quantity set forth in Appendix B of this chapter;


* Each instrument device contains no more than ten exempt quantities. For purposes of this requirement, an instrument's source(s) may contain either one or different types of radionuclides and an individual exempt quantity may be composed of fractional parts of one or more of the exempt quantities in Appendix B of this chapter, provided that the sum fractions shall not exceed unity; or


* For americium-241, 0.05 microcurie (1.85 kBq) is considered an exempt quantity under 39.4(3)"c"(1)"9."

ITEM 27. Amend 39.4(20) by adding new paragraphs "c" and "d" as follows:

c. The applicant must have a permanent office located in Iowa that has a telephone, employee and equipment, and storage for records regarding the equipment and operator certification.

d. All licensees and registrants must submit the appropriate fee in 641--subrule 38.8(2).

ITEM 28. Amend 39.4(24)"a" as follows:

a. Applications for specific licenses shall be filed in duplicate on a form prescribed by the agency and include the fee required in 641--subrule 38.8(2).

ITEM 29. Amend 39.4(25)"d" as follows:

d. The applicant satisfies any applicable special requirements in 39.4(26), 39.4(27), 39.4(28), 641--41.2(136C), 641--41.5(136C) or 641--Chapter 45.

ITEM 30. Amend 39.4(34)"a" as follows:

a. Applications for renewal of specific licenses shall be filed in accordance with 39.4(24) and include the fees required in 641--subrule 38.8(2).

ITEM 31. Amend 39.4(35) as follows:

39.4(35) Amendment of licenses at request of licensee. Applications for amendment of a license shall be filed in accordance with 39.4(24), include the fees required in 641-- subrule 38.8(2), and shall specify the respects in which the licensee desires the license to be amended and the grounds for such amendment.

ITEM 32. Amend Chapter 39, Appendix D, title as follows:

CHAPTER 39--APPENDIX D

LIMITS FOR BROAD LICENSES (39.4(27)) (39.4(28))
ITEM 33. Amend 40.1(5) as follows:

40.1(5) All references to Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) in this chapter are those in effect on or before October 1, 1996 July 1, 1998.

ITEM 34. Adopt new 40.1(6) as follows:

40.1(6) The provisions of Chapter 40 are in addition to, and not in substitution for, any other applicable portions of Chapters 38 to 45.

ITEM 35. Amend 40.2(1) as follows:

40.2(1) For the purposes of this chapter, the definitions of 641--Chapters Chapter 38, 39, and 41 to 46 may also apply.

ITEM 36. Amend 40.19(3)"b" as follows:

b. Accept, as the record of lifetime cumulative radiation dose, an up-to-date IDPH Form 588-2833 or equivalent signed by the individual and countersigned by an appropriate official of the most recent employer for work involving radiation exposure, or the individual's current employer, if the individual is not employed by the licensee or registrant; and

ITEM 37. Amend 40.19(4) as follows:

40.19(4) a. The licensee or registrant shall record the exposure history, as required by 40.37(136C), on IDPH Form 588-2833 or other clear and legible record, of all the information required on that form. The form or record shall show each period in which the individual received occupational exposure to radiation or radioactive material and shall be signed by the individual who received the exposure. For each period for which the licensee or registrant obtains reports, the licensee or registrant shall use the dose shown in the report in preparing IDPH Form 588-2833 or equivalent. For any period in which the licensee or registrant does not obtain a report, the licensee or registrant shall place a notation on IDPH Form 588-2833 or equivalent indicating the periods of time for which data are not available.

b. Licensees or registrants are not required to reevaluate the separate external dose equivalents and internal committed dose equivalents or intakes of radionuclides assessed pursuant to the rules in this chapter in effect on or before January 1, 1994. Further, occupational exposure histories obtained and recorded on IDPH Form 588-2833 or equivalent on or before January 1, 1994, would not have included effective dose equivalent, but may be used in the absence of specific information on the intake of radionuclides by the individual.

ITEM 38. Amend 40.19(6) as follows:

40.19(6) The licensee or registrant shall retain the records on IDPH Form 588-2833 or equivalent until the agency terminates each pertinent license or registration requiring this record. The licensee or registrant shall retain records used in preparing IDPH Form 588-2833 or equivalent for three years after the record is made.

ITEM 39. Amend 40.26(1), introductory paragraph, as follows:

40.26(1) Each licensee or registrant shall conduct operations so that:

ITEM 40. Amend 40.32(2)"f" as follows:

f. Sealed sources, except those used in teletherapy and brachytherapy and those containing radium sources, which are stored, not being used and identified as in storage. The licensee shall, however, test each such sealed source for leakage or contamination and receive the tests results before any use or transfer unless it has been tested for leakage or contamination within six months before the date of use or transfer.

ITEM 41. Amend 40.36(2) as follows:

40.36(2) The licensee or registrant shall ensure that instruments and equipment used for quantitative radiation measurements, for example, dose rate and effluent monitoring, are calibrated at intervals not to exceed 12 months for the radiation measured except when a more frequent interval is specified in another applicable part of these rules or a license condition.

ITEM 42. Adopt new 40.37(1)"d" as follows:

d. Individuals working with medical fluoroscopic equipment.

ITEM 43. Adopt new 40.37(3) as follows:

40.37(3) Location of individual monitoring devices. Each licensee or registrant shall ensure that individuals who are required to monitor occupational doses in accordance with 40.37(136C) wear individual monitoring devices as follows:

a. An individual monitoring device used for monitoring the dose to the whole body shall be worn at the unshielded portion of the whole body likely to receive the highest exposure. When a protective apron is worn, the location of the individual monitoring device is typically at the neck (collar);

b. An individual monitoring device used for monitoring the dose to an embryo/fetus of a declared pregnant woman shall be located at the waist under any protective apron being worn by the woman;

c. An individual monitoring device used for monitoring the eye dose equivalent, to demonstrate compliance with 40.15(136C) shall be located at the neck (collar), outside any protective apron being worn by the monitored individual, or at an unshielded location closer to the eye;

d. An individual monitoring device used for monitoring the dose to the extremities, to demonstrate compliance with 40.15(136C), shall be worn on the extremity likely to receive the highest exposure. Each individual monitoring device shall be oriented to measure the highest dose to the extremity being monitored.

ITEM 44. Amend 40.42(7) as follows:

40.42(7) The licensee or registrant is not required to control entrance or access to rooms or other areas containing sources of radiation capable of producing a high radiation area as described in 641--Chapter 41 40.42(136C) if the registrant has met all the specific requirements for access and control specified in other applicable chapters such as 641--Chapter 45 for industrial radiography, 641--Chapter 41 for X-rays in the healing arts, and 641--Chapter 41 for particle accelerators.

ITEM 45. Amend 40.43(1) as follows:

40.43(1) In addition to the requirements in 40.18(136C) 40.42(136C), the licensee or registrant shall institute measures to ensure that an individual is not able to gain unauthorized or inadvertent access to areas in which radiation levels could be encountered at 500 rad (5 Gy) or more in 1 hour at 1 meter from a source of radiation or any surface through which the radiation penetrates. This requirement does not apply to rooms or areas in which diagnostic X-ray systems are the only source of radiation, or to non-self-shielded irradiators.

ITEM 46. Amend 40.48(136C) as follows:

641--40.48(136C) Use of process or other engineering controls. The licensee shall use, to the extent practicable practical, process or other engineering controls, such as containment or ventilation, to control the concentrations of radioactive material in air.

ITEM 47. Amend 40.49(136C), introductory paragraph, as follows:

641--40.49(136C) Use of other controls. When it is not practicable practical to apply process or other engineering controls to control the concentrations of radioactive material in air to values below those that define an airborne radioactivity area, the licensee shall, consistent with maintaining the total effective dose equivalent ALARA, increase monitoring and limit intakes by one or more of the following means:

ITEM 48. Amend 40.50(1)"c"(5) as follows:

(5) Determination by a physician prior to initial fitting of respirators, and at least either every 12 months thereafter, or periodically at a frequency determined by a physician, that the individual user is physically able medically fit to use the respiratory protection equipment.

ITEM 49. Amend 40.50(2)"a" as follows:

a. The licensee selects respiratory protection equipment that provides a protection factor, specified in Appendix A, greater than the multiple by which peak concentrations of airborne radioactive materials in the working area are expected to exceed the values specified in Appendix B, Table I, Column 3. However, if the selection of respiratory protection equipment with a protection factor greater than the peak concentration multiple defined in the preceding sentence is inconsistent with the goal specified in 40.49(136C) of keeping the total effective dose equivalent ALARA, the licensee or registrant may select respiratory protection equipment with a lower protection factor provided that such a selection would result in a total effective dose equivalent that isALARA. The concentration of radioactive material in the air that is inhaled when respirators are worn may be initially estimated by dividing the average concentration in air, during each period of uninterrupted use, by the protection factor. If the exposure is later found to be greater than initially estimated, the corrected value shall be used; if the exposure is later found to be less than initially estimated, the corrected value may be used.

ITEM 50. Amend 40.55(136C) as follows:

641--40.55(136C) Security and control of stored licensed or registered sources of radiation. The licensee or registrant shall secure from unauthorized removal or access licensed materials or registered sources of radiation that are stored in unrestricted areas.

a. The licensee or registrant shall secure licensed or registered radioactive material from unauthorized removal or access.

b. The licensee or registrant shall maintain constant surveillance and use devices or administrative procedures to prevent unauthorized use of licensed or registered radioactive material that is in an unrestricted area and that is not in storage.

c. The registrant shall secure registered radiation machines from unauthorized removal.

d. The registrant shall use devices or administrative procedures to prevent unauthorized use of registered radiation machines.

ITEM 51. Rescind and reserve 40.56(136C).

ITEM 52. Amend 40.65(2)"b" as follows:

b. Monitor the external surfaces of a labeled labeled3 package for radiation levels unless the package contains quantities of radioactive material that are less than or equal to the Type A quantity, as defined in 641--subrule 39.5(2) and Appendix E to 641--Chapter 39; and

ITEM 53. Amend 40.82(3) as follows:

40.82(3) Upon termination of the license or registration, the licensee or registrant shall permanently store records on IDPH Form 588-2853 588-2833 or 588-2834 or equivalent or shall make provisions with the agency for transfer to the agency.

ITEM 54. Amend 40.84(1) as follows:

40.84(1) The licensee or registrant shall retain the records of prior occupational dose and exposure history as specified in 40.19(136C) on IDPH Form 588-2833 or equivalent until the agency terminates each pertinent license or registration requiring this record. The licensee or registrant shall retain records used in preparing IDPH Form 588-2833 or equivalent for three years after the record is made.

ITEM 55. Amend 40.84(2) as follows:

40.84(2) Upon termination of the license or registration, the licensee or registrant shall permanently store records on IDPH Form 588-2833 or equivalent or shall make provisions with the agency for transfer to the agency.

ITEM 56. Amend 40.85(3) as follows:

40.85(3) Upon termination of the license or registration, the licensee or registrant shall permanently store records on IDPH Form 588-2833 or equivalent or shall make provisions with the agency for transfer to the agency.

ITEM 57. Amend 40.86(3) as follows:

40.86(3) Record-keeping format. The licensee or registrant shall maintain the records specified in 40.86(1) on IDPH Form 588-2834, 588-2833, or equivalent in accordance with the instructions for IDPH Form 588-2834, 588-2833, or equivalent or in clear and legible records containing all the information required by IDPH Form 588-2834, 588-2833, or equivalent.

ITEM 58. Amend 40.86(6) as follows:

40.86(6) Retention after termination. Upon termination of the license or registration, the licensee or registrant shall permanently store records on IDPH Form 588-2833, 588-2834, or equivalent or shall make provision with the agency for transfer to the agency.

ITEM 59. Amend 40.100(2) as follows:

40.100(2) Each licensee or registrant in a category listed in 40.100(1) shall submit an annual report of the results of individual monitoring carried out by the licensee or registrant for each individual for whom monitoring was required by 40.36(136C) during that year. The licensee or registrant may include additional data for individuals for whom monitoring was provided but not required. The licensee or registrant shall use IDPH Form 588-2834 or equivalent or electronic media containing all the information required by IDPH Form 588-2834.

ITEM 60. Amend 40.110(2) as follows:

40.110(2) If posting of a document specified in 40.110(1)"a," 40.110(1)"b" and 40.110(1)"c" is not practicable practical, the licensee or registrant may post a notice which describes the document and states where it may be examined.

ITEM 61. Adopt new 40.111(1)"h" as follows:

h. Shall be commensurate with potential radiological health protection problems present in the workplace.

ITEM 62. Amend Footnotes for Chapter 40, Appendix A, "b"(1) and (2) as follows:

(1) Only for individuals trained in using respirators and wearing properly fitted respirators that are used and maintained under supervision in a well-planned respiratory protective program.

(2) For air-purifying respirators only when high efficiency particulate filters, above 99.97% removal efficiency by thermally generated 0.3 m 0.3 u dioctyl phthalate (DOP) test or equivalent, are used in atmospheres not deficient in oxygen and not containing radioactive gas or vapor respiratory hazards.

ITEM 63. Amend Footnotes for Chapter 40, Appendix B, Table I, fourth paragraph, and Table II, third paragraph, as follows:

Note that the dose equivalents for an extremity, skin and lens of the eye are not considered in computing the committed effective dose equivalent, but are subject to limits that must be met separately.

The air concentration values listed in Table II, Column 1 were derived by one of two methods. For those radionuclides for which the stochastic limit is governing, the occupational stochastic inhalation ALI was divided by 2.4 x 109 (ml), relating the inhalation ALI to the DAC, as explained above, and then divided by a factor of 300. The factor of 300 includes the following components: a factor of 50 to relate the 5 rem (0.05 Sv) annual occupational dose limit to the 0.1 rem limit for members of the public, a factor of 3 to adjust for the difference in exposure time and the inhalation rate for a worker and that for members of the public; and a factor of 2 to adjust the occupational values, derived for adults, so that they are applicable to other age groups.

ITEM 64. Amend Chapter 40, Appendix C, the radionuclide Carbon-14, as follows:

Carbon-14 1,000 100

ITEM 65. Amend 41.1(1) as follows:

41.1(1) Scope. This rule establishes requirements, for which a registrant is responsible, for use of X-ray equipment by or under the supervision of an individual authorized by and licensed in accordance with state statutes to engage in the healing arts or veterinary medicine. The provisions of this rule are in addition to, and not in substitution for, any other applicable provisions of these rules. The provisions of Chapter 41 are in addition to, and not in substitution for, any other applicable portions of Chapters 38 to 42. All references to any Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) in this chapter are those in effect as of October 1, 1996 July 1, 1998.

ITEM 66. Amend 41.1(2) by amending the introductory paragraph and by amending, adding or rescinding the following definitions:

41.1(2) Definitions. For the purpose of this chapter, the definitions of 641--Chapters Chapter 38 to 40 and 45 may also apply. The following are specific to rule 41.1(136C).

"Accessible surface" means the external surface of the enclosure or housing of the radiation producing machine as provided by the manufacturer.

"Aluminum equivalent" means the thickness of type 1100 aluminum alloy affording the same attenuation, under specified conditions, as the material in question. The nominal chemical composition of type 1100 aluminum alloy is 99.00 percent minimum aluminum, 0.12 percent copper.

"Assembler" means any person engaged in the business of assembling, replacing, or installing one or more components into an X-ray system or subsystem. The term includes the owner of an X-ray system or the employee or agent who assembles components into an X-ray system that is subsequently used to provide professional or commercial services.

"Attenuation block" means a block or stack, having dimensions 20 centimeters by 20 centimeters by 3.8 centimeters, of type 1100 aluminum alloy or other materials having equivalent attenuation. The nominal chemical composition of type 1100 aluminum alloy is 99.00 percent minimum aluminum, 0.12 percent copper.

"Automatic exposure control" (AEC) means a device which automatically controls one or more technique factors in order to obtain at a preselected location(s) a required quantity of radiation (see also "Phototimer"). (Includes devices such as phototimers and ion chambers.)

"Beam axis" means a line from the source through the centers of the X-ray fields.

"C-arm X-ray system" means an X-ray system in which the image receptor and X-ray tube housing assembly are connected by a common mechanical support system in order to maintain a desired spatial relationship. This system is designed to allow a change in the projection of the beam through the patient without a change in the position of the patient.

"Certified components" means components of X-ray systems which are subject to regulations promulgated under Public Law 90-602, the "Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968," the Food and Drug Administration.

"Changeable filters" means any filter, exclusive of inherent filtration, which can be removed from the useful beam through any electronic, mechanical, or physical process.

"Contact therapy system" means an X-ray system used for therapy with the X-ray tube port placed in contact with or within 5 centimeters of the surface being treated.

"Control panel" means that part of the X-ray control upon which are mounted the switches, knobs, pushbuttons, and other hardware necessary for manually setting the technique factors. (see X-ray control panel).

"Diagnostic X-ray system" means an X-ray system designed for irradiation of any part of the human body for the purpose of diagnosis or visualization.

"Entrance exposure rate" means the exposure free in air per unit time at the point where the center of the useful beam enters the patient.

"Filter" means material placed in the useful beam to preferentially absorb preferentially selected radiations.

"Fluoroscopic imaging assembly" means a subsystem in which X-ray photons produce a fluoroscopic visual image. It includes the image receptor(s) such as the image intensifier and spot-film device, electrical interlocks, if any, and structural material providing linkage between the image receptor and diagnostic source assembly.

"Focal spot (actual)" means the area projected on the anode of the X-ray tube bombarded by the electrons accelerated from the cathode and from which the useful beam originates.

"Half-value layer" means the thickness of specified material which attenuates the beam of radiation to an extent such that the exposure rate is reduced to one-half of its original value. In this definition, the contribution of all scattered radiation, other than any which might be present initially in the beam concerned, is deemed to be excluded.

"HVL" (see "Half-value layer").

"Image intensifier" means a device, installed in its housing, which instantaneously converts an X-ray pattern into a corresponding light image of higher energy density intensity.

"Image receptor support" means, for mammographic systems, that part of the system designed to support the image receptor in a horizontal plane during a mammographic examination.

"Irradiation" means the exposure of matter to ionizing radiation.

"kWs" means kilowatt second. It is equivalent to 103 (kV)(mA)(s), i.e.,

(A)kWs = (X)kV x
(Y)mA x (Z)s

x
kWs
=
XYZ kWs


103kV x mA x s

103
"Patient" means an individual subjected to healing arts examination, diagnosis, or treatment.

"PBL" (see "Positive beam limitation").

"Peak tube potential" means the maximum value of the potential difference across the X-ray tube during an exposure.

"Phantom" means a volume of material behaving in a manner similar to tissue with respect to the attenuation and scattering of radiation.

"Positive beam limitation" means the automatic or semiautomatic adjustment of an X-ray beam to the size of the selected image receptor, whereby exposures cannot be made without such adjustment.

"Primary dose monitoring system" means a system which will monitor the useful beam during irradiation and which will terminate irradiation when a preselected number of dose monitor units have been acquired.

"Qualified expert" means an individual who has demonstrated to the satisfaction of the agency that such individual possesses the knowledge and training to measure ionizing radiation, to evaluate safety techniques, and to advise regarding radiation protection needs.

"Radiographic imaging system" means any system whereby a permanent or semipermanent image is recorded on an image receptor by the action of ionizing radiation.

"Radiological physicist" means an individual who:

a. Is certified by the American Board of Radiology in therapeutic radiological physics, radiological physics, or X-ray and gamma-ray physics; or

b. Has a bachelor's degree in one of the physical sciences or engineering and three years' full-time experience working in therapeutic radiological physics under the direction of a physicist certified by the American Board of Radiology. The work duties shall include duties involving the calibration and spot checks of a medical accelerator or a sealed source teletherapy unit; or

c. Has a master's or a doctor's degree in physics, biophysics, radiological physics, health physics, or engineering; has had one year's full-time training in therapeutic radiological physics; and has had one year's full-time work experience in a radiotherapy facility where the individual's duties involve calibration and spot checks of a medical accelerator or a sealed source teletherapy unit.

"Registrant," as used in 641--Chapter 41, means any person who owns or possesses and administratively controls an X-ray system which is used to deliberately expose humans or animals to the useful beam of the system and is required by 641--Chapter 39 to register the X-ray system with the agency.

"Scattered radiation" means radiation that, during passage through matter, has been deviated in direction (see "Direct scattered radiation").

"Secondary dose monitoring system" means a system which will terminate irradiation in the event of failure of the primary system.

"Shutter" means a device attached to the tube housing assembly which can totally intercept the entire cross-sectional area of the useful beam and which has a lead equivalency not less than that of the tube housing assembly.

"SSD" means the distance between the source and the skin entrance plane of the patient.

"Traceable to a national standard" means that a quantity or a measurement has been compared to a national standard directly or indirectly through one or more intermediate steps and that all comparisons have been documented.

"Tube" means an X-ray tube, unless otherwise specified.

"Tube housing assembly" means the tube housing with tube installed. It includes high-voltage, or filament transformers, or both, and other appropriate elements when such are contained within the tube housing.

"Wedge filter" means an added filter effecting continuous progressive attenuation on all or part of the useful beam.

"X-ray control" means a device which controls input power to the X-ray high-voltage generator and the X-ray tube. It includes equipment such as timers, phototimers, automatic brightness stabilizers, and similar devices, which control the technique factors of an X-ray exposure., switch, button or similar means by which an operator initiates or terminates the radiation exposure. The X-ray exposure control may include such associated equipment as timers and backup timers.

"X-ray control panel" means a device which controls input power to the X-ray high-voltage generator and the X-ray tube. It includes equipment such as timers, phototimers, automatic brightness stabilizers, and similar devices, which control the technique factors of an X-ray exposure.

"X-ray subsystem" means any combination of two or more components of an X-ray system.

"X-ray table" means a patient support device with its patient support structure (tabletop) interposed between the patient and the image receptor during radiography or fluoroscopy. This includes, but is not limited to, any stretcher equipped with a radiolucent panel and any table equipped with a cassette tray (or bucky), cassette tunnel, image intensifier, or spot-film device beneath the tabletop.

"X-ray tube" means any electron tube which is designed to be used primarily for the production of X-rays.

ITEM 67. Amend subrule 41.1(3) as follows:

41.1(3) Administrative controls.

a. Registrant. The registrant shall be responsible for maintaining in accordance with manufacturer specifications and directing the operation of the X-ray system(s) under the registrant's administrative control. Where no manufacturer specifications are indicated, X-ray systems shall be serviced annually. All service and installation shall be performed by persons registered under 641--subrule 39.3(3). The registrant or the registrant's agent shall ensure that the requirements of 41.1(3)"a"(1) these rules are met in the operation of the X-ray system(s).

(1) An X-ray system which does not meet the provisions of these rules shall not be operated for diagnostic or therapeutic purposes unless so directed by the agency.

(2) Individuals who will be operating the X-ray systems shall be adequately instructed in safe operating procedures and be competent in the safe use of the equipment in accordance with 641--Chapter 42 as applicable. The individual's permit to practice shall be posted in the immediate vicinity of the general work area and visible to the public.

(3) A chart shall be provided in the vicinity of the diagnostic X-ray system's control panel which specifies, for all examinations performed with that system, the following information:

1. Patient's anatomical size versus technique factors to be utilized;

2. Type and size of the film or film-screen combination to be used;

3. Type and focal distance of the grid to be used, if any;

4. Source to image receptor distance to be used, except for dental intra-oral radiography; and

5. Type and location of placement of gonad human patient shielding to be used (e.g., gonad).

(4) Written safety procedures shall be provided to each individual operating X-ray equipment, including patient holding and any restrictions of the operating technique required for the safe operation of the particular X-ray system. The operator shall be able to demonstrate familiarity with these procedures.

(5) Except for patients who cannot be moved out of the room, only the staff and ancillary personnel required for the medical procedure or training shall be in the room during the radiographic exposure. Other than the patient being examined:

1. All individuals shall be positioned such that no part of the body will be struck by the useful beam unless protected by 0.5 millimeter lead equivalent.

2. Staff and ancillary personnel shall be protected from the direct scatter radiation by protective aprons or whole body protective barriers of not less than 0.25 millimeter lead equivalent.

3. Patients Human patients who cannot be removed from the room shall be protected from the direct scatter radiation by whole body protective barriers of 0.25 millimeter lead equivalent or shall be so positioned that the nearest portion of the body is at least 2 meters from both the tube head and the nearest edge of the image receptor.

(6) Gonad shielding of not less than 0.25 millimeter lead equivalent shall be used for human patients, who have not passed the reproductive age, during radiographic procedures in which the gonads are in the useful beam, except for cases in which this would interfere with the diagnostic procedure.

(7) Individuals shall not be exposed to the useful beam except for healing arts purposes and unless such exposure has been authorized by a licensed practitioner of the healing arts. This provision specifically prohibits deliberate exposure for the following purposes:

1. Exposure of an individual for training, demonstration, or other nonhealing arts purposes; and

2. Exposure of an individual for the purpose of healing arts screening except as authorized by 41.1(3)"a"(11).

(8) When a patient or film must be provided with auxiliary support during a radiation exposure:

1. Mechanical holding devices shall be used when the technique permits. The written safety procedures, required by 41.1(3)"a"(4), shall list individual projections where holding devices cannot be utilized;

2. Written safety procedures, as required by 41.1(3)"a"(4), shall indicate the requirements for selecting a holder and the procedure the holder shall follow;

3. The human holder shall be protected as required by 41.1(3)"a"(5)"2";

4. No individual shall be used routinely to hold film or patients; and

5. In those cases where the human patient must hold the film, except during intraoral examinations, any portion of the body other than the area of clinical interest struck by the useful beam shall be protected by not less than 0.5 millimeter lead equivalent material.

6. Each facility shall have leaded aprons and gloves available in sufficient numbers to provide protection to all personnel who are involved with X-ray operations and who are otherwise not shielded.

(9) Procedures and auxiliary equipment designed to minimize patient and personnel exposure commensurate with the needed diagnostic information shall be utilized.

1. The speed of film or screen and film combinations shall be the fastest speed consistent with the diagnostic objective of the examinations. Film cassettes without intensifying screens shall not be used for any routine diagnostic radiological imaging, with the exception of veterinary radiography and standard film packets for intra-oral use in dental radiography.

2. The radiation exposure to the patient shall be the minimum exposure required to produce images of good diagnostic quality.

3. Portable or mobile X-ray equipment shall be used only for examinations where it is impractical to transfer the patient(s) to a stationary X-ray installation.

4. X-ray systems subject to 41.1(6) shall not be utilized in procedures where the source to human patient distance is less than 30 centimeters.

5. If grids are used between the patient and the image receptor to decrease scatter to the film and improve contrast, the grid shall:


* Be positioned properly, i.e., tube side facing the correct direction, and the grid centered to the central ray;


* If of the focused type, be at the proper focal distance for the SIDs being used.

(10) All individuals who are associated with the operation of an X-ray system are subject to the requirements of 641--subrule 40.36(3) and rules 641--40.15(136C) and 641--40.37(136C). In addition:

1. When protective clothing or devices are worn on portions of the body and a personnel monitoring device(s) is present, it (they) shall be worn in accordance with the recommendations found in Chapter 4 of the National Council of Radiation Protection and Measurements Report No. 57.

2. Exposure of a personnel monitoring device to deceptively indicate a dose delivered to an individual is prohibited.

(11) Healing arts screening. Any person proposing to conduct a healing arts screening program shall not initiate such a program without prior approval of the agency. When requesting such approval, that person shall submit the information outlined in Appendix C of this chapter. If any information submitted to the agency becomes invalid or outdated, the agency shall be immediately notified.

b. Information and maintenance record and associated information. The registrant shall maintain the following information for each X-ray system for inspection by the agency:

(1) Maximum rating of technique factors;

(2)(1) Model and serial numbers of all certifiable major components and user's manual for those components;

(3) Aluminum equivalent filtration of the useful beam, including any routine variation;

(4)(2) Tube rating charts and cooling curves;

(5)(3) Records of surveys, calibrations, maintenance, and modifications performed on the X-ray system(s) after the effective date of 41.1(3) with the names of persons who performed such services;

(6) A scale drawing of the room in which a stationary X-ray system is located with such drawing indicating the use of areas adjacent to the room and an estimation of the extent of occupancy by an individual in such areas. In addition, the drawing shall include:

1. The results of a survey for radiation levels present at the operator's position and at pertinent points outside the room at specified test conditions, or

2. The type and thickness of materials, or lead equivalency, of each protective barrier; and

(7)(4) A copy of all correspondence with this agency regarding that X-ray system.

c. X-ray utilization log. Except for veterinary facilities, Each each facility shall maintain an X-ray log containing the patient's name, the type of examinations, and the dates the examinations were performed, and the number of retakes involved. When the patient or film must be provided with human auxiliary support, the name of the human holder shall be recorded.

d. Plan review.

(1) Prior to construction, the floor plans and equipment arrangement of all new installations, or modifications of existing installations, or installation of equipment into existing facilities utilizing X-rays for diagnostic or therapeutic purposes, the floor plans and equipment arrangements shall be submitted to the agency for review and approval. The required information is denoted in Appendices A and B of this chapter.

(2) The agency may require the applicant to utilize the services of a qualified expert to determine the shielding requirements prior to the plan review and approval.

(3) The approval of such plans shall not preclude the requirement of additional modifications should a subsequent analysis of operating conditions indicate the possibility of an individual receiving a dose in excess of the limits prescribed in 641--Chapter 40.

e. Federal performance standards. All X-ray equipment shall comply with the applicable performance standards of 21 CFR 1020.30 to 1020.40 which were in effect at the time the unit was manufactured. All equipment manufactured before the effective date of 21 CFR 1020.30 to 1020.40 shall meet the requirements of the Iowa rules. Persons registered to possess the affected radiation-emitting equipment in Iowa shall be responsible for maintaining the equipment in compliance with the appropriate federal performance standards.

f. Quality management program.

(1) Each registrant under this subrule, as applicable, shall establish and maintain a written quality management program to provide high confidence that radiation from a therapeutic X-ray system will be administered as directed by an individual qualified by training and experience to conduct X-ray therapy. The quality management program must include written policies and procedures to meet the following specific objectives:

1. That, prior to administration, a written directive[1] is prepared for any therapeutic X-ray dose;

2. That, prior to each administration, the patient's identity is verified by more than one method as the individual named in the written directive;

3. That final plans of treatment and related calculations for the X-ray therapy are in accordance with the respective written directives;

4. That each administration is in accordance with the written directive; and

5. That any unintended deviation from the written directive is identified and evaluated, and appropriate action is taken.

(2) The registrant shall:

1. Develop procedures for and conduct a review of the quality management program. This review shall be at intervals no greater than 12 months since the last evaluation and shall include:


* A representative sample of patient administrations,


* All recordable events; and


* All misadministrations to verify compliance with all aspects of the quality management program;

2. Evaluate each of these reviews to determine the effectiveness of the quality management program and, if required, make modifications to meet the objectives of paragraph "a" of this subrule; and

3. Retain records of each review, including the evaluations and findings of the review, in an auditable form for three years.

(3) The registrant shall evaluate and respond, within 30 days after discovery of the recordable event, to each recordable event by:

1. Assembling the relevant facts including the cause;

2. Identifying what, if any, corrective action is required to prevent recurrence; and

3. Retaining a record, in an auditable form, for three years, of the relevant facts and what corrective action, if any, was taken.

(4) The registrant shall retain:

1. Each written directive; and

2. A record of each administered radiation dose or where a written directive is required in 41.1(3)"f"(1)"1," in an auditable form, for three years after the date of administration.

(5) The registrant may make modifications to the quality management program to increase the program's efficiency provided the program's effectiveness is not decreased. The registrant shall furnish the modification to the agency within 30 days after the modification has been made.

(6) Each applicant for a new registration, as applicable, shall submit to the agency a quality management program as part of the application for a registration and implement the program upon issuance of the registration by the agency. Each existing registrant, as applicable, shall submit to the agency by March 31, 1995, a written certification that the quality management program has been implemented along with a copy of the program.

f. X-ray film processing facilities and practices (except for mammography). Each installation using a radiographic X-ray system and using analog image receptors (e.g., radiographic film) shall have available suitable equipment for handling and processing radiographic film in accordance with the following provisions:

(1) Manually developed film.

1. Processing tanks shall be constructed of mechanically rigid, corrosion-resistant material; and

2. The temperature of solutions in the tanks shall be maintained within the range of 60deg.F to 80deg.F (16deg.C to 27deg.C). Film shall be developed in accordance with the time-temperature relationships recommended by the film manufacturer or, in the absence of such recommendations, with the time-temperature chart available from the agency.

3. Devices shall be utilized which will indicate the actual temperature of the developer and signal the passage of a preset time appropriate to the developing time required.

(2) Automatic processors and other closed processing systems.

1. Films shall be developed in accordance with the time-temperature relationships recommended by the film manufacturer; in the absence of such recommendations, the film shall be developed using the chart available from the agency.

2. Processing deviations from the requirements of 41.1(3)"f" shall be documented by the registrant in such manner that the requirements are shown to be met or exceeded (e.g., extended processing and special rapid chemistry).

(3) Other requirements.

1. Pass boxes, if provided, shall be so constructed as to exclude light from the darkroom when cassettes are placed in or removed from the boxes, and shall incorporate adequate shielding from stray radiation to prevent exposure of undeveloped film.

2. The darkroom shall be light tight and use proper safelighting such that any film type in use exposed in a cassette to X-radiation sufficient to produce an optical density from 1 to 2 when processed shall not suffer an increase in density greater than 0.1 when exposed out of the cassette in the darkroom for 2 minutes with all safelights on. If used, daylight film handling boxes shall preclude fogging of the film.

3. Darkrooms typically used by more than one individual shall be provided a method to prevent accidental entry while undeveloped films are being handled or processed.

4. Film shall be stored in a cool, dry place and shall be protected from exposure to stray radiation. Film in open packages shall be stored in a light tight container.

5. Film cassettes and intensifying screens shall be inspected periodically and shall be cleaned and replaced as necessary to best ensure radiographs of good diagnostic quality.

6. Outdated X-ray film shall not be used for diagnostic radiographs, unless the film has been stored in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and a sample of the film passes a sensitometric test for normal ranges of base plus fog and speed.

7. Film developing solutions shall be prepared in accordance with the directions given by the manufacturer and shall be maintained in strength by replenishment or renewal so that full development is accomplished within the time specified by the manufacturer.

ITEM 68. Amend 41.1(4) as follows:

41.1(4) General requirements for all diagnostic X-ray systems. In addition to other requirements of this chapter, all diagnostic X-ray systems shall meet the following requirements:

a. to d. No change.

e. No change.

(1) No change.

1. No change.

2.The requirements of 41.1(4)"e"(1)"1" will be considered to have been met if it can be demonstrated that the aluminum equivalent of the total filtration in the primary beam is not less than that shown in Table II.

Table II


Filtration Required vs. Operating Voltage

Operating Voltage (kVp)
Total Filtration

(inherent plus added)

(mm aluminum equivalent)

Below 50 0.5

50 - 70 1.5

Above 70 2.5

3. Beryllium window tubes shall have a minimum of 0.5 millimeter aluminum equivalent filtration permanently installed in the useful beam.

4. For capacitor energy storage equipment, compliance with the requirements of 41.1(4)"e" shall be determined with the maximum quantity of charge per exposure system fully charged and a setting of 10 mAs for each exposure.

5. The required minimal aluminum equivalent filtration half-value layer of the useful beam shall include the filtration contributed by all materials which are always present permanently between the source and the patient.

(2) No change.

f. and g. No change.

h. Technique indicators.

(1) and (2) No change.

(3) The technique indicators shall be accurate to within manufacturer's standards.

i. Locks. All position locking, holding, and centering devices on X-ray system components and systems shall function as intended.

ITEM 69. Amend 41.1(5) as follows:

41.1(5) Fluoroscopic X-ray systems except for computed tomography X-ray systems. All fluoroscopic X-ray systems shall be image intensified and meet the following requirements:

a. Limitation of useful beam.

(1) Primary barrier.

1. The fluoroscopic imaging assembly shall be provided with a primary protective barrier which intercepts the entire cross section of the useful beam at any SID.

2. The X-ray tube used for fluoroscopy shall not produce X-rays unless the barrier is in position to intercept the entire useful beam.

(2) X-ray field.

1. The X-ray field produced by non-image-intensified fluoroscopic equipment shall not extend beyond the entire visible area of the image receptor. This requirement applies to field size for both fluoroscopic procedures and spot filming procedures. In addition, means shall be provided for stepless adjustment of the field size; the minimum field size at the greatest SID shall be equal to or less than 5 centimeters by 5 centimeters; and compliance with 41.1(5)"a"(2)"1" shall be determined with the beam axis indicated to be perpendicular to the plane of the image receptor.

2. For image-intensified fluoroscopic equipment, neither the length nor the width of the X-ray field in the plane of the image receptor shall exceed that of the visible area of the image receptor by more than 3 percent of the SID. The sum of the excess length and the excess width shall be no greater than 4 percent of the SID. In addition, means shall be provided to permit further limitation of the field at the greatest SID to a field size of 5 centimeters by 5 centimeters or less. Compliance shall be determined with the beam axis indicated to be perpendicular to the plane of the image receptor. For rectangular X-ray fields used with circular image reception, the error in alignment shall be determined along the length and width dimensions of the X-ray field which pass through the center of the visible area of the image receptor.

(2) Fluoroscopic beam limitation.

1. For certified fluoroscopic systems with or without a spot film device, neither the length nor the width of the X-ray field in the plane of the image receptor shall exceed that of the visible area of the image receptor by more than 3 percent of the SID. The sum of the excess length and the excess width shall be no greater than 4 percent of the SID.

2. For uncertified fluoroscopic systems with a spot film device, the X-ray beam with the shutter fully opened (during fluoroscopy or spot filming) shall be no larger than the largest spot film size for which the device is designed. Measurements shall be made at the minimum SID available but at no less than 20 centimeters from the tabletop to the film plane distance.

3. For uncertified fluoroscopic systems without a spot film device, the requirements of 41.1(5)"a"(2)"1" apply.

4. Other requirements for fluoroscopic beam limitation:


* Means shall be provided to permit further limitation of the field. Beam-limiting devices manufactured after May 22, 1979, and incorporated in equipment with a variable SID or a visible area of greater than 300 square centimeters shall be provided with means for stepless adjustment of the X-ray field;


* All equipment with a fixed SID and a visible area of 300 square centimeters or less shall be provided either with stepless adjustment of the X-ray field or with means to further limit the X-ray field size at the plane of the image receptor to 125 square centimeters or less;


* If provided, stepless adjustment shall, at the greatest SID, provide continuous field sizes from the maximum attainable to a field size of 5 centimeters by 5 centimeters or less;


* For equipment manufactured after February 25, 1978, when the angle between the image receptor and beam axis is variable, means shall be provided to indicate when the axis of the X-ray beam is perpendicular to the plane of the image receptor;


* For noncircular X-ray fields used with circular image receptors, the error in alignment shall be determined along the length and width dimensions of the X-ray field which pass through the center of the visible area of the image receptor.

(3) Spot-film beam limitation. Spot-film devices shall meet the following requirements:

1. Means shall be provided between the source and the patient for adjustment of the X-ray field size in the plane of the film to the size of that portion of the film which has been selected on the spot-film selector. Such adjustment shall be automatically accomplished except when the X-ray field size in the plane of the film is smaller than that of the selected portion of the film. For spot-film devices manufactured after June 21, 1979, if the X-ray field size is less than the size of the selected portion of the film, the means for adjustment of the field size shall be only at the operator's option;

2. Neither the length nor the width of the X-ray field in the plane of the image receptor shall differ from the corresponding dimensions of the selected portion of the image receptor by more than 3 percent of the SID when adjusted for full coverage of the selected portion of the image receptor. The sum, without regard to sign, of the length and width differences shall not exceed 4 percent of the SID;

3. It shall be possible to adjust the X-ray field size in the plane of the film to a size smaller than the selected portion of the film. The minimum field size at the greatest SID shall be equal to, or less than, 5 centimeters by 5 centimeters;

4. The center of the X-ray field in the plane of the film shall be aligned with the center of the selected portion of the film to within 2 percent of the SID; and

5. On spot-film devices manufactured after February 25, 1978, if the angle between the plane of the image receptor and beam axis is variable, means shall be provided to indicate when the axis of the X-ray beam is perpendicular to the plane of the image receptor, and compliance shall be determined with the beam axis indicated to be perpendicular to the plane of the image receptor.

(4) Override. If a means exists to override any of the automatic X-ray field size adjustments required in 41.1(5)"a"(2) and 41.1(5)"a"(3), that means:

1. Shall be designed for use only in the event of system failure;

2. Shall incorporate a signal visible at the fluoroscopist's position which will indicate whenever the automatic field size adjustment is overridden; and

3. Shall have a clear and durable label as follows:

FOR X-RAY FIELD

LIMITATION SYSTEM FAILURE

b. Activation of the fluoroscopic tube. X-ray production in the fluoroscopic mode shall be controlled by a device which requires continuous pressure by the fluoroscopist for the entire time of any exposure. When recording serial fluoroscopic images, the fluoroscopist shall be able to terminate the X-ray exposure(s) at any time, but means may be provided to permit completion of any single exposure of the series in process.

c. Exposure rate limits.

(1) Entrance exposure rate allowable limits.

1. The exposure rate measured at the point where the center of the useful beam enters the patient shall not exceed 10 roentgens (2.58 mC/kg) per minute, except during recording of fluoroscopic images or when provided with optional high level control.

1. Fluoroscopic equipment which is provided with automatic exposure rate control shall not be operable at any combination of tube potential and current which will result in an exposure rate in excess of 2.6 mC/kg (10 roentgens) per minute at the point where the center of the useful beam enters the patient, except:


* During recording of fluoroscopic images; or


* When an optional high level control is provided. When so provided, the equipment shall not be operable at any combination of tube potential and current which will result in an exposure rate in excess of 1.3 mC/kg (5 roentgens) per minute at the point where the center of the useful beam enters the patient unless the high level control is activated. Special means of activation of high level controls shall be required. The high level control shall only be operable when continuous manual activation is provided by the operator. A continuous signal audible to the fluoroscopist shall indicate that the high level control is being employed.

2. Fluoroscopic equipment which is not provided with automatic exposure rate control shall not be operable at any combination of tube potential and current which will result in an exposure rate in excess of 1.3 mC/kg (5 roentgens) per minute at the point where the center of the useful beam enters the patient, except:


* During recording of fluoroscopic images; or


* When an optional high level control is activated. Special means of activation of high level controls shall be required. The high level control shall only be operable when continuous manual activation is provided by the operator. A continuous signal audible to the fluoroscopist shall indicate that the high level control is being employed.

2. 3. Compliance with the requirements of 41.1(5)"c" shall be determined as follows: movable grids and compression devices shall be removed from the useful beam during the measurement;


* If the source is below the table, exposure rate shall be measured 1 centimeter above the tabletop or cradle;


* If the source is above the table, the exposure rate shall be measured at 30 centimeters above the tabletop with the end of the beam-limiting device or spacer positioned as closely as possible to the point of measurement;


* All C-arm fluoroscopes, both stationary and mobile, shall meet the entrance exposure rate limits in 41.1(5)"c"(1)"1," "2," and "3," at 30 centimeters from the input surface of the fluoroscopic imaging assembly with the source positioned at any available SID provided that the end of the spacer assembly or beam-limiting device is not closer than 30 centimeters from the input surface of the fluoroscopic imaging assembly.


* For a lateral type fluoroscope, the exposure rate shall be measured at a point 15 centimeters from the centerline of the X-ray table and in the direction of the X-ray source with the end of the beam-limiting device or spacer positioned as closely as possible to the point of measurement. If the tabletop is movable, it shall be positioned as closely as possible to the lateral X-ray source, with the end of the beam-limiting device or spacer no closer than 15 centimeters to the centerline of the X-ray table.

3. 4. Periodic measurement of entrance exposure rate shall be performed by a qualified expert for both typical and maximum values as follows: Such measurements shall be made annually or after any maintenance of the system which might affect the exposure rate; results of these measurements shall be posted where any fluoroscopist may have ready access to such results while using the fluoroscope and in the record required in 41.1(3)"b"(5). The measurement results shall be stated in roentgens per minute and include the technique factors used in determining such results. The name of the individual performing the measurements and the date the measurements were performed shall be included in the results; personnel monitoring devices may be used to perform the measurements required by this paragraph, provided the measurements are made as described below. Conditions of periodic measurement of entrance exposure rate are as follows:


* The measurement shall be made under the conditions that satisfy the requirements of 41.1(5)"c"(1)"2";


* The kVp mA, and other selectable parameters shall be the kVp adjusted to those settings typical of clinical use of the X-ray system on a 23 cm thick abdominal patient;


* The X-ray system(s) that incorporates automatic exposure rate control shall have sufficient attenuative material placed in the useful beam to produce a milliamperage typical of the use of the X-ray system; and the maximum entrance exposure rate of the system.


* The X-ray system(s) that incorporates automatic exposure rate control shall utilize a milliamperage typical of the clinical use of the X-ray system. Materials should be placed in the useful beam when conducting these periodic measurements to protect the imaging system.

(2) Reserved.

d. Barrier transmitted radiation rate limits.

(1) No change.

(2) Measuring compliance of barrier transmission.

1. to 4. No change.

5. The attenuation block shall be positioned in the useful beam 10 centimeters from the point of measurement of entrance exposure rate and between this point and the input surface of the fluoroscopic imaging assembly.

e. No change.

f. Source-to-skin distance. The SSD shall not be less than:

(1) 38 centimeters on stationary fluoroscopes installed after the effective date of these rules on or after August 1, 1974,

(2) 35.5 centimeters on stationary fluoroscopes which were in operation prior to the effective date of these rules prior to August 1, 1974,

(3) 30 centimeters on all mobile fluoroscopes, and

(4) 20 centimeters for image-intensified fluoroscopes used for specific surgical application.

(5) The written safety procedures must provide precautionary measures to be adhered to during the use of this device in addition to the procedures provided in 41.1(3)"a"(4).

g. No change.

h. Mobile fluoroscopes. In addition to the other requirements of 41.1(5), mobile fluoroscopes shall provide intensified imaging.

i h. Control of scattered radiation.

(1) and (2) No change.

(3) The agency may grant exemptions to 41.1(5)"i"(2) 41.1(5)"h"(2) where a sterile field will not permit the use of the normal protective barriers. Where the use of prefitted sterilized covers for the barriers is practical, the agency shall not permit such exemption.

i. Spot-film exposure reproducibility. Fluoroscopic systems equipped with spot film (radiographic) mode shall meet the exposure reproducibility requirements of 41.1(6)"d" when operating in the spot-film mode.

j. No change.

ITEM 70. Amend 41.1(6) as follows:

41.1(6) Radiographic systems other than fluoroscopic, dental intraoral, veterinarian, or computed tomography X-ray systems.

a. Beam limitation. The useful beam shall be limited to the area of clinical interest. This shall be considered met if a positive beam-limiting device meeting manufacturer's specifications and the requirements of 41.1(6)"h"(2) have been properly used or if evidence of collimation is shown on at least three sides or three corners of the film (for example, projections from the shutters of the collimator, cone cutting at the corners, or borders at the film's edge.)

(1) General purpose stationary and mobile X-ray systems and veterinarian systems (other than portable) installed after July 1, 1998.

1. There shall be provided a means for stepless adjustment of the size of the X-ray field.

1. Only X-ray systems provided with means for independent stepless adjustment of at least two dimensions of the X-ray field shall be used.

2. A method shall be provided for visually defining the perimeter of the X-ray field.


* Illuminance shall be greater than 7.5 foot-candles or 80.3 LUX at 100 centimeters or maximum SID whichever is less.


* The total misalignment of the edges of the visually defined field with the respective edges of the X-ray field along either the length or width of the visually defined field shall not exceed 2 percent of the distance from the source to the center of the visually defined field when the surface upon which it appears is perpendicular to the axis of the X-ray beam.

3. No change.

(2) and (3) No change.

(4) Systems designed for or provided with special attachments for mammography. Radiographic systems designed only for mammography and general purpose radiographic systems, when special attachments for mammography are in service, shall be provided with means to limit the useful beam such that the X-ray field at the plane of the image receptor does not extend beyond any edge of the image receptor at any designated SID except the edge of the image receptor designed to be adjacent to the chest wall where the X-ray field may not extend beyond this edge by more than 2 percent of the SID. This requirement can be met with a system which performs as prescribed in 41.1(6)"a"(5)"3." When the beam-limiting device and image receptor support device are designed to be used to immobilize the breast during a mammographic procedure and the SID may vary, the SID indication specified in 41.1(6)"a"(5)"3" shall be the maximum SID for which the beam-limiting device or aperture is designed. In addition, each image receptor support intended for installation on a system designed only for mammography shall have clear and permanent markings to indicate the maximum image receptor size for which it is designed.

(5) X-ray systems other than those described in 41.1(6)"a"(1), (2), and (3), and (4) (Special purpose X-ray systems) and veterinary systems installed prior to July 1, 1998.

1. No change.

2. Means shall be provided to align the center of the X-ray field with the center of the image receptor to within 2 percent of the SID, or means shall be provided to both size and align the X-ray field such that the X-ray field at the plane of the image receptor does not extend beyond any edge of the image receptor. Compliance shall be determined with the axis of the X-ray beam perpendicular to the plane of the image receptor.

3. No change.

b. Radiation exposure control devices.

(1) Timers. Means shall be provided to terminate the exposure at a preset time interval, preset product of current and time, a preset number of pulses, or a preset radiation exposure to the image receptor. In addition, it shall not be possible to make an exposure when the timer is set to a "zero" or "off" position if either position is provided. Except for dental panoramic systems, termination of an exposure shall cause automatic resetting of the timer to its initial setting or to "zero."

(2) X-ray control.

1. Manual exposure control. An X-ray control shall be incorporated into each X-ray system such that an exposure can be terminated by the operator at any time except for exposure of one-half second or less, or during serial radiography when means shall be provided to permit completion of any single exposure of the series in process.

2. Each X-ray control shall be located in such a way as to meet the following requirements: Stationary X-ray systems (except podiatry and veterinary units) shall be required to have the X-ray control (or exposure switch in the case of podiatry units) exposure switch permanently mounted in a protected area so that the operator is required to remain in that protected area during the entire exposure; and mobile and portable X-ray systems which are:


* Used for greater than one week in the same location, i.e., a room or suite, shall meet the requirements of 41.1(6)"b"(2)"2"; or


* Used for greater than one hour and less than one week at the same location, i.e., a room or suite, or in a clinical setting for routine extremities only, shall meet the requirement of the above paragraph or be provided with a 6.5 feet (1.98 m) high protective barrier which is placed at least 6 feet (1.83 m) 2.7 meters (9 feet) from the tube housing assembly. and at least 6 feet (1.83 m) from the patient; or


* Used to make an exposure(s) of a patient at the use location shall meet the requirement of the two above paragraphs or be provided with a method of X-ray control which will permit the operator to be at least 12 feet (3.66 m) from the tube housing assembly during an exposure.

3. The X-ray control shall provide visual indication observable at or from the operator's protected position whenever X-rays are produced. In addition, a signal audible to the operator shall indicate that the exposure has terminated.

(3) and (4) No change.

(5) Exposure duration (timer) linearity. For systems having independent selection of exposure time settings, the average ratios (Xi) of exposure to the indicated timer setting, in units of C kg-1s-1 (mR/s), obtained at any two clinically used timer settings shall not differ by more than 0.10 times their sum. This is written as:

(X1 - X2) _ 0.1 (X1 + X2)

where X1 and X2 are the average C kg-1s-1 (mR/s) values.

c. Source-to-skin distance. All mobile or portable radiographic systems shall be provided with means to limit the source-to-skin distance to equal to or greater than 30 centimeters except for veterinary systems.

d. Exposure reproducibility. The coefficient of variation of exposure shall not exceed 0.10 0.05 when all technique factors are held constant. This requirement applies to clinically used techniques. This requirement shall be deemed to have been met if, when four exposures are made at identical technique factors, the value of the average exposure (E) is greater than or equal to five times the maximum exposure (Emax) minus the minimum exposure (Emin):

E _ 5 (Emax - Emin)

e. No change.

f. Accuracy. Deviation of measured technique factors from indicated values of kVp and exposure time shall not exceed the limits specified for that system by its manufacturer. In the absence of manufacturer's specifications, the deviation shall not exceed 10 percent of the indicated value for kVp and 20 percent for time.

g. mA/mAs linearity. The following requirements apply when the equipment is operated on a power supply as specified by the manufacturer for any fixed X-ray tube potential within the range of 40 percent to 100 percent of the maximum rated:

(1) Equipment having independent selection of X-ray tube current (mA). The average ratios (Xi) of exposure to the indicated milliampere-seconds product (C kg-1 mAs-1 (or mR/mAs)) obtained at any two consecutive tube current settings shall not differ by more than 0.10 times their sum:

X1 - X2 _ 0.10 (X1 + X2)

where X1 and X2 are the average values obtained at each of two consecutive tube current settings, or at two settings differing by no more than a factor of 2 where the tube current selection is continuous.

(2) Equipment having a combined X-ray tube current-exposure time product (mAs) selector, but not a separate tube current (mA) selector. The average ratios (Xi) of exposure to the indicated milliampere-seconds product, in units of C kg-1 mAs-1 (or mR/mAs), obtained at any two consecutive mAs selector settings shall not differ by more than 0.10 times their sum:

X1 - X2 _ 0.10 (X1 + X2)

where X1 and X2 are the average values obtained at any two mAs selector settings, or at two settings differing by no more than a factor of 2 where the mAs selector provides continuous selection.

(3) Measuring compliance. Determination of compliance shall be based on 10 exposures taken within a time period of one hour, at each of the two settings. These two settings may include any two focal spot sizes except where one is equal to or less than 0.45 millimeters and the other is greater than 0.45 millimeters. For purposes of this requirement, focal spot size is the nominal focal spot size specified by the X-ray tube manufacturer.

h. Additional requirements applicable to certified systems only. Diagnostic X-ray systems incorporating one or more certified component(s) shall be required to comply with the following additional requirement(s) which relate to that certified component(s).

(1) Beam limitation for stationary and mobile general purpose X-ray systems.

1. There shall be provided a means of stepless adjustment of the X-ray field. The minimum field size at an SID of 100 centimeters shall be equal to or less than 5 centimeters by 5 centimeters.

2. When a light localizer is used to define the X-ray field, it shall provide an average illumination of not less than 160 lux or 15 foot-candles at 100 centimeters or at the maximum SID, whichever is less. The average illumination shall be based upon measurements made in the approximate center of each quadrant of the light field. Radiation therapy simulation systems manufactured on and after May 27, 1980, are exempt from this requirement.

3. The edge of the light field at 100 centimeters or at the maximum SID, whichever is less, shall have a contrast ratio, corrected for ambient lighting, of not less than 4 in the case of beam-limiting devices designed for use on stationary equipment, and a contrast ratio of not less than 3 in the case of beam-limiting devices designed for use on mobile equipment. The contrast ratio is defined as I1/I2 where I1 is the illumination 3 millimeters from the edge of the light field toward the center of the field; and I2 is the illumination 3 millimeters from the edge of the light field away from the center of the field. Compliance shall be determined with a measuring instrument aperture of 1 millimeter in diameter.

(2) Beam limitation and alignment on stationary general purpose X-ray systems equipped with PBL. If PBL is being used, the following requirements shall be met:

1. PBL shall prevent the production of X-rays when:


* Either the length or width of the X-ray field in the plane of the image receptor differs, except as permitted by 41.1(6)"h"(3), from the corresponding image receptor dimensions by more than 3 percent of the SID; or


* The sum of the length and width differences as stated in 41.1(6)"h"(2)"1" above without regard to sign exceeds 4 percent of the SID;

2. Compliance with 41.1(6)"h"(2)"1" shall be determined when the equipment indicates that the beam axis is perpendicular to the plane of the image receptor. Compliance shall be determined no sooner than 5 seconds after insertion of the image receptor;

3. The PBL system shall be capable of operation, at the discretion of the operator, such that the size of the field may be made smaller than the size of the image receptor through stepless adjustment of the field size. The minimum field size at an SID of 100 centimeters shall be equal to or less than 5 centimeters by 5 centimeters;

4. The PBL system shall be designed such that if a change in image receptor does not cause an automatic return to PBL function as described in 41.1(6)"h"(2)"1," then any change of image receptor size or SID must cause the automatic return.

(3) Beam limitation for portable X-ray systems. Beam limitation for portable X-ray systems shall meet the beam limitation requirements of 41.1(6)"a" or 41.1(6)"h"(2).

i. Tube stands for portable X-ray systems. A tube stand or other mechanical support shall be used for portable X-ray systems, so that the X-ray tube housing assembly need not be handheld during exposures.

ITEM 71. Amend 41.1(7) as follows:

41.1(7) Intraoral dental radiographic systems. In addition to the provisions of 41.1(3) and 41.1(4), the requirements of 41.1(7) apply to X-ray equipment and associated facilities used for dental radiography. Requirements for extraoral dental radiographic systems are covered in 41.1(6). Only systems meeting the requirements of 41.1(7) shall be used.

a. Source-to-skin distance. X-ray systems designed for use with an intraoral image receptor shall be provided with means to limit source-to-skin distance to not less than:

(1) 18 centimeters if operable above 50 kVp, or

(2) 10 centimeters if not operable above 50 kVp.

b. Field Beam limitation. Radiographic systems designed for use with an intraoral image receptor shall be provided with means to limit the X-ray beam such that:

(1) If the minimum source-to-skin distance (SSD) is 18 centimeters or more, the X-ray field, at the minimum SSD, shall be containable in a circle having a diameter of no more than 7 centimeters; and

(2) If the minimum SSD is less than 18 centimeters, the X-ray field, at the minimum SSD, shall be containable in a circle having a diameter of no more than 6 centimeters.

(3) The position indicating device shall be shielded and open-ended. The shielding shall be equivalent to the requirements of 41.1(4)"c."

c. Exposure control.

(1) Exposure initiation.

1. Means shall be provided to initiate the radiation exposure by a deliberate action on the part of the operator, such as the depression of a switch. Radiation exposure shall not be initiated without such an action; and

2. It shall not be possible to make an exposure when the timer is set to a "zero" or "off" position if either position is provided.

(2) Exposure indication. Means shall be provided for visual indication observable at or from the operator's protected position whenever X-rays are produced. In addition, a signal audible to the operator shall indicate that the exposure has terminated.

(3) Exposure termination.

c. Timers. 1. Means shall be provided to terminate the exposure at a preset time interval, preset product of current and time, a preset number of pulses, or a preset radiation exposure to the image receptor. In addition:

(1) It shall not be possible to make an exposure when the timer is set to a "zero" or "off" position if either position is provided.

2. Termination of exposure shall cause automatic resetting of the timer to its initial setting or to "zero."

3. An X-ray control shall be incorporated into each X-ray system such that an exposure can be terminated by the operator at any time, except for exposures of one-half (1/2) second or less.

(4) Exposure duration (timer) linearity. For systems having independent selection of exposure time settings, the average ratios (X1) of exposure to the indicated timer setting, in units of C kg-2 s-1 (mR/s), obtained at any two clinically used timer settings shall not differ by more than 0.10 times their sum. This is written as:

(X1 - X2) _ 0.1 (X1 + X2)

where X1 and X2 are the average values.

(2) Reproducibility. With a timer setting of 0.5 seconds or less, the average exposure period (T) shall be greater than or equal to five times the maximum exposure period (Tmax) minus the minimum exposure period (Tmin) when four timer tests are performed:

T _ 5 (Tmax - Tmin)

d. X-ray control.

(1) An X-ray control shall be incorporated into each X-ray system such that an exposure can be terminated by the operator at any time, except for exposures of one-half (1/2) second or less.

(2) (5) Each X-ray control exposure switch shall be located in such a way as to meet the following requirements:

1. Stationary X-ray systems shall be required to have the X-ray control permanently mounted in a protected area, exposure switch so that the operator is required to remain in that the protected area during the entire exposure; and

2. Mobile and portable X-ray systems which are:


* Used for greater than one week in the same location, i.e., a room or suite, shall meet the requirements of 41.1(7)"d"(2)"1"; 41.1(7)"c"(5)(1).


* Used for greater than one hour and less than one week at the same location, i.e., a room or suite, shall meet the requirements of the above paragraph or be provided with a 6.5 feet (1.98 m) high protective barrier which is placed at least 6 feet (1.83 m) from the tube housing assembly and at least 6 feet (1.83 m) from the patient; or means to allow the operator to be at least 9 feet (2.7 meters) from the tube housing assembly while making exposure.


* Used to make an exposure(s) of a patient at the use location shall meet the requirements of the above two paragraphs or be provided with a method of X-ray control which will permit the operator to be at least 12 feet (3.66 m) from the tube housing assembly during an exposure.

(3) The X-ray control shall provide visual indication observable at or from the operator's protected position whenever X-rays are produced. In addition, a signal audible to the operator shall indicate that the exposure has terminated.

e. Exposure reproducibility. The coefficient of variation shall not exceed 0.10 when all technique factors are held constant. This requirement shall be deemed to have been met if, when four exposures are made at identical technique factors, the value of the average exposure (E) is greater than or equal to five times the maximum exposure (Emax) minus the minimum exposure (Emin):

E _ 5 (Emax - Emin)

d. Reproducibility. When the equipment is operated on an adequate power supply as specified by the manufacturer, the estimated coefficient of variation of radiation exposures shall be no greater than 0.05, for any specific combination of selected technique factors.

e. mA/mS linearity. The following requirements apply when the equipment is operated on a power supply as specified by the manufacturer for any fixed X-ray tube potential within the range of 40 percent to 100 percent of the maximum rated.

(1) Equipment having independent selection of X-ray tube current (mA). The average ratios (X1) of exposure to the indicated milliampere-seconds product, in units of C kg-1 mAs-1 (or mR/mAs), obtained at any two consecutive tube current settings shall not differ by more than 0.10 times their sum:

(X1 - X2) _ 0.1 (X1 + X2)

where X1 and X2 are the average values obtained at each of two consecutive tube current settings, or at two settings differing by no more than a factor of 2 where the tube current selection is continuous.

(2) Equipment having a combined X-ray tube current-exposure time product (mAs) selector, but not a separate tube current (mA) selector. The average ratios (X1) of exposure to the indicated milliampere-seconds product, in units of C kg-1 mAs-1 (or mR/mAs), obtained at any two consecutive mAs selector settings shall not differ by more than 0.10 times their sum:

(X1 - X2) _ 0.1 (X1 + X2)

where X1 and X2 are the average values obtained at any two mAs selector settings, or at two settings differing by no more than a factor of 2 where the mAs selector provides continuous selection.

(3) Measuring compliance. Determination of compliance shall be based on 10 exposures taken within a time period of one hour, at each of the two settings. These two settings may include any two focal spot sizes except where one is equal to or less than 0.45 millimeters and the other is greater than 0.45 millimeters. For purposes of this requirement, focal spot size is the nominal focal spot size specified by the X-ray tube manufacturer.

f. Accuracy. Deviation of technique factors from indicated values for kVp and exposure time (if time is independently selectable) shall not exceed the limits specified for that system by its manufacturer. In the absence of manufacturer's specifications the deviation shall not exceed 10 percent of the indicated value for kVp and 20 percent for time.

g. kVp limitations. Dental X-ray machine with a nominal fixed kVp of less than 50 kVp shall not be used to make diagnostic dental radiographs of humans.

f h. Administrative controls.

(1) Patient and film holding devices shall be used when the techniques permit.

(2) The tube housing and the PID shall not be hand-held during an exposure.

(3) The X-ray system shall be operated in such a manner that the useful beam at the patient's skin does not exceed the requirements of 41.1(7)"b"(1).

(4) Dental fluoroscopy without image intensification shall not be used.

g. Additional requirements applicable to certified systems only. Only diagnostic X-ray systems incorporating one or more certified component(s) shall be required to comply with the following additional requirement(s) which relate to that certified component(s).

(1) Reproducibility. When the equipment is operated on an adequate power supply as specified by the manufacturer, the estimated coefficient of variation of radiation exposures shall be no greater than 0.05, for any specific combination of selected technique factors.

(2) Linearity. When the equipment allows a choice of X-ray tube current settings and is operated on a power supply as specified by the manufacturer in accordance with the requirements of applicable federal standards, for any fixed X-ray tube potential within the range of 40 to 100 percent of the maximum rating, the average ratios of exposure to the indicated milliampere-seconds product obtained at any two consecutive tube current settings shall not differ by more than 0.10 times their sum:

| X1 - X2 | _ 0.10 ( X1 + X2 )

where X1 and X2 are the average mR/mAs values obtained at each of two consecutive tube current settings.

(3) Accuracy. Deviation of technique factors from indicated values shall not exceed the limits specified for that system by its manufacturer.

(4) Timers. Termination of exposure shall cause automatic resetting of the timer to its initial setting or to "zero."

(5) Beam quality. All certified dental X-ray systems manufactured on and after December 1, 1980, shall have a minimum half-value layer not less than 1.5 millimeters aluminum equivalent. Systems operating above 70 kVp are subject to the filtration requirements of 41.1(4)"e"(1).

ITEM 72. Adopt new 41.1(9) as follows:

41.1(9) Bone densitometry units.

a. No additional shielding for the room is required.

b. Film badges must be issued for the first six months to all personnel operating the unit. If monitoring indicates no exposure, the IDPH may allow discontinuance of monitoring upon written request. When new procedures are started that have not been previously monitored, monitoring must be reinstated for six months.

c. Operators, other than physicians, must possess a health education background to include anatomy and physiology and must complete the manufacturer's training session pertaining to bone densitometry or equivalent. A permit to practice for operators is not required.

d. Specific operating procedures must be prepared and made available at the operator's position.

ITEM 73. Amend 41.1(10) as follows:

41.1(10) Veterinary medicine radiographic installations.

a. Equipment.

(1) The protective tube housing shall be equivalent to the requirements of 41.1(4)"c."

(2) Diaphragms or cones shall be provided for collimating the useful beam to the area of clinical interest and shall provide the same degree of protection as is required of the housing.

(3) The total filtration permanently in the useful beam shall not be less than 0.5 millimeters aluminum equivalent for machines operating up to 50 kVp, 1.5 millimeters aluminum equivalent for machines operating between 50 and 70 kVp, and 2.5 millimeters aluminum equivalent for machines operating above 70 kVp.

(4) A device shall be provided to terminate the exposure after a preset time or exposure.

(5) A dead-man type of exposure switch shall be provided, together with an electrical cord of sufficient length, so that the operator can stand out of the useful beam and at least 6 feet (1.83 m) from the animal during all X-ray exposures.

b. Structural shielding. Operator protection.

(1) All wall, ceiling, and floor areas shall be equivalent to or provided with applicable protective barriers to ensure compliance with 641--40.15(136C) and 40.21(136C) and subrule 40.26(1).

(2) All stationary, mobile or portable X-ray systems shall be provided with either a 2 meter (6.5 feet) high protective barrier for operator protections during exposures, or shall be provided with means to allow the operator to be at least 2.7 meters (9 feet) from the tube housing assembly during exposures.

c. Operating procedures.

(1) The operator shall stand well away from the useful beam and the animal during radiographic exposures.

(2) (1) No individual other than the operator shall be in the X-ray room while exposures are being made unless such individual's assistance is required., and

(2) The operator shall stand behind the protective barrier of 9 feet from the useful beam and the animal during radiographic exposures, or

(3) When an animal must be held in position during radiography, mechanical supporting or restraining devices should be used. If the animal must be held by an individual, that individual shall be protected with appropriate shielding devices, such as protective gloves and apron, and shall be so positioned that no part of the holder's body will be struck by the useful beam. The exposure of any individual used for this purpose shall be monitored.

ITEM 74. Amend 41.1(11), definition of "Noise," as follows:

"Noise" means the standard deviation of the fluctuations in CTN expressed as a percentage of the attenuation coefficient of water. Its estimate (Sn) is calculated using the following expression:

Sn =

100 x CS x s

mw
where:

CS = Contrast scale. Linear attenuation coefficient of the material of interest.

mw = Linear attenuation coefficient of water.

s = Estimated standard deviation of the CTN of picture elements in a specified area of the CT image.

ITEM 75. Amend 41.2(1) as follows:

41.2(1) Purpose and scope. This rule establishes requirements and provisions for the use of radionuclides in the healing arts and for issuance of licenses authorizing the medical use of this material. These requirements and provisions provide for the protection of the public health and safety. The requirements and provisions of this rule are in addition to, and not in substitution for, others in these rules the applicable portions of Chapters 38 to 40. The requirements and provisions of these rules apply to applicants and licensees subject to this rule unless specifically exempted. All references to any Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) in this chapter are those in effect as of January 1997 July 1, 1998.

ITEM 76. Amend 41.2(2), introductory paragraph, as follows and strike the following definitions:

41.2(2) Definitions. For the purpose of this chapter, the definitions of 641--Chapters 38 to 40 may also apply. As used in this rule 41.2(136C), the following definitions apply:

"ALARA" (as low as reasonably achievable) means making every reasonable effort to maintain exposures to radiation as far below the dose limits as is practical:

(1) Consistent with the purpose for which the licensed activity is undertaken;

(2) Taking into account the state of technology, the economics of improvements in relation to benefits to the public health and safety, and other societal and socioeconomic considerations; and

(3) In relation to utilization of nuclear energy in the public interest.

"Brachytherapy" means a method of radiation therapy in which sealed sources are utilized to deliver a radiation dose at a distance of up to a few centimeters, by surface, intracavitary, or interstitial application.

"Teletherapy" means therapeutic irradiation in which the source of radiation is at a distance from the body.

ITEM 77. Amend 41.2(14)"f" as follows:

f. Quality management program Written directives. Each licensee shall meet the following objectives:

(1) Each licensee under this paragraph, as applicable, shall establish and maintain a written quality management program to provide high confidence that radioactive material or the radiation therefrom will be administered as directed by the authorized user. The quality management program must include written policies and procedures to meet the following specific objectives:

1. (1) That, prior to administration, a written directive is prepared for:


*
1. Any teletherapy radiation dose;


*
2. Any gamma stereotactic radiosurgery radiation dose;


*
3. Any brachytherapy radiation dose;


*
4. Any administration of quantities greater than 30 microcuries of either sodium iodide I-125 or I-131; or


*
5. Any therapeutic administration of a radiopharmaceutical, other than sodium iodide I-125 or I-131;

2. (2) That, prior to each administration, the patient's or human research subject's identity is verified by more than one method as the individual named in the written directive;

3. (3) That final plans of treatment and related calculations for brachytherapy, teletherapy, and gamma stereotactic radiosurgery are in accordance with the respective written directives;

4. (4) That each administration is in accordance with the written directive; and

5. (5) That any unintended deviation from the written directive is identified and evaluated, and appropriate action is taken.

(2) The licensee shall:

1. Develop procedures for and conduct a review at intervals no greater than 12 months of the quality management program including, since the last review, an evaluation of:


* A representative sample of patient and human research subject administrations,


* All recordable events, and


* All misadministrations to verify compliance with all aspects of the quality management program;

2. Evaluate each of these reviews to determine the effectiveness of the quality management program and, if required, make modifications to meet the objectives of paragraph "a" of this subrule; and

3. Retain records of each review, including the evaluations and findings of the review, in an auditable form for three years.

(3) The licensee shall evaluate and respond, within 30 days after discovery of the recordable event, to each recordable event by:

1. Assembling the relevant facts including the cause;

2. Identifying what, if any, corrective action is required to prevent recurrence; and

3. Retaining a record, in an auditable form, for three years, of the relevant facts and what corrective action, if any, was taken.

(4) (6) The licensee shall retain:

1. Each written directive; and

2. A record of each administered radiation dose or radiopharmaceutical dosage where a written directive is required in 41.2(14)"f"(1)"1," in an audible form, for three years after the date of administration.

(5) The licensee may make modifications to the quality management program to increase the program's efficiency provided the program's effectiveness is not decreased. The licensee shall furnish the modification to the agency within 30 days after the modification has been made.

(6) Each applicant for a new license, as applicable, shall submit to the agency a quality management program as part of the application for a license and implement the program upon issuance of the license by the agency. Each existing licensee, as applicable, shall submit to the agency by March 31, 1995, a written certification that the quality management program has been implemented along with a copy of the program.

ITEM 78. Amend 41.2(26)"c" as follows:

c. A licensee shall conduct the surveys required by 41.2(26)"a" and "b" so as to be able to measure dose rates as low as 0.1 millirem (1 mSv) (1 uSv) per hour.

ITEM 79. Amend 41.2(27)"a" as follows:

a. A licensee shall not authorize release from confinement for medical care any patient or human research subject administered a radiopharmaceutical until either:

(1) The dose rate from the patient or human research subject is less than 5 millirems (50 mSv) (50 uSv) per hour at a distance of 1 meter; or

(2) The activity in the patient or human research subject is less than 30 millicuries (1.11 GBq).

ITEM 80. Amend 41.2(32) as follows:

41.2(32) Possession of survey instrument. A licensee authorized to use radioactive material for uptake, dilution, and excretion studies shall possess a portable radiation detection survey instrument capable of detecting dose rates over the range 0.1 millirem (1.0 mSv) (1.0 uSv) per hour to 50 millirems (500 mSv) (500 uSv) per hour. The instrument shall be operable and calibrated in accordance with 41.2(18).

ITEM 81. Amend 41.2(36) as follows:

41.2(36) Possession of survey instruments. A licensee authorized to use radioactive material for imaging and localization studies shall possess a portable radiation detection survey instrument capable of detecting dose rates over the range of 0.1 millirem (1 mSv) (1 uSv) per hour to 50 millirems (500 mSv) (500 uSv) per hour, and a portable radiation measurement survey instrument capable of measuring dose rates over the range of 1 millirem (10 mSv) (10 uSv) per hour to 1000 millirems (10 mSv) per hour. The instruments shall be operable and calibrated in accordance with 41.2(18).

ITEM 82. Amend 41.2(39)"a" as follows:

a. For each patient or human research subject receiving radiopharmaceutical therapy and hospitalized for compliance with 41.2(27), a licensee shall:

(1) to (7) No change.

(8) Measure the thyroid burden of each individual who helped prepare or administer a dosage of iodine-131 within three days during the period which starts the first days after administration and ends the fourth day after administering the dosage, and retain for the period required by 641--paragraph 40.82(2)"c" which is adopted and included herein arecord of each thyroid burden measurement, date of measurement, the name of the individual whose thyroid burden was measured, and the initials of the individual who made the measurements.

ITEM 83. Amend 41.2(40) as follows:

41.2(40) Possession of survey instruments. A licensee authorized to use radioactive material for radiopharmaceutical therapy shall possess a portable radiation detection survey instrument capable of detecting dose rates over the range of 0.1 millirem (1 mSv) (1uSv) per hour to 50 millirems (500 mSv) (500 uSv) per hour, and a portable radiation measurement survey instrument capable of measuring dose rates over the range of 1 millirem (10 mSv) (10 uSv) per hour to 1000 millirems (10 mSv) per hour. The instruments shall be operable and calibrated in accordance with 41.2(18).

ITEM 84. Amend 41.2(42) as follows:

41.2(42) Availability of survey instrument. A licensee authorized to use radioactive material as a sealed source for diagnostic purposes shall have available for use a portable radiation detection survey instrument capable of detecting dose rates over the range of 0.1 millirem (1 mSv) (1uSv) per hour to 50 millirems (500 mSv) (500 uSv) per hour or a portable radiation measurement survey instrument capable of measuring dose rates over the range of 1 millirem (10 mSv) (10 uSv) per hour to 1000 millirems (10 mSv) per hour. The instrument shall be operable and calibrated in accordance with 41.2(18).

ITEM 85. Amend 41.2(48) as follows:

41.2(48) Possession of survey instruments. A licensee authorized to use radioactive material for implant therapy shall possess a portable radiation detection survey instrument capable of detecting dose rates over the range of 0.1 millirem (1 mSv) (1 uSv) per hour to 50 millirems (500 mSv) (500 uSv) per hour, and a portable radiation measurement survey instrument capable of measuring dose rates over the range of 1 millirem (10 mSv) (10 uSv) per hour to 1000 millirems (10 mSv) per hour. The instruments shall be operable and calibrated in accordance with 41.2(18).

ITEM 86. Amend 41.2(54) as follows:

41.2(54) Possession of survey instrument. A licensee authorized to use radioactive material in a teletherapy unit shall possess either a portable radiation detection survey instrument capable of detecting dose rates over the range of 0.1 millirem (1 mSv) (1 uSv) per hour to 50 millirems (500 mSv) (500 uSv) per hour or a portable radiation measurement survey instrument capable of measuring dose rates over the range of 1 millirem (10 mSv) (10 uSv) per hour to 1000 millirems (10 mSv) per hour. The instruments shall be operable and calibrated in accordance with 41.2(18).

ITEM 87. Amend 41.2(60)"a"(1) as follows:

a. Before medical use, after each installation of a teletherapy source, and after making any change for which an amendment is required by 41.2(51), the licensee shall perform radiation surveys with an operable radiation measurement survey instrument calibrated in accordance with 41.2(18) to verify that:

(1) The maximum and average radiation levels at 1 meter from the teletherapy source with the source in the "off" position and the collimators set for a normal treatment field do not exceed 10 millirems (100 mSv) (100 uSv) per hour and 2 millirems (20 mSv) (20 uSv) per hour, respectively; and

ITEM 88. Amend 641--41.3(136C), catchwords, and 41.3(1)"a" as follows:

641--41.3(136C) Therapeutic use of radiation machines.

a. This subrule establishes requirements, for which the registrant is responsible, for use of therapeutic radiation machines. The provisions of this subrule are in addition to, and not in substitution for, other applicable provisions of these regulations.

ITEM 89. Amend 41.3(2), catchwords, as follows, and strike the following definitions:

41.3(2) Definitions. The following definitions are specific to 641--41.3(136C).

"Air kerma (K)" means the kinetic energy released in air by ionizing radiation. Kerma is determined as the quotient of dE by dM, where dE is the sum of the initial kinetic energies of all the charged ionizing particles liberated by uncharged ionizing particles in air of mass dM. The SI unit of air kerma is joule per kilogram and the special name for the unit of kerma is the gray (Gy).

"Beam monitoring system" means a system designed and installed in the radiation head to detect and measure the radiation present in the useful beam.

"Changeable filters" means any filter, exclusive of inherent filtration, which can be removed from the useful beam through any electronic, mechanical, or physical process.

"Interlock" means a device preventing the start or continued operation of equipment unless certain predetermined conditions prevail.

"Peak tube potential" means the maximum value of the potential difference across the X-ray tube during an exposure.

"Primary dose monitoring system" means a system which will monitor the useful beam during irradiation and which will terminate irradiation when a preselected number of dose monitor units have been delivered.

"Scattered radiation" means ionizing radiation emitted by interaction of ionizing radiation with matter, the interaction being accompanied by a change in direction of the radiation. Scattered primary radiation means that scattered radiation which has been deviated in direction only by materials irradiated by the useful beam.

"Secondary dose monitoring system" means a system which will terminate irradiation in the event of failure of the primary dose monitoring system.

"Simulator (radiation therapy simulation system)" means any X-ray system intended for localizing the volume to be exposed during radiation therapy and reproducing the position and size of the therapeutic irradiation field.

"Source" means the region or material from which the radiation emanates.

"Source-skin distance (SSD)." See "Target-to-skin distance."

"Wedge filter" means a filter which effects continuous change in transmission over all or a part of the useful beam.

"Written directive" means an order in writing for a specific patient, dated and signed by an authorized user prior to the administration of radiation, containing the following information: total dose, dose per fraction, treatment site and overall treatment period.

ITEM 90. Amend 41.3(17)"f" as follows:

f. Possession of survey instrument(s). Each facility location authorized to use a therapeutic radiation machine in accordance with 41.3(17) shall have at its disposal appropriately calibrated portable monitoring equipment. As a minimum, such equipment shall include a portable radiation measurement survey instrument capable of measuring dose rates over the range 1 rem 1 mrem (10 uSv) per hour to 1000 mrem (10 mSv) per hour. The survey instrument(s) shall be operable and calibrated at intervals not to exceed 12 months for the radiation measured.

ITEM 91. Amend 41.3(18)"a"(9)"4" as follows:

4. For each therapeutic radiation machine, the registrant shall determine, or obtain from the manufacturer, the maximum value(s) specified in 41.3(7)"a"(2)"2" and "3" 41.3(18)"a"(7)"2" and "3" for the specified operating conditions. Records of these maximum value(s) shall be maintained at the installation for inspection by the agency.

ITEM 92. Rescind and reserve 641--41.4(136C).

ITEM 93. Rescind and reserve 641--41.5(136C).

ITEM 94. Amend Chapter 41, Appendix A, as follows:

CHAPTER 41--APPENDIX A

INFORMATION ON RADIATION SHIELDING

REQUIRED FOR PLAN REVIEWS
(EXCLUDING THERAPY MACHINES)

In order for the agency to provide an evaluation, technical advice, and official approval on shielding requirements for a radiation installation, the following information shall be submitted.

1. The plans should show, as a minimum, the following:

(a) to (d) No change.

(e) The make and model of the X-ray equipment, the energy waveform (single phase, three phase, etc.) and the maximum technique factors.

(f) The type of examination(s) or treatment(s) which will be performed with the equipment.

2. Information on the anticipated workload of the X-ray system(s) in mA-minutes per week.

3. If the services of a qualified expert have been utilized to determine the shielding requirements, a report, including all basic assumptions used, shall be submitted with the plans.

ITEM 95. Amend Chapter 41, Appendix B, as follows:

CHAPTER 41--APPENDIX B

DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
FOR AN OPERATOR'S BOOTH

1. Space requirements:

(a) to (c) No change.

(d) The booth shall be located or constructed such that unattenuated direct scatter radiation originating on the examination table or at the wall cassette will not reach the operator's station in the booth.

2. Structural requirements:

(a) The booth walls shall be permanently fixed barriers of at least 7 feet (2.13 m) high.

(b) When a door or movable panel is used as an integral part of the booth structure, it must have an interlock which will prevent an exposure when the door or panel is not closed.

(c) Shielding shall be provided to meet the requirements of 641--Chapter 40.

3. X-ray control placement:

The X-ray control for the system shall be fixed within the booth; and

(a) Shall be at least 40 inches (1.02 m) from any open edge of the booth wall which is nearest to the examining table. point subject to direct scatter, leakage or primary beam radiation.

(b) Shall allow the operator to use the majority of the available viewing windows.

4. Viewing system requirements:

(a) Each booth shall have at least one viewing device which will:

(1) Be so placed that the operator can view the patient during any exposure, and

(2) The device shall be so placed that the operator can have full view of any occupant of the room and should be so placed that the operator can view any entry into the room. If any door which allows access to the room cannot be seen from the booth, then outside that door there shall be an "X-ray" warning sign that will be lighted anytime the rotor of the X-ray tube is activated. Alternatively, that door must have an interlock controlling the exposure which will prevent the exposure if the door is not closed.

(b) When the viewing system is a window, the following requirements also apply:

(1) The viewing area shall be at least 1 square foot (0.0929 m2).

(2) The design of the booth shall be such that the operator's expected position when viewing the patient and operating the X-ray system is at least 18 inches (0.457 m) from the edge of the booth.

(2) Regardless of size or shape, at least 0.09 m2 (1 sq ft) of window area must be centered no less than 0.6 m (2 feet) from the open edge of the booth and no less than 1.5 m (5.0 feet) from the floor.

(3) The material constituting the window shall have the same lead equivalence as that required in the booth's wall in which it is mounted.

(c) When the viewing system is by mirrors, the mirror(s) shall be so located as to accomplish the general requirements of Appendix B, 4(a).

(d) When the viewing system is by electronic means:

(1) The camera shall be so located as to accomplish the general requirements of Appendix B, 4(a), and

(2) There shall be an alternate viewing system as a backup for the primary system.

ITEM 96. Amend Chapter 41, Appendix C, numbered paragraph "6," and adopt new numbered paragraph "14" as follows:

6. An evaluation by a qualified expert of the X-ray system(s) to be used in the screening program. The evaluation by the qualified expert shall show that such system(s) does satisfy all requirements of these regulations. The evaluation shall include a measurement of patient exposures from the X-ray examinations to be performed.

14. An indication of the frequency of screening and the duration of the entire screening program.

ITEM 97. Rescind Chapter 41, Appendix D.

ITEM 98. Rescind Chapter 41, Appendix E.

ITEM 99. Amend Chapter 41, Appendix F, title, as follows:

APPENDIX F D
QA FOR THERAPEUTIC RADIATION MACHINES

ITEM 100. Amend Chapter 41, Appendix G, title, as follows:

APPENDIX G E
INFORMATION ON RADIATION SHIELDING REQUIRED FOR PLAN REVIEWS
FOR THERAPY MACHINES

ITEM 101. Amend Chapter 42, title, as follows:

CHAPTER 42

OPERATING PROCEDURES AND STANDARDS FOR USE OF RADIATION EMITTING EQUIPMENT

MINIMUM CERTIFICATION STANDARDS FOR DIAGNOSTIC RADIOGRAPHERS, NUCLEAR MEDICINE TECHNOLOGISTS, AND RADIATION THERAPISTS

ITEM 102. Amend 641--42.1(136C) as follows:

Amend the catchwords as follows:

641--42.1(136C) Minimum training standards for diagnostic radiographers. Purpose and scope.

Rescind subrules 42.1(2) to 42.1(13), renumber 42.1(1) as 42.1(2) and adopt the following new 42.1(1):

42.1(1) Except as otherwise specifically provided, these rules apply to all individuals who operate as a diagnostic radiographer, nuclear medicine technologist, or radiation therapist as defined below.

The provisions of this chapter are in addition to, and not in substitution for, any other applicable portions of 641--Chapters 38 to 41.

Amend renumbered 42.1(2), introductory paragraph and three definitions, and add the following new definitions:

42.1(2) Definitions. For the purpose of this chapter, the definitions of 641--Chapters 38 to 41 and 43 to 46 Chapter 38 may also apply.

"Approved course of study" means a curriculum and associated training and testing materials which the department has determined is are adequate to train students to meet the requirements of 42.1(136C) this chapter.

"Continuing education course" means a planned program of continuing education having sufficient scope and depth of a given subject area directly related to the field to form an educational unit that is planned, coordinated, administered, and evaluated in terms of educational objects and provides a defined level of knowledge or specific performance skill. This concept involves the organized presentation of a body of knowledge so that the subject matter is comprehensively covered in sufficient detail to meet the educational objectives of the course.

"Diagnostic radiographer" means an individual, other than a licensed practitioner or dental radiographer, who applies X-radiation to the human body for diagnostic purposes while under the supervision of a licensed practitioner. The types are as follows:

1. "General diagnostic radiographer" applies X-radiation to any part of the human body.

2. "Limited diagnostic radiographer" applies X-radiation to not more than two body parts. Chest and extremity radiographic examinations are considered as one body part.

3. "Limited in-hospital radiographer" applies X-radiation as permitted in 42.3(1)"c."

"In vitro" means a procedure in which the radioactive material is not administered to a human being.

"In vivo" means a procedure in which the radioactive material is administered to a human being.

"Licensed practitioner" means a person licensed or otherwise authorized by law to practice medicine, osteopathy, chiropractic, podiatry, dentistry or dental hygiene, or certification as a physician assistant as defined in Iowa Code section 148C. 1, subsection 6.

"NRC" means Nuclear Regulatory Commission.

"Nuclear medicine procedure" means any procedure utilizing radiopharmaceuticals for diagnosis or treatment of disease in human beings and any duties performed by the technologist during sealed source procedures and includes, but is not limited to:

1. Administration of any radiopharmaceutical to human beings for diagnostic purposes.

2. Administration of radioactive material to human beings for therapeutic purposes.

3. Use of radioactive material for diagnostic purposes involving transmission or excitation.

4. Quality control and quality assurance.

"Nuclear medicine technologist" means an individual, other than a licensed physician, who performs nuclear medicine procedures while under the supervision of a physician who is authorized by NRC or Iowa to possess and use radioactive materials.

"Quality assurance" means all aspects of a nuclear medicine program that ensure the quality of imaging and therapy procedures.

"Quality control" means specific tests and measurements that ensure the purity, quantity, product identity, and biologic safety of radiopharmaceuticals.

"Radionuclide" means a radioactive element or a radioactive isotope.

"Radiopharmaceutical" means a substance defined by the Food and Drug Administration as a radioactive drug.

"Simulation radiography" means the science and art of applying X-radiation to human beings for the purpose of localizing treatment fields and isotopes and for treatment planning.

"Simulation therapist" means an individual, other than a physician, who applies X-radiation to human beings for the purpose of localizing treatment fields and isotopes and for treatment planning.

"Sinus" as used in the limited radiographer curriculum refers to the paranasal sinuses only.

"Special category course" means those programs still related to health care but indirectly related to diagnostic radiography, nuclear medicine technology, or radiation therapy. Such programs are: venipuncture, CPR, educator's programs, management programs, tumor boards, equipment training, personal improvement, etc.

"Student" means a person an individual enrolled in and participating in an approved course of study.

ITEM 103. Rescind 641--42.2(136C) and adopt the following new rule:

641--42.2(136C) General requirements.

42.2(1) Minimum eligibility requirements.

a. Graduation from high school or its equivalent.

b. Attainment of 18 years of age.

c. Ability to adequately perform necessary duties without constituting a hazard to the health or safety of patients or operators.

42.2(2) Disciplinary grounds and actions. The following shall be grounds for disciplinary action involving possible suspension or revocation of certification or levying of fines:

a. Operating as a diagnostic radiographer, nuclear medicine technologist, or radiation therapist without meeting the requirements of this chapter.

b. Allowing any individual excluding a licensed physician to operate as a diagnostic radiographer, nuclear medicine technologist, or radiation therapist if that individual cannot provide proof of certification by the department.

c. Failing to report to the department any individual whom the certificate holder knows is in violation of this rule.

d. Submitting false information in order to obtain certification or renewal certification as a diagnostic radiographer, nuclear medicine technologist, or radiation therapist.

e. Any action that the department determines may jeopardize the public, other staff, or certificate holder's health and safety.

42.2(3) Continuing education.

a. Each individual other than a licensed practitioner who is certified under these rules shall, during a two-year period, obtain continuing education credit as follows:

(1) General diagnostic radiographer: 24 clock hours, 1.0 hour must be in radiation protection.

(2) Limited in-hospital diagnostic radiographer: 24 clock hours, 1.0 hour must be in radiation protection.

(3) Limited diagnostic radiographer: 12 clock hours, 1.0 hour must be in radiation protection.

(4) General nuclear medicine technologist: 24 hours total.

1. One clock hour in principles of radiation protection and exposure each year, a total of two hours each two-year period.

2. One clock hour in quality assurance each year, a total of two hours each two-year period.

3. The remaining 20 clock hours of continuing education in each two-year period may be in any other subjects directly related to nuclear medicine and approved by the department.

(5) Limited nuclear medicine technologists: 12 hours total, 1.0 hour must be radiation protection and 1.0 hour must be in quality assurance.

(6) Radiation therapist: proof of 24.0 clock hours of continuing education courses in subjects directly related to radiation therapy.

(7) Simulation therapist: proof of 24.0 clock hours of continuing education courses with at least 12.0 hours directly related to radiation therapy. 12.0 hours may be in specified diagnostic radiography courses.

b. Continuing education course approval.

(1) Thirty days prior to conducting a continuing education course, the sponsoring individual must submit the following:

1. The course objectives.

2. An outline of the course which sets forth the subject, the course content, and the length of the course in clock hours.

3. The instructor's name and short résumé detailing qualifications.

(2) Following its review, the department may, in consultation with or under predetermined guidance of the technical advisory committee, approve, disapprove, or request additional information on the proposed course.

(3) The department may, from time to time, audit the continuing education course to verify the adequacy of program content and delivery.

(4) Courses must be at least one clock hour in length and if lasting more than one hour, will be assigned credit in half-hour increments to the closest half-hour.

c. Continuing education credit will be awarded under provisions of 42.2(3) by the department to individuals:

(1) Who have successfully completed a continuing education course which has been approved by the department.

(2) Who present a department-approved continuing education course to individuals certified in the presenter's field. Credit granted shall be at a rate of two times the amount of time it takes to present the course.

(3) Only once during a two-year period for the same continuing education course.

d. Continuing education must be directly related to the area of practice of the operator attending the program. Twenty-five percent of the total hours required may be in "special category."

e. It is required that proof of receiving continuing education be retained at each individual's place of employment for review by representatives of the department. Proof of continuing education must be maintained for at least three years.

f. All continuing education requirements shall be completed during the two-year period prior to the certification continuing education due date.

g. Late submission of continuing education requirements.

(1) For any individual who completes the required continuing education before the continuing education due date but fails to submit the required proof within 30 days after the continuing education due date, the certification shall be terminated and the renewal fee will not be refunded.

(2) Any individual who fails to complete the required continuing education before the continuing education due date but submits a written plan of correction to obtain the required hours shall be allowed no more than 60 days after the original continuing education due date to complete the plan of correction and submit the documentation of completion of continuing education requirements. After 60 days, the certification shall be terminated and the individual shall not function as a diagnostic radiographer, radiation therapist, or nuclear medicine technologist in Iowa.

(3) Once certification has been terminated, any individual who requests permission to reestablish certification within six months of the initial continuing education due date must submit proof of continuing education hours and shall submit a late fee as set forth in 641--paragraph 38.8(6)"c" in addition to the annual fee set forth in 641--paragraph 38.8(6)"a" in order to obtain reinstatement of certification.

42.2(4) Recertification.

a. If an individual allows the certification to expire for any reason or if any individual voluntarily terminates certification, the following will apply:

(1) Any individual who wishes to regain certification and makes application within six months of the termination date will be allowed to do so with no additional training or testing required.

(2) Any individual who wishes to regain certification after the six-month period will need to meet the current educational and testing requirements for that particular certification. Proof of possession of a previous certification may satisfy the training portion of this requirement.

(3) Any individual who has not renewed certification for at least five years and wants to regain certification, or who has not applied for certification within five years of the completion date of the original training course, will need to complete a recertification program approved by the department of not less than 24 contact hours for general certifications and 12 contact hours for limited certifications which specifically applies to the area of certification.

b. Recertification programs.

(1) The recertification program must review those basic principles necessary to ensure minimum competency in the certification area and must also include the satisfactory completion of a written examination. Both the program and the examination must acquire prior approval from the department. Courses designed for use in the recertification program will not qualify for continuing education credit for those individuals required to attend in order to recertify.

(2) If no approved programs are available, the department may require attendance for a minimum of 24 contact hours for general certifications and 12 hours for limited certifications at specific continuing education programs. The continuing education must be confined to subjects which apply to the area of certification limitation, if any, and would have to be completed within a specified time period.

c. Exemptions. Any or all of the above-mentioned requirements may be waived for an individual who has been actively employed in the certification area in another state, country, or federal institution or who can prove circumstances above and beyond the norm. These cases will be reviewed on an individual basis and the decision of the department shall be final.

d. Training programs. Any individual submitting a training program to the department for approval must provide the following:

(1) An outline of the didactic and clinical studies to meet the requirements of this subrule.

(2) Proof that the instructor meets the requirements of this rule as a diagnostic radiographer, nuclear medicine technologist, radiation therapist or is a licensed physician trained in the specific area of competence.

(3) A time schedule of the training program.

(4) A description of the mechanism to be used to determine competency.

e. Upon the completion of the training the following must be submitted:

(1) A statement of competency from the trainer.

(2) A statement of permission to allow a representative of the department to comprehensively evaluate whether the individual meets the training standard.

42.2(5) Fees. All individuals certified under this rule must pay fees as specified in 641--subrule 38.8(6).

ITEM 104. Rescind rule 641--42.3(136C) and adopt the following new rule:

641--42.3(136C) Specific requirements for diagnostic radiographers.

42.3(1) Training requirements.

a. General diagnostic radiographer. Successful completion of a Joint Review Committee on Education in Radiologic Technology approved course of study or equivalent to prepare the student to demonstrate competency in the following areas:

(1) Radiation protection of patients and workers, including monitoring, shielding, units of measurement and permissible levels, biological effects of radiation, and technical consideration in reducing radiation exposure and frequency of retakes;

(2) Technique and quality control to achieve diagnostic objectives with minimum patient exposure, including X-ray examinations, X-ray production, films, screens, holders and grids, technique conversions, film processing, artifacts, image quality, film systems and control of secondary radiation for the specified category;

(3) Patient care including, but not limited to, aseptic techniques, emergency procedures and first aid, and contrast media;

(4) Positioning, including normal and abnormal anatomy and projections;

(5) Radiographic equipment and operator maintenance to include X-ray tubes, grids, standardization of equipment, generators, preventive maintenance, basic electricity, film processors and maintenance, collimators, X-ray control consoles, tilt tables, ancillary equipment, fluoroscopes and electrical and mechanical safety;

(6) Special techniques, including stereo, body section radiography, pelvimetry, image intensification, photo timing and mobile units; and

(7) Clinical experience sufficient to demonstrate competency in the application of the above as specified in the revised 1990 edition of the "Essentials and Guidelines of an Accredited Educational Program for the Radiographer" of the American Medical Association's Committee on Allied Health Education and Accreditation.

b. Limited diagnostic radiographer.

(1) Completion of an approved course of study to prepare the student to demonstrate competency in the following areas:

1. Radiation protection of patients and workers including monitoring, shielding, units of measurement and permissible levels, biological effects of radiation, and technical considerations in reducing radiation exposure and frequency of retakes;

2. Technique and quality control to achieve diagnostic objectives with minimum patient exposure to include X-ray examination, X-ray production, films, screens, holders and grids, technique conversions, film processing, artifacts, image quality, film systems and control of secondary radiation for the specified category;

3. Patient care including, but not limited to, aseptic techniques, emergency procedures and first aid;

4. Positioning, including normal and abnormal anatomy and projections for the specific category;

5. Radiographic equipment and operator maintenance to include X-ray tubes, grids, standardization of equipment, generators, preventive maintenance, basic electricity, film processors and maintenance, collimators, X-ray control consoles, tilt tables, ancillary equipment, and electrical and mechanical safety;

6. Special techniques limited to those required by the specific category; and

7. Clinical experience sufficient to demonstrate competency in the application of the above as specified by the department. Clinical experience must be directly supervised by a two-year trained general radiographer, licensed physician, chiropractor, or podiatrist who physically observes and critiques the actual X-ray procedures.

8. Permission for a representative of the Iowa department of public health to comprehensively evaluate whether the individual meets the training standard.

c. Limited in-hospital diagnostic radiographer. An individual employed in a diagnostic radiography facility which has a workload of less than 5000 examinations per year and which provides 24-hour service in a hospital will be permitted to apply X-radiation to any part of the human body at that facility if the individual completes a training program recognized by the department, as outlined in 42.1(4)"b"(1) and submits a letter from a board-certified or board-eligible radiologist who verifies in writing the specific procedures the individual is competent to perform. The training program must cover the areas outlined in 42.1(4)"b," the anatomy and physiology of the entire body, positioning and techniques relative to the procedures to be performed, and appropriate clinical training which includes all parts of the human body. Training received under this subrule is specific to the facility and must be reevaluated by the department before an individual may transfer to another facility.

d. Certification by the American Registry of Radiologic Technologists or the American Registry of Clinical Radiography Technologists meets the minimum requirements of 42.3(136C).

42.3(2) School accreditation.

a. Graduates of schools accredited by the Joint Review Committee on Education in Radiologic Technology who have successfully completed an appropriate course of study in diagnostic radiography will be considered to meet the requirements of 42.3(1)"a."

b. Graduates of programs recognized by the Iowa department of public health in consultation with the professional societies and boards of examiners for appropriate course of study in diagnostic radiography will be considered to meet the requirements of this rule.

42.3(3) Examinations.

a. All individuals, except licensed practitioners, seeking to perform diagnostic radiography must, in addition to subrule 42.3(1), take and satisfactorily pass a written examination within one year of the date of the initial certification. Examination must include the following subject matter for each category of radiographer:

(1) General diagnostic radiographer and limited in-hospital radiographer: radiation protection, radiation physics, radiographic and fluoroscopic techniques, special procedures, patient care, positioning, equipment maintenance, anatomy, contrast media, physiology, quality control, radiographic processing and clinical experience.

(2) Limited diagnostic radiographer: radiation protection, radiation physics, radiographic techniques, patient care, positioning, equipment maintenance, anatomy, physiology, quality control, and radiographic processing and clinical experience for the specific permit to practice requested.

(3) Contents of the examinations will be established and periodically revised by the department in consultation with the technical advisory committee.

b. Examinations will be given by the department at least annually, or as necessary, at course of study location or other location determined by the department.

c. The department may accept, in lieu of its own examination, evidence of satisfactory performance in an examination given by an appropriate organization or testing service provided that the department finds the organization or service to be competent to examine applicants in the discipline of radiography. For purposes of this subrule, individuals who are registered with the American Registry of Radiologic Technologists or American Registry of Clinical Radiography Technologists meet the testing requirements of 42.3(3).

d. Any individual certified under these rules and exempted from examination is exempted from examination requirements as long as the initial certification remains in effect.

42.3(4) Exemptions.

a. Students enrolled in and participating in an approved program or approved course of study for diagnostic radiography, or an approved school of medicine, osteopathy, podiatry, and chiropractic, who as a part of their course of study, apply ionizing radiation to a human being while under the supervision of a licensed practitioner. The projected completion date of the clinical portion of the program or course of study shall be within a time period equal to or less than twice that required for the original program or course of study.

b. Licensed practitioners as defined in Chapter 38.

c. Individuals who operate processors only.

ITEM 105. Adopt the following new rules:

641--42.4(136C) Specific requirements for nuclear medicine technologists.

42.4(1) Specific eligibility requirements.

a. Any individual who is registered in nuclear medicine technology with the following organizations may meet the education and testing requirements of this rule.

(1) American Registry of Radiologic Technologists.

(2) Nuclear Medicine Technology Certification Board.

(3) American Society of Clinical Pathologists.

b. Any individual, other than a licensed physician, who has completed all educational requirements of this rule but has not yet successfully completed the required examination will be issued temporary certification valid for one year from completion of a training program approved by the department.

42.4(2) Training requirements.

a. General nuclear medicine technologist. Successful completion of a Joint Review Committee on Educational Programs in Nuclear Medicine approved course of study or equivalent designed to prepare the student to demonstrate competency in the following:

(1) Basic anatomy, physiology, and pathology.

(2) Intravenous injections and radiopharmaceutical chemistry.

(3) Radiation physics and mathematics.

(4) Nuclear instrumentation.

(5) Radiation biology.

(6) Radiation protection and radiation protection standards and codes.

(7) Laboratory procedures and techniques (in vivo and in vitro).

(8) Clinical application of radiopharmaceuticals used for diagnostic and therapeutic uses and duties performed by the technologist during sealed source procedures.

(9) Records and administrative procedures.

(10) Medical ethics.

(11) Patient care.

b. Limited nuclear medicine technologist. Successful completion of a department-approved training program that prepares the student to demonstrate competency in a specified area. Each program shall include the items in 42.4(2)"a" that are specific to the limited area. Included are laboratory technologists who perform nuclear medicine procedures unless the material handled is regulated under 641--paragraph 39.4(22)"i."

c. Graduates of programs recognized by the department in consultation with the professional societies and others as being adequate and appropriate courses of study in nuclear medicine technology may be considered to meet the requirements of this subrule.

42.4(3) Examinations.

a. Any individual, other than a licensed physician, seeking certification as a general nuclear medicine technologist shall, in addition to the requirements of 42.4(2) successfully complete a written examination including the subject matter specified in 42.4(2)"a." The following organizations offer approved general examinations:

(1) American Registry of Radiologic Technologists.

(2) Nuclear Medicine Technology Certification Board.

b. Any individual certified under these rules shall be exempt from the examination requirements as long as the original certification remains in effect.

c. Any individual, other than a licensed physician, seeking certification as a limited nuclear medicine technologist shall, in addition to the requirements of 42.4(2)"b," successfully complete a written examination approved by the department which includes the subject matter specified in 42.4(2)"b."

d. Any individual holding temporary certification must successfully complete an approved examination within one year of the issuance date of the certification.

42.4(4) Exemptions.

a. Students enrolled in and participating in an approved program or approved course of study for nuclear medicine technology or an approved school of medicine, osteopathy, podiatry, or chiropractic who, as a part of their course of study, administer radioactive material to a human being while under the supervision of a licensed physician who appears as an authorized user on an Iowa or NRC radioactive materials license. Clinical experience must be directly supervised by a certified nuclear medicine technologist or by a physician who appears as an authorized user on an Iowa or NRC radioactive materials license.

b. A licensed physician who appears as an authorized user on an Iowa or NRC radioactive materials license.

641--42.5(136C) Specific requirements for radiation therapists.

42.5(1) Specific eligibility requirements. Each individual shall meet one of the following:

a. Any individual who is registered in radiation therapy with the American Registry of Radiological Technologists in radiation therapy meets the education and testing requirements of this rule.

b. Any individual, other than a licensed physician, who has completed all educational requirements of this rule but has not successfully completed the required examination will be issued temporary certification valid for one year from the date of completion of a training program approved by the department.

42.5(2) Training requirements.

a. General radiation therapist. Successful completion of a Joint Committee on Education in Radiologic Technology approved course of study or equivalent designed to prepare the student to demonstrate didactic and clinical competency in radiation therapy including, but not limited to, anatomy, physiology, radiation physics, radiation protection and exposure, quality assurance, radiation oncology treatment techniques, dosimetry, radiation oncology and pathology, radiology, oncologic patient care and management.

b. Limited radiation therapist. Successful completion of a training program approved by the department to prepare the student to demonstrate competency in a specified area only. This includes the simulation therapist. Each program shall include the items in 42.5(2)"a" that are specific to the limited area.

c. Graduates of programs recognized by the department in consultation with the professional societies and others as being adequate and appropriate courses of study in radiation therapy technology may be considered to meet the requirements of this subrule.

42.5(3) Examinations.

a. Any individual, other than licensed physicians, seeking certification as a radiation therapist shall, in addition to the requirements of 42.5(2), satisfactorily complete a written examination in radiation therapy technology approved by the department. An approved examination is offered by the American Registry of Radiologic Technologists.

b. Any individual certified under these rules and exempted from examination, is exempt from examination requirements as long as the initial certification remains in effect.

c. Any individual seeking to perform simulation radiography only must successfully complete an approved examination in either diagnostic radiography or radiation therapy.

d. Any individual holding a temporary certification must successfully complete an approved examination within one year of the date of completion of the training.

42.5(4) Exemptions.

a. Students enrolled in and participating in an approved program or approved course of study for radiation therapy technology or an approved school of medicine, osteopathy, podiatry, or chiropractic who, as a part of their course of study, administer radiation therapy to a human being while under the supervision of a licensed physician in the state of Iowa. Clinical experience must be directly supervised by a radiation therapist or radiation oncologist who physically observes and critiques the actual radiation therapy procedure.

b. A licensed physician in the state of Iowa.

ITEM 106. Amend Chapter 45, title, as follows:

CHAPTER 45

RADIATION SAFETY REQUIREMENTS FOR

INDUSTRIAL RADIOGRAPHIC OPERATIONS /NON-MEDICAL USE OF RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL AND RADIATION PRODUCING MACHINES

ITEM 107. Amend 641--45.1(136C), catchwords, and 45.1(1) as follows:

641--45.1(136C) General requirements for industrial radiography operations.

45.1(1) Purpose and scope. The rules in this chapter establish radiation safety requirements for using sources of radiation for industrial radiography. The requirements of this chapter are in addition to, and not in substitution for, other applicable requirements of 641--Chapter Chapters 38, 39, and 40, or 41. The rules in this chapter apply to all licensees or registrants who use sources of radiation for industrial radiography. All references to any Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) in this chapter are those in effect as of October 1, 1996 July 1, 1998.

The provisions of Chapter 38 are in addition to, and not in substitution for, any other applicable portions of Chapters 39 to 45.

ITEM 108. Amend 45.1(2), introductory paragraph, and amend or strike the following definitions:

45.1(2) Definitions. For the purpose of this chapter, the definitions of 641--Chapters Chapter 38 to 41 may also apply. As used in this chapter, the following definitions apply:

"Cabinet radiography" means industrial radiography conducted in an enclosure or cabinet shielded so that radiation levels at every location on the exterior meet the limitations specified in 641--40.26(136C).

"Industrial radiography" means a nondestructive testing method using ionizing radiation, such as gamma rays or X-rays, to make radiographic images for the purpose of detecting flaws in objects without destroying them.

"Permanent radiographic installation" means a shielded installation or structure designed or intended for performing enclosed radiography, not located at a temporary job site, and in which radiography is regularly performed.

"Radiation machine" means any device capable of producing ionizing radiation except those which produce radiation only from radioactive material.

"Sealed source" means radioactive material that is permanently bonded or fixed in a capsule or matrix designed to prevent release and dispersal of the radioactive material under the most severe conditions likely to be encountered in normal use and handling (pill).

"Source container" means a shielded device in which sealed sources are secured, transported, and stored.

"Storage container" means a shielded device in which sealed sources are secured, transported, and stored.

ITEM 109. Amend 45.1(5)"a" and "b" as follows:

a. The licensee or registrant shall maintain sufficient calibrated and operable radiation survey instruments at each location where sources of radiation are present to make physical radiation surveys as required by this chapter and 641--subrule 40.36(1). Instrumentation required by this subrule shall have a range such that 2 milliroentgens millirems (5.16 _ 107C/kg) (0.02 millisievert) per hour through 1 roentgen rem (2.58 _ 104C/kg) (0.01 sievert) per hour can be measured.

b. Notwithstanding the requirements of 641--subrule 40.36(2) each radiation survey instrument shall be calibrated:

(1) At energies appropriate for use and at intervals not to exceed three six months and after each instrument servicing;

(2) Such that accuracy within plus or minus 20 percent can be demonstrated;

(3) At 2 points located approximately 1/3 and 2/3 of full-scale on each scale for linear scale instruments; at midrange of each decade, and at 2 points of at least 1 decade for logarithmic scale instruments; and at appropriate points 3 points between 2 and 1000 mrem per hour for digital instruments; and

(4) No change.

ITEM 110. Amend 45.1(8)"a" as follows:

a. Each licensee or registrant shall ensure that visual and operability checks for obvious defects, proper working order, adequate shielding, and required labeling in of radiation machines, radiographic exposure devices, storage containers, and source changers, and survey instruments are performed prior to each day or shift of use.

ITEM 111. Amend 45.1(10)"f" and "g" as follows:

f. Applications and examinations.

(1) Application.

1. An application for taking the examination shall be on forms prescribed and furnished by the agency along with the fee required in 641--38.8(3).

2. A nonrefundable fee of $100 to cover the cost of the examination shall be submitted with each application.

3. The application and the nonrefundable fee shall be submitted to the agency by the date specified by the agency.

4 2. An individual whose I.D. card has been suspended or revoked shall obtain prior approval from the agency to apply to take the examination.

(2) No change.

g. Identification procedures.

(1) I.D. card.

1. to 3. No change.

4. Any individual who wishes to replace the I.D. card shall submit to the agency a written request for a replacement I.D. card, stating the reason a replacement I.D. card is needed and the fee required in 641--subrule 38.8(3). A nonrefundable fee of $25 shall be paid to the agency for each replacement of a lost I.D. card. The individual shall maintain in possession a copy of the request while performing industrial radiographic operations until a replacement I.D. card is received from the agency.

(2) and (3) No change.

ITEM 112. Amend 45.1(11) as follows:

45.1(11) Internal audits. Each licensee or registrant shall conduct an internal audit program to ensure that the agency's radioactive material license conditions and the licensee's or registrant's operating and emergency procedures are followed by each radiographer. These internal audits shall be performed at least quarterly, and each radiographer shall be audited at least quarterly. Records of internal audits shall be maintained for inspection by the agency for two years from the date of the audit. Each radiographer's, radiographer trainee's, and accelerator operator's performance during an actual radiographic operation shall be audited at intervals not to exceed three months. If a radiographer or a radiographer trainee has not participated in a radiographic operation for more than three months since the last audit, that individual's performance shall be observed and recorded the next time the individual participates in a radiographic operation. Records of audits shall be maintained by the registrant for agency inspection for two years from the date of the audit.

ITEM 113. Amend 45.1(12)"b"(5) and "d" as follows:

(5) If an individual's pocket dosimeter is discharged beyond its range (i.e., goes "off scale"), industrial radiographic operations by that individual shall cease and the individual's film badge or TLD shall be immediately within 24 hours sent for processing. The individual shall not return to work with sources of radiation until a determination of the radiation exposure has been made.

d. Pocket dosimeters shall be checked for correct response to radiation at periods not to exceed one year. Acceptable dosimeters shall read within plus or minus 30 20 percent of the true radiation exposure. Records of this check shall be maintained for inspection by the agency for two years from the date of the event.

ITEM 114. Rescind 45.2(4)"d."

ITEM 115. Amend 45.2(6)"b"(3) as follows:

(3) Tests for proper operation of interlocks used to control entry to the high radiation area or alarm systems, where applicable, shall be conducted and recorded every three months. Records of these tests shall be maintained for agency inspection until disposal is authorized by the agency.

ITEM 116. Rescind and reserve 45.3(1).

ITEM 117. Amend 45.3(3)"a" as follows:

a. Locked radiographic exposure devices, source changers, transport packages, and storage containers shall be physically secured to prevent tampering, accidental loss, or removal by unauthorized personnel and stored to minimize danger from explosion or fire.

ITEM 118. Amend 45.3(4)"c" as follows:

c. In addition to the requirements specified in paragraphs "a" and "b" of this subrule, the following requirements apply to radiographic exposure devices and associated equipment that allow the source to be moved out of the device for routine radiographic operation or source changing:

ITEM 119. Rescind and reserve 45.3(6)"b."

ITEM 120. Amend 45.4(1)"b" as follows:

b. Unless specifically required otherwise by this rule, all registrants or licensees performing operations with a particle accelerator are subject to the requirements of 641--Chapters 38 to 40 and 641--45.1(136C). The requirements of 641--45.1(10) do not apply.

ITEM 121. Amend 45.4(2), introductory paragraph, as follows:

45.4(2) Definitions. For purposes of this subrule, definitions in 641--Chapter 38 may also apply. As used in this rule, the following definitions apply:

ITEM 122. Amend 45.4(6) as follows:

45.4(6) Limitations Operations.

a. and b. No change.

c. Along with the audit required in 641--subrule 40.10(3), each operator's performance during an actual accelerator operation shall be audited by the radiation safety officer or designee at intervals not to exceed 12 months. If an operator has not participated in an accelerator operation for more than 12 months since the last audit, the individual's performance shall be observed and recorded at the first opportunity the individual participates in an accelerator operation. Records of the audits shall be maintained by the registrant for the agency inspection for three years from the date of the audit.

ITEM 123. Adopt the following new subrule:

45.4(12) Radiation safety officer.

a. Each registrant shall appoint a radiation safety officer that meets the following requirements:

(1) Possesses a high school diploma or a certificate of high school equivalency based on the GED test;

(2) Documents two years of radiation protection experience.

b. The specific duties of the RSO include, but are not limited to, the following:

(1) To establish and oversee operating, emergency, and ALARA procedures and to review them regularly to ensure that the procedures are current and conform with these rules;

(2) To oversee and approve all phases of the training program for accelerator operators so that appropriate and effective radiation protection practices are taught;

(3) To ensure that required radiation surveys are performed and documented in accordance with these rules, including any corrective measures when levels of radiation exceed established limits;

(4) To ensure that personnel monitoring devices are calibrated and used properly by occupationally exposed personnel, that records are kept of the monitoring results, and that timely notifications are made as required by 641--Chapter 40;

(5) To ensure that any required interlock switches and warning signals are functioning and that radiation signs, ropes, and barriers are properly posted and positioned;

(6) To investigate and report to the agency each known or suspected case of radiation exposure to an individual or radiation level detected in excess of limits established by these rules and each theft or loss of source(s) of radiation, to determine the cause, and to take steps to prevent its recurrence;

(7) To have a thorough knowledge of management policies and administrative procedures of the licensee or registrant;

(8) To assume control and have the authority to institute corrective actions including shutdown of operations when necessary in emergency situations or unsafe conditions;

(9) To maintain records as required by these rules;

(10) To ensure the proper storing, labeling, and use of the accelerator;

(11) To ensure that inspection and maintenance programs are performed in accordance with 45.1(6), 45.1(8), 45.4(10)"c"; and

(12) To ensure that personnel are complying with these rules and the operating and emergency procedures of the registrant.

ITEM 124. Adopt the following new rules:

641--45.5(136C) Radiation safety requirements for analytical X-ray equipment.

45.5(1) Purpose and scope. This rule provides special requirements for analytical X-ray equipment. The requirements of this rule are in addition to, and not in substitution for, 641--Chapters 38, 39, and 40. The requirements of rules 641--45.1(136C) to 641--45.4(136C) do not apply.

45.5(2) Definitions. For the purpose of this subrule, definitions in 641--Chapter 38 may also apply. As used in this rule, the following definitions apply:

"Analytical X-ray equipment" means equipment used for X-ray diffraction or fluorescence analysis.

"Analytical X-ray system" means a group of components utilizing X-rays or gamma rays to determine the elemental composition or to examine the microstructure of materials.

"Fail-safe characteristics" means a design feature which causes beam port shutters to close, or otherwise prevents emergence of the primary beam, upon the failure of a safety or warning device.

"Local components" means part of an analytical X-ray system and includes X-ray areas that are struck by X-rays such as radiation source housings, port and shutter assemblies, collimators, sample holders, cameras, goniometers, detectors, and shielding, but does not include power supplies, transformers, amplifiers, readout devices, and control panels.

"Normal operating procedures" means step-by-step instructions necessary to accomplish the analysis. These procedures shall include sample insertion and manipulation, equipment alignment, routine maintenance by the registrant or licensee, and data recording procedures, which are related to radiation safety.

"Open-beam configuration" means an analytical X-ray system in which an individual could accidentally place some part of his body in the primary beam path during normal operation.

"Primary beam" means radiation which passes through an aperture of the source housing by a direct path from the X-ray tube or a radioactive source located in the radiation source housing.

45.5(3) Equipment requirements.

a. Safety device. A device which prevents the entry of any portion of an individual's body into the primary X-ray beam path or which causes the beam to be shut off upon entry into its path shall be provided on all open-beam configurations. A registrant or licensee may apply to the agency for an exemption from the requirement of a safety device. Such application shall include:

(1) A description of the various safety devices that have been evaluated;

(2) The reason each of these devices cannot be used; and

(3) A description of the alternative methods that will be employed to minimize the possibility of an accidental exposure, including procedures to ensure that operators and others in the area will be informed of the absence of safety devices.

b. Warning devices.

(1) Open-beam configurations shall be provided with a readily discernible indication of:

1. X-ray tube "on-off" status located near the radiation source housing, if the primary beam is controlled in this manner; or

2. Shutter "open-closed" status located near each port on the radiation source housing, if the primary beam is controlled in this manner.

(2) An easily visible warning light labeled with the words "X-RAY ON," or words having a similar intent, shall be located:

1. Near any switch that energizes an X-ray tube and shall be illuminated only when the tube is energized; or

2. In the case of a radioactive source, near any switch that opens a housing shutter and shall be illuminated only when the shutter is open.

(3) Warning devices shall be labeled so that their purpose is easily identified. On equipment installed after the effective date of these rules, warning devices shall have fail-safe characteristics.

c. Ports. Unused ports on radiation source housings shall be secured in the closed position in a manner which will prevent casual opening.

d. Labeling. All analytical X-ray equipment shall be labeled with a readily discernible sign or signs bearing the radiation symbol and the words:

(1) "CAUTION--HIGH INTENSITY X-RAY BEAM," or words having a similar intent, on the X-ray source housing; and

(2) "CAUTION--RADIATION--THIS EQUIPMENT PRODUCES RADIATION WHEN ENERGIZED," or words having a similar intent, near any switch that energizes an X-ray tube if the radiation source is an X-ray tube; or

(3) "CAUTION--RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL," or words having a similar intent, on the source housing in accordance with 641--40.63(136C) if the radiation source is a radionuclide.

e. Shutters. On open-beam configurations, each port on the radiation source housing shall be equipped with a shutter that cannot be opened unless a collimator or a coupling has been connected to the port.

f. Radiation source housing. Each radiation source housing shall be subject to the following requirements:

(1) Each X-ray tube housing shall be equipped with an interlock that shuts off the tube if it is removed from the radiation source housing or if the housing is disassembled.

(2) Each radioactive source housing or port cover or each X-ray tube housing shall be so constructed that, with all shutters closed, the radiation measured at a distance of 5 centimeters from its surface is not capable of producing a dose in excess of 2.5 millirems (0.025 mSv) in one hour. For systems utilizing X-ray tubes, this limit shall be met at any specified tube rating.

g. Generator cabinet. Each X-ray generator shall be supplied with a protective cabinet which limits leakage radiation measured at a distance of 5 centimeters from its surface such that it is not capable of producing a dose in excess of 0.25 millirem (2.5 mSv) in one hour.

45.5(4) Area requirements.

a. Radiation levels. The local components of an analytical X-ray system shall be located and arranged and shall include sufficient shielding or access control such that no radiation levels exist in any area surrounding the local component group which could result in a dose to an individual present therein in excess of the dose limits given in 641--40.26(136C). For systems utilizing X-ray tubes, these levels shall be met at any specified tube rating.

b. Surveys.

(1) Radiation surveys, as required by 641--40.36(136C), of all analytical X-ray systems sufficient to show compliance with 45.5(4)"a" shall be performed:

1. Upon installation of the equipment, and at least once every 12 months thereafter;

2. Following any change in the initial arrangement, number, or type of local components in the system;

3. Following any maintenance requiring the disassembly or removal of a local component in the system;

4. During the performance of maintenance and alignment procedures if the procedures require the presence of a primary X-ray beam when any local component in the system is disassembled or removed;

5. Anytime a visual inspection of the local components in the system reveals an abnormal condition; and

6. Whenever personnel monitoring devices show a significant increase over the previous monitoring period or the readings are approaching the limits specified in 641--40.15(136C).

(2) Radiation survey measurements shall not be required if a registrant or licensee can demonstrate compliance with 45.5(4)"a" to the satisfaction of the agency.

c. Posting. Each area or room containing analyticalX-ray equipment shall be conspicuously posted with a signor signs bearing the radiation symbol and the words"CAUTION--X-RAY EQUIPMENT" or words having a similar intent in accordance with 641--subrule 40.61(1).

45.5(5) Operating requirements.

a. Procedures. Normal operating procedures shall be written and available to all analytical X-ray equipment workers. No individual shall be permitted to operate analytical X-ray equipment in any manner other than that specified in the procedures unless such individual has obtained written approval of the radiation safety officer.

b. Bypassing. No individual shall bypass a safety device or interlock unless such individual has obtained the approval of the radiation safety officer. Such approval shall be for a specified period of time. When a safety device or interlock has been bypassed, a readily discernible sign bearing the words "SAFETY DEVICE NOT WORKING," or words having a similar intent, shall be placed on the radiation source housing.

c. Repair or modification of X-ray tube systems. Except as specified in 45.5(5)"b," no operation involving removal of covers, shielding materials or tube housings or modifications to shutters, collimators, or beam stops shall be performed without ascertaining that the tube is off and will remain off until safe conditions have been restored. The main switch, rather than interlocks, shall be used for routine shutdown in preparation for repairs.

d. Radioactive source replacement, testing, or repair. Radioactive source housings shall be opened for source replacement, leak testing, or other maintenance or repair procedures only by individuals authorized to specifically conduct such procedures under a license issued by the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, an agreement state, or a licensing state.

45.5(6) Personnel requirements.

a. Instruction. No individual shall be permitted to operate or maintain analytical X-ray equipment unless such individual has received instruction in and demonstrated competence as to:

(1) Identification of radiation hazards associated with the use of the equipment;

(2) Significance of the various radiation warnings, safety devices, and interlocks incorporated into the equipment, or the reasons they have not been installed on certain pieces of equipment and the extra precautions required in such cases;

(3) Proper operating procedures for the equipment;

(4) Recognition of symptoms of an acute localized exposure; and

(5) Proper procedures for reporting an actual or suspected exposure.

b. Personnel monitoring.

(1) Finger or wrist dosimetry devices shall be provided to and shall be used by:

1. Analytical X-ray equipment workers using systems having an open-beam configuration and not equipped with a safety device; and

2. Personnel maintaining analytical X-ray equipment if the maintenance procedures require the presence of a primary X-ray beam when any local component in the analytical X-ray system is disassembled or removed.

(2) Reported dose values shall not be used for the purpose of determining compliance with 641--subrule 40.2(1) unless evaluated by a qualified expert.

641--45.6(136C) Radiation safety requirements for wireline service operations and subsurface tracer studies.

45.6(1) Purpose. This rule establishes radiation safety requirements for using sources of radiation for wireline service operations including mineral-logging, radioactive markers, and subsurface tracer studies. The requirements of this rule are in addition to, and not in substitution for, the requirements of 641--Chapters 38, 39, and 40. The requirements of 641--45.1(136C) to 641--45.5(136C) do not apply.

45.6(2) Scope. This rule applies to all licensees or registrants who use sources of radiation for wireline service operations including mineral-logging, radioactive markers, or subsurface tracer studies.

45.6(3) Definitions. For the purpose of this subrule, the definitions of 641--Chapter 38 may also apply. As used in this rule, the following definitions apply:

"Field station" means a facility where radioactive sources may be stored or used and from which equipment is dispatched to temporary job sites.

"Injection tool" means a device used for controlled subsurface injection of radioactive tracer material.

"Logging assistant" means any individual who, under the personal supervision of a logging supervisor, handles sealed sources or tracers that are not in logging tools or shipping containers or who performs surveys required by 45.6(22).

"Logging supervisor" means the individual who uses sources of radiation or provides personal supervision of the utilization of sources of radiation at the well site.

"Logging tool" means a device used subsurface to perform well-logging.

"Mineral-logging" means any logging performed for the purpose of mineral exploration other than oil or gas.

"Personal supervision" means guidance and instruction by the supervisor who is physically present at the job site and watching the performance of the operation in such proximity that contact can be maintained and immediate assistance given as required.

"Radioactive marker" means radioactive material placed subsurface or on a structure intended for subsurface use for the purpose of depth determination or direction orientation.

"Source holder" means a housing or assembly into which a radioactive source is placed for the purpose of facilitating the handling and use of the source in well-logging operations.

"Subsurface tracer study" means the release of a substance tagged with radioactive material for the purpose of tracing the movement or position of the tagged substance in the well-bore or adjacent formation.

"Temporary job site" means a location where radioactive materials are present for the purpose of performing wireline service operations or subsurface tracer studies.

"Uranium sinker bar" means a weight containing depleted uranium used to pull a logging tool down toward the bottom of a well.

"Well-bore" means a drilled hole in which wireline service operations or subsurface tracer studies are performed.

"Well-logging" means all operations involving the lowering and raising of measuring devices or tools which may contain sources of radiation into well-bores or cavities for the purpose of obtaining information about the well or adjacent formations.

"Wireline" means a cable containing one or more electrical conductors which is used to lower and raise logging tools in the well-bore.

"Wireline service operation" means any evaluation or mechanical service which is performed in the well-bore using devices on a wireline.

45.6(4) Prohibition. No licensee shall perform wireline service operations with a sealed source(s) unless, prior to commencement of the operation, the licensee has a written agreement with the well operator, well owner, drilling contractor, or landowner that:

a. In the event a sealed source is lodged downhole, a reasonable effort at recovery will be made; and

b. In the event a decision is made to abandon the sealed source downhole, the requirements of 45.6(25)"c" and the name of any other state agency having applicable regulations shall be met.

45.6(5) Limits on levels of radiation. Sources of radiation shall be used, stored, and transported in such a manner that the transportation requirements of 641--39.5(136C) and the dose limitation requirements of 641--Chapter 40 are met.

45.6(6) Storage precautions.

a. Each source of radiation, except accelerators, shall be provided with a storage or transport container. The container shall be provided with a lock, or tamper seal for calibration sources, to prevent unauthorized removal of, or exposure to, the source of radiation.

b. Sources of radiation shall be stored in a manner which will minimize danger from explosion or fire.

45.6(7) Transport precautions. Transport containers shall be physically secured to the transporting vehicle to prevent accidental loss, tampering, or unauthorized removal.

45.6(8) Radiation survey instruments.

a. The licensee or registrant shall maintain sufficient calibrated and operable radiation survey instruments at each field station to make physical radiation surveys as required by this subrule and by 641--40.36(136C). Instrumentation shall be capable of measuring 0.1 milliroentgen (25.8 nanocoulombs/kg) per hour through at least 50 milliroentgens (12.9 microcoulombs/kg) per hour.

b. Each radiation survey instrument shall be calibrated:

(1) At intervals not to exceed six months and after each instrument servicing;

(2) For linear scale instruments, at two points located approximately 1/3 and 2/3 of full-scale on each scale; for logarithmic scale instruments, at midrange of each decade, and at two points of at least one decade; and for digital instruments, at appropriate points; and

(3) So that accuracy within 20 percent of the true radiation level can be demonstrated on each scale.

c. Calibration records shall be maintained for a period of two years for inspection by the agency.

45.6(9) Leak testing of sealed sources.

a. Requirements. Each licensee using sealed sources of radioactive material shall have the sources tested for leakage. Records of leak test results shall be kept in units of microcuries (Bq) and maintained for inspection by the agency for six months after the next required leak test is performed or until transfer or disposal of the sealed source.

b. Method of testing. Tests for leakage shall be performed only by persons specifically authorized to perform such tests by the agency, the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, an agreement state, or a licensing state. The test sample shall be taken from the surface of the source, source holder, or from the surface of the device in which the source is stored or mounted and on which one might expect contamination to accumulate. The test sample shall be analyzed for radioactive contamination, and the analysis shall be capable of detecting the presence of 0.005 microcurie (185 Bq) of radioactive material on the test sample.

c. Interval of testing. Each sealed source of radioactive material shall be tested at intervals not to exceed six months. In the absence of a certificate from a transferor indicating that a test has been made prior to the transfer, the sealed source shall not be put into use until tested. If, for any reason, it is suspected that a sealed source may be leaking, it shall be removed from service immediately and tested for leakage as soon as practical.

d. Leaking or contaminated sources. If the test reveals the presence of 0.005 microcurie (185 Bq) or more of leakage or contamination, the licensee shall immediately withdraw the source from use and shall cause it to be decontaminated, repaired, or disposed of in accordance with these rules. A report describing the equipment involved, the test results, and the corrective action taken shall be filed with the agency within five days of receiving the test results.

e. Exemptions. The following sources are exempted from the periodic leak test requirements of 45.6(9)"a" to "d":

(1) Hydrogen-3 sources;

(2) Sources of radioactive material with a half-life of 30 days or less;

(3) Sealed sources of radioactive material in gaseous form;

(4) Sources of beta- or gamma-emitting radioactive material with an activity of 100 microcuries (3.7 MBq) or less; and

(5) Sources of alpha-emitting radioactive material with an activity of 10 microcuries (0.370 MBq) or less.

45.6(10) Quarterly inventory. Each licensee or registrant shall conduct a quarterly physical inventory to account for all sources of radiation. Records of inventories shall be maintained for two years from the date of the inventory for inspection by the agency and shall include the quantities and kinds of sources of radiation, the location where sources of radiation are assigned, the date of the inventory, and the name of the individual conducting the inventory.

45.6(11) Utilization records. Each licensee or registrant shall maintain current records, which shall be kept available for inspection by the agency for two years from the date of the recorded event, showing the following information for each source of radiation:

a. Make, model number, and a serial number or a description of each source of radiation used;

b. The identity of the well-logging supervisor or field unit to whom assigned;

c. Locations where used and dates of use; and

d. In the case of tracer materials and radioactive markers, the utilization record shall indicate the radionuclide and activity used in a particular well.

45.6(12) Design, performance, and certification criteria for sealed sources used in downhole operations.

a. Each sealed source, except those containing radioactive material in gaseous form, used in downhole operations shall be certified by the manufacturer, or other testing organization acceptable to the agency, to meet the following minimum criteria:

(1) Be of doubly encapsulated construction;

(2) Contain radioactive material whose chemical and physical forms are as insoluble and nondispersible as practical; and

(3) Has been individually pressure tested to at least 24,656 pounds per square inch absolute (170 MN/m2) without failure.

b. For sealed sources, except those containing radioactive material in gaseous form, in the absence of a certificate from a transferor certifying that an individual sealed source meets the requirements of 45.6(12)"a," the sealed source shall not be put into use until such determinations and testing have been performed.

c. Each sealed source, except those containing radioactive material in gaseous form, used in downhole operations, shall be certified by the manufacturer, or other testing organization acceptable to the agency, as meeting the sealed source performance requirements for oil well-logging as contained in the American National Standard Institute (ANSI) N542-1977 or United States of American Standards Institute (USASI) N5.10-1968.

d. Certification documents shall be maintained for inspection by the agency for a period of two years after source disposal. If the source is abandoned downhole, the certification documents shall be maintained until the agency authorizes disposition.

45.6(13) Labeling.

a. Each source, source holder, or logging tool containing radioactive material shall bear a durable, legible, and clearly visible marking or label, which has, as a minimum, the standard radiation caution symbol, without the conventional color requirement, and the following wording:

DANGER1

RADIOACTIVE

1or CAUTION

This labeling shall be on the smallest component transported as a separate piece of equipment.

b. Each transport container shall have permanently attached to it a durable, legible, and clearly visible label which has, as a minimum, the standard radiation caution symbol and the following wording:

DANGER1

RADIOACTIVE

NOTIFY CIVIL AUTHORITIES

[OR NAME OF COMPANY]

1or CAUTION

45.6(14) Inspection and maintenance.

a. Each licensee or registrant shall conduct, at intervals not to exceed six months, a program of inspection and maintenance of source holders, logging tools, source handling tools, storage containers, transport containers, and injection tools to ensure proper labeling and physical condition. Rec-ords of inspection and maintenance shall be maintained for a period of two years for inspection by the agency.

b. If any inspection conducted pursuant to 45.6(14)"a" reveals damage to labeling or components critical to radiation safety, the device shall be removed from service until repairs have been made.

c. If a sealed source is stuck in the source holder, the licensee shall not perform any operation, such as drilling, cutting, or chiseling, on the source holder unless the licensee is specifically approved by the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, an agreement state, or a licensing state to perform this operation.

d. The repair, opening, or modification of any sealed source shall be performed only by persons specifically authorized to do so by the agency, the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, an agreement state, or a licensing state.

45.6(15) Training requirements.

a. No licensee or registrant shall permit any individual to act as a logging supervisor as defined in this rule until such individual has:

(1) Received, in a course recognized by the agency, the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, an agreement state, or a licensing state, instruction in the subjects outlined in Appendix D of this chapter and demonstrated an understanding thereof;

(2) Read and received instruction in the rules contained in this chapter and the applicable sections of 641--Chapters 38, 39, and 40 or their equivalent, conditions of appropriate license or certificate of registration, and the licensee's or registrant's operating and emergency procedures, and demonstrated an understanding thereof; and

(3) Demonstrated competence to use sources of radiation, related handling tools, and radiation survey instruments which will be used on the job.

b. No licensee or registrant shall permit any individual to assist in the handling of sources of radiation until such individual has:

(1) Read or received instruction in the licensee's or registrant's operating and emergency procedures and demonstrated an understanding thereof; and

(2) Demonstrated competence to use, under the personal supervision of the logging supervisor, the sources of radiation, related handling tools, and radiation survey instruments which will be used on the job.

c. The licensee or registrant shall maintain employee training records for inspection by the agency for two years following termination of the individual's employment.

45.6(16) Operating and emergency procedures. The licensee's or registrant's operating and emergency procedures shall include instructions in at least the following:

a. Handling and use of sources of radiation to be employed so that no individual is likely to be exposed to radiation doses in excess of the standards established in 641--Chapter 40;

b. Methods and occasions for conducting radiation surveys;

c. Methods and occasions for locking and securing sources of radiation;

d. Personnel monitoring and the use of personnel monitoring equipment;

e. Transportation to temporary job sites and field stations, including the packaging and placing of sources of radiation in vehicles, placarding of vehicles, and securing sources of radiation during transportation;

f. Minimizing exposure of individuals in the event of an accident;

g. Procedure for notifying proper personnel in the event of an accident;

h. Maintenance of records;

i. Use, inspection and maintenance of source holders, logging tools, source handling tools, storage containers, transport containers, and injection tools;

j. Procedure to be followed in the event a sealed source is lodged downhole;

k. Procedures to be used for picking up, receiving, and opening packages containing radioactive material;

l. For the use of tracers, decontamination of the environment, equipment, and personnel;

m. Maintenance of records generated by logging personnel at temporary job sites;

n. Notifying proper persons in the event of an accident; and

o. Actions to be taken if a sealed source is ruptured, including actions to prevent the spread of contamination and minimize inhalation and ingestion of radioactive material and actions to obtain suitable radiation survey instruments as required by 45.6(8).

45.6(17) Personnel monitoring.

a. No licensee or registrant shall permit any individual to act as a logging supervisor or to assist in the handling of sources of radiation unless each such individual wears either a film badge or a thermoluminescent dosimeter (TLD). Each film badge or TLD shall be assigned to and worn by only one individual. Film badges must be replaced at least monthly and TLDs replaced at least quarterly. After replacement, each film badge or TLD must be promptly processed.

b. Personnel monitoring records shall be maintained for inspection until the agency authorizes disposition.

45.6(18) Security. During each logging or tracer application, the logging supervisor or other designated employee shall maintain direct surveillance of the operation to protect against unauthorized or unnecessary entry into a restricted area, as defined in 641--Chapter 38.

45.6(19) Handling tools. The licensee shall provide and require the use of tools that will ensure remote handling of sealed sources other than low activity calibration sources.

45.6(20) Subsurface tracer studies.

a. Protective gloves and other appropriate protective clothing and equipment shall be used by all personnel handling radioactive tracer material. Precautions shall be taken to avoid ingestion or inhalation of radioactive material.

b. No licensee shall cause the injection of radioactive material into potable aquifers without prior written authorization from the agency and any other appropriate state agency.

45.6(21) Particle accelerators. No licensee or registrant shall permit aboveground testing of particle accelerators, designed for use in well-logging, which results in the production of radiation, except in areas or facilities so controlled or shielded that the requirements of 641--40.15(136C) and 641--40.26(136C), as applicable, are met.

45.6(22) Radiation surveys.

a. Radiation surveys or calculations shall be made and recorded for each area where radioactive materials are used and stored.

b. Radiation surveys shall be made and recorded for the radiation levels in occupied positions and on the exterior of each vehicle used to transport radioactive material. Such surveys shall include each source of radiation or combination of sources to be transported in the vehicle.

c. If the sealed source assembly is removed from the logging tool before departing the job site, the logging tool detector shall be energized, or a survey meter used, to ensure that the logging tool is free of contamination.

d. Radiation surveys shall be made and recorded at the job site or wellhead for each tracer operation, except those using hydrogen-3, carbon-14, and sulfur-35. These surveys shall include measurements of radiation levels before and after the operation.

e. Records required pursuant to 45.6(22)"a" to "d" shall include the dates, the identification of individual(s) making the survey, the identification of survey instrument(s) used, and an exact description of the location of the survey. Rec-ords of these surveys shall be maintained for inspection by the agency for two years after completion of the survey.

45.6(23) Documents and records required at field stations. Each licensee or registrant shall maintain, for inspection by the agency, the following documents and records for the specific devices and sources used at the field station:

a. Appropriate license, certificate of registration, or equivalent document(s);

b. Operating and emergency procedures;

c. Applicable regulations;

d. Records of the latest survey instrument calibrations pursuant to 45.6(8);

e. Records of the latest leak test results pursuant to 45.6(9);

f. Records of quarterly inventories required pursuant to 45.6(10);

g. Utilization records required pursuant to 45.6(11);

h. Records of inspection and maintenance required pursuant to 45.6(14);

i. Survey records required pursuant to 45.6(22); and

j. Training records required pursuant to 45.6(15).

45.6(24) Documents and records required at temporary job sites. Each licensee or registrant conducting operations at a temporary job site shall have the following documents and records available at that site for inspection by the agency:

a. Operating and emergency procedures;

b. Survey records required pursuant to 45.6(22) for the period of operation at the site;

c. Evidence of current calibration for the radiation survey instruments in use at the site;

d. When operating in the state under reciprocity, a copy of the appropriate license, certificate of registration, or equivalent document(s); and

e. Shipping papers for the transportation of radioactive material.

45.6(25) Notification of incidents, abandonment, and lost sources.

a. Notification of incidents and sources lost in other than downhole logging operations shall be made in accordance with appropriate provisions of 641--Chapter 40.

b. Whenever a sealed source or device containing radioactive material is lodged downhole, the licensee shall:

(1) Monitor at the surface for the presence of radioactive contamination with a radiation survey instrument or logging tool during logging tool recovery operations; and

(2) Notify the agency immediately by telephone and subsequently, within 30 days, by confirmatory letter if the licensee knows or has reason to believe that a sealed source has been ruptured. This letter shall identify the well or other location, describe the magnitude and extent of the escape of radioactive material, assess the consequences of the rupture, and explain efforts planned or being taken to mitigate these consequences.

c. When it becomes apparent that efforts to recover the radioactive source will not be successful, the licensee shall:

(1) Advise the well operator of the regulations of the appropriate state agency regarding abandonment and an appropriate method of abandonment, which shall include:

1. The immobilization and sealing in place of the radioactive source with a cement plug;

2. The setting of a whipstock or other deflection device; and

3. The mounting of a permanent identification plaque at the surface of the well, containing the appropriate information required by 45.6(25)"d."

(2) Notify the agency by telephone, giving the circumstances of the loss, and request approval of the proposed abandonment procedures; and

(3) File a written report with the agency within 30 days of the abandonment. The licensee shall send a copy of the report to the appropriate state agency that issued permits or otherwise approved of the drilling operation. The report shall contain the following information:

1. Date of occurrence;

2. A description of the well-logging source involved, including the radionuclide and its quantity, chemical, and physical form;

3. Surface location and identification of the well;

4. Results of efforts to immobilize and seal the source in place;

5. A brief description of the attempted recovery effort;

6. Depth of the source;

7. Depth of the top of the cement plug;

8. Depth of the well;

9. Any other information, such as a warning statement, contained on the permanent identification plaque; and

10. The names of state agencies receiving a copy of this report.

d. Whenever a sealed source containing radioactive material is abandoned downhole, the licensee shall provide a permanent plaque2 for posting the well or well-bore. This plaque shall:

(1) Be constructed of long-lasting material, such as stainless steel or monel; and

(2) Contain the following information engraved on its face:

1. The word "CAUTION";

2. The radiation symbol without the conventional color requirement;

3. The date of abandonment;

4. The name of the well operator or well owner;

5. The well name and well identification number(s) or other designation;

6. The sealed source(s) by radionuclide and activity;

7. The source depth and the depth to the top of the plug; and

8. An appropriate warning, depending on the specific circumstances of each abandonment.3

e. The licensee shall immediately notify the agency by telephone and subsequently by confirming letter if the licensee knows or has reason to believe that radioactive material has been lost in or to an underground potable aquifer. Such notice shall designate the well location and shall describe the magnitude and extent of loss of radioactive material, assess the consequences of such loss, and explain efforts planned or being taken to mitigate these consequences.

2An example of a suggested plaque is shown in Appendix F of this chapter.

3Appropriate warnings may include: (a) "Do not drill below plug-back depth"; (b) "Do not enlarge casing"; or (c) "Do not reenter the hole", followed by the words, "before contacting the Iowa Department of Public Health."

ITEM 125. Add the following new Appendix E:

CHAPTER 45--APPENDIX E

SUBJECTS TO BE INCLUDED IN TRAINING COURSES FOR LOGGING SUPERVISORS

I. Fundamentals of radiation safety.

A. Characteristics of radiation.

B. Units of radiation dose and quantity of radioactivity.

C. Significance of radiation dose.

1. Radiation protection standards.

2. Biological effects of radiation dose.

D. Levels of radiation from sources of radiation.

E. Methods of minimizing radiation dose.

1. Working time.

2. Working distances.

3. Shielding.

F. Radiation safety practices including prevention of

contamination and methods of decontamination.

II. Radiation detection instrumentation to be used.

A. Use of radiation survey instruments.

1. Operation.

2. Calibration.

3. Limitations.

B. Survey techniques.

C. Use of personnel monitoring equipment.

III. Equipment to be used.

A. Handling equipment.

B. Sources of radiation.

C. Storage and control of equipment.

D. Operation and control of equipment.

IV. The requirements of pertinent federal and state
regulations.

V. The licensee's or registrant's written operating and
emergency procedures.

VI. The licensee's or registrant's record-keeping
procedures.

ITEM 126. Adopt the following new Appendix F:

CHAPTER 45--APPENDIX F

EXAMPLE OF PLAQUE FOR IDENTIFYING WELLS CONTAINING SEALED SOURCES

CONTAINING RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL ABANDONED DOWNHOLE

e size of the plaque should be convenient for use on active or inactive wells, e.g., a 7-inch square. Letter size of the word "CAUTION" should be approximately twice the letter size of the rest of the information, e.g., 1/2-inch and 1/4-inch letter size, respectively.

These rules are intended to implement Iowa Code chapters 136B and 136C.

ARC 7774A

PUBLIC HEALTH DEPARTMENT[641]

Notice of Intended Action

Twenty-five interested persons, a governmental subdivision, an agency or association of 25 or more persons may demand an oral presentation hereon as provided in Iowa Code section 17A.4(1)"b."

Notice is also given to the public that the Administrative Rules Review Committee may, on its own motion or on written request by any individual or group, review this proposed action under section 17A.8(6) at a regular or special meeting where the public or interested persons may be heard.

Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code section 136C.7, the Iowa Department of Public Health hereby gives Notice of Intended Action to amend Chapter 41, "Safety Requirements for the Use of Radiation Machines and Certain Uses of Radioactive Materials," Iowa Administrative Code.

These rules are being revised to amend the format, which consists of changing the mammography rules from a subrule to a rule. They are also being amended to incorporate additional mammography rules pertaining to mammographically guided breast biopsy.

Any interested person may make written suggestionsor comments on the proposed amendments by 4:30 p.m. on February 9, 1998. Such written material should be directed to Donald A. Flater, Chief, Bureau of Radiological Health, Lucas State Office Building, Des Moines, Iowa 50319; fax (515)242-6284.

A public hearing will be held on February 9, 1998, at9 a.m. in the Third Floor Conference Room, Side 2, Lucas State Office Building, Des Moines, Iowa, at which time persons may make oral suggestions or comments on the proposed amendments.

These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code chapter 136C.

The following amendments are proposed.

ITEM 1. Rescind subrule 41.1(12) and adopt new rule 641--41.6(136C) as follows:

641--41.6(136C) X-ray machines used for screening and diagnostic mammography.

41.6(1) Definitions. In addition to the definitions provided in 41.1(136C), the following definitions shall be applicable to this rule.

"Artifact" means a substance or structure not naturally present in living tissue but of which an authentic image appears in a radiograph.

"Automatic exposure control systems" means automatic exposure control systems, often referred to as phototimers, which are designed to automatically determine and provide the exposure needed to produce an adequate density image by sampling the X-ray intensity after passage through the patient and image receptor.

"Average glandular dose" means the energy deposited per unit mass of glandular tissue averaged over all the glandular tissue in the breast, calculated from values of entrance exposure in air, the X-ray beam quality (half-value layer), and compressed breast thickness. The maximum average glandular dose should be 6 milliGray (0.6 rad) or less for a 2-view examination of the breast. See also: "Dose."

"Base density" means the optical density due to the supporting base of the film alone. The base density of a film is the optical density that would result if an unexposed film were processed through the fixer, wash, and dryer, without first passing through the developer.

"Base plus fog density" means the optical density of a film due to its base density plus any action of the developer on the unexposed silver halide crystals. The base plus fog density can be measured by processing an unexposed film through the entire processing cycle and measuring the resultant optical density.

"Cassette" means a light-tight case, usually made of thin, low X-ray absorption plastic, for holding X-ray film. One or two intensifying screens for the conversion of X-rays to visible light photons are mounted inside the cassette so that they are in close contact to the film.

"Compression device" means a firm plastic paddle used to help hold the breast stationary and eliminate blurring due to motion, to help separate structures within the breast, and to decrease the thickness of breast tissue, minimizing the amount of radiation used and the amount of scattered radiation reaching the film.

"Control chart" means a chart used to record (and control) the results of quality control testing as a function of time.

"Control limit" means the range of variation on a control chart beyond which action must be taken to correct the results of quality control testing.

"Craniocaudal view" means one of two routine views for mammography. The detector system is placed caudad to (below) the breast and the vertical X-ray beam is directed from cranial to caudad (downward) through the breast.

"Dedicated mammography equipment" means X-ray systems designed specifically for breast imaging, providing optimum imaging geometry, a device for breast compression and low dose exposure that can generate reproducible images of high quality.

"Densitometer" means an instrument which measures the degree of blackening (or radiographic density) of film due to radiation or light by measuring the ratio of the light intensity incident on the film to the light intensity transmitted by the film.

"Detents" means mechanical settings that limit or prevent the motion or rotation of an X-ray tube, cassette assembly, or image receptor system.

"Developer" means a chemical solution (alkaline) that changes the latent image (exposed silver halide crystals) on a film to a visible image composed of minute masses of black metallic silver.

"Developer replenishment" means the process, occurring as film travels past a certain point in the processor, triggering the activation of a pump, whereby fresh developer is added in small amounts to the solution in the developer tank of the processor. The purpose is to maintain the proper alkalinity, chemical activity, and level of solution in the developer tank.

"Diagnostic mammography" means mammography performed on an individual who, by virtue of symptoms or physical findings, is considered to have a substantial likelihood of having breast disease.

"Dose" means the amount of energy deposited per unit mass of tissue due to X-radiation. The newer unit of absorbed dose is the Gray: 1 Gray=1 Joule of energy deposited per kilogram of tissue. The older unit of absorbed dose is the rad: 1 rad=0.01 Gray, 1 centiGray, or 10 milliGray.

"Exposure" means the amount of X-radiation, quantitated by measuring the amount of ionization in air caused by the radiation. The units of exposure are Coulombs of charge ionized per kilogram of air. The older unit of exposure is the Roentgen: 1 Roentgen=2.58 x 10E-4 Coulombs of charge per kilogram of air.

"Fixer" means a chemical solution (acidic) which removes the unexposed and undeveloped silver halide crystals from film so it will not discolor or darken with age or exposure to light. Fixer also hardens the gelatin containing the black metallic silver so film may be dried and resist damage from abrasions.

"Fixer retention" means the inadequate removal of fixer from the film by the water in the wash tank of the processor. Retained fixer causes eventual brown discoloration of the radiograph.

"Focal spot size" means the focal spot is the area of the target or anode that is bombarded by electrons from the cathode of the X-ray tube to produce X-rays. The smaller the focal spot, the better the limited spatial resolution of the X-ray system, especially in magnification mammography.

"Fog" means the density added to a radiograph due to unwanted action of the developer on the unexposed silver halide crystals or by light, radiation, or heat exposure during storage, handling, and processing.

"Grids" means a set of thin lead strips spaced close to one another, interspaced by carbon fiber for mammographic grids. The grid is placed between the breast and the screen-film image receptor to reduce scattered radiation reaching the image receptor.

"Half-value layer (HVL)" means the thickness of a specified substance which, when introduced into the path of a given beam of radiation, reduces the exposure rate by one-half. HVL is a measure of beam quality and is usually specified in millimeters of aluminum for diagnostic units.

"Image contrast" means the amount of radiographic density difference between adjacent areas resulting from a fixed amount of attenuation difference or light exposure difference.

"Image noise." See "Radiographic noise."

"Image quality" means the overall clarity and detail of a radiographic image. Limiting spatial resolution (or resolving power), image sharpness, and image contrast are three common measures of image quality.

"Image sharpness" means the overall impression of detail and clarity in a radiographic image.

"Kilovoltage, peak (kVp)" means the maximum potential difference setting between anode and cathode in an X-ray tube. This setting is also the maximum energy of X-rays emitted by the X-ray tube in kilo-electron volts (keV).

"Mediolateral view" means one of the routine views for mammography in addition to the craniocaudal view. The detector system is placed lateral to the breast and the horizontal X-ray beam is directed from medial to lateral aspect through the breast.

"Milliampere (mA) setting" means the current of electrons passing from cathode to anode in an X-ray tube. For a fixed kVp, the output of X-rays per unit time from the tube is linearly proportional to the mA setting.

"Milliampere-seconds (mAs)" means the product of electron current (mA) and the time over which an X-ray exposure is made (in seconds). For a fixed kVp, total X-ray output is linearly proportional to mAs.

"Oblique mediolateral view" means one of the standard two views of the breast. The detector system (cassette holder assembly) is angled 30-60 degrees from horizontal so that the cassette assembly is parallel to the pectoral muscle and the corner of the cassette holder fits comfortably into the axilla. The X-ray beam is directed from the supero-medial to the infero-lateral aspect of the breast.

"Phantom" means an artificial test object which simulates the average composition of and various structures within the breast. A "good breast phantom" should have an established correlation with clinical image quality, allowing objective rather than subjective analysis, and should be sensitive to small changes in mammographic image quality.

"Physician consultant" means a licensed doctor of medicine or osteopathy who meets the requirements for the interpreting physician as specified in 41.6(3)"b" and who is responsible for the operation of the mammography program. This individual is designated by the supplier.

"Processor" means an automated device which transports film in a controlled manner by a system of rollers through specialized sections where developing, fixing, washing, and drying of the film occur.

"Quality assurance" means the overall program of testing and maintaining the highest possible standards of quality in the acquisition and interpretation of radiographic images.

"Quality control" means the actual process of testing and maintaining the highest possible standards of quality in equipment performance and the acquisition and interpretation of radiographic images.

"Quality control technologist" means the technologist assigned the task of testing for and maintaining records of radiographic image quality.

"Radiographic contrast" means the magnitude of optical density difference between structures of interest and their surroundings, or between areas of film receiving different amounts of X-ray or visible light exposure.

"Radiographic noise" means unwanted fluctuations in optical density on the screen-film image.

"Radiographic sharpness" means the distinctness or perceptibility of the boundary or edge of the structure in a mammogram.

"Repeat (or reject) analysis" means a systematic approach to determine the causes for radiographs being discarded or repeated, or both.

"Replenishment rate" means the amount of chemicals added in order to maintain the proper chemical activity of developer and fixer solutions.

"Safelight" means a source of minimal visible light in a darkroom, produced at frequencies (colors) to which the film is insensitive, protecting the film from unwanted exposure (fog) while allowing personnel to function more efficiently and safely.

"Screen" means microscopic phosphor crystals on a plastic support and used in conjunction with either single or double emulsion film; the screen emits visible light when exposed to X-radiation, creating a latent image on X-ray film.

"Screen-film combination" means a particular intensifying screen used with a particular type of film. Care must be taken to match the number of screens (one or two) to the number of emulsions coating the film and to match the light output spectrum of the screen to the light sensitivity of the film.

"Screen-film contact" means the close proximity of the intensifying screen to the emulsion of the film, necessary in order to achieve a sharp image on the film.

"Screen-film mammography" means mammography performed with high-detailed intensifying screen(s) in close contact with the film.

"Screening mammography" means X-ray breast examination of asymptomatic individuals in an attempt to detect breast cancer when it is small, nonpalpable, and confined to the breast.

"Sensitometer" means a device used to reproducibly expose a piece of film to a number of different levels of light intensity.

"Sensitometric strip" means a sheet of film exposed by a sensitometer, resulting in a gray scale range. Such strips are used to measure the range of densities, from minimum to maximum, resulting from a reproducible set of exposures.

"Sensitometry" means a quantitative measurement of the response of film to exposure and development. Sensitometry is used to test the processor setup and stability.

"Supplier" means the individual in control of a mammography facility whose basic responsibility is the overall quality of all mammograms conducted in that particular facility.

"Thermoluminescent dosimeter (TLD)" means a radiation dose measurement device using a crystalline substance (chips or powder) that, when properly prepared (annealed) and exposed to radiation, emits light in proportion to the radiation dose received.

"Viewbox" means a device by which a uniform field of white light is transmitted through an X-ray so that the image on the film may be seen.

"Written report" means interpreting physician's technical narrative of a mammography evaluation.

"Written statement" means interpreting physician's description of a mammography examination written in lay terms.

41.6(2) Registration and application standards and requirements.

a. Each radiation machine used to perform mammography shall be registered according to 641--subrule 39.3(2).

b. Each facility wishing to perform mammography shall apply for agency authorization by providing or verifying the following information for each mammography machine:

(1) The mammography unit meets the criteria for the American College of Radiology (ACR) mammography accreditation. An evaluation report issued by the American College of Radiology meets this requirement.

(2) The mammography equipment and facility meet the general requirements of these rules for radiation machines.

(3) The radiation machine is specifically designed to perform mammography.

(4) The radiation machine is used according to these rules on patient radiation exposure and radiation dose levels.

(5) The radiation machine is operated by individuals meeting the requirements of this subrule.

(6) The entire mammography system is evaluated annually by a radiation physicist.

(7) The equipment, personnel, procedures, and records are evaluated annually by a physician consultant.

c. Withdrawal or denial of mammography authorization.

(1) Mammography authorization may be withdrawn with cause if any machine does not meet one or more of the standards of these rules.

(2) The facility shall have opportunity for a hearing in connection with a denial or withdrawal of mammography authorization.

(3) An emergency order withdrawing authorization may be issued if the agency finds the radiation unit or facility violates rules that seriously affect the health, safety, and welfare of the public. An opportunity for hearing shall be held within five working days after the issuance of the order. The order shall be effective during the proceedings.

(4) If authorization is withdrawn, the radiation machine shall not be used for mammography until reinstated.

d. Reinstatement of mammography authorization.

(1) An application for reinstatement shall be submitted and processed the same as an initial application.

(2) The agency shall inspect the radiation machine within 60 days of the approved reinstatement application.

(3) A certificate of reinstatement shall be issued only after the agency has inspected the radiation machine and determined that it meets the requirements of these rules.

e. Inspections. The agency shall conduct an inspection of each radiation machine no later than 60 days after initial mammography authorization and at least annually thereafter.

f. Determination of the quality of the mammograms produced by facilities. To make the determination each facility will:

(1) Provide at the time of initial registration and at renewal (at least every three years) thereafter, two original (not copies) mammography examinations which meet the following criteria:

1. One mammography examination, including craniocaudal and mediolateral oblique views of each breast, of a patient with fatty breasts,

2. One mammography examination, including craniocaudal and mediolateral oblique views of each breast, of a patient with at least 75 percent glandular tissue, and

3. Each mammography examination must have been interpreted as a "normal" examination.

(2) Provide randomly (at least every three years), at the request of agency mammography inspectors, two mammography examinations (mammograms) which meet the criteria in 41.6(2)"f"(1).

(3) Have the film returned by the agency for inclusion in the patient's file after quality interpretation by agency radiologists.

(4) Be billed the fee for the quality interpretation as set forth in 38.8(1)"b"(2).

(5) Be provided with a written explanation of the results of the quality evaluation which will accompany the returned mammograms referred to in 41.6(2)"f"(3).

41.6(3) Mammography personnel.

a. Physician consultant.

(1) Must be available either on staff or through arrangement.

(2) Must document in writing annually completion of:

1. Review of the procedural manuals to determine that they are adequate.

2. Verification that equipment and personnel meet applicable state requirements and are performing properly.

3. Verification that the safety procedures are being followed.

4. Verification that all other requirements of these rules are being met.

b. Interpreting physician. All mammograms must be interpreted by a radiologist who meets the following certification, experience, continuing education, and written report requirements:

(1) Be certified by the American Board of Radiology, the American Osteopathic Board of Radiology, or Royal College of Physicians and Surgeons of Canada in Radiology or have had at least two months of documented full-time training from a person recognized by this agency. The training must include interpretation of mammograms, including instructions in radiation physics, radiation effects and radiation protection.

(2) Has interpreted an average of ten or more mammograms per workweek in the prior six months or has completed a radiology residency within the past two years.

(3) Has successfully completed or taught a minimum of 40 hours (includes radiology residency) of postgraduate instruction in mammography interpretation.

(4) Has successfully completed or taught a minimum of 15 hours of postgraduate instruction in mammography interpretation every 36 months thereafter.

(5) Continues to interpret an average of ten or more mammograms per workweek.

(6) Signs a written report, as defined in 41.6(1), a copy of which must be sent to the referring physician or, if a referring physician is not available, directly to the patient.

(7) Provides a copy of the written report and the original images or films to the patient's mammography supplier for inclusion in the patient's medical record.

(8) Provides a written statement to the patient, either through a referring physician or designee or, if a referring physician is not available, directly to the patient. The statement must:

1. Be written in terms easily understood by a lay person.

2. Describe the test results and the importance of the mammogram to the patient's health (including, if the results are positive, a description of the next steps), as well as the patient's responsibility to share with any new physician or supplier of the next mammogram, the date and place of the previous mammogram.

3. Record the date of the procedure, name of the facility, the physician, if any, to whom the patient wants a copy to be sent.

4. Indicate that the original images of films are being provided to the mammographic supplier, for inclusion in the patient's medical record.

c. Mammography imaging medical physicist. All mammography imaging medical physicists conducting surveys of mammography facilities and providing oversight of the facility quality assurance program under the federal "Mammography Quality Standards Act of 1992" (MQSA) shall meet the requirements for initial qualifications as well as the requirements for continuing qualifications.

(1) Initial qualifications. All mammography imaging medical physicists shall be state-approved or be certified by the American Board of Radiology in Radiological Physics/Diagnostic Radiological Physics, the American Board of Medical Physics in Diagnostic Imaging Physics, or the Canadian College of Physicists in Medicine as a Fellow in Diagnostic Radiological Physics or any other body approved by FDA to certify medical physicists; and

1. Have a master's or higher degree in a science from a college or university accredited by one of the regional accreditation bodies of the Commission on Higher Education with not less than 30 semester hours or equivalent of college level physics or radiation science, have two years of experience in conducting performance evaluations of mammography facilities and 20 hours of documented specializedtraining in conducting performance evaluations of mammography facilities. Complete surveys of five mammography units shall be equal to one year of experience. Two or more years of training while pursuing a master's or higher degree in medical physics may be accepted in lieu of one year of experience. After January 1, 1996, the experience shall be acquired under the direct supervision of a mammography imaging medical physicist who meets the requirements in 41.6(3)"c"(1) and 41.6(3)"c"(2).

2. Prior to October 27, 1997, have a bachelor's degree in a physical science from a college or university accredited by one of the regional accreditation bodies of the Commission on Higher Education with not less than 15 semester hours or equivalent college level physics or radiation sciences and five years of experience in conducting performance evaluations of mammography facilities. The individual shall have surveyed at least five mammography units in each of the five years and have at least 40 hours of documented specialized training in conducting performance evaluations of mammography facilities to comply with the requirements of MQSA.

(2) Continuing qualifications.

1. Continuing education. After the third anniversary of completion of the requirements of 41.6(3)"c"(1), the individual shall have taught or completed at least 15 continuing education units in mammographic imaging over the three previous years. This shall include training, if available, appropriate to each mammographic modality evaluated by the mammography imaging medical physicist during the surveys or oversights of quality assurance programs for which the medical physicist is responsible.

2. Continuing experience. After the first anniversary of completion of the requirements of 41.6(3)"c"(1), and each year thereafter, the individual shall have surveyed at least three mammography units within the last 12 months. This requirement does not apply to an individual who is employed full-time at a single facility as a diagnostic medical physicist.

(3) All facility survey reports must be signed by a mammography imaging medical physicist who meets the qualification requirements of 41.6(3)"c"(1).

(4) A mammography imaging medical physicist who signs a facility survey report must have been present in that facility during the survey.

(5) Mammography imaging medical physicists who fail to maintain the required continuing qualifications stated in 41.6(3)"c"(2) shall reestablish their qualifications before independently surveying another facility. To reestablish their qualifications, mammography imaging medical physicists who fail to meet the continuing education requirement of 41.6(3)"c"(2) must obtain a sufficient number of continuing education units to bring their total up to the required 15 in the previous three years. Mammography imaging medical physicists who fail to meet the continuing experience requirement of 41.6(3)"c"(1) must obtain experience by surveying one mammography unit for each year of not meeting the continuing experience requirements under the supervision of a mammography imaging medical physicist who meets the qualifications stated in 41.6(3)"c"(1) and 41.6(3)"c"(2). After five years of not meeting the continuing experience requirements, the mammography imaging medical physicist must requalify under 41.6(3)"c"(1).

d. Equipment operators. Any individual operating mammography equipment must be a physician as defined in 641--Chapter 38 or must be credentialed as a general radiographer as set forth in 641--Chapter 42.

(1) Each general radiographer must meet one of the following:

1. Have successfully completed a formal training program in radiologic technology in a school that meets the requirements of Appendix A (Standards for Accreditation of Educational Programs for Radiographers) of 42 CFR Part 75; or

2. Have successfully completed a formal training program in radiologic technology that is approved by the Council on Allied Health Education and Accreditation; or

3. Have had at least five years' experience in performing radiologic procedures and at least one year's experience in performing mammography before October 1, 1992.

(2) Each general radiographer must have completed successfully 40 hours of specialized training, approved by the agency, to include a minimum of one hour of hands-on mammographic positioning, quality control, technique factor settings and other areas pertinent to mammography prior to the time the individual begins performing mammography and an average of five hours of specialized training every 12 months thereafter to be averaged over no more than a 36-month period.

Training programs shall be submitted to the agency for approval and shall include demonstrations and practical evaluation by the instructor of the student's performance and documentation describing training, date and length of training, and evaluation of student's performance to be signed and dated by the instructor, and the business address of the supplier of the training.

e. Personnel orientation. The supplier of mammography services must have an orientation program for operators of mammography equipment based on a procedures manual that is available to all staff members and that incorporates relevant documents and instructions concerning the following:

(1) Precautions to protect the operator of the equipment, the patient and individuals in the surrounding area from unnecessary exposure to radiation.

(2) Determination of the area that will receive the primary beam (breast positioning).

(3) Pertinent information on compression, exposure levels, resolution, contrast, noise, examination identification, artifacts, and average glandular dose per view.

(4) Employee responsibilities concerning the proper use of personal radiation monitors.

(5) Proper use and maintenance of equipment, including a discussion of the image receptors appropriate for use with mammography and the kV-target-filter combination to be used with each image receptor.

(6) Proper maintenance of records.

(7) Possible technical problems and solutions.

(8) Protection against electrical hazards.

(9) Hazards of excessive exposures to radiation.

(10) Quality control procedures and those individuals responsible for performing them.

f. Personnel records. Records must be maintained to indicate that each employee is qualified for a specific position by means of appropriate state or other certification, license, training, and experience.

41.6(4) Obtaining and preserving records.

a. The supplier of the current mammography examination must make all reasonable efforts to obtain the patient's recent mammography records, including original images or films, copies of written reports prepared by interpreting physicians, and other relevant information pertinent to previous mammograms that might be available from others, for comparison with the current mammography records.

b. The supplier must make, for each patient, a record of the mammography services it provides, including:

(1) The date the mammography procedure was performed and the date of the interpretation.

(2) The name of the patient.

(3) The name of the operator of the equipment and the interpreting physician.

(4) A description of the procedures performed.

(5) The name of the referring physician (if any) or other physician (if any) identified by the patient to receive the interpreting physician's written report.

(6) The date the interpreting physician's written report was sent to the appropriate physician or patient.

c. Preservation of records.

(1) The supplier must provide satisfactory assurances (as documented in its medical records) that the images or films of the first and subsequent mammography procedures and the related written reports of the interpreting physician for each patient are either placed in the patient's medical record kept by the supplier or sent for placement in the patient's medical record as directed by the patient's physician or the patient.

(2) Records retained by the supplier must be retained for at least 60 calendar months following the date of service or not less than ten years, if no additional mammograms of the patient are performed.

(3) If the supplier should cease to exist before the end of the 60-month period, the records must be transferred to the patient or patient's physician.

41.6(5) Quality assurance program.

a. The supplier shall ensure that the facility has an equipment quality assurance program specific to mammography and covering all components of the system, to ensure consistently high-quality images with minimum patient exposure.

b. The supplier shall ensure that a general review of the program is conducted at least annually and have available the services of a qualified radiation physicist who is capable of establishing and conducting the program.

c. Under the direction of the physician consultant, the radiation physicist shall have responsibility for establishing and conducting the equipment quality assurance program. The program shall include:

(1) Conducting or training others to conduct equipment performance monitoring functions.

(2) Analyzing the monitoring results to determine if there are any problems requiring correction.

(3) Ensuring that the facility has procedures in place for carrying out or arranging for the necessary corrective actions as well as for the calibrations and other preventive maintenance.

d. Calibration of equipment. All variable parameters of the equipment shall be calibrated:

(1) When the equipment is first installed.

(2) After any major changes or replacement of parts.

(3) At least annually during use based on recommendations of the mammography imaging medical physicist.

(4) When quality assurance tests indicate that calibration is needed.

e. Performance monitoring. The supplier shall routinely ensure that the performance of the mammography system is monitored. The parameters to be monitored shall include but not be limited to:

(1) Processor performance (through daily sensitometric-densitometric means).

(2) Half-value layer.

(3) Output reproducibility and linearity.

(4) Automatic exposure control reproducibility and linearity.

(5) Adequacy of film storage (both before use and after exposure if processing does not occur immediately).

(6) Availability and use of technique charts that shall include an indication of the kV-target-filter combination to be used with each image receptor.

(7) Darkroom integrity, to be performed at least semiannually or when conditions have changed, shall include an inspection for light leaks, a fog test, and a safe light test.

(8) Image quality. The minimum image quality achieved at a mammographic facility shall be the ability to observe the image of four 0.75 mm fibriles, three 0.32 mm specks, and three 0.75 mm masses from an ACR-approved phantom (or equivalent) on the standard mammographic film used at the facility. No mammograms shall be performed if this minimum is not met.

f. Frequency of monitoring.

(1) Processor performance shall be accomplished daily before processing patient films.

(2) Image quality shall be monitored at least monthly with a phantom and every time the unit is altered including the replacement of parts.

(3) All other parameters shall be proportional to the expected variability of each parameter, but at least annually.

g. Evaluation of monitoring results.

(1) Standards of image quality giving acceptable ranges of values for each of the parameters tested shall be established to aid in the evaluation. The standards of image quality related to dose shall include a requirement that the mean glandular dose for one craniocaudal view of a 4.5 cm compressed breast (50 percent adipose/50 percent glandular) or equivalent phantom shall not exceed 100 mrad (millirad) for film/screen units with no grids, or 300 mrad for film/screen units with grids.

(2) The monitoring results shall be compared routinely to the standards of image quality in Appendix I. If the results fall outside the acceptable range, the test shall be repeated. If the results continue to be unacceptable, the source of the problem shall be identified and corrected before further examinations are conducted.

h. Retake analysis program.

(1) A program shall be established as a further aid in detecting and correcting problems affecting image quality or exposure.

(2) All retakes shall be logged including date, technologist's name and reason for retake. A retake analysis shall be performed every 250 patients or quarterly, whichever comes first.

i. Medical outcomes audit. Each facility shall establish a system for reviewing outcome data from all mammography performed, including follow-up on the disposition of positive mammograms and correlation of surgical biopsy results with mammogram reports.

j. Responsibility for each requirement for monitoring shall be assigned to qualified personnel and documented in the supplier's records.

41.6(6) Equipment standards. The equipment used to perform mammography shall meet the following standards:

a. Be specifically designed for mammography.

b. Meet the Food and Drug Administration (FDA) performance standards for diagnostic X-ray systems and their major components found in 21 CFR 1020.30 and FDA standards for radiographic equipment in 21 CFR 1020.31.

c. Have image receptor systems and individual components which are appropriate for mammography and used according to the manufacturer's recommendations.

d. Have beam limitation which limits the useful beam so that the X-ray field at the plane of the image receptor does not extend beyond any edge of the image receptor at any designated source to image receptor distance (SID). However, the X-ray field may extend beyond the edge of the image receptor which is adjacent to the chest wall provided it does not extend beyond this edge by more than 2 percent of the SID.

e. Check film/screen contact when cassettes are first placed into use and semiannually thereafter.

f. Have limits to provide kV-target-filter combinations appropriate for the image receptors which have met the requirements of 41.6(6)"c."

g. The focal spot size, magnification factor and source to image receptor distance (SID) are appropriate for mammography and in the ranges shown below:

SID

Nominal Focal Spot Size
>65 cm
< or = to 0.6 mm
50 to 65 cm
< or = to 0.5 mm
< or = to 50 cm
< or = to 0.4 mm
h. Devices parallel to the imaging plane shall be available to immobilize and compress the breast with a force of at least 25 pounds per square inch and shall be capable of maintaining this compression for at least three seconds.

i. Shall have the capability for using antiscatter grids.

j. Shall have the capability of automatic exposure control.

k. Shall have a control panel that:

(1) Gives a positive indication when X-rays are being produced.

(2) Gives an audible signal indicating termination of exposure.

(3) Includes labeled control settings or appropriate indications that show the physical factors used for exposure such as kilovoltage potential (kVp), milliampere seconds (mAs), exposure time, and whether exposure termination is automatic.

l. Shall indicate, or provide a means of determining, the mAs resulting from each exposure made with automatic exposure control.

m. The viewbox shall be checked periodically to ensure optimal conditions. When the mammogram is placed on the viewbox, the area surrounding the film must be masked to exclude extraneous light which may reduce image contrast.

n. Mobile units and vans.

(1) A phantom image shall be made and processed after each relocation.

(2) If processing is not available, a check of the radiation output shall be made.

(3) Equipment shall be recalibrated as necessary to maintain quality of phantom image.

41.6(7) Safety standards for mammography equipment.

a. Proper safety precautions shall be maintained and shall include, but not be limited to, adequate shielding for patients, personnel, and facilities. The equipment shall be operated only from a shielded position.

b. Equipment operators shall wear personnel monitors to measure their radiation exposure.

c. Annual inspections shall be conducted by an inspector from the agency to ensure compliance with these rules. Identified hazards shall be promptly corrected.

d. Equipment shall be shockproof and grounded to protect against electrical hazards.

e. Records of all inspections, reports, and consultations shall be maintained for at least seven years.

RULE 41.6(136C)--APPENDIX I

Normally, the frequency of monitoring for each of the following should be no longer than the values given on the following table. The standards of image quality are also given on the table. The surveyor is expected to measure phantom image quality and calculate dose from a measured exposure to confirm that the guidelines meet the desired standards of image quality. The surveyor will determine if the other standards are met by checking the supplier's monitoring records.

ITEMS


FREQUENCY

STDS OF IMAGE QUALITY
Processor

Daily

Mid-density step and density difference (contrast) t _ 0.1 OD of the optimized operating level and base + fog deviation _ 0.03 OD
HVL

Annually

Meas. HVL with compression device in field _ (kVp/100) mm Al and
_ (kVp/100 + 0.1 mm Al)
Output reproducibility

*Quarterly

Coefficient of variation _ 0.05 with 4 exposures at the same technique
Output linearity

*Quarterly

mR/mAs values at any two consecutive tube current settings should not vary more than 0.1 times their sum.
Automatic exposure
control reproducibility

Annually

The phantom used for measurements related to this and the two following automatic control parameters should be either acrylic or BR-12 and consist of at least three 2-cm-thick slabs to provide thicknesses of 2cm, 4cm, and 6cm (each having linear dimensions of at least 8 x 10 cm). When a fixed kVp is used to produce four images of the 4cm thick phantom, the maximum value for the coefficient of variation for exposure at the center of the image should be _ 0.05.
kVp response of

automatic exposure


Annually

Film density maintained to _ 0.3 OD of the average optical density at the center of an exposure control phantom image over the range of kVp used in the facility. To obtain the average, at least four phantom images should be made, one each with the highest and lowest kVps commonly used in the facility and the other two at intermediate values.
Thickness response of
automatic exposure control

Annually

Film density maintained to _ 0.3 OD of the average optical density at the center of a phantom image at each kVp commonly used in the facility. To obtain the average, images with phantom thickness of at least 2, 4, and 6 cm should be used.
Adequacy of unexposed
film storage

Quarterly

Increase in base + fog density over storage time maintained to t0.02 OD
Availability and use of
technique charts

Monthly

Ensure that charts are available and used
kVp/target/filter combination

Daily

Must be unchanged from that indicated on the technique charts
Darkroom integrity

Clean Daily Fog measured when bulbs or filter changed and semiannually

Minimum dust particles on film. Fog not greater than 0.05 OD with
2-minute test
Phantom image quality

At least monthly

Phantom image scores not less than required ACR MAP (currently specified only using RMI phantoms) and that should not decrease more than one in any category between consecutive tests. Also, they should not have decreased by more than one in any category from the initial baseline phantom image.
Dose

Annually

See Appendix II

*If the supplier can document that the item has remained within limits for at least three consecutive monitoring periods, it may use a longer monitoring interval for any parameters except processor performance and phantom image quality. The period should not be longer than one year in any case. If during the longer monitoring interval the test results fall outside the "Standards of Image Quality" criteria, then the test frequency must revert to the original intervals for at least three consecutive quarters.

RULE 41.6(136C)--APPENDIX II

Glandular Dose (in mrad) for 1 Roentgen Entrance Exposure

4.5-cm Breast Thickness--50% Adipose/50% Glandular Breast Tissue*

Mo/Mo Target Filter X-Ray Voltage (kVp)












W/Al

Target Filter

Combination

HVL
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33

0.23
109











0.24
113
116










0.25
117
120
122









0.26
121
124
126
128








0.27
126
128
130
132
134







0.28
130
132
134
136
138
139






0.29
135
137
139
141
142
143
144





0.30
139
141
143
145
146
147
148
149



170
0.31
144
146
147
149
150
151
152
153
154


175
0.32
148
150
151
153
154
155
156
158
159
160
160
180
0.33
153
154
155
157
158
159
160
162
163
164
164
185
0.34
157
159
160
161
162
163
164
166
167
168
168
190
0.35

163
164
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
172
194
0.36


168
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
176
199
0.37



174
175
176
177
178
178
179
180
204
0.38




179
180
181
182
182
183
184
208
0.39





184
185
186
186
187
188
213
0.40






189
190
191
192
192
217
0.41







194
195
196
196
221
0.42









200
200
225
0.43










204
230
0.44











234
0.45











238

To convert from entrance exposure in air in Roentgen to mean glandular breast dose in millirads, multiply the entrance exposure by the factor shown in the table for the appropriate kVp and beam quality (HVL) combination. For example, a measured entrance exposure of 0.50 Roentgen from a Mo/Mo Target Filter system at 30 kVp with a measured HVL of 0.36 mm aluminum yields an average glandular dose of (0.50 R) x (174 mrad/R) = 87 mrad or 0.87 mGy.

*Wu X. Breast dosimetry in screen-film mammography. In: Barnes GT, Frey GD (eds), Screen film mammography: Imaging considerations and medical physics responsibilities. Madison, WI: Medical Physics Publishing; 159-175, 1991. W/Al conversion factors are derived from fits to data from Stanton L et al. Dosage evaluation in mammography. Radiology 1984; 150:577-584.

ITEM 2. Adopt new rule 641--41.7(136C) as follows:

641--41.7(136C) X-ray machines used for mammographically guided breast biopsy.

41.7(1) Definitions. In addition to the definitions provided in rule 41.1(136C), the following definitions are applicable to this rule.

"Collaborative setting" means a setting in which a qualified radiologist and surgeon (under 41.7(3)"a" or 41.7(3)"c") are working together in consultation and in performing mammographically guided breast biopsies with a common goal of the patient's benefit.

"Mammographically guided breast biopsy" means a breast biopsy procedure performed with the utilization of a dedicated system which emits ionizing radiation and is designed specifically for that procedure.

"Supervising physician" means the physician designated by the facility/owner to:

1. Evaluate the equipment, personnel, procedures, and records annually; and

2. Establish and conduct the quality assurance program.

41.7(2) Registration and application standards and requirements.

a. Each radiation machine used to perform mammographically guided breast biopsies shall be registered according to 641--subrule 39.3(2).

b. Each facility wishing to perform mammographically guided breast biopsies shall apply to the agency for authorization by providing or verifying the following information for each machine:

(1) The mammographically guided biopsy equipment and facility meet the general requirements of these rules for radiation machines.

(2) The radiation machine is specifically designed to perform mammographically guided breast biopsies.

(3) The radiation machine is used according to these rules on patient radiation exposure and radiation dose levels.

(4) The radiation machine is operated by individuals meeting the requirements of this rule.

(5) The entire mammographically guided breast biopsy system is evaluated annually by a radiation physicist who meets the requirements of this rule.

(6) The equipment, personnel, procedures and records are evaluated annually by the supervising physician.

c. Withdrawal or denial of authorization.

(1) Authorization may be withdrawn with cause if any machine does not meet one or more of the standards of these rules.

(2) The facility shall have an opportunity for a hearing in connection with a denial or withdrawal of authorization.

(3) An emergency order withdrawing authorization may be issued if the agency finds the radiation machine or facility violates rules that seriously affect the health, safety and welfare of the public. An opportunity for hearing shall be held within five working days after the issuance of the order. The order shall be effective during the proceedings.

(4) If authorization is withdrawn, the radiation machine shall not be used until reinstated.

d. Reinstatement of authorization.

(1) An application for reinstatement shall be submitted and processed the same as an initial application.

(2) The agency shall inspect the radiation machine within 60 days of the approved reinstatement application.

(3) A certificate of reinstatement shall be issued only after the agency has inspected the radiation machine and facility and determined that they meet the requirements of these rules.

e. Inspections. The agency shall conduct an inspection of each radiation machine no later than 60 days after initial authorization and at least annually thereafter.

41.7(3) Physicians. Physicians must be qualified according to the setting and their role in performing mammographically guided breast biopsies as outlined below.

a. Requirements for a radiologist in a collaborative setting are as follows:

(1) Initial training and qualifications.

1. Must be qualified according to 41.6(3)"b."

2. Shall have performed at least 12 mammographically guided breast biopsies prior to the effective date of these rules, or at least 3 hands-on image-guided breast biopsies under a physician who is qualified under 41.6(3)"b" and has performed at least 24 mammographically guided breast biopsies.

3. Shall have at least three hours of Category 1 CME in image-guided breast biopsy.

4. Shall be responsible for mammographic interpretation, be experienced as noted in "2" above and be experienced in recommendations for biopsy and lesion identification at time of biopsy.

5. Shall be responsible for oversight of all quality control and quality assurance activities.

6. Shall be responsible for the supervision of the radiologic technologist and the medical physicist.

(2) Maintenance of proficiency and CME requirements.

1. Perform at least 12 mammographically guided breast biopsies per year or requalify as specified above in 41.7(3)"a"(1).

2. Obtain at least three hours of Category 1 CME in mammographically guided breast biopsy every three years.

b. Requirements for a physician other than a qualified radiologist in a collaborative setting are as follows:

(1) Initial training and qualifications.

1. Must have at least three hours of Category 1 CME in mammographically guided breast biopsy which includes instruction on triangulation for lesion location.

2. Must have performed at least 12 mammographically guided breast biopsies prior to the effective date of these rules, or at least 3 hands-on mammographically guided breast biopsy procedures under a physician who is both qualified to interpret mammography according to 41.6(3)"b" and has performed at least 24 mammographically guided breast biopsies.

3. Shall be responsible for postbiopsy management of the patient.

(2) Maintenance of proficiency and CME requirements.

1. Perform or participate in at least 12 mammographically guided breast biopsies per year or requalify by performing 3 supervised procedures.

2. Obtain at least three hours of Category 1 CME in mammographically guided breast biopsy every three years.

c. Requirements for a radiologist performing mammographically guided breast biopsy independently are as follows:

(1) Initial training and requirements.

1. Must be qualified according to 41.6(3)"b."

2. Initially, must have at least 3 hours of Category 1 CME in mammographically guided breast biopsy.

3. Initially, must obtain at least 15 hours of CME in breast imaging including benign and malignant breast diseases.

4. Must have performed at least 12 mammographically guided breast biopsies prior to the effective date of these rules or at least 3 hands-on mammographically guided breast biopsy procedures under a physician who is both qualified according to 41.6(3)"b" and has performed at least 24 mammographically guided breast biopsies.

5. Must be responsible for mammographic interpretation.

6. Must be responsible for patient selection.

7. Must be responsible for quality assurance activities including medical audit (tracking of number of biopsies done, cancers found, benign lesions, biopsies needing repeat, and complications).

8. Must be responsible for the oversight of all quality control.

9. Must be responsible for the supervision of the radiologic technologist and the medical physicist.

10. Must be responsible for postbiopsy managementof the patient which may include referral to a surgeon for a follow-up on certain lesions.

(2) Maintenance of proficiency and CME requirements.

1. Perform at least 12 mammographically guided breast biopsies per year or requalify by performing 3 supervised procedures.

2. Obtain at least three hours of Category 1 CME in mammographically guided breast biopsy every three years which includes postbiopsy management of the patient.

d. Requirements for a physician other than a qualified radiologist (under 41.7(3)"c") performing mammographically guided breast biopsy independently are as follows:

(1) Initial training and requirements.

1. Must have evaluated at least 480 mammograms per year in the prior two years in consultation with a physician who is qualified according to 41.6(3)"b."

2. Initially, must have at least 15 hours of Category 1 CME in mammographically guided breast imaging and biopsy or three years' experience having performed at least 36 image-guided breast biopsies.

3. Must have four hours of Category 1 CME in medical radiation physics.

4. Must have performed at least 12 mammographically guided breast biopsies prior to the effective date of these rules, or at least 3 hands-on mammographically guided breast biopsy procedures under a physician who is both qualified according to 41.6(3)"b" and has performed at least 24 image-guided breast biopsies.

5. Must be responsible for patient selection.

6. Must be responsible for quality assurance activities including medical audit (tracking of number of biopsies, cancers found, benign lesions, biopsies needing repeat and complications).

7. Must be responsible for oversight of all quality control.

8. Must be responsible for the supervision of the radiologic technologist and the medical physicist.

9. Must be responsible for postbiopsy management of the patient.

(2) Maintenance of proficiency and CME requirements.

1. Continue to evaluate at least 480 mammograms per year in consultation with a physician who is qualified according to 41.6(3)"b."

2. Perform at least 12 mammographically guided breast biopsies per year or requalify by performing 3 supervised procedures.

3. Obtain at least three hours of Category 1 CME in mammographically guided breast biopsy every three years.

41.7(4) Medical physicist.

a. Must be qualified according to 41.6(3)"c."

b. Must meet the following initial requirements:

(1) Prior to July 1, 1998, have performed three hands-on mammographically guided breast biopsy physics surveys; or one hands-on mammographically guided breast biopsy physics survey under the guidance of a medical physicist qualified through 41.7(4)"a" and 41.7(4)"b."

(2) On or after July 1, 1998, have one hands-on image-guided breast biopsy physics survey under the guidance of a medical physicist qualified to perform mammographically guided breast biopsy physics surveys. Have at least one mammographically guided breast biopsy physics survey per year after the initial qualifications are met; and three hours of continuing education in mammographically guided breast biopsy physics every three years after the initial qualifications are met.

41.7(5) Radiologic technologist.

a. Must be qualified according to 41.6(3)"d."

b. Must meet the following initial requirements:

(1) Five hands-on procedures on patients under the supervision of a qualified physician or technologist.

(2) Three hours of continuing education in mammographically guided breast biopsy.

c. Thereafter, an average of at least 12 mammographically guided breast biopsies per year after initial qualifications are met.

d. Three hours of continuing education in mammographically guided breast biopsy every 3 years after initial qualifications are met.

41.7(6) Obtaining and preserving records.

a. The facility must make, for each procedure, a record of the service provided including:

(1) The date of the procedure.

(2) The name of the patient.

(3) The name of the radiologic technologists and physicians performing the procedure.

(4) A description of the service provided.

(5) The name of the referring physician, if any.

b. Records retained by the medical facility must be retained for at least ten years.

41.7(7) Quality assurance program.

a. The facility shall have an equipment quality assurance program specific to image-guided breast biopsy systems and covering all components of the system to ensure high-quality images with minimum patient exposure.

b. The facility shall ensure that a general review of the program is conducted at least annually and have available the services of a qualified radiation physicist who is capable of establishing and conducting the program.

c. Under the direction of the supervising physician, the radiation physicist shall have the responsibility for establishing and conducting the equipment quality assurance program. The program shall include:

(1) Conducting equipment performance monitoring functions, at least annually, to include:

1. Evaluation of biopsy unit assembly.

2. Evaluation of focal spot.

3. kVp accuracy/reproducibility.

4. Half-value layer measurement.

5. Exposure reproducibility.

6. Breast entrance exposure, average glandular dose.

7. Image quality evaluation.

8. Artifact evaluation.

9. Digital field uniformity.

10. Localization simulation (gelatin phantom) test.

11. Evaluation of the facility's technologist quality control program.

(2) Analyzing the monitoring results to determine if there are any problems requiring correction.

(3) Ensuring that the facility has procedures in place for carrying out or arranging for the necessary corrective actions as well as for the calibrations and other preventative maintenance.

d. The supervising physician shall have the responsibility for establishing and conducting the quality control program in a facility with a fixed unit. In the case of a mobile stereotactic unit, the owner or designee shall assume the responsibility for establishing and conducting the quality assurance program. The program shall include:

(1) Localization accuracy (daily and if localization unit is adjusted, especially for add-on units before use).

(2) Visual checklist (weekly).

(3) Phantom image (weekly).

(4) Compression (semiannually).

(5) Processor sensitometry (daily before use with systems utilizing film).

e. Each facility shall establish a medical audit program to ensure the accuracy and appropriateness of the pro-cedures performed. This program shall include an imaging-pathology correlation for each biopsy performed, an ongoing analysis of biopsy results and periodic review of the utilization of the procedure.

41.7(8) Equipment standards.

a. Be specifically designed for mammographically guided breast biopsy.

b. Meet the Food and Drug Administration (FDA) standards found in 21 CFR.

41.7(9) Safety standards.

a. Proper safety precautions shall be maintained and shall include, but not be limited to, adequate shielding for patients, personnel and facilities. The equipment shall be operated only from a shielded position.

b. Equipment operators shall wear personnel monitors to monitor their radiation exposure.

c. Annual inspections shall be conducted by an inspector from the agency to ensure compliance with these rules. Identified hazards shall be promptly corrected.

d. Equipment shall be shockproof and grounded to protect against electrical hazards.

e. Records of all inspections, reports and consultations shall be maintained for at least seven years.

This rule is intended to implement Iowa Code chapter 136C.

ARC 7770A

PUBLIC HEALTH DEPARTMENT[641]

Notice of Intended Action

Twenty-five interested persons, a governmental subdivision, an agency or association of 25 or more persons may demand an oral presentation hereon as provided in Iowa Code section 17A.4(1)"b."

Notice is also given to the public that the Administrative Rules Review Committee may, on its own motion or on written request by any individual or group, review this proposed action under section 17A.8(6) at a regular or special meeting where the public or interested persons may be heard.

Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code section 137.5, the Department of Public Health hereby gives Notice of Intended Action to amend Chapter 77, "Local Boards of Health," Iowa Administrative Code.

These amendments change the minimum standards required to identify the roles and responsibilities of local boards of health in relation to the core public health functions and the essential public health services.

These administrative rule changes were suggested by representatives of local public health agencies involved in the single-contract process and by the State/Local Board of Health Liaison Committee.

Consideration will be given to all written suggestions or comments on the proposed amendments received on or before February 3, 1998. Such written materials should be sent to the Community Services Bureau, Department of Public Health, Lucas State Office Building, Des Moines, Iowa 50319; fax (515)242-6384.

Also, there will be a public hearing on February 3, 1998, from 10 to 11 a.m. over the Iowa Communications Network (ICN) at which time persons may present their views. The sites for the public hearing are as follows: Iowa Department of Public Health, ICN Room, Lucas State Office Building, Third Floor, Des Moines; Atlantic National Guard Armory, 210 Poplar Street, Atlantic; Storm Lake National Guard Armory, 1601 Park Street, Storm Lake; North Iowa Area Community College, Activity Center, Room AC106, 500 College Drive, Mason City; Washington Armory, ICN Classroom, 501 Hwy. 1 South, Washington; and Hawkeye Community College, 110 Tama Hall, 1501 East Orange Road, Waterloo.

These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code chapter 137.

The following amendments are proposed.

ITEM 1. Adopt new rules 77.1(137) to 77.3(137) and renumber existing rules 77.1(137) to 77.3(137) as 77.4(137) to 77.6(137):

641--77.1(137) Purpose of local boards of health. The local board of health shall have jurisdiction over public health matters within its designated geographic area according to Iowa Code chapter 137. The local board of health shall promote and protect the health of the citizens, and carry out the powers of local boards as specified in Iowa Code sections 137.6 and 137.7, and all other applicable Iowa Code chapters.

641--77.2(137) Definitions. For the purpose of these rules, unless otherwise defined, the following definitions apply:

"Core public health functions" means the functions of community health assessment, policy development, and assurance.

1. Assessment: Regular collection, analysis, interpretation, and communication of information about health conditions, risks, and assets in a community.

2. Policy development: Development, implementation, and evaluation of plans and policies, for public health in general and priority health needs in particular, in a manner that incorporates scientific information and community values.

3. Assurance: Ensuring by encouragement, regulation, or direct action that programs and interventions that maintain and improve health are carried out.

"Department" means the Iowa department of public health.

"Essential public health services" means those activities carried out by public health that fulfill the core functions.

"Local board of health" means a county, city, or district board of health.

"Personal health services" means services focused on the care of individuals.

"Population-based health services" means services focused on the health status of population groups and their environments.

641--77.3(137) Roles and responsibilities of local boards of health. Public health is responsible for safeguarding the community's health. This goal is pursued through three core functions: assessment, policy development and assurance.

77.3(1) Assessment: regularly and systematically collect, assemble, analyze, and make available information on the health of the community, including statistics on health status, community health needs, personal health services, and epidemiologic and other studies of health problems. Assessment includes the essential public health services that:

a. Monitor health status to identify community health problems,

b. Diagnose and investigate health problems and health hazards in the community, and

c. Evaluate effectiveness, accessibility, and quality of personal and population-based health services.

77.3(2) Policy development: exercise its responsibility to serve the public interest in the development of comprehensive public health policies. This can be accomplished by promoting use of a scientific knowledge base in decision making about public health and by taking the lead in public health policy development. Policy development includes the essential public health services that:

a. Develop policies and plans that support individual and community health efforts,

b. Enforce laws and regulations that protect and ensure safety, and

c. Research new insights and innovative solutions to health problems.

77.3(3) Assurance: Assure their constituents that services necessary to achieve agreed upon goals are provided either by encouraging actions by other entities (private or public sector), by requiring such action through regulation, or by providing services directly. Each local board must involve key policymakers and the general public in determining a set of high-priority personal and communitywide health services. Assurance includes the essential public health services that:

a. Link people to needed personal health services and provide such personal and environmental services as deemed necessary,

b. Ensure the competence of public health and personal health care workforce,

c. Inform, educate, and empower people about health issues, and

d. Mobilize community partnerships to identify and solve health problems.

ITEM 2. Amend renumbered subrule 77.4(1), paragraph "b," as follows:

b. In case of a vacancy of the office of chairman due to death, resignation, or other cause, a successor shall be elected at the next meeting of the board, who shall serve the remainder of the term.

ITEM 3. Amend renumbered subrule 77.4(2), paragraph "a," as follows:

a. Each local board of health shall meet at least four times yearly quarterly.

ITEM 4. Amend renumbered subrule 77.5(1) as follows:

77.5(1) The following information shall be submitted to the Iowa department of public health:

a. Names, addresses, and telephone numbers of members of the local board of health, which shall be submitted within one month after their appointment.

b. Names of the chairperson and any other officers elected by the board, which shall be submitted within one month after their election.

c. Names, addresses, and telephone numbers of board employees, information as to whether these are full- or part-time employees, and the salary they are to receive, which shall be submitted within one month following their employment.

d. Notice of resignation, discharge or other termination of the services of any employee, which shall be submitted within one month following termination.

e. A copy of the minutes of each regular and special meeting of the board, which shall include at least:

(1) The date and place of the meeting,

(2) A list of members present, and

(3) A report of any official board actions and shall be submitted within one month of the date of the meeting.

ITEM 5. Amend renumbered subrule 77.5(2) as follows:

77.5(2) An annual report of expenditures for the previous calendar fiscal year, to be submitted on forms provided by the Iowa department of public health, shall be submitted within 30 90 days of the close of the county fiscal year.

ARC 7771A

PUBLIC HEALTH DEPARTMENT[641]

Notice of Intended Action

Twenty-five interested persons, a governmental subdivision, an agency or association of 25 or more persons may demand an oral presentation hereon as provided in Iowa Code section 17A.4(1)"b."

Notice is also given to the public that the Administrative Rules Review Committee may, on its own motion or on written request by any individual or group, review this proposed action under section 17A.8(6) at a regular or special meeting where the public or interested persons may be heard.

Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code section 147A.4, the Iowa Department of Public Health hereby gives Notice of Intended Action to amend Chapter 132, "Emergency Medical Services," Iowa Administrative Code.

The proposed amendments will allow non-EMS agencies, public or private, to train their employees or associates in the use of an automatic external defibrillator. The proposed amendments are intended to enhance and supplement the local EMS system with nontraditional early defibrillation groups/agencies.

Iowa's 22 EMS training programs and the Iowa EMS Advisory Council endorsed public access defibrillation (PAD) on October 7 and 8, 1997. All of Iowa's EMS service programs, medical directors, and hospitals were mailed draft copies of proposed PAD amendments for comment. Additionally, two informational meetings were broadcast over the Iowa Communication Network (ICN) on December 8, and December 17, 1997, to gather input on the issue of PAD. There has been widespread support.

The Iowa Department of Public Health will hold a public hearing over the Iowa Communications Network (ICN) on Tuesday, February 3, 1998, from 2 to 3 p.m. Sites participating in the ICN broadcast include:

National Guard Armory, 12 North 35th Street, Denison, Iowa;

National Guard Armory, 11 East 23rd Street, Spencer, Iowa;

Mason City National Guard Armory, 1160 10th Street SW, Mason City, Iowa;

Iowa Public TV, Room IPTV 1, 6450 Corporate Drive, Johnston, Iowa (origination site);

Washington National Guard Armory, 501 Hwy. 1 South, Washington, Iowa;

National Guard Armory, 195 Radford Road, Dubuque, Iowa.

Any oral or written comments must be received on or before February 3, 1998. Comments should be addressed to Gary Ireland, EMS Bureau Chief, Iowa Department of Public Health, Lucas State Office Building, Des Moines, Iowa 50319-0075.

These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code section 147A.4.

The following amendments are proposed.

ITEM 1. Amend rule 641--132.1(147A) by inserting the following new definitions in alphabetical order:

"AED" means automatic external defibrillator.

"PAD" means public access defibrillation.

"PAD service program" means a nonemergency response business agency, public or private, that has trained its employees or associates in the use of an automatic external defibrillator and is authorized by the department as a PAD service program.

"Public access defibrillation" means the operation of an automatic external defibrillator by a nontraditional provider of emergency medical care.

"Public access defibrillation provider" means someone who has completed the public access provider AED course approved by the department and who is currently certified by the department as a PAD provider.

ITEM 2. Adopt new rule 641--132.16(147A) as follows:

641--132.16(147A) Public access defibrillation. The purpose of this rule is to allow nonemergency response agencies, public or private, to train their employees or associates in the use of the automatic external defibrillator and to provide AED coverage when appropriately trained personnel are available. This rule is intended to enhance and supplement the local EMS system with nontraditional early defibrillation groups/agencies.

132.16(1) Authority of public access defibrillation provider. Public access defibrillation providers may perform those skills identified in the public access defibrillation provider curriculum approved by the department, as part of an authorized PAD service program.

132.16(2) Public access defibrillation provider--training requirements. Individuals seeking certification as a public access defibrillation provider shall:

a. Be an employee or associate of the public or private business agency applying for PAD service program authorization.

b. Obtain appropriate training approved by the department. PAD provider training shall include as a minimum:

(1) Successful course completion in adult CPR, including one rescuer CPR, foreign body airway obstruction, rescue breathing, recovery position, and activating the EMS system.

(2) Successful completion of an AED curriculum approved by the department.

132.16(3) PAD service program--application, guidelines, and standards. A public or private nonemergency response business agency may establish an affiliation with an EMS service program if wishing to provide AED coverage in an EMS service program's service area or may apply for authorization as an independent PAD service program. An application is required and may be obtained by contacting the Iowa Department of Public Health, Bureau of EMS, Lucas State Office Building, Des Moines, Iowa 50319-0075. PAD service programs shall:

a. Provide a medical director licensed under Iowa Code chapter 148, 150, or 150A, who shall be responsible for the overall medical direction of the PAD service program.

b. Use an AED approved by the department.

c. Use the defibrillation protocol approved by the department.

d. Make simultaneous voice/ECG recordings on each call where CPR is performed.

e. Submit a copy of the patient care report and the original voice/ECG recording to the department or departmentdesignee within 48 hours of the cardiac arrest.

f. Implement a policy for periodic maintenance of the AED.

g. Ensure PAD providers complete quarterly practice sessions in the use of the AED.

h. Identify which authorized Iowa ambulance service program(s) will provide patient transportation.

i. Ensure continuity of care, which may include, if necessary, that the PAD provider accompany the patient to a hospital.

j. Complete a renewal application every three years.

k. Ensure PAD providers maintain current course completion in CPR.

132.16(4) Complaints and investigations shall be conducted as with any complaint received against an EMS service program, applying rule 641 IAC 132.10(147A).

ARC 7772A

PUBLIC HEALTH DEPARTMENT[641]

Notice of Intended Action

Twenty-five interested persons, a governmental subdivision, an agency or association of 25 or more persons may demand an oral presentation hereon as provided in Iowa Code section 17A.4(1)"b."

Notice is also given to the public that the Administrative Rules Review Committee may, on its own motion or on written request by any individual or group, review this proposed action under section 17A.8(6) at a regular or special meeting where the public or interested persons may be heard.

Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code section 147A.4, the Iowa Department of Public Health hereby gives Notice of Intended Action to amend Chapter 139, "Iowa Law Enforcement Emergency Care Provider," Iowa Administrative Code.

The proposed amendments will allow Iowa law enforcement agencies to train their peace officers in the use of an automatic external defibrillator (AED). The proposed rules are intended to enhance and supplement the local EMS system with nontraditional early defibrillation groups/agencies.

Iowa's 22 EMS training programs and the Iowa EMS Advisory Council endorsed public access defibrillation (PAD) on October 7 and 8, 1997. All of Iowa's EMS service programs, medical directors, and hospitals were mailed draft copies of proposed AED rules for comment. Additionally, two informational meetings were broadcast over the Iowa Communications Network (ICN) on December 8, and December 17, 1997, to gather input on the issue of AED and use by law enforcement personnel. There has been widespread support.

The Iowa Department of Public Health will hold a public hearing over the Iowa Communications Network on Tuesday, February 3, 1998, from 2 to 3 p.m. Sites participating in the ICN broadcast include:

National Guard Armory, 12 North 35th Street, Denison, Iowa;

National Guard Armory, 11 East 23rd Street, Spencer, Iowa;

Mason City National Guard Armory, 1160 10th Street SW, Mason City, Iowa;

Iowa Public TV, Room IPTV 1, 6450 Corporate Drive, Johnston, Iowa (origination site);

Washington National Guard Armory, 501 Hwy. 1 South, Washington, Iowa;

National Guard Armory, 195 Radford Road, Dubuque, Iowa.

Any oral or written comments must be received on or before February 3, 1998. Comments should be addressed to Gary Ireland, EMS Bureau Chief, Iowa Department of Public Health, Lucas State Office Building, Des Moines, Iowa 50319-0075.

These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code chapter 147A.

The following amendments are proposed.

ITEM 1. Amend rule 641--139.1(147A) by adding the following new definitions in alphabetical order:

"AED" means automatic external defibrillator.

"Law enforcement AED service program" means a recognized Iowa law enforcement agency that has trained its peace officers in the use of an AED and is authorized by the department as a law enforcement AED service program.

ITEM 2. Amend rule 641--139.2(147A) as follows:

641--139.2(147A) Authority of Iowa law enforcement emergency care provider. Iowa law enforcement emergency care provider may perform skills identified in the Iowa law enforcement emergency care provider curriculum approved by the department, plus the skill of automated defibrillation for which training can be documented.

ITEM 3. Adopt new rule 641--139.6(147A) and an implementation clause as follows:

641--139.6(147A) Law enforcement AED service program authorization. A recognized Iowa law enforcement agency that desires to allow its peace officers to use an AED shall apply to the department for authorization. Application for authorization shall be made on forms provided by the department. The purpose of this rule is to allow law enforcement agencies to train their peace officers in the use of the automatic external defibrillator and to provide AED coverage when appropriately trained personnel are available. This rule is intended to enhance and supplement the local EMS system with nontraditional early defibrillation agencies.

139.6(1) Training requirements. Law enforcement personnel wishing to provide AED coverage as part of an Iowa law enforcement agency shall:

a. Be an employee or associate of the law enforcement agency.

b. As a minimum, be currently certified as an Iowa law enforcement emergency care provider.

c. Obtain appropriate training approved by the department. AED training shall include, as a minimum, successful completion of an AED curriculum approved by the department.

139.6(2) Iowa law enforcement AED service program-- application, guidelines, and standards. An Iowa law enforcement agency may establish an affiliation with an EMS service program if wishing to provide AED coverage in an EMS service program's service area or may apply for authorization as an independent law enforcement AED service program. An application is required and may be obtained by contacting the Iowa Department of Public Health, Bureau of EMS, Lucas State Office Building, Des Moines, Iowa 50319-0075. Iowa law enforcement AED service programs shall:

a. Provide a medical director licensed under Iowa Code chapter 148, 150, or 150A, who shall be responsible for the overall medical direction of the law enforcement AED service program.

b. Use an AED approved by the department.

c. Use the defibrillation protocol approved by the department.

d. Make simultaneous voice/ECG recordings on each call where CPR is performed.

e. Submit a copy of the patient care report and the original voice/ECG recording to the department or department designee within 48 hours of the cardiac arrest.

f. Implement a policy for periodic maintenance of the AED.

g. Ensure that law enforcement personnel trained in the use of the AED complete quarterly practice sessions in the use of the AED.

h. Identify which authorized Iowa ambulance service program(s) will provide patient transportation.

i. Ensure continuity of care, which may include, if necessary, that the peace officer trained in the use of an AED accompany the patient to a hospital.

j. Complete a renewal application every three years.

139.6(3) Complaints and investigations shall be conducted as with any complaint received against an EMS service program, applying rule 641 IAC 132.10.

These rules are intended to implement Iowa Code chapter 147A.

ARC 7768A

REVENUE AND FINANCE DEPARTMENT[701]

Notice of Intended Action

Twenty-five interested persons, a governmental subdivision, an agency or association of 25 or more persons may demand an oral presentation hereon as provided in Iowa Code section 17A.4(1)"b."

Notice is also given to the public that the Administrative Rules Review Committee may, on its own motion or on written request by any individual or group, review this proposed action under section 17A.8(6) at a regular or special meeting where the public or interested persons may be heard.

Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code sections 421.17(19) and 422.68, the Iowa Department of Revenue and Finance hereby gives Notice of Intended Action to amend Chapter 40, "Determination of Net Income," Chapter 45, "Partnerships," and Chapter 52, "Filing Returns, Payment of Tax and Penalty and Interest," Iowa Administrative Code.

Item 1 adds five additional bonds to the list of bonds that interest from is not subject to Iowa income tax.

Item 2 clarifies that limited liability companies that are treated as partnerships for federal income tax purposes are also treated as partnerships for Iowa income tax purposes.

Item 3 amends rule 701--40.13(422) to add language referring resident shareholders in S corporations to 701--Chapter 50 for information about whether they might be able to use allocation and apportionment to determine Iowa taxable income.

Item 4 amends rule 701--45.1(422) to clarify that limited liability companies are required to file Iowa partnership returns if they file a federal partnership return. Also the amendment puts the public on notice that Iowa follows the federal check-the-box election as to the tax status of various flow-through entities.

Item 5 amends subrule 52.1(5) to inform the public that Iowa recognizes the federal "qualified subchapter S subsidiary" election.

The proposed amendments will not necessitate additional expenditures by political subdivisions or agencies and entities which contract with political subdivisions.

The Department has determined that these proposed amendments may have an impact on small business. The Department has considered the factors listed in Iowa Code section 17A.31(4). The Department will issue a regulatory flexibility analysis as provided in Iowa Code sections 17A.31 to 17A.33 if a written request is filed by delivery or by mailing postmarked no later than February 3, 1998, to the Policy Section, Compliance Division, Iowa Department of Revenue and Finance, Hoover State Office Building, P.O. Box 10457, Des Moines, Iowa 50306. The request may be made by the Administrative Rules Review Committee, the Governor, a political subdivision, at least 25 persons who qualify as a small business under Iowa Code sections 17A.31 to 17A.33, or an organization of small businesses representing at least 25 persons which is registered with this agency under Iowa Code sections 17A.31 to 17A.33.

Any interested person may make written suggestions or comments on these proposed amendments on or before February 13, 1998. Such written comments should be directed to the Policy Section, Compliance Division, Iowa Department of Revenue and Finance, Hoover State Office Building, P.O. Box 10457, Des Moines, Iowa 50306.

Persons who want to orally convey their views should contact the Policy Section, Compliance Division, Iowa Department of Revenue and Finance, at (515)281-4250 or at the Department of Revenue and Finance offices on the fourth floor of the Hoover State Office Building.

Requests for a public hearing must be received by February 6, 1998.

These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code sections 422.7, 422.8, 422.15, and 422.36.

The following amendments are proposed.

ITEM 1. Amend rule 701--40.3(422) by adding the following new numbered paragraphs:

17. Iowa sewage treatment bonds: Bonds issued under Iowa Code section 16.131(6).

18. Community college residence halls and dormitories bonds: Bonds issued under Iowa Code section 260C.61.

19. Community college bond program bonds: Bonds issued under Iowa Code section 260C.71(6).

20. Regents institutions medical and hospital buildings at University of Iowa bonds: Bonds issued under Iowa Code section 263A.6.

21. Interstate bridges bonds: Bonds issued under Iowa Code section 313A.36.

ITEM 2. Amend rule 701--40.12(422) to read as follows:

701--40.12(422) Income from partnerships or limited liability companies. Residents engaged in a partnership, or limited liability company, even if located or doing business outside the state of Iowa, are taxable upon their distributive share of net income of such partnership, or limited liability company, whether distributed or not, and are required to include such distributive share in their return. A nonresident individual who is a member of a partnership or limited liability company doing business in Iowa is taxable on that portion of net income which is applicable to the Iowa business activity whether distributed or not. See 701--Chapter 45.

This rule is intended to implement Iowa Code sections 422.7, 422.8, and 422.15.

ITEM 3. Amend rule 701--40.13(422) to read as follows:

701--40.13(422) Subchapter "S" income. Where a corporation elects under Sections 1371-1379 of the Internal Revenue Code, to distribute the corporation's income to the shareholders, the corporation's income, in its entirety, is subject to individual reporting whether or not actually distributed. Both resident and nonresident shareholders shall report their share of the corporation's net taxable income on their respective Iowa returns. Isaacson v. Iowa State Tax Commission, 183 N.W.2d 693, Iowa Supreme Court, February 9, 1971. Residents shall report their distributable share in total while nonresidents shall report only their portion of their distributable share which was earned in Iowa. For tax years beginning on or after January 1, 1996, residents should refer to 701 Chapter 50 to determine if they qualify to compute Iowa taxable income by allocation and apportionment. See 701--Chapter 54 for allocation and apportionment of corporate income.

This rule is intended to implement Iowa Code sections 422.7, 422.8, 422.15, and 422.36.

ITEM 4. Amend rule 701--45.1(422) to read as follows:

701--45.1(422) General rule. An Iowa partnership, or limited partnership, or limited liability company required to file a return under the provisions of Iowa Code subsection 422.15(2) shall be a partnership, or limited partnership, or limited liability company required to file a partnership return for purposes of federal income tax. A partnership or limited liability company engaged in carrying on business in this state is an Iowa partnership or an Iowa limited liability company. Iowa follows the Treasury check-the-box regulation, 301.7701-3, for determination of the tax status of partnerships or limited liability companies including single-member limited liability companies.

This rule is intended to implement Iowa Code section 422.15.

ITEM 5. Amend subrule 52.1(5) by adding the following new unlettered paragraph to the end of the subrule:

For tax years beginning after 1996, Iowa recognizes the federal election to treat subsidiaries of a parent corporation that has elected S corporation status as "qualified subchapter S subsidiaries" (QSSSs). To the extent that for federal income tax purposes, the incomes and expenses of the QSSSs are combined with the parent's income and expenses, they must be combined for Iowa tax purposes.

ARC 7769A

REVENUE AND FINANCE DEPARTMENT[701]

Notice of Intended Action

Twenty-five interested persons, a governmental subdivision, an agency or association of 25 or more persons may demand an oral presentation hereon as provided in Iowa Code section 17A.4(1)"b."

Notice is also given to the public that the Administrative Rules Review Committee may, on its own motion or on written request by any individual or group, review this proposed action under section 17A.8(6) at a regular or special meeting where the public or interested persons may be heard.

Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code sections 421.14 and 422.68(1), the Iowa Department of Revenue and Finance hereby gives Notice of Intended Action to amend Chapter 40, "Determination of Net Income," and Chapter 41, "Determination of Taxable Income," Iowa Administrative Code.

The amendments specify how gains from sales or exchanges of real property and tangible personal property are taxed for Iowa individual income tax purposes. The amendments show which capital gains from the sales or exchanges of ownership interests in various types of Iowa business entities by nonresidents of Iowa are subject to Iowa income tax and which capital gains are not taxable to Iowa.

The amendments cover taxation for Iowa individual income tax purposes of capital gains received by a nonresident from the sale or exchange of a nonresident's ownership interest in a C or S corporation, a partnership, a limited liability company, or a sole proprietorship. The amendments also include information on the taxation of proceeds received by nonresidents from liquidations of corporations. The amendments describe the Iowa tax treatment of capital losses realized by nonresidents from the sale of ownership interests in Iowa business entities.

The amendments also show how capital gains and losses received by nonresidents from sales or exchanges of intangible personal property other than interests in business entities are taxed for Iowa individual income tax purposes.

The amendments define a person described as a "survivor" who is a person other than a surviving spouse. The amendments state that this survivor is eligible for the partial exclusion of pensions and other retirement benefits if this survivor had an insurable interest in an annuitant or pensioner who would have qualified for the partial exclusion of retirement benefits for the tax year on the basis of age or disability. The amendments provide much information on what constitutes an insurable interest in a pensioner or annuitant. A recent review of the statute for the partial pension or retirement income exclusion disclosed that although this survivor was eligible for the exclusion, this individual had been omitted from the rule.

The amendments revise the rule for federal estimated payments for purposes of the federal tax deduction to clarify how the estimated payments made in the tax year, including the payment made in January for the prior tax year, are to be allocated between married taxpayers when the taxpayers file separate Iowa returns or separately on the combined return form. In addition, the amendments clarify that self-employment tax paid in the tax year through federal estimated tax payments does not qualify for the Iowa deduction for federal income tax.

The amendments describe the rescission of the subrule and adoption of a replacement subrule for the Itemized Deduction Worksheet (Form 41-104) which is used to compute the itemized deductions allowable for Iowa individual income tax purposes for certain high-income individuals. The amendments specify that the medical deduction portion of the itemized deduction shown on the worksheet must be reduced by any health insurance premiums deducted in determining the net income for a taxpayer to prevent a possible double deduction for the health insurance premiums on the Iowa individual income tax return.

The proposed amendments will not necessitate additional expenditures by political subdivisions or agencies and entities which contract with political subdivisions.

The Department has determined that these proposed amendments may have an impact on small business. The Department has considered the factors listed in Iowa Code section 17A.31(4). The Department will issue a regulatory flexibility analysis as provided in Iowa Code sections 17A.31 to 17A.33 if a written request is filed by delivery or by mailing postmarked no later than February 3, 1998, to the Policy Section, Compliance Division, Iowa Department of Revenue and Finance, Hoover State Office Building, P.O. Box 10457, Des Moines, Iowa 50306. The request may be made by the Administrative Rules Review Committee, the Governor, a political subdivision, at least 25 persons who qualify as a small business under Iowa Code sections 17A.31 to 17A.33, or an organization of small businesses representing at least 25 persons which is registered with this agency under Iowa Code sections 17A.31 to 17A.33.

Any interested person may make written suggestions or comments on these proposed amendments on or before February 13, 1998. Such written comments should be directed to the Policy Section, Compliance Division, Iowa Department of Revenue and Finance, Hoover State Office Building, P.O. Box 10457, Des Moines, Iowa 50306.

Persons who want to orally convey their views should contact the Policy Section, Compliance Division, Iowa Department of Revenue and Finance, at (515)281-4250 or at the Department of Revenue and Finance offices on the fourth floor of the Hoover State Office Building.

Requests for a public hearing must be received by February 6, 1998.

These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code sections 422.7 and 422.9.

The following amendments are proposed.

ITEM 1. Amend subrule 40.16(8) to read as follows:

40.16(8) Gains or losses from sales or exchange exchanges of real property and tangible personal property by a nonresident of Iowa. If a nonresident realizes any gains or losses from sales or exchanges of real property or tangible personal property within the state of Iowa, such gains or losses are subject to the Iowa income tax and shall be reported to this state by the nonresident. Gains or losses attributable to Iowa will be determined as follows:

1. Gains or losses from sales or exchanges of real property located in this state are allocable to this state.

2. Capital gains and losses from sales or exchanges of tangible personal property are allocable to this state if the property had a situs in this state at the time of the sale.

3. Gains and losses from the sale of intangible personal property are allocable to this state if the taxpayer's commercial domicile is in this state.

In determining whether a short-term or long-term capital gain or a capital loss is involved in a sale or exchange, and determining the amount of a gain from the sale of real or tangible property in Iowa, the provisions of the Internal Revenue Code are to be followed.

ITEM 2. Amend rule 701--40.16(422) by adding the following new subrules:

40.16(9) Capital gains or losses from sales or exchanges of ownership interests in Iowa business entities by nonresidents of Iowa. Nonresidents of Iowa who sell or exchange ownership interests in various Iowa business entities will be subject to Iowa income tax on capital gains and capital losses from those transactions for different entities as described in the following paragraphs:

a. Capital gains from sales or exchanges of stock in C corporations and S corporations. When a nonresident of Iowa sells or exchanges stock in a C corporation or an S corporation, that shareholder is selling or exchanging the stock, which is intangible personal property. The capital gain received by a nonresident of Iowa from the sale or exchange of capital stock of a C corporation or an S corporation is taxable to the state of the personal domicile or residence of the owner of the capital stock unless the stock attains an independent business situs apart from the personal domicile of the individual who sold the capital stock. The stock may acquire an independent business situs in Iowa if the stock had been used as an integral part of some business activity occurring in Iowa in the year in which the sale or exchange of the stock had taken place. Whether the stock has attained an independent business status is determined on a factual basis.

For example, a situation where capital stock owned by a nonresident of Iowa was used as collateral to secure a loan to remodel a retail store in Iowa would meet the test for the stock being used as an integral part of some business activity in Iowa.

Assuming that the gain from the sale or exchange of stock is attributable to Iowa, the next step is to determine how much of the gain is attributable to Iowa. This is computed on the basis of the Iowa allocation and apportionment rules applicable to the separate business the stock has become an integral part of for the year in which the sale or exchange occurred. For example, if the business was subject to Iowa income tax on 40 percent of its income in the year of the sale or exchange, then 40 percent of the capital gain would be attributable or taxable by Iowa.

However, the fact that the gain from the sale or exchange of stock is taxable or partially taxable to Iowa does not mean that the dividends received by the nonresident in the year of sale is taxable to Iowa. Dividends from stock used in an Iowa specific business activity would not be taxable to Iowa except under special circumstances. An illustration of these special circumstances would be when the dividends are from capital stock from a business where the purchase and sale of stock constitutes a regular business in Iowa. In this situation the dividends would be taxable to Iowa. See subrule 701--40.16(5).

b. Capital gains from sales or exchanges of interests in partnerships. When a nonresident of Iowa sells or exchanges the individual's interest in a partnership, the nonresident is actually selling an intangible since the partnership can continue without the nonresident partner and the assets used by the partnership are legally owned by the partnership and an individual retains only an equitable interest in the assets of the partnership by virtue of the partner's ownership interest in the partnership. However, because of the unique attributes of partnerships, the owner's interest in a partnership is considered to be localized or "sourced" at the situs of the partnership's activities as a matter of law. Arizona Tractor Co. v. Arizona State Tax Com'n., 566 P.2d 1348, 1350 (Ariz. App. 1997); Iowa Code chapter 486 (unique attributes of a partnership defined). Therefore, if a partnership conducts all of its business in Iowa, 100 percent of the gain on the sale or exchange of a partnership interest would be attributable to Iowa. On the other hand, if the partnership conducts 100 percent of its business outside of Iowa, none of the gain would be attributable to Iowa for purposes of the Iowa income tax. In the situation where a partnership conducts business both in and out of Iowa, the capital gain from the sale or exchange of an interest in the partnership would be allocated or apportioned in and out of Iowa based upon the partnership's activities in and out of Iowa in the year of the sale or exchange.

Note that if a partnership is a publicly traded partnership and is taxed as a corporation for federal income tax purposes, any capital gains realized on the sale or exchange of a nonresident partner's interest in the partnership will receive the same tax treatment as the capital gain from the sale or exchange of an interest in a C corporation or an S corporation as specified in paragraph "a" of this subrule.

c. Capital gains from sales or exchanges of sole proprietorships. When a nonresident sells or exchanges the individual's interest in a sole proprietorship, the nonresident is actually selling or exchanging tangible and intangible personal property used in this business because the sole proprietor is the legal and equitable owner of all such assets. Therefore, the general source or situs rules governing the gain from the sale or exchange of tangible property and intangible property by a nonresident individual control. Thus, if the sole proprietorship is located in Iowa, the gain from the sale or exchange of the proprietorship by a nonresident would be taxable to Iowa.

d. Capital gains from sales or exchanges of interests in limited liability companies. Limited liability companies are hybrid business entities containing elements of both a partnership and a corporation. If a limited liability company properly elected to file or would have been required to file a federal partnership tax return, a capital gain from the sale or exchange of an ownership interest in the limited liability company by a nonresident member of the company would be taxable to Iowa to the same extent as if the individual was selling a similar interest in a partnership as described in paragraph "c" of this subrule. However, if the limited liability company properly elected or would have been required to file a federal corporation tax return, a nonresident member who sells or exchanges an ownership interest in the limited liability company would be treated the same as if the nonresident was selling a similar interest in a C corporation or an S corporation as described in paragraph "a" of this subrule.

e. Taxation of corporate liquidations. As a matter of Iowa law, the proceeds from corporate liquidating distributions are not considered to be the proceeds from the sale or exchange of corporate stock. Rather, such proceeds represent the transfer back to the shareholder of that shareholder's pro-rata share of the actual assets of the corporation in which each shareholder held only an equitable ownership interest prior to the dissolution. Lynch v. State Board of Assessment and Review, 228 Iowa 1000, 1003-1004, 291 N.W. 161 (1940). The amount of such gain is calculated by subtracting the distribution realized from the shareholder's basis in the stock. Id. Thus, any gain realized by the shareholder upon such distribution is considered a capital gain from a sale or exchange of the assets by the shareholder for purposes of sourcing the shareholder's liquidating distribution gain. Consequently, the general source or situs rules in subrule 40.16(8) governing the taxation of the sale or exchange of tangible personal property by a nonresident and subrule 40.16(10) governing the sale or exchange of intangible personal property by a nonresident control.

f. Capital losses realized by a nonresident of Iowa from the sale or exchange of an ownership interest in an Iowa business entity. In a situation where a nonresident of Iowa sells the ownership interest in an Iowa business entity and has a capital loss from the transaction, the nonresident can claim the loss on the Iowa income tax return under the same circumstances that a capital gain would have been reported as described in paragraphs "a" through "e" of this subrule. The federal income tax provisions for netting Iowa source capital gains and losses are applicable as well as the federal provisions for limiting the net capital loss in the tax year to $3,000, with the carryover of the portion of net capital losses that exceed $3,000.

40.16(10) Capital gains and losses from sales or exchanges of intangible personal property other than ownership interests in business entities. Capital gains and losses realized by a nonresident of Iowa from the sale or exchange of intangible personal property (other than interests in business entities) are taxable to Iowa if the intangible property was an integral part of some business activity occurring regularly in Iowa prior to the sale or exchange. In the case of an intangible asset which was an integral part of a business activity of a business entity occurring regularly within and without Iowa, a capital gain or loss from the sale or exchange of the intangible asset by a nonresident of Iowa would be reported to Iowa in the ratio of the Iowa business activity to the total business activity for the year of the sale.

ITEM 3. Amend rule 701--40.47(422) as follows:

701--40.47(422) Partial exclusion of pensions and other retirement benefits for disabled individuals, individuals who are 55 years of age or older, and surviving spouses, and survivors. For tax years beginning on or after January 1, 1995, an individual who is disabled, is 55 years of age or older, or is a surviving spouse, or is a survivor with an insurable interest in an individual who would have qualified for the exclusion is eligible for a partial exclusion of retirement benefits received in the tax year.

"Insurable interest" is a term used in life insurance which also applies to this rule and is defined to be "such an interest in the life of the person insured, arising from the relations of the party obtaining the insurance, either as credit of or surety for the assured, or from the ties of blood or marriage to him, as would justify a reasonable expectation of advantage or benefit from the continuance of his life." Warnock v. Davis, 104 U.S. 775, 779, 26 L.Ed. 924; Connecticut Mut. Life Ins. Co. v. Luchs, 2 S.Ct. 949, 952, 108 U.S. 498, 27 L.Ed. 800; Appeal of Corson, 6 A. 213, 215, 113 Pa.438, 57 Am. Rep. 479; Adams' Adm'r v. Reed, Ky., 36 S.W. 568, 570; Trinity College v. Travelers' Co., 18 S.E. 175, 176, 113 N.C. 244, 22 L.R.A. 291: Opitz v. Karel, 95 N.W. 948, 951, 118 Wis. 527, 62 L.R.A. 982. It is not necessary that the expectation of advantage or profit should always be capable of pecuniary estimation, for a parent has an insurable interest in the life of his child, and a child in the life of his parent, a husband in the life of his wife, and a wife in the life of her husband. The natural affection in cases of this kind is considered as more powerful, as operating the more efficaciously, to protect the life of the insured than any other consideration, but in all cases there must be a reasonable ground, founded on relations to each other, either pecuniary or of blood or affinity, to expect some benefit or advantage from the continuance of the life of the assured. Warnock v. Davis, 104 U.S. 775, 26 L.Ed. 924; Appeal of Corson, 6 A. 213, 215, 113 Pa. 438, 57 Am. Rep. 479; Connecticut Mut. Life Ins. Co. v. Luchs, 2 S.Ct. 949, 952, 108 U.S. 498, 27 L.Ed. 800.

For purposes of this rule, the term "insurable interest" will be considered to apply to a beneficiary receiving retirement benefits due to the death of a pensioner or annuitant under the same circumstances as if the beneficiary were receiving life insurance benefits as a result of the death of the pensioner or annuitant.

For purposes of this rule, the term "survivor" is a person other than the surviving spouse of an annuitant or pensioner who is receiving the annuity or pension benefits because the person was a beneficiary of the pensioner or annuitant at the time of death of the pensioner or annuitant. In addition, in order for this person to qualify for the partial exclusion of pensions or retirement benefits, this survivor must have had an insurable interest in the pensioner or annuitant at the time of death of the annuitant or pensioner.

A survivor other than the surviving spouse will be considered to have an insurable interest in the pensioner or annuitant if the survivor is a son, daughter, mother, or father of the annuitant or pensioner. The relationship of these individuals to the pensioner or annuitant is considered to be so close that no separate pecuniary or monetary interest between the pensioner or annuitant and any of these relatives must be established.

A survivor may include relatives of the pensioner or annuitant other than those relatives that were mentioned above. However, before any of these relatives can be considered to be a survivor for purposes of this rule, the relative must have had some pecuniary interest in the continuation of the life of the pensioner or annuitant. That is, the relative must establish a relationship with the pensioner or annuitant that shows there was a reasonable expectation of an advantage or benefit which the person would have received with the continuance of the life of the pensioner or annuitant.

The fact that a niece of the pensioner or annuitant was named beneficiary of an uncle's pension where the uncle had no closer relatives does not in itself establish that the niece had an insurable interest in the pension benefits, if the niece was not receiving monetary benefits or the niece did not have some special relationship to the uncle at the time of the uncle's death.

If a grandson was receiving college tuition regularly from his grandfather and received the grandfather's pension as a beneficiary of the grandfather after the grandfather's death, the grandson would be deemed to have an insurable interest in the benefits and would be eligible for the partial retirement benefit exclusion.

A person who is not related to the pensioner or annuitant, such as a partner in a business or a creditor, may have an insurable interest in the pensioner or annuitant. However, the burden of proof is on a nonrelated person to show that the person had an insurable interest in the pensioner or the annuitant at the time of death of the pensioner or annuitant.

There are numerous court cases which deal with whether a person had established an insurable interest in the life of an individual that was insured. These cases may be used as a guideline to determine whether or not a person receiving a pension or annuity due to the death of an annuitant or pensioner had an insurable interest in the annuitant or pensioner at the time of death of the pensioner or annuitant. Thus, if a person would have met criteria for an insurable interest for purposes of an interest in a person's life insurance policy, the person would also be considered to be qualified for an insurable interest in a pensioner or annuitant.

An eligible individual filing a separate state return can exclude up to a maximum of $3,000 in retirement benefits. A husband and wife who file a joint state return can exclude up to a maximum of $6,000 in retirement benefits. Retirement benefits subject to the exclusion include, but are not limited to: benefits from defined benefit or defined contribution pension and annuity plans, benefits from annuities, incomes from individual retirement accounts, benefits from pension or annuity plans contributed by an employer or maintained or contributed by a self-employed person and benefits and earnings from deferred compensation plans. However, the exclusion does not apply to social security benefits. A surviving spouse who is not disabled or is not 55 years of age or older can only exclude retirement benefits received as a result of the death of the other spouse and on the basis that the deceased spouse would have been eligible for the exclusion in the tax year. In order for a survivor other than the surviving spouse to qualify for the partial exclusion of retirement benefits, the survivor must have received the retirement benefits as a result of the death of a pensioner or annuitant who would have qualified for the exclusion in the tax year on the basis of age or disability. In addition, the survivor other than the surviving spouse would have had to have an insurable interest in the pensioner or annuitant at the time of the death of the pensioner or annuitant.

For purposes of this rule, a disabled individual is a person who is receiving benefits as a result of retirement from employment or self-employment due to disability. In addition, a person is considered to be a disabled individual if the individual is determined to be disabled in accordance with criteria established by the Social Security Administration or other federal or state governmental agency.

Note that the pension or other retirement benefits that are excluded from taxation for certain individuals are to be considered as a part of net income for purposes of determining whether or not a particular individual's income is low enough to exempt that taxpayer from tax. In addition, the pension or other retirement benefits that are excluded from taxation for certain individuals are to be considered as a part of net income for the alternative tax computation, which is available to all taxpayers except those taxpayers filing as single individuals.

Finally, the pension or other retirement benefits are to be considered as a part of net income for individuals using the single filing status whose tax liabilities are limited so the liabilities cannot reduce the person's net income plus exempt benefits below $9,000.

This rule is intended to implement Iowa Code sections 422.5 and 422.7.

ITEM 4. Amend rule 701--41.3(422), paragraph "2," as follows:

2. Tax paid at any time during the taxable year on a declaration filing of federal estimated tax or on any amendment to such declaration filing. Where a husband and wife file separately separate Iowa returns or separately on a combined Iowa return, the estimate of federal income federal estimated tax payments made in the tax year shall be prorated between the spouses by the ratio of each spouse's income not subject to withholding to the total income not subject to withholding of both spouses, including the federal estimated tax payment made in January of the tax year which was made for the prior tax year. If a declaration of an estimated tax payment or portion of the payment thereof is made for self-employment tax, then the spouse that has earned the self-employment income shall deduct that report the amount of estimated tax designated as self-employment tax. The federal tax deduction for the tax year does not include the self-employment tax paid through the federal estimated pay-ments made in the tax year. However, one-half of the self-employment tax paid in the tax year is deductible in computing federal adjusted gross income pursuant to Section 164(f) of the Internal Revenue Code so this self-employment tax is also deductible in computing net income.

ITEM 5. Rescind subrule 41.11(1) and adopt the following new subrule in lieu thereof:

41.11(1) Itemized deduction worksheet (Form 41-104). High-income taxpayers who are itemizing deductions on the Iowa income tax return and whose itemized deductions for federal income tax purposes were subject to reduction because their federal adjusted gross incomes exceeded certain amounts (the amounts for 1996 were $117,950 for all taxpayers except married taxpayers who filed separate federal returns and $58,975 for married individuals who filed separate federal returns) must complete Itemized Deduction Worksheet (Form 41-104) to determine the amount of federal itemized deductions that can be claimed on the Iowa income tax return. This worksheet must also be used to compute the itemized deductions allowable on the Iowa return for taxpayers who claimed the standard deduction on their federal individual income tax return, but are itemizing deductions for Iowa income tax purposes and whose deductions would have been subject to reduction, if they had itemized deductions on their federal income tax return. These taxpayers must complete the worksheet (Form 41-104) as if they had itemized deductions on their federal returns. Generally, the itemized deductions allowed on the federal income tax return for high-income taxpayers are also allowed for Iowa individual income tax purposes, except that the Iowa income tax that was allowable as a deduction on the federal Schedule A is not allowed as an Iowa itemized deduction. In addition, the deduction for medical expenses claimed as an itemized deduction on the federal income tax return should be reduced by the amount of health insurance premiums claimed as a deduction on line 18 of the IA 1040. The line references on Form 41-104 are to the federal 1040 and to the federal Schedule A for 1996 and to the IA 1040 for the 1996 tax year. Similar line references will apply on Form 41-104 and to IA 1040 for any later tax year when the taxpayer's federal itemized deductions were subject to reduction because the taxpayer's federal adjusted gross income exceeded the threshold amount for that year and the taxpayer itemized deductions on the Iowa income tax return. Note that if a taxpayer's itemized deductions are less than the Iowa standard deduction amount, the taxpayer may elect to claim the Iowa standard deduction.

Form 41-104 follows:

1. Enter the allowable federal itemized deductions as shown on line 34 of the 1040.

1. ______
2. Add the amounts on federal Schedule A, lines *4, 13, 19 plus any gambling losses included on line 27 and enter the total here.
2. ______
3. Subtract line 2 amount from line 1 amount.
3. ______
4. Add the amounts on federal Schedule A, lines *4, 9, 14, 18, 19, 26, and 27 and enter here.
4. ______
5. Subtract line 2 amount from line 4 amount.
5. ______
6. Divide line 3 by line 5 and enter percentage here.
6. %
7. Enter the amount of Iowa income tax that is included in line 5 of the federal Schedule A.
7. ______
8. Multiply line 7 by the percentage on line 6.
8. ______
9. Subtract line 8 from line 1. Enter this amount here and on line 39 of the IA 1040.
9. ______

* The deduction for medical expenses from line 4 of federal Schedule A must be reduced by the amount of any health insurance premiums that were deducted on line 18 of Form IA 1040 in computing the taxpayer's net income for the tax year.

NOTICE--USURY

In accordance with the provisions of Iowa Code section 535.2, subsection 3, paragraph "a," the Superintendent of Banking has determined that the maximum lawful rate of interest shall be:

December 1, 1996 -- December 31, 1996 8.50%

January 1, 1997 -- January 31, 1997 8.25%

February 1, 1997 -- February 28, 1997 8.25%

March 1, 1997 -- March 31, 1997 8.50%

April 1, 1997 -- April 30, 1997 8.50%

May 1, 1997 -- May 31, 1997 8.75%

June 1, 1997 -- June 30, 1997 9.00%

July 1, 1997 -- July 31, 1997 8.75%

August 1, 1997 -- August 31, 1997 8.50%

September 1, 1997 -- September 30, 1997 8.25%

October 1, 1997 -- October 31, 1997 8.25%

November 1, 1997 -- November 30, 1997 8.25%

December 1, 1997 -- December 31, 1997 8.00%

January 1, 1998 -- January 31, 1998 8.00%

FILED EMERGENCY

ARC 7777A

LABOR SERVICES DIVISION[875]

Adopted and Filed Emergency After Notice

Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code sections 17A.3, 89.5, and 252J.8, the Labor Commissioner adopts rules to rescind 347--Chapters 41, 42, and 49; adopt 875--Chapters 200 to 203; and transfer 347--Chapters 43 to 48 to 875-- Chapters 204 to 209, Iowa Administrative Code.

These amendments relating to boilers and pressure vessels implement Iowa Code sections 89.3, 89.5, and 252J.8 and 1997 Iowa Acts, House File 399, section 1; reorganize and renumber certain rules; delete, amend, and adopt numerous definitions; require applicants for special inspector commissions to complete, sign and submit the application form available from the division of labor; make technical and editing corrections; change references to match updated and current standards; allow disciplinary action against special inspectors based upon their failure to maintain a valid work card from the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors and for obtaining or retaining, or attempting to obtain or retain, a special inspector's commission through the use of fraud or deceit; change the fee schedule; require special inspectors to provide to the insured a copy of the inspection report; require special inspectors to list all adverse conditions and requirements on their reports; and adopt updated national requirements for new installations of boilers and pressure vessels.

Notice of Intended Action was published in the Iowa Administrative Bulletin on November 19, 1997, as ARC 7666A.

A public hearing was scheduled for December 11, 1997. No one attended the hearing. No written comments were received regarding the Notice of Intended Action.

These amendments are identical to the Notice of Intended Action, with three exceptions. In subrule 201.1(3), a comma was added to make a reference correct. In Items 5 and 6, the following sentence was inserted for clarification, "Unfired steam boilers shall not be constructed under the provisions of Section VIII."

Pursuant to Iowa Code section 17A.5(2)"b"(2) and (3), these amendments became effective on January 1, 1998. The Commissioner finds that these amendments confer a benefit on the public by permitting the installation of newly designed equipment in this state. Additionally, the amendments set forth procedures to be followed for commissioned inspectors to avoid behavior which could result in actions being taken against them.

These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code chapters 89 and 252J and 1997 Iowa Acts, House File 399.

These amendments became effective January 1, 1998.

The following amendments are adopted.

ITEM 1. Rescind 347-Chapter 41 and adopt new 875-Chapter 200 in lieu thereof:

CHAPTER 200

GENERAL

875--200.1(89) Purpose. These rules institute administrative and operational procedures for implementation of Iowa Code chapter 89.

875--200.2(89,252J) Definitions. The definitions in this chapter, to the extent they do not conflict with the definitions contained in Iowa Code chapter 89, shall be applicable to the rules contained in 875--Chapters 200 to 209.

"Alteration" means a change in a boiler or pressure vessel that substantially alters the original design requiring consideration of the effect of the change on the original design. It is not intended that the addition of nozzles smaller than an unreinforced opening size will be considered an alteration.

"ANSI/API510" means the Recommended Practice for Inspection, Repair, and Rating of Pressure Vessels in Petroleum Refining Service as published by the American Petroleum Institute, Inspection Code, ANSI/API510-1992 with 1994 addendum.

"ANSI/ASME CSD-1" means Control and Safety Devices for Automatically-Fired Boilers.

"ASME" means the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.

"Authorized inspector" means a special inspector or an inspector of boilers and pressure vessels employed by the division.

"BSI" means British Standards Institute.

"Certificate of noncompliance" means a certificate of noncompliance with child support payment obligations issued by the child support recovery unit, department of human services, pursuant to Iowa Code chapter 252J.

"CNS" means Canadian National Standards.

"Construction or installation code" means the applicable recognized national or international standard for construction or installation in effect at the time of installation such as American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME), German Institute of Standards (DIN), British Standards Institute (BSI), Japanese Industrial Standards (JIS) or Canadian National Standards (CNS).

"DIN" means German Institute of Standards.

"Division" means the division of labor services, unless another meaning is clear from the context.

"Electric boilers" means a power boiler, heating boiler, high or low temperature water boiler in which the source of heat is electricity.

"External inspection" means as complete an examination as can be reasonably made of the external surfaces and safety devices while the boiler or pressure vessel is in operation.

"High temperature water boiler" means a water boiler intended for operations at pressures in excess of 160 psig or temperatures in excess of 250 degrees F.

"Hot water heating boiler" means a boiler in which no steam is generated, from which hot water is circulated for heating purposes and then returned to the boiler, and which operates at a pressure not exceeding 160 psig or a temperature of 250 degrees F at the boiler outlet.

"Hot water supply boiler" means a boiler completely filled with water that furnishes hot water to be used externally to itself at pressures not exceeding 160 psig or at temperatures not exceeding 250 degrees F.

"Internal inspection" means as complete an examination as can be reasonably made of the internal and external surfaces of a boiler or pressure vessel while it is shut down and while manhole plates, handhole plates or other inspection opening closures are removed as required by the inspector.

"ISO" means International Standards Organization.

"JIS" means Japanese Industrial Standards.

"Labor commissioner" means the labor commissioner or the commissioner's designee.

"Lap seam crack" means a crack found in lap seams, extending parallel to the longitudinal joint and located either between or adjacent to rivet holes.

"Major repair" means a repair which affects or will affect the strength of a boiler or pressure vessel.

"National Board" means the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors, 1055 Crupper Avenue, Columbus, Ohio 43229, whose membership is composed of the chief inspectors of jurisdictions who are charged with the enforcement of the provisions of local boiler codes.

"National Board Inspection Code" means the Manual for Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors (ANSI/NB 23) published by the National Board. Copies of the code may be obtained from the National Board.

"New boiler installations" means all boilers constructed, installed and placed in operation after July 1, 1959, and all hot water supply boilers installed and placed in operation after July 1, 1983.

"Nonstandard object" means an object or related equipment that has not been designed and manufactured to a recognized national or international standard such as ASME, DIN, BSI, JIS or CNS, and has not been inspected by an inspector commissioned by the National Board and registered with the National Board.

"Nuclear power plant components" means items constructed in accordance with the rules of Section III, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, for use in, or containment of, portions of a nuclear power system. A nuclear power system is that system which serves the purpose of producing and controlling the output of thermal energy from nuclear fuel and those associated systems essential to the functions and overall safety of the nuclear power system.

"Object" means a boiler or pressure vessel.

"Pressure vessel" means a vessel in which pressure is obtained from an external source, or by the application of heat from an indirect or direct source.

"Process steam generator" means a vessel or system of vessels comprised of one or more drums and one or more heat exchange surfaces as used in waste heat or heat recovery type steam boilers.

"Psig" means pounds per square inch gage.

"Reinstalled boiler or pressure vessel" means an object removed from its original setting and reinstalled at the same location or at a new location.

"Relief valve" means an automatic pressure-relieving device actuated by a static pressure upstream of the valve which opens further with the increase in pressure over the opening pressure. It is used primarily for liquid service.

"Repair" means work necessary to return a boiler or pressure vessel to a safe operating condition.

"Rupture disk device" means a nonreclosing pressure-relief device actuated by inlet static pressure and designed to function by the bursting of a pressure-containing disk.

"Safety appliance" shall include, but not be limited to:

1. Rupture disk device;

2. Safety relief valve;

3. Safety valve;

4. Temperature limit control;

5. Pressure limit control;

6. Gas switch;

7. Air switch; or

8. Any major gas train control.

"Safety relief valve" means an automatic, pressure-actuated relieving device suitable for use as a safety or relief valve, depending on application.

"Safety valve" means an automatic, pressure-relieving device actuated by the static pressure upstream of the valve and characterized by full opening pop action. It is used for gas or vapor service.

"Special inspection" means an inspection which is not required by Iowa Code chapter 89.

"Temperature/pressure relief valve" means a valve set to relieve at a designated temperature and pressure.

"Unfired steam boiler" means a vessel or system of vessels intended for operation at a pressure in excess of 15 psig for the purpose of producing and controlling an output of thermal energy.

"Water heater supply boiler" means a closed vessel in which water is heated by combustion of fuels, electricity or any other source and withdrawn for use external to the system at pressure not exceeding 160 psig and shall include all controls and devices necessary to prevent water temperatures from exceeding 210 degrees F.

875--200.3(89) Publications available for review. Pursuant to Iowa Code section 89.5, subsection 4, the standards, codes, and publications adopted by reference in these rules are available for review in the office of the Division of Labor Services, 1000 East Grand Avenue, Des Moines, Iowa.

875--200.4(89) Fees.

200.4(1) Special inspector certification fee. A $30 fee shall be paid annually to the commissioner to obtain a special inspector certification pursuant to Iowa Code section 89.7, subsection 1.

200.4(2) Certificate fee. A $15 fee shall be paid for each one-year certificate and a $25 fee shall be paid for each two-year certificate.

200.4(3) Fees for inspection. An inspection fee for each object inspected by a division inspector shall be paid by the appropriate party as follows:

a. A $20 fee for each water heater supply boiler.

b. A $35 fee for each boiler, other than a water heater supply boiler, having a working pressure to and including 70 pounds per square inch.

c. A $40 fee for each boiler, other than a water heater supply boiler, having a working pressure in excess of 70 pounds to and including 150 pounds per square inch.

d. A $60 fee for each boiler, other than a water heater supply boiler, having a working pressure in excess of 150 pounds to and including 450 pounds per square inch or generating between 20,000 and 100,000 pounds of steam per hour.

e. A $100 fee for each boiler, other than a water heater supply boiler, having a working pressure in excess of 450 pounds per square inch and generating in excess of 100,000 pounds of steam per hour.

f. A $20 fee for each pressure vessel, such as steam stills, tanks, jacket kettles, sterilizers and all other reservoirs having a working pressure from 15 pounds to and including 70 pounds per square inch.

g. A $23 fee for each pressure vessel, such as steam stills, tanks, jacket kettles, sterilizers and all other reservoirs having a working pressure from 71 pounds to and including 150 pounds per square inch.

h. A $25 fee for each pressure vessel, such as steam stills, tanks, jacket kettles, sterilizers and all other reservoirs having a working pressure from 150 pounds to and including 450 pounds per square inch.

i. A $28 fee for each pressure vessel, such as steam stills, tanks, jacket kettles, sterilizers and all other reservoirs having a working pressure in excess of 450 pounds per square inch.

j. In addition to the applicable object's inspection fee, if the division cannot follow normal practice of scheduling inspections in a cost-effective manner due to a request by an owner or user for a customized schedule, or due to a failure of any special inspector to comply with applicable laws or rules, travel expenses may be charged at the discretion of the division.

k. Inspections and code qualification surveys made by the commissioner at the request of a boiler or tank manufacturer shall be charged at a rate set by the commissioner not to exceed the rate currently charged by the various insurance companies for performing a similar service. This charge shall not void the regular fee for inspection or certification when the boiler or tank is installed.

l. If a boiler or pressure vessel has to be reinspected through no fault of the division, there shall be another inspection fee as specified above. However, there shall be no fee charged for the first scheduled reinspection to verify that ordered repairs have been made.

m. If the division is required to inspect a boiler or pressure vessel due to the failure of a special inspector to comply with any applicable law or rules, the insurance company which employs the special inspector shall be charged $100 per inspection, plus travel expenses as described in subrule 200.4(3), paragraph "j."

200.4(4) Fees for attempted inspections. A $20 fee shall be charged for each attempt by a division inspector to conduct an inspection which is not completed through no fault of the division.

875-200.5(89) Quality reviews, surveys and audits.

200.5(1) An entity that manufactures or repairs boilers, pressure vessels or related equipment may request quality reviews, surveys or audits from certifying organizations such as the ASME or the National Board. The division is authorized to conduct the quality reviews, surveys or audits. If the division performs the service, the manufacturer or repairer shall pay all applicable expenses as specified in 200.4(3), paragraph "j."

200.5(2) Quality reviews, surveys and audits for certification to the National Board or ASME standards shall be conducted only by a person or organization designated by the labor commissioner. Any person or organization seeking this designation on behalf of the division shall provide documented evidence of training, examination, experience, and certification for the type of reviews, surveys and audits to be performed. The labor commissioner shall have final authority to determine qualifications and designations.

a. Assessing quality programs. The division recognizes the ASME and the National Board as qualified designees for conducting quality reviews, surveys and audits which lead to ASME or National Board program certification.

b. ISO 9000 assessments. The division recognizes the ASME and the National Board as acceptable ISO 9000 registrars of quality systems for boilers and pressure vessels and the related pressure-technology equipment industry, and to certify auditors and lead auditors to the requirements of ISO 10011-2 1991(E), Annex A, for conducting ISO 9000 assessments for the boiler, pressure vessel, and related pressure-technology equipment industry.

These rules are intended to implement Iowa Code section 84A.2 and chapter 89.

ITEM 2. Rescind 347-Chapter 42 and adopt new 875--Chapter 201 in lieu thereof:

CHAPTER 201

INSPECTIONS AND CERTIFICATES

875--201.1(89) Inspections.

201.1(1) General. All boilers and pressure vessels covered by Iowa Code chapter 89 shall be inspected by a division inspector or special inspector within a 60-day period prior to the expiration date of an operating certificate. Modification of this period will be permitted only upon written application showing just cause for waiver of the 60-day period. Special inspections may be conducted at any time mutually agreed to by the division and the object's owner or user.

201.1(2) Inspections conducted by special inspectors. Special inspectors shall leave a copy of the completed report with the insured at the time of the inspection and shall submit reports to the division within 30 days of the inspection. The reports shall list all adverse conditions and requirements, if any. If the special inspector has not notified the division of the inspection results within 30 days of the expiration of an operating certificate, the division may conduct the inspection. If the division inspects a boiler or pressure vessel due to the failure of a special inspector to notify the division of the inspection results, the specified fees in 875--subrule 200.4(3), paragraph "m," shall be paid by the insurance company which employs the special inspector.

201.1(3) Type of inspection. The inspection shall be an internal inspection when required; otherwise, it shall be as complete an external inspection as possible. An internal inspection of an unfired steam pressure vessel operating in excess of 15 pounds per square inch may be required by the commissioner when an inspector observes any deviation from these rules, Iowa Code chapter 89, or the construction or installation code, or the National Board Inspection Code. Conditions including, but not limited to, the following may also be the basis for an internal inspection.

1. Visible metal or insulation discoloration due to excessive heat.

2. Visible distortion of any part of the pressure vessel.

3. Visible leakage from any pressure-containing boundary.

4. Any operating records or verbal reports of a vessel being subjected to pressure above the nameplate rating or temperature above or below the nameplate design temperature.

5. A suspected or known history of internal corrosion or erosion.

6. Evidence or knowledge of a vessel having been subjected to external heat from a resulting fire.

7. A welded repair not documented as required.

8. Personal injury, property damage accident, or malfunction affecting the pressure vessel's integrity.

875--201.2(89) Certificate. A certificate to operate shall not be issued until the boiler or pressure vessel complies with the applicable rules and all fees have been paid.

875--201.3(89) Preinspection owner or user preparation.

201.3(1) Preparation of objects. Each owner or user shall ensure that each object covered by Iowa Code chapter 89 is prepared for inspection pursuant to this rule.

201.3(2) Permit-required confined spaces (29 CFR 1910.146 in effect on July 1, 1997) and control of hazardous energy (lock-out/tag-out) (29 CFR 1910.147 in effect on July 1, 1997) compliance.

a. It is the responsibility of the owner or user to assess all objects for compliance with the confined space and lock-out/tag-out standards. If an object is a non-permit-required confined space or a permit-required confined space as defined by 29 CFR 1910.146, the owner or user must comply with all the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.146 and 1910.147 in preparing the object for inspection.

b. It is the duty of the owner or user to inform any inspector of the owner's or user's confined space policy and standards, supply to the inspector all information necessary to assess whether the confined space is safe for entry, and ensure all inspectors comply with the policy and Iowa occupational safety and health standards for confined space entry.

c. If the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.146 and 1910.147 are not met, the inspector shall not enter the space or, if there is a breach of the policy or standard, the inspection process shall cease until the space is reassessed and determined to be safe. It is the right of an inspector to verify any of the information supplied. No inspector shall violate the owner's or user's confined space or lock-out/tag-out policies in making an inspection.

d. The owner or user shall have all objects locked-out or tagged-out prior to entry for inspection or testing.

201.3(3) Hydrostatic tests. The owner or user shall prepare for and apply a hydrostatic test, whenever necessary, on the date specified by the division's inspector, which date shall be not less than seven days after the date of notification.

201.3(4) Boilers. A boiler shall be prepared for internal inspection in the following manner:

a. Water shall be drawn off and the boiler washed thoroughly.

b. Manhole and handhole plates, washout plugs and inspection plugs in water columns shall be removed as required by the inspector. The furnace and combustion chambers shall be thoroughly cooled and cleaned.

c. All grates of internally fired boilers shall be removed.

d. Brickwork shall be removed as required by the inspector in order to determine the condition of the boiler, header, furnace, supports or other parts.

e. If it is found that steam or hot water is leaking into a boiler or unfired pressure vessel when opened for inspection, the source of the leakage shall be disconnected, if necessary, to eliminate the steam or hot water from the boiler or pressure vessel to be inspected.

f. Before opening the manhole or handhole plates and entering any parts of the steam-generating unit connected to the common header with other boilers, the nonreturn and steam stop valves must be closed, tagged, and locked. Drain valves between the two valves must be opened. Blowoff lines, where practicable, shall be disconnected between pressure parts and valves. All drains and vent lines shall be opened.

g. Low water fuel cutoff controls shall be opened or removed to allow for visual inspection.

201.3(5) Pressure vessels. The extent of inspection preparation for a pressure vessel will vary. If the inspection is to be external only, advance preparation is not required other than to afford reasonable access to the vessel. For combined internal and external inspections of small vessels of simple construction handling air, steam, nontoxic or nonexplosive gases or vapors, minor preparation is required including isolating the vessel from its source of pressure, affording reasonable means of access and removing manhole plates and inspection opening closures. In other cases, preparation shall include draining, venting and purging the vessel to free toxic, explosive or other harmful gases or vapors, providing suitable safeguards to prevent leakage or accidental inflow of harmful substances into the vessel, removing manhole plates and inspection opening closures, cooling and cleaning the interior of the vessel and removing the internal fittings and appurtenances to permit satisfactory inspection of the interior of the vessel.

201.3(6) Removal of covering or brickwork to permit inspection. If the object is jacketed so that the longitudinal seams of shells, drums, or domes cannot be seen, sufficient jacketing, setting wall, or other form of casing or housing shall be removed to permit reasonable inspection of the seams and so that the size of rivets, pitch of the rivets, and other data necessary to determine the safety of the object may be obtained, providing the information cannot be determined by other means. Brickwork shall be removed as required by the inspector in order to determine the condition of the boiler, header, furnace, supports or other parts.

201.3(7) Improper preparation for inspection. If an object has not been properly prepared for an internal inspection, or if the owner or user fails to comply with the requirements for hydrostatic tests as set forth in this chapter, the inspector may decline to make the inspection or test, and the inspection certificate shall be withheld until the owner or user complies with the requirements.

These rules are intended to implement Iowa Code chapter 89 and 1997 Iowa Acts, House File 399.

ITEM 3. Adopt new 875-Chapter 202 as follows:

CHAPTER 202

SPECIAL INSPECTORS

875-202.1(89) Commission. A special inspector shall obtain a commission from the labor commissioner. A commission shall be granted only to those persons holding a commission from the National Board. The commission is for no more than one year and ceases when the special inspector leaves employment with the insurance company, or when the commission is suspended or revoked by the labor commissioner. A person applying for a commission shall complete, sign, and submit to the division with the required fee the form entitled "Special Inspector Commission Application Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspector" provided by the division. The special inspector shall notify the division at the time any of the information on the form or attachments changes. Additionally, the applicant shall submit a copy of the applicant's National Board Inspectors Commission with an initial application and a copy of the applicant's current National Board work card with each application. Each commission shall expire no later than June 30 of each year.

875-202.2(89) Denials. The labor commissioner may refuse to issue or renew a special inspector's commission for failure to complete an application package or for any reason listed in rules 202.4(89) to 202.6(89).

875-202.3(89) Investigations. Investigations shall take place at the time and in the places the labor commissioner directs. The labor commissioner may investigate for any reasonable cause. The labor commissioner may conduct interviews and utilize other reasonable investigatory techniques. Investigations may be conducted without prior notice.

875-202.4(89) Reasons for probation. The labor commissioner may issue a notice of commission probation when an investigation reasonably reveals the special inspector filed inaccurate reports.

875-202.5(89,252J) Reasons for suspension. The labor commissioner may issue a notice of commission suspension when an investigation reasonably reveals the following:

1. The special inspector failed to submit and report inspections on a timely basis;

2. The special inspector abused special inspector's authority;

3. The special inspector misrepresented self as a state inspector or a state employee;

4. The special inspector used commission authority for inappropriate personal gain;

5. The special inspector failed to follow the division's rules for inspection of object repairs, alterations, construction, installation, or in-service inspection;

6. The special inspector committed numerous violations as described in rule 202.4(89);

7. The special inspector used fraud or deception to obtain or retain, or attempt to obtain or retain, a special inspector commission whether for one's self or another;

8. The National Board revoked or suspended the special inspector's work card;

9. The division received a certificate of noncompliance; or

10. The special inspector failed to take appropriate disciplinary actions against a subordinate special inspector who has committed repeated acts or omissions listed in paragraphs "1" to "8" of this rule.

875-202.6(89,252J) Reasons for revocation. The labor commissioner may issue a notice of revocation of a special inspector's commission when an investigation reveals any of the following:

1. The special inspector filed a misleading, false or fraudulent report;

2. The special inspector failed to perform a required inspection;

3. The special inspector failed to file a report or filed a report which was not in accordance with the provisions of applicable standards;

4. The special inspector failed to notify the division in writing of any accident involving an object;

5. The special inspector committed repeated violations as described in rule 202.5(89,252J);

6. The special inspector used fraud or deception to obtain or retain, or attempt to obtain or retain, a special inspector commission whether for one's self or another;

7. The special inspector instructed, ordered, or otherwise encouraged a subordinate special inspector to perform the acts or omissions listed in paragraphs "1" to "6" of this rule;

8. The National Board revoked or suspended the special inspector's work card; or

9. The division received a certificate of noncompliance.

875-202.7(89) Notice of actions. The labor commissioner shall serve a notice on the special inspector by certified mail to an address listed on the commission application form or by other service as permitted by Iowa Code chapter 17A. A copy shall be sent to the insurance company employing the special inspector.

875-202.8(89) Contested cases. The special inspector shall have 20 days to file a written notice of contest with the labor commissioner. If the special inspector does not file a written contest within 20 days of receipt of the notice, the action stated in the notice shall automatically be effective.

875-202.9(89) Hearing procedures. The hearing procedures in 347--Chapter 300 shall govern.

875-202.10(89) Emergency suspension. Pursuant to Iowa Code section 17A.18(3), if the labor commissioner finds that public health, safety or welfare imperatively requires emergency action because a special inspector failed to comply with applicable laws or regulations, the special inspector's commission may be summarily suspended.

875-202.11(89) Probation period. A special inspector may be placed on probation for a period not to exceed one year for each incident causing probation.

875-202.12(89) Suspension period. A special inspector's commission may be suspended up to five years for each incident causing a suspension.

875-202.13(89) Revocation period. A special inspector's commission which has been revoked shall not be reinstated for five years.

875-202.14(89,252J) Certificates of noncompliance. Rules 202.8(89) through 202.13(89) shall not apply in the event of revocation or suspension due to receipt of a certificate of noncompliance, and the procedures of Iowa Code section 252J.8 shall apply.

875-202.15(89) Concurrent actions. Multiple actions under rules 202.3(89) to 202.7(89) or 202.14(89,252J) may proceed at the same time against any special inspector.

These rules are intended to implement Iowa Code chapters 17A, 89, and 252J.

ITEM 4. Adopt new 875--Chapter 203 as follows:

CHAPTER 203

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL OBJECTS

875--203.1(89) Hydrostatic pressure tests. A hydrostatic pressure test, when applied to objects, shall not exceed 11/2 times the maximum allowable working pressure, less corrosion factor, as applicable. The pressure shall be under proper control so that in no case shall the required test pressure be exceeded by more than 2 percent. During a hydrostatic test involving pressures in excess of the lowest safety valve setting, the safety valve or valves shall be removed or each valve disk shall be held to its seat by means of a testing clamp and not by screwing down the compression screw upon the spring. Other safety devices that may be damaged shall be removed prior to applying a hydrostatic test. When a hydrostatic test is to be applied to existing installations, the pressure shall be as follows:

1. To determine tightness, the hydrostatic test pressure need be no greater than the set pressure of the safety valve having the lowest setting.

2. For safety tests, the pressure shall be equal to 2 times the maximum allowable working pressure, less corrosion factor, as applicable. All major repairs and alterations shall require a safety test.

875--203.2(89) Safety appliance. Any safety appliance required shall not be removed or tampered with except for the purpose of repair or inspection. An object shall not be operated unless all applicable safety appliances are properly functional and operational.

875--203.3(89) Pressure-reducing valves. Wherepressure-reducing valves are used, one or more relief or safety valves shall be provided on the low-pressure side of the reducing valve when the piping equipment on the low-pressure side does not meet the requirements for the full initial pressure. The relief or safety valves shall be located adjoining or as close as possible to the reducing valve. Proper protection shall be provided to prevent injury or damage caused by the escaping fluid from the discharge of relief or safety valves if vented to the atmosphere. The combined discharge capacity of the relief valves or safety valves shall be such that the pressure rating of the lower-pressure piping or equipment shall not be exceeded in case the reducing valve sticks open. If a bypass around the reducing valves is used, a safety valve is required on the low-pressure side and shall be of sufficient capacity to relieve all the fluid that can pass through the bypass without overpressuring the low-pressure side. A pressure gage shall be installed on the low-pressure side of a reducing valve.

875--203.4(89) Blowoff equipment. The blowdown from an object that enters a sanitary sewer system or blowdown which is considered a hazard to life or property shall pass through some form of blowoff equipment that will reduce pressure and temperature. The temperature of the water leaving the blowoff equipment shall not exceed 150 degrees F, and the pressure shall not exceed 5 psig. The blowoff piping and fittings between the object and the blowoff tank shall comply with the construction or installation code. All materials used in the fabrication of object blowoff equipment shall comply with the construction or installation code. All blowoff equipment shall be equipped with openings to facilitate cleaning and inspection.

875--203.5(89) Location of discharge piping outlets. The discharge from safety valves, safety relief valves, blowoff pipes and other outlets shall be so arranged that there will be no danger of scalding personnel. When the safety valve or temperature/pressure relief valve discharge is piped away from the object to the point of discharge, provision shall be made for properly draining the piping. The size and arrangement of discharge piping shall be such that any pressure that may exist or develop will not reduce the relieving capacity of the relieving devices below that capacity required to protect the object.

875--203.6(89) Piping and fitting requirements. No galvanic pipe or fittings may be used on any object. The minimum piping and fitting supplied on any object shall be schedule 40. The piping design must take into account the removal of material for mechanical joints such as threading or bolting, corrosion and erosion requirements, and the effects of hydrostatic head pressure. ASME B31.1 and ASME B31.9 (1995 with 1997 addenda) provide the applicable standards and calculations for piping design.

875--203.7(89) Electric steam generator.

203.7(1) A cable at least as large as one of the incoming power lines to the generator shall be permanently fastened to and provide grounding of the generator shell.

203.7(2) A suitable screen or guard shall be provided around high-tension bushings and a sign posted warning of high voltage. This screen or guard shall be so located that it will be impossible for anyone working around the generator to accidentally come in contact with the high-tension circuits.

203.7(3) All electrically heated boilers shall meet the applicable standards of the construction or installation code.

875--203.8(89) Alterations, retrofits and repairs to objects. Alterations, retrofits, and repairs shall be made so that the object shall be at least as safe as the original construction. Alterations, retrofits, and repairs not covered by these rules shall be done as though new construction and shall comply with the applicable code or codes. The appropriate National Board "R" form shall be filed with the division.

203.8(1) Welding. Repairs or alterations by welding shall be approved beforehand by an authorized inspector, and all welding repairs or alterations must be in accordance with the "Repairs and Alterations to Boilers and Pressure Vessels by Welding," Chapter III, National Board Inspection Code (1995 with 1997 addenda). All welding shall be done by an organization holding a National Board "R" stamp. The organization performing the repair or alteration is responsible for filing the appropriate National Board "R" form with the division.

The material used for patches shall be of the same general quality and have at least the minimum physical properties of the plate to be patched. The thickness of any patch shall be at least equal to the plate being patched. Flush-welded patches in unstayed shells, drums, or headers shall be radiographed and stress-relieved in accordance with the requirements of the construction or installation code.

203.8(2) Stress-relieving of alterations and repairs. Subject to the approval of the labor commissioner, peening or other methods of stress-relieving may be substituted for thermal stress-relieving. Flush-welded patches or new sections may be applied to stayed plates without limitations of size or plate thickness.

Threaded stays may be replaced by welded stays provided that in the judgment of the authorized inspector the plate adjacent to the staybolt has not been materially weakened by deterioration or wasting away. All material requirements of the applicable section of the construction or installation code governing welded stays shall be met except that stress-relieving other than thermal means may be used.

875--203.9(89) Boiler door latches. A watertube boiler shall have the firing doors of the inward opening type, unless such doors are provided with substantial and effective latching or fastening devices or otherwise so constructed as to prevent them when closed from being blown open by pressure on the furnace side. These latches or fastenings shall be of the positive, self-locking type. Friction contacts, latches, and bolts actuated by springs shall not be used. The foregoing requirements for latches or fastenings shall not apply to coal openings on downdraft or similar furnaces.

All other doors, except explosion doors, not used in the firing of the boiler may be provided with bolts or fastenings in lieu of self-locking latching devices. Explosion doors, if used and located in the setting walls within seven feet of the firing floor or operating platform, shall be provided with substantial deflectors to divert the blast.

875--203.10(89) Clearance. All objects shall be so located that adequate space is provided for the proper operation, inspection, and necessary maintenance and repair of the object and its appurtenances.

875--203.11(89) Ladders and runways. When necessary for safety, a steel runway platform of standard construction shall be installed across the tops of objects or at some other convenient level for the purpose of affording safe access. All runways shall have at least two means of exit remotely located from each other.

875--203.12(89) Exit from rooms containing objects. All rooms exceeding 500 square feet of floor area and containing one or more objects having a fuel-burning capacity of 1 million Btu's shall have two means of exit remotely located from each other on each level.

875--203.13(89) Air and ventilation. A permanent source of outside air shall be provided for each room to permit satisfactory combustion of fuel and ventilation if necessary under normal operations.

The minimum ventilation for coal, gas, or oil burners in rooms containing objects is based on the Btu's per hour, required air, and louvered area. The minimum net louvered area shall not be less than 1 square foot. The following table shall be used to determine the net louvered area in square feet:

INPUT(BTUs per hour)


MINIMUM AIRREQUIRED(cubic feet)

MINIMUMLOUVERED AREA(net square feet)
500,000

125

1.0
1,000,000

250

1.0
2,000,000

500

1.6
3,000,000

750

2.5
4,000,000

1,000

3.3
5,000,000

1,200

4.1
6,000,000

1,500

5.0
7,000,000

1,750

5.8
8,000,000

2,000

6.6
9,000,000

2,250

7.5
10,000,000

2,500

8.3

When mechanical ventilation is used, the supply of combustion and ventilation air to the objects and the firing device shall be interlocked with the fan so the firing device will not operate with the fan off. The velocity of the air through the ventilating fan shall not exceed 500 feet per minute and the total air delivered shall be equal to or greater than shown above.

875--203.14(89) Condensate return tank. Condensate return tanks shall be equipped with at least two vents or a vent and overflow pipe to protect against a loose float plugging a single connection.

875--203.15(89) Nuclear power plant components. Nuclear power systems shall be designed, manufactured, installed, stamped, inspected, repaired and maintained in accordance with the ASME Code, Section III, for the year of construction or installation.

875--203.16(89) Conditions not covered. For any condition or modification not covered by these rules, the ASME Code for New Installations (1995 with 1997 addenda) shall apply.

875--203.17(89) Stamping of Iowa identification number. All objects shall be stamped with an Iowa identification number followed by an "IA," the letters and figures to be not less than a height of 5/16 of an inch. Stamping of the Iowa identification number shall be located on steel objects below the ASME Code stamping. When construction of the object does not allow the direct stamping of an object, a metal tag the size of 1 inch by 21/2 inches shall be affixed to the object with the Iowa identification number. This tag shall be attached as closely as possible to the manufacturer's data plate of the object. For objects covered by Iowa Code chapter 89 which are unstamped, state inspectors and special inspectors shall assign numbers as directed by the division.

875--203.18(89) Nonstandard objects. If a nonstandard object as defined in rule 875--200.2(89) is to be installed in Iowa, all of the following conditions must first be met.

203.18(1) The blueprints and design calculations for construction of the object must be submitted to the labor commissioner for review and approval before any installation work is commenced. All units of measure on submitted paperwork must be scaled to customary United States units of measure. All documents must be provided in the English language.

203.18(2) The blueprints and design calculations for construction of the object must be certified by a professional engineer who is registered in the United States for the design of objects. The manufacturer's data report or design documentation records must be signed by a special inspector who is commissioned by the labor commissioner or by a division employee holding a National Board commission and a state commission.

203.18(3) The blueprints and design calculations of these objects shall be prepared utilizing a specified, stated, known engineering standard such as the DIN, ISO, BSI, ASME, JIS or CNS.

203.18(4) All documentation verifying quality and code compliance shall be submitted to the division for review and approval by the labor commissioner unless there is an agreement which provides for reciprocity between the division and the jurisdiction in which the object was built. The quality assurance system shall include, but is not limited to:

a. Quality assurance documentation. The quality assurance documentation shall include the following: statement of authority, scope of work addressed, organizational charts, quality control responsibilities, drawings and design, calculation, specification control, order entry, purchasing, training, audits, auditor training, material control, examination and inspection programs, correction and detection of nonconformities, welding controls, nondestructive examination and personnel qualifications, heat treatment, calibration of test equipment, records retention, sample forms, and duties of the authorized inspector; or the requirements of ANSI/ASQC Q 91-1994 or ASME NQA 1-1989 with 1C-1992 addenda.

b. Certification from a registered professional engineer knowledgeable about the code of construction and installation; and

c. Implementation of all phases of the quality assurance system(s) and certification(s) shall be demonstrated.

203.18(5) An English language version of the documents described in subrule 203.18(4), shall be submitted for review by the labor commissioner. The English language versions of the documents shall control during any implementation or demonstration of the fabrication of the nonstandard object. The documentation and certification described in subrule 203.18(4), if in a language other than English, must include a statement that in case of a conflict, the translated English language version shall prevail.

203.18(6) The fees and costs for the review shall be borne by the manufacturer, owner, or user of the object requesting the review and shall include, but not be limited to, the inspection fees set forth in rule 875-200.4(89). Fees and costs shall include travel, lodging, meals, and incidental costs associated with performing the review or audit. If the review is outside the United States, the party or parties requesting the review shall be responsible to arrange all travel permits and visas. A party requesting a review or audit shall guarantee access to all phases of manufacture, regardless of who is the owner of a relevant facility.

203.18(7) After a manufacturer has received permission to construct a nonstandard object for an Iowa location, the manufacturer shall construct the object complying with all quality standards approved and certified for Iowa installation and construction. Compliance with this rule during the installation and construction phases shall not in any way be viewed as creating an exception from any provisions of Iowa Code chapter 89 or IAC 875--Chapters 200 to 209.

875--203.19(89) Notification of explosion. Owners and users of covered objects must report any object explosion by calling (515)281-3647 or (515)281-6533. If the explosion occurs during normal division operating hours, notification shall occur before close of business on that day. If the explosion occurs when the division office is closed, the notification shall occur no later than close of business on the next division business day. Division hours are 8 a.m. to 4:30 p.m., Monday through Friday, except state holidays.

875--203.20(89) Lap seam crack. The shell or drum of an object in which a lap seam crack is discovered along a longitudinal, riveted joint shall be immediately discontinued from use. If the object is not more than 15 years of age, a complete new course of the original thickness may be installed at the discretion of the inspector. Patching is prohibited.

These rules are intended to implement Iowa Code chapter 89.

ITEM 5. Transfer 347--Chapters 43 to 48 to 875-- Chapters 204 to 209, respectively, and change all references within those chapters accordingly.

ITEM 6. Amend subrule 204.2(4) as follows:

204.2(4) Installations after-July 1, 1996, to December 31, 1997. All new installations between July 1, 1996, and December 31, 1997, of boilers, including reinstalled boilers, shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of the ASME Code for Boilers and Pressure Vessels Section I (1992) with 1994 addenda) or with the requirements of recognized national or international standards such as DIN, BSI, JIS, or Canadian National Standards CNS. Gas-fired jacketed steam kettles may be installed provided they are designed, installed, inspected and stamped in accordance with ASME Code for Boilers and Pressure Vessels Section VIII, Division I, Appendix 19 (1995). Unfired steam boilers shall not be constructed under the provisions of Section VIII. Boiler installations Installations shall also comply with ANSI/ASME CSD-1 (1995 with 1996 addenda).

ITEM 7. Adopt new subrule 204.2(5) as follows:

204.2(5) Installations after January 1, 1998. After January 1, 1998, all new installations of boilers, including reinstalled boilers, shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of the ASME Code for Boilers and Pressure Vessels Section I (1995 with 1997 addenda) or with the requirements of recognized national or international standards such as DIN, BSI, JIS, or CNS. Unfired steam boilers shall not be constructed under the provisions of Section VIII. Boiler installations shall also comply with ANSI/ASME CSD-1 (1995 with 1996 addenda).

ITEM 8. Amend subrule 205.1(1) as follows:

205.1(1) Working pressure--shell. The maximum allowable working pressure on the shell of a boiler shall be determined by the strength of the weakest course computed from the thickness of the plate, the tensile strength of the plate, the efficiency of the longitudinal joint, the inside diameter of the course, and the factor of safety allowed by these rules. The formula for determining the maximum allowable working pressure is:

TStE

=
Maximum allowable working pressure, psig.
RFS


Where:

TS = Ultimate tensile strength of shell plates plate(s), psig. When the tensile strength of a steel plate(s) is unknown, it shall be taken as 55,000 psig for temperatures not exceeding 650 degrees F.

t = Minimum thickness of shell plates of the weakest course, in inches.

E = Efficiency of longitudinal joint, method of determining which is given in calculated pursuant to (ANSI/ASME BPV-1-PG-27) (1995 with 1997 addenda).

R = Inside radius of the weakest course of the shell or drum, in inches.

FS = Factor of safety specified in subrule 44.1(2) 205.1(2).

ITEM 9. Amend subrule 205.4(1) to read as follows:

205.4(1) The use of weighted-lever safety valves or safety valves having either the seat or disk of cast iron is prohibited. All power boilers shall have direct, springloaded, pop-type safety valves that conform to the requirements of ASME Code, Section I (1995 with 1997 addenda).

ITEM 10. Amend subrule 205.4(10), paragraph "c," to read as follows:

c. For heating surface determination, see ASME Code, Section I, Appendix A 44, 1995 with 1997 addenda.

ITEM 11. Amend subrule 205.4(10) by inserting new paragraph "d" as follows:

d. Maximum steaming capacity for safety valves shall be the value stated on design documents or shall be calculated by multiplying horsepower by 34.5.

ITEM 12. Amend subrule 206.2(2), catchwords, to read as follows:

206.2(2) Installations after-July 1, 1996, to December 31, 1997.

ITEM 13. Adopt new subrule 206.2(3) as follows and renumber existing subrule 206.2(3) as 206.2(4).

206.2(3) Installations after January 1, 1998. After January 1, 1998, all installed and reinstalled miniature boilers covered by this chapter shall be constructed and installed in accordance with national and international standards such as DIN, BSI, ASME, JIS, or CNS (1995 with 1997 addenda). Only national and international standards acceptable to the division may be utilized. Miniature boilers installed and reinstalled after January 1, 1998, must be inspected by a National Board commissioned inspector and be registered with the National Board. The boilers must comply with the requirements of ANSI/ASME CSD-1 (1995 with 1997 addenda).

ITEM 14. Amend subrule 207.2(5) to read as follows:

207.2(5) Installations after-July 1, 1996, to December 31, 1997. All new installations of boilers, including reinstalled boilers, between July 1, 1996, and December 31, 1997, shall be designed, manufactured, installed, inspected and stamped in accordance with the requirements of the ASME Code for Boilers and Pressure Vessels Section I IV (1992) with 1994 addenda or with the requirements of recognized national or international standards such as DIN, BSI, JIS, Canadian National Standards or CNS. Only national and international standards acceptable to the division of labor services may be utilized. Boilers installed and reinstalled after July 1, 1996, must be inspected by a National Board commissioned inspector and be registered with the National Board. The boilers must comply with the requirements of ANSI/ASME CSD-1 1995.

ITEM 15. Adopt new subrule 207.2(6) as follows:

207.2(6) Installations after January 1, 1998. After January 1, 1998, all new installations of boilers, including reinstalled boilers, shall be designed, manufactured, installed, inspected and stamped in accordance with the requirements of the ASME Code for Boilers and Pressure Vessels Section IV (1995 with 1997 addenda) or with the requirements of recognized national or international standards such as DIN, BSI, JIS, or CNS. Only national and international standards acceptable to the division may be utilized. Boilers installed and reinstalled after January 1, 1998, must be inspected by a National Board commissioned inspector and be registered with the National Board. The boilers must comply with the requirements of ANSI/ASME CSD-1 (1995 with 1997 addenda).

ITEM 16. Amend subrule 209.1(4) as follows:

209.1(4) Installations after-July 1, 1996, to December 31, 1997. Pressure vessels, including reinstalled pressure vessels, installed between July 1, 1996, and December 31, 1997, shall be designed, manufactured, installed, inspected, and stamped according to an accepted in accordance with the requirements of ASME Code for Boilers and Pressure Vessels Section VIII (1995) or the requirements of recognized national or international standard such as DIN, BSI, ASME, JIS, Canadian National Standards or CNS. Only national and international standards acceptable to the division of labor services may be utilized. Pressure vessels installed and reinstalled after January July 1, 1996, must be inspected by a National Board commissioned inspector and be registered with the National Board. The boilers pressure vessels must comply with the requirements of ANSI/ASME CSD-1 1995 (1995), as applicable.

ITEM 17. Adopt new subrule 209.1(5) as follows:

209.1(5) Installations after January 1, 1998. After January 1, 1998, pressure vessels installed, including reinstalled pressure vessels, shall be designed, manufactured, installed, inspected, and stamped in accordance with the requirements of ASME Code for Boilers and Pressure Vessels Section VIII (1995) or the requirements of recognized national or international standard such as DIN, BSI, ASME, JIS, or CNS. Only national and international standards acceptable to the division may be utilized. Pressure vessels installed and reinstalled after January 1, 1998, must be inspected by a National Board commissioned inspector and be registered with the National Board. The pressure vessels must comply with the requirements of ANSI/ASME CSD-1 (1995 with 1997 addenda) as applicable.

ITEM 18. Amend subrule 209.2(2) to read as follows:

209.2(2) Maximum allowable working pressure (noncode stamped).

a. The maximum allowable working pressure on the shell of pressure vessels not covered by subrule 209.2(1) shall be determined by the strength of the weakest course computed from the thickness of the plate, the tensile strength of the plate, the efficiency of the longitudinal joint, the inside diameter of the course and the factor of safety set by this subrule.

TStE

=
Maximum allowable working pressure, psig.
RFS


WHERE Where:

TS = Ultimate tensile strength of shell plate plate(s), psig. When the tensile strength of a steel plate(s) is not known unknown, it shall be taken as 55,000 psig for temperatures not exceeding 650 degrees F.

t = Minimum thickness of shell plate plates of the weakest course, in inches.

E = Efficiency of longitudinal joint. For riveted joints, use ASME Code, Section 1 (1971). For fusion-welded and brazed joints, use the following table:

Single lap welded 40

Double lap welded 60

Single butt welded 60

Double butt welded 75

Forge welded 70

Brazed steel 80

R = Inside radius for of the weakest course of shell or drum in inches, provided the thickness does not exceed 10 percent of the radius. If the thickness is over 10 percent of the radius, the outer radius shall be used.

FS = Factor of safety shall be four.

b. External pressure. The maximum allowable working pressure for noncode pressure vessels subjected to external or collapsing pressure shall be determined by the ASME Code, Section VIII, Divisions 1, 2 and 2 3, 1995 (1995 with 1997 addenda).

ITEM 19. Amend subrule 209.2(4) to read as follows:

209.2(4) End closures. The maximum allowable working pressure permitted for formed heads under pressure shall be determined by using the formulas in ASME Code, Section VIII, Divisions 1, 2 and 2 3, 1995 (1995 with 1997 addenda).

ITEM 20. Rescind 347-Chapter 49.

[Filed Emergency After Notice 12/26/97, effective 1/1/98]

[Published 1/14/98]

EDITOR'S NOTE: For replacement pages for IAC, see IAC Supplement 1/14/98.

FILED

ARC 7759A

ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION COMMISSION[567]

Adopted and Filed

Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code sections 455B.105 and 455B.173, the Environmental Protection Commission hereby adopts Chapter 44, "Drinking Water Revolving Fund," Iowa Administrative Code.

On August 6, 1996, the Safe Drinking Water Act (SDWA) Amendments of 1996 (Pub. L. 104-182) were passed. Section 1452 of this Act authorizes the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) to enact a State Revolving Loan Fund (SRF) for drinking water-related projects to help water systems finance the costs of infrastructure needs. Authorizing legislation to set up this drinking water facilities fund in Iowa (1997 Iowa Acts, chapter 4) was approved in March. These rules will enable and administer the infrastructure loan fund.

Notice of Intended Action was published in the Iowa Administrative Bulletin on September 10, 1997, as ARC 7508A. Six public hearings were held on these rules. Oral comments from five individuals and written comments from three individuals or groups were received during the public comment period. Several technical clarifications suggested by the U.S. EPA and the Des Moines Water Works were adopted. These are summarized within a Responsiveness Summary, which is available from the Administrative Rules Coordinator, Capitol Building, Room 11, or from Michael K. Anderson at (515)281-6599.

The rules define the fund's purpose, including the Department's intent to utilize various authorized set-aside provisions within the fund. The rules also contain thresholds for water systems to become eligible for loan assistance and a project priority scoring system.

New definitions for "authority," "drinking water state revolving fund," "loan agreement," "project priority list," and "significant noncompliance" have been added. The rules also include provisions for working with the Iowa Finance Authority, which will be the entity which issues bonds which will maintain the proposed loan fund.

These rules will become effective February 18, 1998.

These rules are intended to implement Iowa Code chapter 455B, division III, part 1, and 1997 Iowa Acts, chapter 4.

The following chapter is adopted.

Adopt the following new chapter:

CHAPTER 44

DRINKING WATER REVOLVING FUND

567--44.1(455B) Statutory authority. The authority for the Iowa department of natural resources to provide loans to eligible applicants to assist in the construction of drinking water treatment facilities is provided by 1997 Iowa Acts, chapter 4.

567--44.2(455B) Scope of title. The department has jurisdiction over the surface and groundwater of the state to prevent, abate, and control pollution. As a part of that general responsibility, the department and the Iowa finance authority ("authority") are jointly designated to conduct the administration of the state revolving (SRF) loan program to assist in infrastructure financing projects pursuant to the Safe Drinking Water Act. A project must comply with this chapter to be eligible for an SRF loan. This chapter provides for the background, the general rules of practice for the department's administration of the program, including the criteria for loan eligibility, and the general project and program administration rules.

567--44.3(455B) Purpose. The state revolving fund program provides financial assistance to eligible public drinking water supplies for the design and construction of facilities to ensure public health and the provision of safe and adequate drinking water. The program reserves a certain percentage of money each year for administrative purposes, to improve and protect source water quality, and to provide technical assistance to smaller drinking water systems. The program is administered by the Iowa department of natural resources ("department"), with assistance from the authority. The director will coordinate with the authority under the terms of an interagency agreement entered pursuant to Iowa Code chapter 28E. The Iowa department of natural resources establishes priorities for the use of the state revolving fund and publishes them each year in its intended use plan (IUP). Published IUPs may include loan funding applications (capitalization grant applications, submitted by the department to the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) regional administrator) for either single or for multiple years, depending on the department's preference and resource utilization plans, as long as the fund account or set-aside account remains in operation. The IUP will identify all proposed uses of available funds and how each will be managed. All potentially funded projects must be approved by the Iowa department of natural resources before they can be considered for certification to the Iowa finance authority.

The EPA provides capitalization grants for this program to the state of Iowa. Financial assistance projects must be in conformance with the requirements of the Public Health Service Act (42 U.S.C. 300f et seq.), United States Code, Title XIV, Section 1452, Part E.

567--44.4(455B) Definitions. The following words and terms shall have the following meanings unless the context clearly indicates otherwise:

"Applicable interest rate" means the interest rate applied to each individual loan as determined by the director and in accordance with any agreement with the Iowa finance authority.

"Authority" means the Iowa finance authority (IFA) as established by Iowa Code chapter 16.

"Conservation easements" means an interest in land that entitles a person to use the land possessed by another (affirmative easement), or to restrict uses of the land subject to the easement (negative easement). A conservation easement restricts the landowner to uses that are compatible with resource conservation.

"Contiguous" means directly adjacent or touching along all or most of one side of a legally defined piece of property. Tracts of land involved in the same operation or water supply and separated only by roads, railroads, or bike trails are deemed contiguous tracts.

"Debt service coverage ratio" means the sum of net income plus interest expense plus depreciation, divided by the sum of debt service, principal plus interest, and repayments.

"Department" means the Iowa department of natural resources (DNR).

"Director" means the director of the Iowa department of natural resources.

"Drinking water state revolving fund (SRF)" means a state-administered fund intended to develop drinking water revolving loans to help finance drinking water infrastructure improvements, source water protection, system technical assistance, and other activities intended to encourage and facilitate public water supply system rule compliance and public health protection established by 1997 Iowa Acts, chapter 4.

"Eligible cost" means the cost of all labor, material, machinery, equipment, loan initiation and loan service fees, design and construction engineering services, legal fees and expenses directly related to the project, capitalized interest during construction of the project, and all other expansion, construction, and rehabilitation of all or part of a project incurred after the date of approval of an intended use plan (IUP) which contains the project on a list of projects which are approved for SRF loan assistance.

"Fiscal year" means the federal fiscal year starting October 1 and ending September 30.

"Intended use plan (IUP)" means a plan identifying the intended uses of funds available for loans in the SRF for each fiscal year as described in Section 1452 of the Safe Drinking Water Act.

"Loan agreement" means an executed contract between a loan applicant and the director and the authority, confirming the purpose of the loan, the amount and terms of the loan, the schedule of the loan payments and requirements, and any other agreed-upon conditions set forth by the director and the authority.

"Project priority list" means the list of projects in priority order that may qualify for SRF loan assistance contained in the IUP document prepared pursuant to rule 44.8(455B). The priority list shall identify all projects eligible for funding and the points assigned to each project pursuant to subrule 44.7(8).

"Public water supply system" (also referred to as "system" or "water system" or "PWS") means a system for the provision to the public of piped water for human consumption, if such system has at least 15 service connections or regularly serves an average of at least 25 individuals daily at least 60 days out of the year. Such term includes (1) any collection, treatment, storage, and distribution facilities under control of the supplier of water and used primarily in connection with such system, and (2) any collection, including wells, or pretreatment storage facilities not under such control which are used primarily in connection with such system. A public water supply system is either a "community water system" or a "noncommunity water system."

1. "Community water system" means a public water supply system which has at least 15 service connections used by year-round residents or regularly serves at least 25 year-round residents.

2. "Noncommunity water system" means a public water supply system that is not a community water system.

"Significant noncompliance" means the failure to comply with any national primary drinking water standard as adopted by the state of Iowa according to criteria established by the administrator of the federal Environmental Protection Agency.

"SRF funds" means the combination of a particular fiscal year's federal capitalization grant appropriation plus the 20 percent state of Iowa match.

"Viability" means the technical, financial, and managerial ability to comply with applicable national primary drinking water standards as adopted by the state of Iowa. Viability is the ability of a system to remain in compliance insofar as the requirements of the SDWA.

567--44.5(455B) Set-asides. The Safe Drinking Water Act (SDWA, or "Act") authorizes set-aside funds to enable states to implement specific requirements of the Act. The amount and use of set-aside money is set each year in the IUP pursuant to rule 44.8(455B) and may be adjusted from year to year based on available funds and priorities as outlined in the IUP. As prescribed in the Act, set-asides will include but are not limited to:

44.5(1) Administration expense set-aside. These set-aside funds are to be used to administer the state revolving loan fund (SRF). This includes loan portfolio management, debt issuance, SRF program startup and other administrative costs, financial, management, and legal consulting fees, and related support services. This set-aside allows a maximum of 4 percent of the total available federal capitalization grant and state match funds in a particular year.

44.5(2) Small system technical assistance set-aside. These set-aside funds will be used to provide technical assistance to public water supplies serving 10,000 people or fewer. This set-aside allows a maximum of 2 percent of the total available federal capitalization grant and state match funds in a particular year. Applications for third-party technical assistance proposals must be submitted and will be accepted and evaluated pursuant to subrules 44.7(2) through 44.7(8) prior to publication of the IUP in a given year.

44.5(3) Source water protection implementation set-aside. These set-aside funds will be used to delineate and assess source water protection areas, and may be used to establish and implement source water and wellhead protection programs. This set-aside allows a maximum of 15 percent of the total available federal capitalization grant and state match funds in a particular year. Up to 10 percent of the total funds (67 percent of this set-aside) will be used by the department in the first two years of the SRF to delineate and assess source water protection areas; some of these funds may be subcontracted to third parties to perform aspects of this work. Source water (quality partnership) petition programs (made by individual or consortiums of public water systems) established under Section 1454 of the SDWA Amendments will be eligible for money under this set-aside. Applications for third-party source water petition proposals must be submitted and will be accepted and evaluated pursuant to subrules 44.7(2) through 44.7(8) prior to publication of the IUP in a given year.

44.5(4) State program management set-aside. This set-aside money may be reserved for public water supply supervision programs, to include watershed protection, wellhead protection, operator certification, drinking water information management system development, and viability assessment efforts. This set-aside allows a maximum of 10 percent of the total available federal capitalization grant and state match funds in a particular year, and any additional state funds required to meet EPA, SRF grant requirements.

567--44.6(455B) Eligibility.

44.6(1) The following systems are eligible to receive funds from the Iowa drinking water revolving loan fund, for health improvements as listed and defined in the Safe Drinking Water Act, as amended in 1996.

a. Community drinking water systems.

b. Nonprofit nontransient noncommunity drinking water systems.

c. Cities and counties that are PWS or can become viable new PWS as a result of this project.

d. Any other governmental subdivision of the state responsible for a public water supply.

44.6(2) The following systems are ineligible to receive funds from the Iowa drinking water revolving loan fund.

a. Any loan applicant who has not adopted and implemented satisfactory department-approved water conservation plans and practices, or demonstrated to the department an ongoing effort to adopt and implement such plans and practices within one calendar year from the date of the loan agreement.

b. Any loan applicant in significant noncompliance with any applicable primary drinking water regulation, unless the project will return the loan applicant to compliance.

c. Any loan applicant lacking viability (applicants whose systems lack technical, financial, and managerial viability to comply with the Act and are nonviable or lack capacity per the definition of the Act), unless the loan applicant commits to undertake appropriate changes in operations, including ownership, management accounting, rates, maintenance, consolidation, alternative sources of water supply, or other procedures if the director determines that such changes are necessary to demonstrate viability.

d. Projects and activities deemed ineligible for participation in the drinking water SRF program by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency's February 28, 1997, guidelines, or by the department.

567--44.7(455B) Project point ranking system (project priority list).

44.7(1) The director shall develop and maintain a project priority list of public water systems that have a need for either a new or an upgraded drinking water system (including individual subcomponents). The term "public water system projects" may also include separate segments or phases of a segmented or phased project. The project priority list may include projects which are not ready to proceed (e.g., it may include projects by their nature planned and implemented for a longer term than one year or those unable to be implemented within one calendar year), but letters of intent for such projects must be received by the department for the projects to proceed within 5 years of the submitted letter of intent, or they shall not receive funding. Projects may be construed as not ready to proceed due to lack of fiscal capability (of either the loan applicant or of the state), due to emergencies experienced by the applicant (or the state), or due to construction or other scheduling constraints. Projects may continue to be eligible for loan funding when funded for the first year of a multiyear project effort. However, the project applicant must resubmit the project for priority ranking each subsequent year during the life of a project.

44.7(2) At least once each year, the director will provide notification to eligible water supplies that applications for placement on the project priority list are being accepted by the department. The notice shall include the schedule for submittal of the requirements listed in subrule 44.7(6), in order to be placed on the project priority list.

44.7(3) At least once each year, or more often as necessary, the department may amend the project priority list to add eligible projects. List adjustment can be done to ensure that the department uses at least 15 percent of all funds credited to the SRF account to provide loan assistance to systems serving fewer than 10,000 persons (allowable under Section 1452(a)(2) of the Act), to the extent that there are a sufficient number of eligible projects to fund. List adjustment can also be made to maintain the fiscal integrity of the bond fund, pursuant to rule 44.8(455B) and the annual published IUP's short-term and long-term goals.

44.7(4) To be eligible for placement on the project priority list, the water system must have a preliminary engineering study of potential system needs (e.g., a "planning" study) approved by the department, and must submit a written application for placement on the list to the director. The application must include:

1. A description of the type of project for which financial assistance is being requested,

2. The amount of financial assistance being requested, and

3. A proposed preliminary project construction schedule.

Application shall be made on an SRF application package form provided by the department; the applicant may include additional information in the application. Applicants must reapply each year to be placed on the project priority list. Forms can be obtained from the Environmental Protection Division, Iowa Department of Natural Resources, Henry A. Wallace Building, 502 E. 9th Street, Des Moines, Iowa 50319-0034.

44.7(5) Reserved.

44.7(6) Applicants seeking financial assistance for construction must include with their application:

1. A description of the entity's current drinking water supply system, including a discussion of existing and potential problems or failures in the current drinking water system and compliance with state and federal criteria,

2. An estimate of the population and the number of households to be served,

3. Annual operating cost projections for a minimum of five years, if feasible, and historical annual operating costs for a period of the immediate past three years, to include balance sheets and income statements, where applicable,

4. A description of the basis for project design,

5. A description of the financial management system, and a map showing the geographical area that the project is expected to serve, and

6. A cost estimate for the selected project must also be included with the submission.

44.7(7) A construction project's priority points shall be the total number of points assigned by the department pursuant to the department's scoring system, delineated in subrule 44.7(8). All projects shall be listed in descending order on the published project priority list according to the number of total priority points assigned each project. When two or more projects have the same priority point total, the project sponsored by a system in the process of consolidation shall receive the higher priority. A private system in the process of forming and becoming a PWS shall have the next highest priority (if the system is determined by U.S. EPA regulations or guidance to be eligible for SRF funding), and the entity with the smallest served population shall receive the next highest priority. The most current official census population shall be used for all municipalities which apply for these loan funds. Nontransient noncommunity systems will be counted based on either the actual population verifiable by the department or population calculated by multiplying by an occupancy factor of 2.5 persons per service connection. New systems will be counted based on either census data, an occupancy factor of 2.5 persons per service connection, an occupancy factor of 2.5 persons per identifiable occupied building, or other means acceptable to the department. Funding shall be offered to the projects with highest rank on the project priority list, subject to the project's readiness to proceed, and shall proceed from highest project downward subject to availability of funds. No project is eligible for more than 50 percent of the total available funds in any single calendar year. No project is eligible for a loan of less than $50,000. Projects comprising for-profit water systems may make up no more than 10 percent of the project priority list in any given year. Private water companies are eligible to receive loans from the funds generated by the sale of state tax-exempt bonds. The EPC may adjust these maximum and minimum loan figures in a given year pursuant to their final approval of the fiscal year's IUP. The published project priority list shall also be included in the department's annual intended use plan (IUP), pursuant to rule 44.8(455B).

44.7(8) Eligible public drinking water supply projects shall be scored pursuant to the following priority point scoring system.

IOWA SRF PROJECT SCORING SYSTEM

(Multiple attributes within a lettered subcategory are not additive, but points are additive from other subcategories; consolidation/restructuring is an approved option to correct violations or "improve" treatment)

Scoring Criterion Points


A. Water Quality and Human Health Risk-related Criteria (maximum of 60 points)

1. Acute MCL violation corrected (fecal coliform,
E. coli, nitrate, SWTR including turbidity and Giardia)
60
2. Chronic MCL violation corrected (all nonacute MCLs including heavy metals, SOCs, VOCs)
50
3. Treatment technique requirement correction (Pb/cu corrective measures, CT time corrective measures, disinfectant residual corrective measures)
40
4. Imminent threat from groundwater contamination (from UST site, from CERCLA site, from uncontrolled site)
35
5. Connection of individual residences to PWS to eliminate use of contaminated individual private wells (bacterial, nitrate, or IOC/VOC/SOC well contamination all eligible)
35
6. Intermittent nonacute MCL violation correction (generally defined as more than 4 MCLs of a single contaminant in 3 years)
25
7. Lead or asbestos cement pipe replacement (replace at least 200 feet of pipe)
15
B. Infrastructure and Engineering-related Improvement Criteria (maximum of 35 points)

1. System redundancy and additional source to meet peak day demand with largest well or intake out of service; plant process rehabilitation (made to ensure redundancy of treatment units to protect against acute or chronic MCL with system's largest treatment unit out of service); water storage improvements (system reliability enhancement--to increase effective storage to Average Daily Demand, including either at-ground or elevated storage); pumping improvements meeting hydraulic and ten-State Standard requirements for Average Daily Demand.
35
2. Water system over capacity expansion. Points are allowable only when system is operating at 85 percent or more of system design capacity. Source, plant, or distribution system improvements for system expansion are all eligible under this category.
30
3. Pressure improvements, including pump upgrades, pipe looping and pressure reduction valves such that average distribution system pressure increases by more than 10 psi in project area.
20
4. Other distribution system enhancement (e.g., valves, fittings, line replacement, hydrants, pumping stations)
20
5. Provision of emergency power/emergency pumping capacity including purchase of diesel generators or installation of automatic switching systems
15
6. Rectify excessive water loss per established water conservation plan (more than 15 percent of water must be unaccounted for to be eligible for points)
10
C. Affordability Criteria (maximum of 10 points)

1. System serves low-income population (Community Development Block Grant (CDBG) Iowa Department of Economic Development (IDED) Low-Moderate Income Criteria (LMI))
10
D. Special Category Improvements (maximum of 15 points)

1. Wellhead protection (detailed contaminant inventory, contingency plan, conservation easements, and land acquisition)
15
2. Source protection (detailed contaminant inventory, contingency plan, conservation easements, and land acquisition)
15
3. Water conservation measures/conservation plan preparation insofar as new water conservation ordinances are adopted and enforced
5
E. IDNR Adjustment Factor for Population--use 1 score only

1. (Project Serves) Population less than 10,000
10
TOTAL MAXIMUM POINTS
130
567--44.8(455B) Intended use plan.

44.8(1) Development. The director shall prepare an intended use plan (IUP) each year. The IUP will be submitted to a public hearing and approved by the commission and U.S. EPA.

44.8(2) Contents. The IUP will identify the anticipated uses of loan funds available for that fiscal year and will include:

a. A list of projects from the state project priority list (defined in rule 44.7(455B)) that are eligible for SRF loans and any proposed activities eligible for assistance under set-aside authority of the SDWA. The list will include the name of the eligible recipient, applicable PWS permit number, the projected amount of loan assistance, and a schedule of estimated disbursement of funds. The department's list will consider the following in developing the list of eligible recipients for the intended use plan:

(1) Whether a project will be ready to proceed on a schedule consistent with time requirements for outlay of funds;

(2) Whether the project addresses the need upon which the system's priority is based;

(3) Applicant's financial capability to service the loan, provide operation and maintenance, and provide replacement and debt service reserves;

(4) Applicant's statement of willingness to accept all loan terms and conditions.

b. Discussion of the long-term and the short-term goals of the SRF.

c. Information on the types of activities to be supported by the SRF.

d. The method by which the IUP may be amended.

e. Assurances on how the state intends to meet environmental review requirements of the Act.

567--44.9(455B) Department initial approval of projects.

44.9(1) Project/loan initiation conference. Each eligible loan recipient shall schedule a project/loan initiation conference with the department. The eligible recipient's official representative will meet with the department to discuss the following items and other items relevant to the project/loan as necessary:

a. SRF loan program policies, procedures and guidelines;

b. Allowable costs;

c. Treatment technologies;

d. Environmental impacts and review considerations;

e. Public participation;

f. Scheduling;

g. Other information as needed.

44.9(2) An applicant seeking financial assistance from the state revolving fund for a construction project must provide the following information to the director for review and approval:

a. Plans and specifications must be signed by a professional engineer holding current license to practice in Iowa.

b. Plans and specifications must be consistent with the project identified in the application submitted pursuant to subrule 44.7(6).

c. The planned project must be described in full and the construction requirements necessary to complete the project as proposed must be detailed.

d. The project submittal shall include the latest engineering cost estimate for the project.

e. The plans and specifications shall comply with all applicable state statutes, rules, and design standards.

f. Those portions of projects not meeting eligibility requirements may be excluded from the funded project, but included in the submitted plans and specifications if the applicant chooses to keep the loan-ineligible part of the project as part of the overall system improvement. Ineligible portions of projects include but are not limited to dams, water rights, monitoring costs, operation and maintenance expenses, proj-ects designed primarily in anticipation of future or speculative growth, and projects needed primarily for fire protection.

g. The applicant has or will demonstrate the ability to ensure a dedicated source of revenue.

h. The applicant has demonstrated its ability to provide the necessary legal, institutional, managerial, and financial capability to complete the project. Legal, institutional, managerial, and financial capability includes the requirement that the applicant show the ability to collect the amount of money sufficient to repay the SRF loan.

44.9(3) An applicant seeking financial assistance from the state revolving fund for any project appearing on the project priority list must submit information as required under subrule 44.7(6) on forms provided by and acceptable to the department. Departmental review requirements shall consist of the following:

a. Upon review and approval of construction projects submitted as required under subrule 44.7(6), and the plans and specifications as required under subrule 44.9(2), and following a determination that the project meets the applicable requirements of the Act, federal regulations, Iowa statutes, and relevant portions of this chapter, the director shall approve the project in writing.

b. If there is an alteration (change order) to a project after the director approves the project, the eligible applicant must request in writing from the department an amended approval. The director shall review the request and proposed project alteration (change order) and, upon a determination that the project meets the applicable requirements of the Act, federal regulations or "Drinking Water State Revolving Fund Program Guidelines," dated February 1997, Iowa statutes, and relevant portions of this chapter, the director shall approve the project as amended.

c. The director shall inform the applicant in writing of the reason for loan denial and return any application not in substantial compliance with these rules.

567--44.10 Reserved.

567--44.11(455B) Certification of the project to the authority.

44.11(1) Upon approval of a project pursuant to rules 44.7(455B) and 44.9(455B) and certification that the project is listed on the department's project priority list for the current year, the director shall certify the project to the authority for review and consideration for loan eligibility.

44.11(2) Systems without a certified operator shall not receive loan assistance. Before the financial assistance recipient submits its 50 percent payment loan disbursement request to the authority (with copy to the department), it must submit to the department the name, certification number and certification expiration date of the operator certified, pursuant to 567--Chapter 81, to be directly responsible (in direct responsible charge) for the operation of the facility.

567--44.12(455B) General administrative requirements.

44.12(1) Loan agreement conditions. The director, in coordination with the authority, will prepare a loan agreement when the application has been determined to be in compliance with the requirements of the SDWA and applicable state rules for SRF funding. The loan agreements to be executed by the applicant and the department shall be a binding obligation under Iowa law, shall include conditions and terms to be effective for the loan period, and shall be accompanied by evidence of such security, legality, and enforceability as shall be satisfactory to the director. Each borrower's loan agreement terms may differ due to differences in legal structure and creditworthiness of eligible borrowers. The expected loan agreement terms will be discussed with the applicant at the project initiation conference described in rule 44.9(455B).

44.12(2) Allowable costs shall be limited to those costs deemed necessary, reasonable, and directly related to the efficient completion of the project. The director will determine project costs eligible for state assistance in accordance with rule 44.6(455B). Land purchase, easement, or rights-of-way costs are ineligible with the exception of land which is integral to a project that is needed to meet or maintain public health protection, and needed to locate eligible treatment or distribution works. Source water protection easements are considered to be integral to a project. (The acquisition of land or easements has to be from a willing seller.) In addition to those costs identified in this chapter, unallowable costs include the following:

a. Cost of planning and applying for an SRF loan.

b. Costs of service lines and in-house plumbing.

c. Administrative costs of the loan recipient.

d. Vehicles and tools.

44.12(3) The recipients shall maintain adequate records that document all costs associated with the project. Moneys from the SRF and those contributed by the recipient shall be accounted for separately. Accounting procedures shall conform with generally accepted government accounting principles, and auditing procedures will be in accordance with the U.S. General Accounting Office (GAO) publication, "Government Auditing Standards," dated June 1994. Allrecords shall be preserved and made available to the department, the authority, the state auditor, and the Office of the Inspector General (OIG) of the EPA for at least three years from the date of the final loan repayment.

44.12(4) The recipient shall provide access at all times for the department, the authority, the state auditor and the OIG at EPA to all project records and documents for inspection and audit purposes for a period of three years from the date of the final loan payment. The same access to the project site(s) shall be provided for inspection purposes.

44.12(5) Other federal and state statutes and programs may affect an SRF project. Loan agreements will include an assurance that a recipient will comply with all applicable federal and state requirements. Federal "cross-cutters" which will affect SRF projects include 13 environmental authorities, four economic and miscellaneous authorities, and nine social policy authorities. Each of these specific cross-cutters is delineated in Appendix 1.

44.12(6) The recipient must submit a construction drawdown schedule to the department prior to the award of contracts.

44.12(7) Loan agreements will be binding commitments based on estimated eligible costs prior to construction. A final adjustment to a loan amount may be made upon completion of construction. Loans will be made to eligible recipients as soon as possible after money is available. The SRF will be managed such that contingency money is available in loans to allow for final adjustments in allowable costs as approved by the director. If eligible costs exceed the loan amount, the recipient may request an increase. The director in coordination with the authority will evaluate the request considering available money in the fund as well as the financial risk to determine the appropriate action, including renegotiation of the loan. Should costs be less than the loan amount, the loan shall be adjusted. Any project identified in the intended use plan for funding in a fiscal year that has not signed a binding commitment by August 31 of the fiscal year may be bypassed by projects of a lower priority that are in a state of readiness.

44.12(8) The director shall have the right to terminate any loan when terms of the agreement have been violated or project activities are not progressing in a satisfactory manner. Loans will be terminated if construction has not begun within one year of the execution of a loan agreement. The director in coordination with the authority will establish a repayment schedule for funds already loaned to the recipient. All terminations must be in writing.

567--44.13(455B) Construction phase and postconstruction phase requirements.

44.13(1) The loan recipient must notify the director of the estimated project completion date. A final inspection of the project may be performed by the director to verify that construction is complete (except for weather-related items) and conforms with the approved plans and specifications and all approved change orders.

44.13(2) The department shall undertake measures to discern adequate project performance as follows:

a. Three months after initiation of final operation of the project, the loan recipient must certify to the director that the project is operating as planned and designed. This certification must be made on a form provided by and approved by the department.

b. If the loan recipient is unable to certify the project is operating as planned and designed, the recipient must submit a corrective action report to the director for review and approval. The corrective action report must contain an analysis of the project's failure to operate as planned and designed; a discussion of the nature, scope, and cost of the action needed to correct the failure; and a schedule for completing the corrective work, acceptable to the department.

567--44.14(455B) Loan agreements and repayment policy for loans. Loan agreements shall be entered into for each separate project, with the director and an authorized representative of the applicant signing the agreement. For each investment pool there shall be a single interest rate applicable to all loans made to recipients. Loans shall bear interest for the entire life of the loan at a rate set by the authority. The interest rate will be based on the true interest cost method and may be rounded to the nearest one-hundredth of one percent. The interest rate shall be equal to A/B times (C-X), to which there shall be added, but only if available funds from one or more SRF accounts relating to prior bond issues ("existing SRF funds") will be used to fund a portion of the loans made to the pool, D times E/B; where A is the total amount of the loans being funded by proceeds of bonds issued for that pool; where B is the total of all loans to be made to that pool; where C is the true interest cost of the bonds issued for that pool; where D is the loan rate used for the original pool of loans from which bond issue the existing SRF funds were derived; where E is the amount of the existing SRF funds used for loans to the pool; and where X is the lesser of (0.3 times C) or 2.0 percent. If the existing SRF funds used for the pool are derived from more than one previous bond issue, then a factor of D times E/B shall be calculated for each bond issue from which the loan funds are derived and shall be added to the foregoing amount so as to produce a weighted average of interest for that pool. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the interest rate for a loan shall never exceed the yield on the bonds used to fund that loan. In the event the aforementioned bonds bear interest at a variable or floating rate of interest, C shall be equal to the rate set forth in the 20 G.O. Bond Buyer Index in effect on the date that the bonds are delivered.

Loans shall be for a period of 20 years. Fees for servicing the loans may also be set by the authority. It is the intent of the department to charge a loan initiation fee of 1.0 percent of the amount of the loan, payable on the date the loan agreement is entered. It is the intent of the department to charge an annual loan servicing fee of 0.05 percent of the loan principal, due at the time of each annual loan repayment. The department reserves the right to charge higher credit-based fees to nongovernmental recipients (with the exception of nonprofit rural water districts). Loan agreements shall include but shall not be limited to provisions whereby the recipient ensures water system viability will be maintained, ensures compliance with the Act will be maintained, and ensures a certified operator in charge of the system in question will be maintained, all for the length of the loan agreement.

All principal and interest shall be repaid in accordance with the terms and conditions of the executed loan agreement. Repayments of principal shall begin no later than two years after receipt of the first loan disbursement. Borrowers must begin repayment of the loan (both principal and interest) no later than one year after completion of construction of the project. Principal payments will be made annually and interest payments will be made semiannually on a schedule determined by the director which is consistent with these rules and financing requirements applicable to the SRF. Repayment of the loan shall not exceed a 20-year repayment period as agreed upon in the loan agreement. Prepayment of the principal in whole or in part may be made, in accordance with the terms and conditions of the executed loan agreement.

The recipient shall use the proceeds of the SRF loan solely for the purpose of funding the project. Timely disbursement from the loan by the borrower shall be made to contractors.

All costs must be documented to the satisfaction of the director before proceeds can be disbursed. Records shall be maintained in accordance with subrule 44.12(3).

The recipient shall agree to comply with all applicable laws, rules, and regulations of the department, the authority, or other federal, state, and local jurisdictions concerning the financing, construction, operation, maintenance, and use of the water facilities.

567--44.15(455B) Sanctions. Failure of the recipient to repay the loan in accordance with the schedule contained in the loan agreements will result in the loan's being declared in default. Should a loan be declared in default, the director shall take legal action to collect amounts past due. Also, other state agencies will be notified and actions will be taken to preclude the recipient from receiving other grant or financial assistance until such time that all delinquent payments have been recovered.

Failure of a project to conform to approved plans and specifications or failure of a loan recipient to comply with the requirements of 567--Chapters 40 through 44 (pertaining to drinking water supply systems) constitutes grounds for the director to withhold authorization of loan disbursements to the financial assistance recipient. The loan recipient is then responsible for ensuring that the identified problem in either the plans and specifications or the other relevant portion of the project is rectified such that disbursements may be resumed. Once an agreement for correcting the conditions which led to the withholding of funds is reached between the director and the loan recipient, the director shall release the retained funds according to the provisions of the agreement.

567--44.16(455B) Disputes. A person or entity who disagrees with the project rankings, department funding decisions, or the withholding of project funding pursuant to rules 44.7(455B), 44.8(455B), and 44.12(455B) may request a formal review of the action. A request for review must be submitted in writing to the director by the person or entity within 45 days of the date of notification of the final decision made by the department or department staff. A decision by the director in a formal review case may be further appealed to the environmental protection commission (EPC).

567--44.17(455B) Insufficient priority points. Reserved.

567--44.18(455B) Financial need. Reserved.

[Filed 12/19/97, effective 2/18/98]

[Published 1/14/98]

EDITOR'S NOTE: For replacement pages for IAC, see IAC Supplement 1/14/98.

Appendix 1

Federal Cross-Cutters (Federal laws executive orders, and governmentwide policies that apply by their own terms to projects and activities receiving federal financial assistance, regardless of whether the statute authorizing the assistance makes them specifically applicable).

Environmental Authorities


* Archaeological and Historic Preservation Act of 1974, Pub. L. 86-523, as amended


* Clean Air Act, Pub. L. 84-159, as amended


* Coastal Barrier Resources Act, Pub. L. 97-348


* Coastal Zone Management Act, Pub. L. 92-583, as amended


* Endangered Species Act, Pub. L. 93-205, as amended


* Environmental Justice, Executive Order 12898


* Floodplain Management, Executive Order 11988, as amended by Executive Order 12148


* Protection of Wetlands, Executive Order 11990


* Farmland Protection Policy Act, Pub. L. 97-98


* Fish and Wildlife Coordination Act, Pub. L. 85-624, as amended


* National Historic Preservation Act of 1966, Public Law 89-665, as amended


* Safe Drinking Water Act, Pub. L. 93-523, as amended


* Wild and Scenic Rivers Act, Pub. L. 90-542, as amended

Economic and Miscellaneous Authorities


* Demonstration Cities and Metropolitan Development Act of 1966, Pub. L. 89-754, as amended, Executive Order 12372


* Procurement Prohibitions under Section 306 of the Clean Air Act and Section 508 of the Clean Water Act, including Executive Order 11738, Administration of the Clean Air Act and the Federal Water Pollution Control Act with respect to Federal Contracts, Grants, or Loans


* Uniform Relocation and Real Property Acquisition Policies Act, Pub. L. 91-646, as amended


* Debarment and Suspension, Executive Order 12549

Social Policy Authorities


* Age Discrimination Act of 1975, Pub. L. 94-135


* Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, Pub. L. 88-352


* Section 13 of the Federal Water Pollution Control Act Amendments of 1972, Pub. L. 92-500 (the Clean Water Act)


* Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, Pub. L. 93-112 (including Executive Orders 11914 and 11250)


* The Drug-Free Workplace Act of 1988, Pub. L. 100-690 (applies only to the capitalization grant recipient)


* Equal Employment Opportunity, Executive Order 11246


* Women's and Minority Business Enterprise, Executive Orders 11625, 12138, and 12432


* Section 129 of the Small Business Administration Reauthorization and Amendment Act of 1988, Pub. L. 100-590


* Anti-Lobbying Provisions (40 CFR Part 30) (applies only to capitalization grant recipients)

ARC 7760A

ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION COMMISSION[567]

Adopted and Filed

Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code sections 455B.263, 455B.268, 455B.278, and Iowa Code Supplement chapter 455I, the Environmental Protection Commission amends Chapter 50, "Scope of Division--Definitions-- Forms--Rules of Practice," Chapter 51, "Water Permit or Registration--When Required," and Chapter 52, "Criteria and Conditions for Authorizing Withdrawal, Diversion and Storage of Water," Iowa Administrative Code.

The adopted amendments implement a program to regulate agricultural drainage wells. The amendments require that certain agricultural drainage wells be closed but allow the continued use of other drainage wells provided that a permit is obtained from the Department of Natural Resources. Permits for the continued use of a drainage well will be issued subject to various conditions, including the implementation of best management practices for the drainage well and lands that are drained by the drainage well.

Notice of Intended Action was published in the Iowa Administrative Bulletin on September 10, 1997, as ARC 7509A. Comments on the proposed amendments were accepted through October 14, 1997. Public hearings were also held at Charles City, Humboldt, and Des Moines to take oral and written comments. Written comments were received from three public interest organizations and eight individuals. In addition, a number of persons presented oral comments at the public hearings. The comments received and the Department's response to those comments have been summarized in a public interest responsiveness summary. A copy of this document has been filed with the Administrative Rules Coordinator and is available from the Department of Natural Resources.

The adopted amendments differ from the amendments in the Notice of Intended Action. Many of the changes were made for clarification purposes and are not significant in terms of requirements for agricultural drainage wells. For instance, changes were made to clarify that permits are an appurtenance of the land described in the permit and transfer with land ownership, as stipulated in Iowa Code section 455B.265. Other changes were more significant and these changes are summarized below.


* Permit renewal - Language was added to clarify that a permit for an agricultural drainage well will not be renewed if a viable alternative exists at the time of renewal. It is possible that viable alternatives will become available (e.g., construction of an alternative drainage system) in the ten-year permit period and, if this is the case, the permit would not be renewed and the drainage well would have to be closed when the permit expires.


* Viable alternative - A permit for the continuing use of an agricultural drainage well will not be granted if an economically and physically viable alternative exists. More specific language was added to indicate what factors the Department will consider in making a determination if there is a viable alternative.


* Nitrogen management - The adopted amendments require that nitrogen not be applied to lands drained by agricultural drainage wells in excess of the nitrogen use levels necessary to obtain optimum crop yields. The rules as proposed in the Notice of Intended Action would have prohibited the fall and winter application of nitrogen. This prohibition has been eliminated from the adopted amendments.


* Feedlot runoff - The amendments as proposed in the Notice of Intended Action would not have allowed runoff from feedlots to be discharged across lands drained by agricultural drainage wells. This prohibition is not included in the adopted amendments. The Department of Natural Resources will, however, evaluate the contamination risk of feedlots located in agricultural drainage well areas on a case-by-case basis to determine if feedlot controls are needed.

These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code chapter 455B, division III, part 4, and 1997 Iowa Acts, chapter 193.

These amendments will become effective February 18, 1998.

The following amendments are adopted.

ITEM 1. Amend rule 567--50.2(455B) as follows:

Amend the definition of "Agricultural drainage well" as follows:

"Agricultural drainage well" is means a vertical opening to an aquifer or permeable substratum, which has been drilled, driven, dug, bored, augured, jetted, washed, cored or otherwise constructed and which intercepts or receives or is constructed by any means including but not limited to drilling, driving, digging, boring, using an auger, jetting, washing, or coring, and which is capable of intercepting or receiving surface or subsurface drainage water from agricultural land directly or by a drainage system.

Further amend rule 567--50.2(455B) by adding the following new definitions in alphabetical order:

"Agricultural drainage well area" means an area of land where surface or subsurface water drains into an agricultural drainage well directly or through a drainage system connecting to the agricultural drainage well.

"Designated agricultural drainage well area" means an agricultural drainage well area in which there is located an anaerobic lagoon or earthen manure storage structure which requires a construction permit under 567--Chapter 65.

"Drainage system" means tile lines, laterals, surface inlets, or other improvements which are constructed to facilitate the drainage of land.

"Earthen storage structure" means an earthen cavity, either covered or uncovered, including but not limited to an anaerobic lagoon or earthen manure storage basin which is used to store manure, sewage, wastewater, industrial waste, or other waste as regulated by the department of natural resources, if stored in a liquid or semiliquid state.

"Pesticide" means (1) any substance or mixture of substances intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating directly or indirectly any insects, rodents, nematodes, fungi, weeds, and other forms of plant or animal life or viruses, except viruses on or in living persons, which the secretary of agriculture shall declare to be a pest; and (2) any substance intended for use as a plant growth regulator, defoliant, or desiccant.

"Surface water" means water occurring on the surface of the ground.

"Surface water intake" means an artificial opening to a drain tile which drains into an agricultural drainage well, if the artificial opening allows surface water to enter the drain tile without filtration through the soil profile.

ITEM 2. Amend subrule 50.3(1) as follows:

50.3(1) Application forms. The following application forms are currently in use:

Form 16: Application for Permit to Divert, Store, or Withdraw Water for Beneficial Use. 1/84. 542-3105.

Form 17: Application for Permit to Use Water for Irrigation. 1/84. 542-3106.

Form 18: Application for Permit to Store Water for Beneficial Use. 7/83. 542-3109.

Form 19: Application for Permit to Divert or Withdraw Water for Production and Processing of Sand, Gravel, or Rock Materials. 1/84. 542-3110.

Form 20: Registration of Minor Nonrecurring Use of Water. 7/84. 542-3112.

Form 542-0986: Registration of Agricultural Drainage Wells. 10/87.

Form 542-1539: Application for Use of an Agricultural Drainage Well.

ITEM 3. Amend rule 567--50.4(17A,455B) as follows:

567--50.4(17A,455B) How to request a permit.

50.4(1) Form of application.

a. Application for approval of a new withdrawal, diversion or storage of water unrelated to the use of an agricultural drainage well. For withdrawals, diversions, or storage of water unrelated to the use of an agricultural drainage well, A a request for a new permit as distinguished from modification or renewal of an existing permit shall be made on a form obtained from the department. An application form must be submitted by or on behalf of the owner, lessee, easement holder or option holder of the area where the water is to be withdrawn, diverted or stored, and used. An application must be accompanied by a map portraying the points of withdrawal or diversion and storage, and the land on which water is to be used oriented as to section, township, and range. One application normally will be adequate for all uses on contiguous tracts of land. Tracts of land involved in the same operation separated only by roads or railroads will be deemed contiguous tracts.

b. Application for diversion of water related to the use of an agricultural drainage well. An application for the diversion of water and any other materials to an aquifer related to the use of an agricultural drainage well shall be made on a form obtained from the department and be submitted by or on behalf of such owners, lessees, easement holders, or option holders of all lands within the agricultural drainage well area. If the agricultural drainage well is part of a legally organized drainage district, the drainage district shall be a joint applicant. Applications for permits for diversions related to the use of an agricultural drainage well that existed prior to February 18, 1998, shall be made by July 1, 1998, with the exception of agricultural drainage wells that must be closed to comply with the provisions of 1997 Iowa Acts, Senate File 473. An application will not have to be filed for wells in a designated agricultural drainage well area which must be closed by December 31, 1999. In addition, the department may grant up to an 18-month delay in the application date for owners of agricultural drainage wells where it can be shown there is a reasonable expectation that the agricultural drainage well will be voluntarily closed by December 31, 1999.

b c. Application for modification or renewal of a permit. A request for renewal of a permit need not be submitted on an application form. A letter identifying the permittee and permit number and requesting renewal is sufficient. To request modification of a permit, the letter must also clearly identify each modification desired and the reasons why each modification is needed.

c d. Where to submit application. An application must be mailed or delivered to the Water Supply Section, Environmental Protection Division, Department of Natural Resources, East 9th and Grand, Des Moines, Iowa 50319.

50.4(2) Application fee. A nonrefundable fee in the form of a check or money order in the amount of $25 payable to the Department of Natural Resources must accompany an application for a new permit to withdraw or divert water. The same fee must accompany an application for modification or renewal of a permit to withdraw or divert water. No fee is charged for an application to store water or an application for registration of a minor nonrecurring use of water. No fee is charged for an application for a permit to divert water to an aquifer related to the use of an agricultural drainage well.

50.4(3) Supporting information required for complete application. An application shall not be considered complete until the fee specified in this rule and all supporting information requested under 50.6(17A,455B) of these rules have been submitted by the applicant or agents of the applicant.

ITEM 4. Amend subrule 50.6(4) as follows:

50.6(4) Application for permit to divert water into an aquifer not related to the use of an agricultural drainage well. An applicant for a permit to divert water or any other material from the surface into an aquifer not related to the use of an agricultural drainage well shall submit information showing that the requested diversion will not pollute the aquifer.

ITEM 5. Amend rule 567--50.6(455B) by adding the following new subrule:

50.6(7) Application for permit to divert water into an aquifer related to the use of an agricultural drainage well. An applicant for a permit to divert water or any other material into an aquifer by means of an agricultural drainage well shall submit the following information. The locations of the features as listed below shall be shown on a map drawn to scale submitted with the application.

a. Location of the agricultural drainage well to at least the nearest quarter-quarter section, township and range.

b. Diameter and depth of the agricultural drainage well, if known.

c. Description and ownership of the lands which are drained by the agricultural drainage well and the associated drainage system.

d. Location of tiles which drain to the agricultural drainage well, if known, and the location of any existing surface water intakes.

e. The location and description of any earthen storage structures, confinement feeding operations, or open feedlots within the agricultural drainage well area.

f. Information regarding any known connections between the agricultural drainage well or its drainage system and wastewater disposal or storage systems such as septic tanks and the location of such connections.

g. The nature and extent of any agreements between the well owner and adjacent landowners who have lands which are drained by the agricultural drainage well and associated tile drainage system.

h. Any available information regarding the economic and physical feasibility of closing the agricultural drainage well.

ITEM 6. Amend subrule 50.7(2) as follows:

50.7(2) Summary report of application review. Before an initial decision is issued on an application, personnel assigned to review an application shall prepare a summary report which shall state whether the withdrawal, diversion, or use of water as described in the complete application conforms to relevant criteria. The report shall identify the information used to determine the potential for the a proposed use of water to adversely affect other water users. For an application to withdraw groundwater, the report shall describe the effects on water levels anticipated to occur from the proposed use; indicate if verified well interference has been found; and provide options for resolving any verified well interference in accordance with 567--Chapter 54.

ITEM 7. Amend subrule 50.7(4) as follows:

50.7(4) Notice to the applicant that proposed withdrawal, diversion or use of water does not conform to criteria. If the application review discloses that the proposed withdrawal, diversion or use of water violates one or more criteria and the application should therefore be disapproved, or approved only subject to special conditions to which the applicant has not agreed, the department shall notify the applicant and, when practical, suggest appropriate project modifications. The department shall offer the applicant an opportunity to submit comments before an initial decision is made.

ITEM 8. Amend subrule 50.8(2) as follows:

50.8(2) Notice of initial decision. Copies of the initial decision shall be mailed to the applicant, any person who commented pursuant to 50.7(3), and any other person who has requested a copy of the decision. The decision may be sent by ordinary mail, first class, and shall be accompanied by a certification of the date of mailing. An initial decision becomes the final decision of the department unless a timely notice of appeal is filed in accordance with 50.9(17A,455B). The final decision may be filed with the appropriate county recorder to give constructive notice to future landowners of any conditions or requirements imposed by the final decision.

ITEM 9. Amend rule 567--51.3(455B) as follows:

567--51.3(455B) Diversion from surface into aquifer. A permit is required for diversion of water or any other material from the surface directly into any aquifer, including diversion by means of an agricultural drainage well. Diversion by tile or ditch into a sinkhole or quarry excavated in carbonate rock is presumed to be a diversion from the surface directly into an aquifer in the absence of convincing evidence to the contrary.

ITEM 10. Amend rule 567--52.5(455B) as follows:

567--52.5(455B) Duration of permits for withdrawal or diversion of water.

52.5(1) General. A permit granted shall remain as an appurtenance of the land described in the permit through the date specified in the permit and any extension of the permit or until an earlier date when the permit or its extension is canceled under 567--52.7(455B). Upon application for a permit prior to the termination date specified in the permit, a permit may be renewed by the department.

52.5(1) (2) Permits for withdrawal or diversion of surface water. Permits for withdrawal or diversion of surface water shall be issued for ten years.

52.5(2) (3) Permits for withdrawal of groundwater. Permits for withdrawal of groundwater shall be issued for a maximum period of ten years and may be granted for less than ten years if geological data on the capacity of the aquifer and the rate of its recharge are indeterminate.

This rule is intended to implement Iowa Code section 455B.265.

ITEM 11. Amend 567--Chapter 52 by adding the following new rule.

567--52.21(455B) Permits to divert water to an agricultural drainage well.

52.21(1) Approval criteria. An application for a permit to divert water or other material to an aquifer by means of an agricultural drainage well shall not be approved if the agricultural drainage well is located within a designated agricultural drainage well area or the drainage well is to be constructed after February 18, 1998. An initial permit for the diversion of water or any material to an aquifer by means of an agricultural drainage well shall be based on a finding that the following criteria are satisfied. Renewal of such a permit shall be made only upon a finding that such owners, lessees, easement holders, or option holders are in compliance with the conditions of the initial permit or any permit issued thereafter and that the agricultural drainage well meets applicable approval criteria, including paragraph 52.21(1)"c."

a. The application for the permit has been submitted by or on behalf of all owners, lessees, easement holders, or option holders of all lands which are drained by the agricultural drainage well.

b. There is reasonable assurance that the applicant(s) can minimize the contamination potential to the aquifer through closure of surface water intakes, elimination of any septic system connections, and other appropriate management practices including nutrient and pesticide management as required under subrule 52.21(2).

c. There are no economically and physically viable alternatives to the use of the agricultural drainage well. The department will consult with the division of soil conservation, department of agriculture and land stewardship, and other parties with drainage expertise as necessary to determine if viable alternatives exist. In determining whether a viable alternative exists, the department will consider all relevant factors, including the following:

(1) The impact that closure of the ADW would have on lands drained by the agricultural drainage well if an alternative drainage system is not provided.

(2) The cost and feasibility of providing an alternative outlet. Alternative drainage systems constructed under the provisions of the alternative drainage system assistance program administered by the division of soil conservation will be considered as a viable alternative to the use of the agricultural drainage well.

(3) The availability of public assistance for the construction of an alternate outlet or for compensation for loss of productivity on lands drained by the agricultural drainage well.

(4) The results of the engineering study provided for under 52.21(2)"l."

52.21(2) Approval conditions. Permits granted for the diversion of water or any material to an aquifer by means of an agricultural drainage well shall be subject to the following conditions as appropriate.

a. Surface water intakes. All surface water intakes shall be removed by December 31, 1998. Additional tile lines may be added to compensate for removal of surface water intakes provided the replacement tile does not increase the size of the agricultural drainage well area. Replacement tiles shall generally conform with the Natural Resources Conservation Services Tile Intake Replacement Interim Standard 980.

b. Cisterns. Cisterns shall be sealed or otherwise modified as necessary by December 31, 1998, to prevent direct entry of surface water. Compliance with the Natural Resources Conservation Services Wellhead Protection Interim Standard 981 will be considered as complying with this condition. Alternatives to the interim standard may be allowed with department approval.

c. Access/ventilation. The agricultural drainage well or its cistern shall be provided with a locked cover to prevent unauthorized access. If the agricultural drainage well and the related drainage system is ventilated, ventilation shall be accomplished in a manner that will not allow surface water to enter the agricultural drainage well.

d. Repair and maintenance. The agricultural drainage well and the associated drainage system may be repaired and maintained as needed to maintain drainage efficiency. The drainage well and associated tile drainage system shall be maintained in a condition so as to prevent surface water which has not filtered through the soil profile from entering the drainage well.

e. Modifications of drainage well. The agricultural drainage well shall not be modified without department approval. The related drainage system may be modified without department approval providing the modifications do not enlarge the agricultural drainage well area. Construction of new surface water intakes is not allowed.

f. Closure. If the permittee discontinues use of the agricultural drainage well, the department shall be notified and closure shall be made in accordance with 567--Chapter 39 or by an alternative method approved by the department. The permit will be revoked upon submission of proof that the drainage well was properly closed.

g. Modification or cancellation of permit. As provided in 567--52.7(455B), the department may modify or cancel the permit or require the permittee to take other actions to protect the public health and safety, to protect the public interest in lands and waters, or to prevent any manner of substantial injury to persons or property.

h. Waste systems. Effluent from wastewater treatment or storage systems, including on-site wastewater treatment and disposal systems such as septic systems, shall not be allowed to directly enter the agricultural drainage well or associated tile drainage system. Runoff controls consistent with Chapter 65 requirements and guidance may be required for feedlots that discharge across lands drained by an agricultural drainage well to control manure nitrogen and to eliminate the potential for direct entry of animal wastes into an agricultural drainage well or its drainage system.

i. Nitrogen management. The application of nitrogen from all sources, including manure, legumes, and commercial fertilizers, on lands within an agricultural drainage well drainage area shall not exceed the nitrogen use levels necessary to obtain optimum crop yields for the crop being grown.

j. Application of liquid animal wastes. Application of liquid animal waste to lands drained by the agricultural drainage well shall be done in a manner that will not result in a discharge of the waste to the drainage well or associated drainage system.

k. Application of pesticides. The application of pesticides on lands within the agricultural drainage well area shall be in accordance with the provisions of Iowa Code chapter 206 and rules adopted pursuant to chapter 206.

l. Alternatives to the use of the agricultural drainage well. Prior to reissuance of a permit for the continued use of an agricultural drainage well, the permittee(s) shall conduct an engineering study of the physical and economic feasibility of alternatives to the continued use of the agricultural drainage well. The study shall comply with the provisions of Iowa Code chapter 542B regarding certification by a licensed professional engineer. The results of the study shall be submitted to the department at least one year prior to a request to renew a permit.

52.21(3) Closure of existing agricultural drainage wells.

a. Agricultural drainage wells within a designated agricultural drainage well area. A permit shall not be granted for the diversion of water or other material into an aquifer by means of an agricultural drainage well if the drainage well is located within a designated agricultural drainage well area. All existing agricultural drainage wells within a designated agricultural drainage well area shall be closed by December 31, 1999. Closure shall be in accordance with 567--Chapter 39, Requirements for properly plugging abandoned wells, or by an alternative method approved by the department. Cisterns shall be filled in or removed and filled in with earth or other suitable material and any tile lines shall be removed for a distance of 10 feet around the wellhead or, alternatively, be replaced with nonperforated pipe. The owner of the land on which the agricultural drainage well is located shall provide the department with notice that the well has been closed in accordance with the requirements of this paragraph. Agricultural drainage wells that have been properly closed will no longer be considered an agricultural drainage well by the department.

b. Other agricultural drainage wells. Existing agricultural drainage wells that have not been authorized by permit by December 31, 1999, shall be closed by that date unless the department has granted a waiver to the closure requirements. The closure procedures shall be as specified in 52.21(3)"a."

[Filed 12/19/97, effective 2/18/98]

[Published 1/14/98]

EDITOR'S NOTE: For replacement pages for IAC, see IAC Supplement 1/14/98.

ARC 7763A

NURSING BOARD[655]

Adopted and Filed

Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code sections 17A.3 and 147.76, the Iowa Board of Nursing hereby adopts amendments to Chapter 7, "Advanced Registered Nurse Practitioners," Iowa Administrative Code.

These amendments improve language, use terminology that is more accurate and more clearly articulate the requirements for registration as an advanced registered nurse practitioner. Provisions are made for destruction of incomplete applications after a specified time.

Notice of Intended Action was published in the Iowa Administrative Bulletin on October 22, 1997, as ARC 7597A. The only changes from the Notice are insertion of the words "or recertification, as applicable" appearing in the definition of "Certified registered nurse anesthetist" and insertion of the words "the Council on Recertification of Nurse Anesthetists" appearing in the definition of "National professional nursing certifying body," which more accurately describe the process of recertification of certified registered nurse anesthetists.

These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code sections 17A.3, 147.10, 147.53, 147.76, and 152.1.

These amendments will become effective February 18, 1998.

The following amendments are adopted.

ITEM 1. Amend rule 655--7.1(152), six of the definitions, as follows:

"Advanced registered nurse practitioner (ARNP)" is a nurse with current licensure as a registered nurse in Iowa who is registered in Iowa to practice in an advanced role. The ARNP is prepared for an advanced role by virtue of additional knowledge and skills gained through an organized postbasic a formal advanced practice education program of nursing in a specialty area approved by the board. In the advanced role, the nurse practices nursing assessment, intervention, and management within the boundaries of the nurse-client relationship. Advanced nursing practice occurs in a variety of settings within an interdisciplinary health care team which provide for consultation, collaborative management, or referral. The ARNP may perform selected medically delegated functions when a collaborative practice agreement exists.

"Certified clinical nurse specialist" is an ARNP prepared at the master's level who possesses evidence of current advanced level certification as a clinical specialist in an area of nursing practice by a national professional nursing association certifying body as approved by the board.

"Certified nurse-midwife" is an ARNP educated in the disciplines of nursing and midwifery who possesses evidence of current advanced level certification by a national professional nursing association certifying body approved by the board. The certified nurse-midwife is authorized to manage the care of normal newborns and women, antepartally, intrapartally, postpartally or gynecologically.

"Certified nurse practitioner" is an ARNP educated in the disciplines of nursing who has advanced knowledge of nursing, physical and psychosocial assessment, appropriate interventions, and management of health care, and who possesses evidence of current certification by a national professional nursing association certifying body approved by the board.

"Certified registered nurse anesthetist" is an ARNP educated in the disciplines of nursing and anesthesia who possesses evidence of current advanced level certification or recertification, as applicable, by a national professional nursing association certifying body approved by the board.

"National professional nursing association certifying body" is a professional nursing organization certifying body approved by the board. Agencies approved by the board include the American Nurses Credentialing Center, the American Academy of Nurse Practitioners, the American College of Nurse-Midwives Certification Council, the Council on Certification of Nurse Anesthetists, the Council on Recertification of Nurse Anesthetists, the National Certification Board of Pediatric Nurse Practitioners and Nurses, the National Certification Corporation for the Obstetric, Gynecologic, and Neonatal Nursing Specialties, and the Oncology Nursing Certification Organization.

ITEM 2. Amend subrule 7.2(3), paragraph "a," subparagraph (2), as follows:

(2) Satisfactory completion of an organized postbasic a formal advanced practice educational program of study in a nursing specialty area approved by the board and appropriate clinical experience as approved by the board.

ITEM 3. Amend subrule 7.2(4), paragraph "c," as follows:

c. A copy of the time-dated, advanced level certification by appropriate national organization certifying body evidencing that the applicant holds current certification in good standing; copy of official transcript directly from the formal postbasic training advanced practice educational program maintaining the records necessary to document that all requirements have been met in one of the specialty areas of nursing practice as listed in subrule 7.2(1). The transcript shall verify the date of completion of the program/graduation and the degree conferred. A registered nurse may make application to practice in more than one specialty area of nursing practice.

ITEM 4. Add the following new subrule 7.2(6) and renumber subrules 7.2(6) to 7.2(10) as 7.2(7) to 7.2(11):

7.2(6) The registered nurse shall complete the registration process within 12 months of receipt of the application materials. The board reserves the right to destroy the documents after 12 months.

ITEM 5. Amend renumbered subrule 7.2(8), paragraph "c," as follows:

c. Copy of current time-dated, advanced level certification by appropriate national organization certifying body.

ITEM 6. Amend renumbered subrule 7.2(9) as follows:

7.2(9) Continuing education requirements. Continuing education shall be met as required for certification by the relevant national certification board or agency certifying body, as outlined in 655--subrule 5.2(3), paragraph "e."

ITEM 7. Amend renumbered subrule 7.2(11), introductory paragraph, as follows:

7.2(11) License Registration to practice as an advanced registered nurse practitioner restricted, revoked, or suspended, etc. The board may restrict, suspend or revoke a license registration to practice as an advanced registered nurse practitioner on any of the grounds stated in Iowa Code section 147.55 or 152.10 or chapter 272C. In addition:

[Filed 12/19/97, effective 2/18/98]

[Published 1/14/98]

EDITOR'S NOTE: For replacement pages for IAC, see IAC Supplement 1/14/98.

ARC 7764A

REAL ESTATE APPRAISER EXAMINING BOARD[193F]

Adopted and Filed

Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code section 543D.5, the Iowa Real Estate Appraiser Examining Board hereby adopts amendments to Chapter 3, "Examinations--Certified Licensed and Associate Real Property Appraisers," and Chapter 4, "Registration--Certificates, Licenses and Associates," and rescinds Chapter 6, "Continuing Education," and adopts new Chapter 6 with the same title, Iowa Administrative Code.

Item 1 amends subrule 3.3(1), paragraph "a," which sets forth the requirement that 180 classroom hours of courses be completed to qualify for the certified general real property appraiser examination.

Items 2 and 3 amend subrules 4.3(2) and 4.3(4) which set forth requirements that the applicants for certified general and residential real property appraiser certificates shall accumulate an increased number of hours of experience for the issuance of a certificate.

Item 4 rescinds existing Chapter 6 and adopts new Chapter 6 setting forth the requirements for preapproving continuing education required to renew an appraisal certificate.

Notice of Intended Action was published in the Iowa Administrative Bulletin on November 5, 1997, as ARC 7631A. These amendments are identical to the Notice of Intended Action with one exception. The definition of "Live instruction" in rule 6.1(272C,543D) has been modified by replacing "ICN" with "video conferencing".

These amendments will become effective February 18, 1998.

These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code chapters 272C and 543D.

The following amendments are adopted.

ITEM 1. Amend subrule 3.3(1), paragraph "a," introductory paragraph, as follows:

a. Completion of 165 180 classroom hours of courses in subjects related to and including 15 hours of tested USPAP and all topics listed below with particular emphasis on the appraisal of nonresidential properties:

ITEM 2. Amend subrule 4.3(2) as follows:

4.3(2) The applicant for the general real property appraiser certificate shall accumulate a total of 2000 3000 hours of appraisal experience of which at least 50 percent, 1000 1500 hours, shall be in nonresidential appraisal work. A minimum of two calendar years 30 months is required to obtain the experience.

ITEM 3. Amend subrule 4.3(4) as follows:

4.3(4) The applicant for the residential real property appraiser certificate shall accumulate a total of 2000 2500 hours of appraisal experience. A minimum of two calendar years 24 months is required to obtain the experience.

ITEM 4. Rescind 193F--Chapter 6 and adopt in lieu thereof the following new chapter:

CHAPTER 6

CONTINUING EDUCATION

193F--6.1(272C,543D) Definitions. For the purpose of these rules, the following definitions shall apply:

"Approved program" means a continuing education program, course, or activity which satisfies the standards set forth in these rules and has received advanced approval of the board pursuant to these rules.

"Approved provider" means a person or an organization that has been approved by the board to conduct continuing education programs pursuant to these rules.

"Board" means the Iowa real estate appraiser examining board.

"Certificate holder" means any person holding an Iowa real estate appraiser certificate.

"Continuing education" means education which is obtained by a person licensed or certified to practice real estate appraising in order to maintain, improve, or expand skills and knowledge obtained prior to initial licensure or certification, or to develop new and relevant skills and knowledge, all as a condition of certification renewal.

"Credit hour" means the value assigned by the board to a continuing education program.

"Guest speaker" means an individual who teaches an appraisal education program on a one-time-only or very limited basis and who possesses a unique depth of knowledge and experience in the subject matter.

"Home-study/correspondence program" means acomputer-generated program, such as CD-ROM, or written materials or exercises intended for self-study, which does not include simultaneous interaction with an instructor but does include tests transmitted to the provider for review and grading.

"Hour" means 50 minutes of instruction.

"Live instruction" means an educational program delivered in a classroom setting or through video conferencing whereby the instructor and student carry out their essential tasks while together.

193F--6.2(272C,543D) Continuing education requirements. Certified, licensed and associate real estate appraisers must demonstrate compliance with the following continuing education rules as a condition of biennial renewal.

6.2(1) As a condition of biennial renewal, certified, licensed and associate real estate appraisers must demonstrate compliance with all of the following requirements:

a. A minimum of 28 credit hours in approved continuing education programs acquired during the two-year renewal period. Carryover hours from a previous renewal period are not allowed.

b. A minimum of 14 of the required 28 credit hours must directly involve one or more of the following topics: real estate appraisal law and rules, report writing, cost approach, sales approach, income approach and USPAP.

c. A minimum of 3 of the required 28 credit hours must involve USPAP.

6.2(2) A maximum of 14 of the required 28 credit hours may be acquired in approved home-study/correspondence programs.

6.2(3) A maximum of 14 of the required 28 credit hours may be claimed by an instructor for teaching one or more approved continuing education programs in an amount equal to the credit hours approved for attendees. Instructors may only seek credit hours once for each separate program.

6.2(4) A maximum of 7 of the required 28 credit hours may be claimed for published articles and books, provided the board determines such activity has contributed to the professional competence of the applicant.

6.2(5) Applicants seeking to renew an initial certificate or license issued less than two years but more than one year prior to renewal must demonstrate completion of at least 14 credit hours, including at least 3 credit hours of USPAP.

6.2(6) Applicants who have allowed their certificates or licenses to lapse shall make the same showing as prescribed in subrule 6.2(1).

6.2(7) During each two-year renewal period, a continuing education program may be taken for credit only once. A program may be repeated for credit only if the program numbers and instructors are different.

6.2(8) Successful completion of a continuing education program requires full-time attendance. Continuing education credits shall not be granted to attendees who arrive late, leave early, or leave during the program.

6.2(9) Applicants may claim continuing education credits earned in a state which has a continuing education requirement for renewal of a real estate appraisal certificate or license if the program is approved by the appraisal certification board of that state or the appraisal foundation for continuing education purposes. All other programs must be approved upon application to the board pursuant to rules 6.6(272C,543D), 6.8(272C,543D) and 6.9(272C,543D).

6.2(10) A person licensed or certified to practice real estate appraising in Iowa shall be deemed to have complied with Iowa's continuing education requirements during periods that the person serves honorably on active duty in the military service, or for periods that the person is a resident of another state or district having continuing education requirements for real estate appraising and meets all requirements of that state or district, or for periods that the person is a government employee working in real estate appraising and assigned to duty outside the United States.

193F--6.3(272C,543D) Hardship and disability provisions.

6.3(1) The board may, in individual cases involving undue hardship caused by reasons including, but not limited to, illness, disability, or retirement, grant waivers, modifications or extensions of time within which to fulfill the continuing education requirements in rule 6.2(272C,543D). No waiver or extension of time shall be granted except upon written application to the board specifying and verifying the grounds of the request and attaching confirmation by an attending physician where applicable. The board may, as a condition of granting a waiver or extension of time, require the applicant to make up all or a certain portion of the minimum requirements by such methods or on such terms as the board may prescribe.

6.3(2) An applicant seeking a waiver, modification, extension of time or other form of reasonable accommodation due to a disability, as defined in the Americans with Disabilities Act, must include an attending physician's verification of the disability and a detailed description of the type of accommodation requested.

193F--6.4(272C,543D) Minimum program qualifications.

6.4(1) Continuing education programs, as a condition of board approval, must provide a formal program of learning which contributes to the growth in the professional knowledge and professional competence of real estate appraisers.

6.4(2) Programs dealing with the following subject areas will generally be acceptable:

a. Ad valorem taxation;

b. Agriculture production and economics;

c. Agronomy/soil;

d. Arbitrations;

e. Business courses related to the practice of real estate appraisal;

f. Construction estimating;

g. Cost approach;

h. Ethics and standards of professional practice;

i. Income approach;

j. Land use planning, zoning and taxation;

k. Litigation;

l. Management, leasing, brokerage time-sharing;

m. Property development;

n. Real estate appraisal law and rules;

o. Real estate appraisal (valuations/evaluations);

p. Real estate law;

q. Real estate financing and investment;

r. Real estate appraisal-related computer applications;

s. Real estate securities and syndication;

t. Real property exchange;

u. Production economics;

v. Sales approach;

w. USPAP.

6.4(3) The following programs will not be acceptable:

a. Courses of instruction designed to prepare a student for passing the real estate appraisal certification examination.

b. Programs in mechanical office and business or managerial skills, such as typing, speed-reading, and keypunch.

c. Sales promotion or other meetings held in conjunction with the appraiser's general business.

d. Time devoted to breakfast, lunch or dinner.

e. A program certified by the use of a challenge examination. The required number of hours must be completed to receive credit hours.

f. Meetings which are a normal part of the in-house staff or employee training.

g. Home-study/correspondence programs which are not tested and successfully completed.

h. Programs which do not provide at least three credit hours.

6.4(4) Continuing education credit will only be granted for whole hours, with a minimum of 50 minutes constituting one hour. For example, 100 minutes of continuous instruction would count as two credit hours; however, more than 50 minutes but less than 100 minutes of continuous instruction would only count as one hour.

6.4(5) Continuing education credit may be approved for university or college courses in qualifying topics according to the following formula: Each semester hour of credit shall equal 15 credit hours and each quarter hour of credit shall equal 10 credit hours.

193F--6.5(272C,543D) Standards for provider and program approval. Providers and programs must satisfy the following minimum standards in order to be preapproved in accordance with the procedures established in rule 6.6(272C,543D), and in order to maintain approval status.

6.5(1) The program must meet the minimum qualifications described in rule 6.4(272C,543D).

6.5(2) The program must be taught or developed by individuals who have the education, training and experience to be considered experts in the subject matter of the program and competent in the use of teaching methods appropriate to the program.

6.5(3) Live instruction programs must be taught by instructors who have successfully completed an instructor development workshop within 24 months preceding board approval of the program.

6.5(4) In determining whether an instructor is qualified to teach a particular program, the board will consider whether the instructor has an ability to teach and an in-depth knowledge of the subject matter.

6.5(5) An instructor's ability to teach may be shown by meeting one or more of the following criteria:

a. A bachelor's degree or higher in education from an accredited college (attach a copy of transcripts), or

b. A current teaching credential or certificate in any field (attach copy), or

c. A certificate of completion from an instructor institute, workshop or school that is sponsored by a member of the appraisal foundation in the area of instruction (detail specific teaching experiences), or

d. A full-time current appointment to the faculty of an accredited college, or

e. Other, as the board may determine.

6.5(6) An instructor's in-depth knowledge of the program's subject matter may be shown by meeting one or more of the following criteria:

a. A bachelor's degree or higher from an accredited college with a major in a field of study directly related to the subject matter of the course the instructor proposes to teach; such as business, economics, accounting, real estate or finance (attach copy of transcript), or

b. A bachelor's degree or higher from an accredited college and five years of appraisal experience related to the subject matter of the course the instructor proposes to teach (attach copy of transcript and document how the instructor's experience is related to the subject matter the instructor proposes to teach), or

c. A qualified professional with a generally recognized professional real property appraisal designation or sponsor member of the appraisal foundation, or

d. Other, as the board may determine.

6.5(7) Course content and materials must be accurate, consistent with currently accepted standards relating to the program's subject matter and updated no later than 30 days after the effective date of a change in standards, laws or rules.

6.5(8) Programs must have an appropriate means of written evaluation by participants. Evaluations shall include the relevance of the materials, effectiveness of presentation, content, facilities, and such additional features as are appropriate to the nature of the program.

6.5(9) Programs shall not be used to advertise or solicit orally or in writing any product or service.

6.5(10) Providers must clearly inform prospective participants of the number of credit hours preapproved by the board for each program, and all applicable policies concerning registration, payment, refunds, attendance requirements and examination grading.

6.5(11) Procedures must be in place to monitor whether the person receiving credit hours is the person who attended or completed the program.

6.5(12) Providers must be accessible to students during normal business hours to answer questions and provide assistance as necessary.

6.5(13) Providers must comply with or demonstrate exemption from the provisions of Iowa Code sections 714.14 to 714.25.

6.5(14) Providers must designate a coordinator in responsible charge of each program who will act as the board's contact on all compliance issues.

6.5(15) Programs shall not offer more than eight credit hours in a single day.

6.5(16) Providers shall not provide any information to the board, the public or prospective students which is misleading in nature. For example, providers may not refer to themselves as a "college" or "university" unless qualified as such under Iowa law.

6.5(17) Providers must establish and maintain for a period of five years complete and detailed records on the programs successfully attended by each Iowa participant.

6.5(18) Providers must issue an individual certificate of attendance to each participant upon successful completion of the program. The certificate must be no larger than 81/2\ _ 11\ and must include the provider name and number, program name and number, name of attendee, date program was completed, number of approved credit hours, and the signature of the coordinator or other person authorized by the board.

6.5(19) Program providers and instructors are solely responsible for the accuracy of all program materials, instruction and examinations. Board approval of a provider or program is not an assurance or warranty of accuracy and shall not be explicitly or implicitly marketed or advertised as such.

193F--6.6(272C,543D) Applications for approval of providers and programs. Applications for approval of providers and programs must be submitted on forms prescribed by the board. Board approval is effective for 24 months, including the month of approval.

6.6(1) Approval must be obtained for each program separately.

6.6(2) A nonrefundable fee of $50 must be submitted for each program.

6.6(3) All required forms and attachments must be submitted for approval at least 45 days prior to the first offering of each program. The board will approve or deny each program, in whole or part, within 21 days of the date it receives the fee and fully completed application.

6.6(4) Application forms will request information including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Program description;

b. Program purpose;

c. Difficulty level;

d. Learning objectives for each major topic that specify the level of knowledge or competency the student should demonstrate upon completing the program;

e. Description of the instructional methods utilized to accomplish the learning objective;

f. Identifying information for all guest speakers or instructors and such documentation as is necessary to verify compliance with the instructor qualifications described in rule 6.5(272C,543D);

g. Copies of all instructor and student program materials;

h. Copies of all examinations and a description of all grading procedures;

i. A description of the diagnostic assessment method(s) used when examinations are not given;

j. Copies of prospective brochures or narrative descriptions of the program as will be advertised to prospective students;

k. Such information as needed to verify compliance with board rules;

l. The name, address, telephone number, fax number and E-mail address for the program's coordinator; and

m. Such other information as the board deems reasonably needed for informed decision making.

6.6(5) The board shall assign each provider and program a number. This number shall be placed on all correspondence with the board, all subsequent applications by the same provider, and all certificates of attendance issued to participants.

193F--6.7(272C,543D) Waiver of application fees. Application fees may be waived for approved programs sponsored by a federal, state, or local governmental agency, when the program is offered at no cost or at a nominal cost to participants. A request for waiver of application fees should be made by the provider or certificate holder at the time the application is filed with the board.

193F--6.8(272C,543D) Continuing education committee. Upon majority vote of the board, the board chair will appoint, on an annual basis, a continuing education committee to approve or deny, in whole or part, applications for provider and program approval, hardship and disability applications, pursuant to rule 6.3(272C,543D), and credits claimed by appraisers on certification renewal forms. The committee shall be comprised of three members of the board, at least two of whom are professional board members.

193F--6.9(272C,543D) Certificate holder requests for preapproval of continuing education programs. A certificate holder seeking credit for attendance and participation in a program which is to be conducted by a provider not accredited or otherwise approved by the board shall apply for approval to the board at least 60 days in advance of the commencement of the activity. The board shall approve or deny the application in writing within 21 days of receipt of the application. Application for prior approval of a continuing education activity shall include the following fee and information:

1. Application fee of $100.

2. School, firm, organization or person conducting the program.

3. Location of the program.

4. Title of activity and description of program.

5. Credit hours requested for approval.

6. Date of program.

7. Principal instructor(s).

193F--6.10(272C,543D) Certificate holder requests for postapproval of continuing education programs. A certificate holder seeking credit for attendance and participation in a program which was not conducted by an approved provider or otherwise approved by the board shall submit to the board a request for credit for the program. Within 30 days after receipt of the request, the board shall advise the certificate holder in writing whether the program is approved and the number of hours allowed therefor. A certificate holder not complying with the requirement of this rule may be denied credit for the program. Application for postapproval of a continuing education program shall include the following fee and information:

1. Application fee of $100.

2. School, firm, organization or person conducting the program.

3. Location of the program.

4. Title of program and description of program.

5. Credit hours requested for approval.

6. Dates of program.

7. Principal instructor(s).

8. Verification of attendance.

193F--6.11(272C,543D) Review of provider or program. The board on its own motion or upon receipt of a complaint or negative evaluation may monitor or review any approved program or provider, and upon evidence of significant variation in the program presented from the program approved, a violation of board rules, or material misstatement or omission in the application form, may withdraw approval of the provider or program and disallow all or any part of the approved hours granted to the program. The provider, as a condition of approval, agrees to allow the board or its authorized representatives to monitor ongoing compliance with board rules, through means including, but not limited to, unannounced attendance at programs.

193F--6.12(272C,543D) Hearings. In the event of denial, in whole or in part, of any application for approval of a continuing education program or provider or credit for a continuing education program or withdrawal of approval of a continuing education program or provider, the applicant, provider or licensee shall have the right, within 20 days after the sending of the notification of the denial or withdrawal by ordinary mail, to request, in writing, a hearing which shall be held within 60 days after receipt of the written request for hearing. The hearing shall be conducted by the board, a panel of the board, or a qualified administrative law judge designated by the board. If the hearing is conducted by a panel of the board or an administrative law judge, a transcript of the hearing shall be presented to the board with the proposed decision. The decision of the board, or the decision of the panel of the board or an administrative law judge after adoption or amendment by the board, shall be final.

[Filed 12/22/97, effective 2/18/98]

[Published 1/14/98]

EDITOR'S NOTE: For replacement pages for IAC, see IAC Supplement 1/14/98.

ARC 7765A

REGENTS BOARD[681]

Adopted and Filed

Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code section 262.9(3), the Board of Regents hereby adopts an amendment to Chapter 1, "Admission Rules Common to the Three State Universities," Iowa Administrative Code.

The amendment will allow the Regent universities to assess Iowa resident tuition and fees to American Indian students who maintain a cultural identification with one or more of the Tribes or Nations historically connected with the present state of Iowa.

Notice of Intended Action was published in the Iowa Administrative Bulletin on November 5, 1997, as ARC 7627A. A public hearing was held on November 26, 1997, in the Board of Regents Conference Room. No comments were received during the public comment period or during the public hearing. The adopted amendment is identical to that published under Notice.

This amendment is intended to implement Iowa Code section 262.9(3).

This amendment will become effective on February 18, 1998.

The following amendment is adopted.

Amend subrule 1.4(2) by adding new paragraph "i."

i. At the regent institutions, American Indians who have origins in any of the original people of North America and who maintain a cultural identification through tribal affiliation or community recognition with one or more of the tribes or nations connected historically with the present state of Iowa, including the Iowa, Kickapoo, Menominee, Miami, Missouri, Ojibwa (Chippewa), Omaha, Otoe, Ottawa (Odawa), Potawatomi, Sac and Fox (Sauk, Meskwaki), Sioux, and Winnebago (Ho Chunk), will be assessed Iowa resident tuition and fees.

[Filed 12/23/97, effective 2/18/98]

[Published 1/14/98]

EDITOR'S NOTE: For replacement pages for IAC, see IAC Supplement 1/14/98]

ARC 7766A

REGENTS BOARD[681]

Adopted and Filed

Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code section 262.9, the Board of Regents hereby adopts amendments to Chapter 3, "Personnel Administration," Iowa Administrative Code.

Item 1 amends subrule 3.39(5) to reflect changes made previously in other parts of the rules.

Item 2 alters language to reflect changes made in the 1997-1999 AFSCME labor agreement.

Notice of Intended Action was published in the Iowa Administrative Bulletin on November 5, 1997, as ARC 7626A. A public hearing was held on November 26, 1997, in the Board of Regents Conference Room. No comments were received during the public comment period or during the public hearing. The adopted amendments are identical to those published under Notice.

These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code sections 19A.9 and 262.9.

These amendments will become effective on February 18, 1998.

The following amendments are adopted.

ITEM 1. Amend subrule 3.39(5), introductory paragraph, as follows:

3.39(5) Pay on reinstatement, reemployment or return from leave. An employee who is reinstated to the previously occupied class or a class in the same pay grade as the previously occupied class will be paid at a rate no less than what the employee was last paid and no higher than that provided at the step of the pay grade at which the employee was last paid with the prior approval of the resident director. An employee who is reinstated to a lower class, or who is returned to a merit system position from a professional position, will be paid in accordance with subrule 3.39(4), pay on demotion. The date of reinstatement will be the merit review date.

ITEM 2. Amend subrule 3.39(16) as follows:

3.39(16) Payment of a shift differential. All employees will be paid a shift differential of $0.25 per hour for any shift of which four or more hours occur between 6 p.m. and midnight and a shift differential of $0.30 per hour for any shift of which four or more hours occur between midnight and 6 a.m. The amount of the shift differential paid shall be determined by the merit system director.

[Filed 12/23/97, effective 2/18/98]

[Published 1/14/98]

EDITOR'S NOTE: For replacement pages for IAC, see IAC Supplement 1/14/98.

ARC 7767A

REGENTS BOARD[681]

Adopted and Filed

Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code section 262.9, the Board of Regents hereby adopts an amendment to Chapter 8, "Purchasing," Iowa Administrative Code.

This amendment removes the requirement that the Board of Regents use a roll call vote in granting its consent to vendors with a potential conflict of interest.

Notice of Intended Action was published in the Iowa Administrative Bulletin on November 5, 1997, as ARC 7625A. A public hearing was held on November 26, 1997, in the Board of Regents Conference Room. No comments were received during the public comment period or during the public hearing. The adopted amendment is identical to that published under Notice.

This amendment is intended to implement Iowa Code sections 68B.4 and 262.9.

This amendment will become effective on February 18, 1998.

The following amendment is adopted.

Amend subrule 8.9(1), paragraph "a," as follows:

a. The board of regents, on a roll call vote, must give its consent. The individual who wishes to sell goods or services must not participate in giving that consent. Further, the individual will be precluded from participating not only in the initial decision to purchase and to authorize, but also in all subsequent approvals which might include payment vouchers, contract amendments, or any substantive changes to such agreements.

[Filed 12/23/97, effective 2/18/98]

[Published 1/14/98]

EDITOR'S NOTE: For replacement pages for IAC, see IAC Supplement 1/14/98.

ARC 7753A

TRANSPORTATION DEPARTMENT[761]

Adopted and Filed

Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code sections 307.10 and 307.12, the Department of Transportation, on December 16, 1997, adopted an amendment to Chapter 425, "Motor Vehicle and Travel Trailer Dealers, Manufacturers, Distributors and Wholesalers," and adopted new Chapter 641, "Financial Liability Coverage Cards," Iowa Administrative Code.

Notice of Intended Action for these rules was published in the November 5, 1997, Iowa Administrative Bulletin as ARC 7612A.

1997 Iowa Acts, House File 514 [chapter 139], provides for the following: Effective January 1, 1998, a driver of a motor vehicle registered in Iowa or subject to registration in Iowa must carry in the motor vehicle a financial liability coverage card. Insurance carriers authorized to do business in Iowa and the Department of Transportation were required to distribute financial liability coverage cards by December 1, 1997. The Department is required to adopt amendments regarding the content of financial liability coverage cards. The legislation also sets out the minimum limits of financial liability coverage for motor vehicle dealers.

These amendments are intended to implement 1997 Iowa Acts, chapter 139, and are identical to those published under Notice.

These amendments will become effective February 18, 1998.

Rule-making actions:

ITEM 1. Amend rule 761--425.10(322) by adding the following new subrule:

425.10(8) Financial liability. The applicant for a motor vehicle dealer's license shall certify on the application that the applicant has the required financial liability coverage in the limits as set forth in Iowa Code Supplement section 322.4(8). It is the applicant's responsibility to ensure the required financial liability coverage is continuous with no lapse in coverage as long as the applicant maintains a valid dealer's license.

ITEM 2. Adopt the following new chapter:

CHAPTER 641

FINANCIAL LIABILITY COVERAGE CARDS

761--641.1(321) Purpose and applicability.

641.1(1) The purpose of this chapter is to establish requirements for financial liability coverage cards.

641.1(2) This chapter applies to motor vehicles registered in Iowa or subject to registration in Iowa.

641.1(3) This chapter does not address proof of financial responsibility under Iowa Code chapter 321A except for the issuance of financial liability coverage cards.

641.1(4) Proof of financial liability coverage for motor vehicle dealers is addressed in 761--subrule 425.10(8).

761--641.2(321) Definitions.

"Fleet" means five or more motor vehicles covered under an insurance policy, or one or more motor vehicles covered by a bond filed under Iowa Code section 321A.24, a security certificate issued under section 321A.25, or a self-insurance certificate issued under section 321A.34.

"Registration number" as used in Iowa Code Supplement section 321.20B, Iowa Code subsection 321A.24(1) and Iowa Code subsection 321A.25(1) means vehicle identification number.

761--641.3(321) Content of financial liability coverage card.

641.3(1) A financial liability coverage card issued by an insurance company for a motor vehicle that is not insured as a part of a fleet shall contain the following information:

a. Either one of the following:

(1) Name, address and telephone number of insurer.

(2) Name of insurer and name, address and telephone number of insurance agency.

b. Name of insured.

c. Policy number.

d. Vehicle identification number of the insured motor vehicle.

e. Year and make of the insured motor vehicle.

f. Either one of the following:

(1) Type of coverage provided; for example, personal automobile, business automobile, commercial automobile.

(2) The statement, "Coverage provided by this policy meets the minimum liability limits prescribed by law," or a statement that is substantially similar.

g. Effective and expiration dates of coverage.

h. The statement, "This card must be carried in the insured motor vehicle at all times," or a statement that is substantially similar.

641.3(2) An insurance company shall issue a financial liability coverage card for each motor vehicle insured as a part of a fleet. The fleet owner shall maintain a card in each fleet vehicle. The card shall contain the following information:

a. Either one of the following:

(1) Name, address and telephone number of insurer.

(2) Name of insurer and name, address and telephone number of insurance agency.

b. Name of insured.

c. Policy number.

d. Either the vehicle identification number or the words "all owned vehicles" or the word "fleet."

e. Either one of the following:

(1) Type of coverage provided; for example, personal automobile, business automobile, commercial automobile.

(2) The statement, "Coverage provided by this policy meets the minimum liability limits prescribed by law," or a statement that is substantially similar.

f. Effective and expiration dates of coverage.

g. The statement, "This card must be carried in the insured motor vehicle at all times," or a statement that is substantially similar.

641.3(3) One financial liability coverage card shall be issued by the department for each fleet covered by a bond filed under Iowa Code section 321A.24, a security certificate issued under section 321A.25, or a self-insurance certificate issued under section 321A.34. The fleet owner shall maintain a copy of the card in each fleet vehicle. The card shall contain the following information:

a. Name, address and telephone number of person to whom the card is issued.

b. Number assigned by the department.

c. Either the vehicle identification number or the words "all owned vehicles" or the word "fleet."

d. Type of coverage provided.

e. The statement, "This card must be carried in the covered motor vehicle at all times."

761--641.4(321) Responsibilities of insurer.

641.4(1) Each insurer issuing financial liability coverage in this state shall furnish a financial liability coverage card that complies with these rules to the named insured for each motor vehicle insured. The card shall be provided with every new policy and every policy renewal issued.

641.4(2) The insurer shall file a true and correct sample copy of its financial liability coverage card with the Iowa insurance division.

761--641.5(321) Acquisition of additional or replacement motor vehicles.

641.5(1) A financial liability coverage card that provides coverage for a replacement motor vehicle may be used temporarily in a replacement motor vehicle for 30 days if ownership evidence as described in 761--subrule 400.19(3) is carried in the motor vehicle.

641.5(2) A copy of a financial liability coverage card that provides coverage for an additionally acquired motor vehicle may be used temporarily in an additionally acquired motor vehicle for 30 days if ownership evidence as described in 761--subrule 400.19(3) is carried in the motor vehicle.

761--641.6(321) New policies. On new policy applications, a binder of liability coverage issued by an insurance agent authorized to conduct insurance business in this state is acceptable proof of financial liability coverage for a period of 30 days from date of issue of the binder.

These rules are intended to implement 1997 Iowa Acts, chapter 139.

[Filed 12/17/97, effective 2/18/98]

[Published 1/14/98]

EDITOR'S NOTE: For replacement pages for IAC, see IAC Supplement 1/14/98.

ARC 7776A

TRANSPORTATION DEPARTMENT[761]

Adopted and Filed

Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code sections 307.10 and 307.12, the Department of Transportation, on December 24, 1997, adopted amendments to Chapter 620, "OWI and Implied Consent," Iowa Administrative Code.

Notice of Intended Action for these amendments was published in the November 19, 1997, Iowa Administrative Bulletin as ARC 7644A.

These amendments provide for substance abuse evaluation and treatment and a course for drinking drivers.

These amendments are identical to those published under Notice except for the following: In paragraph 620.15(1)"b" the word "on" was changed to "of" in the phrase "Confidentiality of Alcohol and Drug Abuse Patient Records."

These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code Supplement sections 321J.3(3) and 321J.17.

These amendments will become effective February 18, 1998.

Rule-making actions:

ITEM 1. Amend rule 761--620.5(321J) as follows:

761--620.5(321J) Reinstatement. When the revocation period has ended, a person shall be notified by the department to appear before a driver's license examiner to obtain a motor vehicle license. A license The license may be issued if the person has:

620.5(1) Filed proof of financial responsibility with the department in accordance with under Iowa Code chapter 321A for all motor vehicles to be operated.

620.5(2) Paid the $200 victim reparation civil penalty.

620.5(3) Received a notice from the department ending the revocation.

620.5(3) Provided proof of satisfactory completion of a course for drinking drivers and proof of completion of substance abuse evaluation and treatment or rehabilitation services on a form and in a manner approved by the department.

620.5(4) Successfully completed the required driver license examination.

620.5(5) Paid the specified reinstatement fee.

620.5(6) Paid the appropriate license or permit fee.

ITEM 2. Amend 761--Chapter 620 by adding new rule 761--620.15(321J) as follows:

761--620.15(321J) Substance abuse evaluation and treatment or rehabilitation services. When the department revokes a person's license under Iowa Code chapter 321J, the department shall also order the person to submit to substance abuse evaluation and, if recommended, treatment or rehabil-itation services. A provider of substance abuse evaluation and treatment or rehabilitation programs shall be licensed by the Iowa department of public health, division of substance abuse. A provider of a substance abuse evaluation who is not licensed by the Iowa department of public health may be granted provisional authority by the Iowa department of public health to conduct a substance abuse evaluation required under Iowa Code chapter 321J. To obtain provisional authority, the provider must apply for a license to the Iowa department of public health accompanied by a recommendation from the district court having jurisdiction for the offense. Provisional authority will expire on July 1, 1998.

620.15(1) Reporting.

a. A provider of a substance abuse program shall report to the department on a form and in a manner approved by the department when a person who has been ordered to attend the program has satisfactorily completed the program.

b. Reporting to the department shall be in accordance with Iowa Code sections 125.37, 125.84 and 125.86 and the federal confidentiality regulations, "Confidentiality of Alcohol and Drug Abuse Patient Records," 42 CFR Part 2, effective June 9, 1987.

620.15(2) Payment. Payment of substance abuse evaluation and treatment or rehabilitation costs shall be in accordance with Iowa department of public health rules.

ITEM 3. Amend 761--Chapter 620 by adding new rule 761--620.16(321J) as follows:

761--620.16(321J) Drinking drivers course. When the department revokes a person's license under Iowa Code chapter 321J, the department shall order the person to enroll, attend and satisfactorily complete a course for drinking drivers, as provided in Iowa Code section 321J.22.

620.16(1) Reporting.

a. A community college conducting a drinking drivers course shall report to the department on a form and in a manner approved by the department when a person who has been ordered to attend the course has successfully completed it.

b. Reserved.

620.16(2) Payment. A person ordered to complete a drinking drivers course is responsible for payment of course fees and expenses in accordance with Iowa Code section 321J.22.

ITEM 4. Rescind 761--Chapter 620, implementation clause, and adopt a new implementation clause as follows:

These rules are intended to implement Iowa Code chapter 17A and section 321.376 and Iowa Code Supplement chapter 321J and section 707.6A.

[Filed 12/24/97, effective 2/18/98]

[Published 1/14/98]

EDITOR'S NOTE: For replacement pages for IAC, see IAC Supplement 1/14/98.

[1] If, because of the patient's condition, a delay in order to provide a written revision to an existing written directive would jeopardize the patient's health, an oral revision to an existing written directive will be acceptable, provided that the oral revision is documented immediately in the patient's record and a revised written directive is signed by the qualified individual within 48 hours of the oral revision.

Also, a written revision to an existing written directive may be made for any therapeutic procedure provided that the revision is dated and signed by a qualified individual prior to the administration of the X-ray dose.

If, because of the emergent nature of the patient's condition, a delay in order to provide a written directive would jeopardize the patient's health, an oral directive will be acceptable, provided that the information contained in the oral directive is documented immediately in the patient's rec-ord and a written directive is prepared within 24 hours of the oral directive.
Previous Bulletin Table of Contents Next Bulletin

Return To Home index


© 1998 Cornell College and League of Women Voters of Iowa


Comments about this site or page? lsbinfo@legis.state.ia.us.
Please remember that the person listed above does not vote on bills. Direct all comments concerning legislation to State Legislators.

Last update: Wed Jan 14 0:01:05 CST 1998
URL: /Rules/1998/Bulletin/acb980114.html
sam